GE Fanuc Automation - JAMETjamet.com/Fanuc_Web_Manuals/Lasers/63395EN.pdf · GE Fanuc Automation...

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products Series 18i-LNA Maintenance Manual GFZ-63395EN/01 February 2003

GFL-001

Warnings, Cautions, and Notesas Used in this Publication

Warning

Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment ormay be associated with its use.

In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, aWarning notice is used.

Caution

Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

NoteNotes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding andoperating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While effortshave been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover alldetails or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency inconnection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described hereinwhich are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumesno obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutorywith respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, orusefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness forpurpose shall apply.

©Copyright 2003 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

B–63395EN/01 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

s–1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to themachine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Notethoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the userbeing injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is notobserved.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

B–63395EN/01 PREFACE

p–1

PREFACE

LCD/MDI display and operation

This chapter covers those items, displayed on the LCD, that are relatedto maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also provided at theend of this chapter.

2.Basic Operating Package: Viewing and Operation

This chapter describes the Basic Operating Package that enables theviewing and manipulation of various types of information in the NC,using a personal computer connected via an RS–232C interface, insteadof the LCD/MDI.

3.Hardware

This chapter covers hardware–related items, including the hardwareconfiguration, connection, and NC status indicated on printed circuitboards. A list of all units is also provided as well as an explanation of howto replace each unit.

4.Data input/output

This chapter describes the input/output of data, including programs,parameters, and tool compensation data, aswell as the input/outputprocedures for conversational data.

5.Interface between the NC and PLC

This chapter describes the PLC specifications, the PMC function in the18i–LNA and the signals used by the PLC.

6.Digital servo

This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust thereference position return position.

7.AC spindles

These chapters describe the spindle amplifier checkpoints, as well as thespindle tuning screen.

8.Trouble shooting

This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event ofcertain problems occurring, for example, if the power cannot be turned onor if manual operation cannot be performed. Countermeasures to beapplied in the event of alarms being output are also described.

9.Spindle trouble shooting

These chapters explain the alarms related to spindles, as well as thecorresponding countermeasures to be applied.

Description of this manual

PREFACE B–63395EN/01

p–2

APPENDIX

This manual does not provide a parameter list. If necessary, refer to theseparate PARAMETER MANUAL (B–63400EN) .

This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviatednames may be used.

Product name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 18i–LNA 18i–LNA

The table below lists manuals related to Series 18i–LNA.In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).

Table 1 Related Manuals

Manual name Specificationnumber

CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–63393EN

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–63393EN–1

OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63394EN

MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–63395EN *

PARAMETER MANUAL B–63400EN

Applicable models

Related manuals

B–63395EN/01 PREFACE

p–3

For specifications and maintenance of FANUC CONTROL MOTOR αseries, refer to the following manuals :

Document name Document number Major contents Major usage

FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α seriesDESCRIPTIONS B–65142E

Specification

Characteristics

External dimensions

Connections Selection of motor

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α seriesDESCRIPTIONS B–65152E

Specification

Characteristics

External dimensions

Connections

Connection of motor

FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65162E

Specifications and functions

Installation

External dimensions and mainte-nance area

Connections

Selection of amplifier

Connection of amplifier

FANUC CONTROL MOTOR α seriesMAINTENANCE MANUAL B–65165E

Start up procedure

Troubleshooting

Maintenance of motor

Start up the system(Hardware)

Troubleshooting

Maintenance of motor

FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α seriesPARAMETER MANUAL B–65150E

Initial setting

Setting parameters

Description of parameters Start up the system

(Software)

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α seriesPARAMETER MANUAL B–65160E

Initial setting

Setting parameters

Description of parameters

Turning the system (Parameters)

B–63395EN/01 Table of Contents

c–1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE s–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREFACE p–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 VIRTUAL KEYBOARD 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.1 Soft Keys 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 Slot Status Display 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Setting Module Screen 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.3 Configuration Display of Software 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.1 Display Method 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.2 Configuration of PCBs 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.3 Software Configuration Screen 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4.4 Module Configuration Screen 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.1 General 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 Screen Display 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3 Clearing Alarm History 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.4 Alarm Display 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.6 OPERATION HISTORY 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.1 Parameter Setting 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.2 Screen Display 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.3 Input Signal or Output Signal to be Recorded in the Operation History 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6.4 Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.7 HELP FUNCTION 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.1 General 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7.2 Display Method 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.1 Displaying Diagnostic Page 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8.2 Contents Displayed 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.9 NC STATE DISPLAY 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.10 WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10.1 Setting Parameters 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10.2 Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10.3 Graphic of Wave Diagnosis Data 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10.4 Servo Alarm Type Waveform Diagnostic Data 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.11 OPERATING MONITOR 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11.1 Display Method 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.14 TOUCH PANEL ADJUSTMENT SCREEN 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14.1 Conditions Requiring Compensation 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14.2 Parameter Setting 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14.3 Compensation Procedure 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. BASIC OPERATING PACKAGE VIEWING AND OPERATING 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 OVERVIEW 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1 Purpose 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–63395EN/01Table of Contents

c–2

2.1.2 Configuration of BOP 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 COMMON OPERATIONS 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Menus and Screen Selection 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.1.1 Purpose 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.1.2 Menu configuration 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.1.3 Operation 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.2 Dialog Box and Input/Output 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.2.1 Purpose 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.2.2 Dialog box layout 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.2.3 Operation 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.3 Status Display 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.3.1 Purpose 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.3.2 Screen layout 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.3.3 Operation 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 POSITION DISPLAY SCREENS 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Overall Position Information 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.1.1 Purpose 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.1.2 Screen layout 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.1.3 Operation 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.2 Overall Position Information and Monitoring 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.2.1 Purpose 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.2.2 Screen layout 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.3 Absolute Coordinates (Slide Coordinates, Machine Coordinates, or Remaining Amount of Movement) 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.3.1 Purpose 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.3.2 Screen layout 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 PROGRAM SCREENS 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 Editing 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.1.1 Purpose 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.1.2 Screen configuration 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.1.3 Operation 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.2 Directory 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.2.1 Purpose 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.4.2.3 Operation 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.3 MDI Program 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.3.1 Purpose 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.4.3.3 Operation 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.4 Program Check 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4.4.1 Purpose 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.4.4.3 Operation 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5 SETTING SCREENS 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5.1 Data Input/Output 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.1.1 Purpose 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.5.1.3 Operation 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.2 CNC Setting 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–63395EN/01

c–3

2.5.2.1 Purpose 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.5.2.3 Operation 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.3 Tool Offset 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.3.1 Purpose 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.5.3.3 Operation 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.4 Workpiece Origin Offset 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.4.1 Purpose 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.5.4.3 Operation 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.5 Macro Variable 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.5.1 Purpose 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.5.5.3 Operation 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6 MESSAGE SCREENS 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 Alarm History 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6.1.1 Purpose 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.6.1.3 Operation 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7 SYSTEM SCREENS 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.1 CNC Diagnosis 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.1.1 Purpose 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.1.2 Screen structure 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.1.3 Operation 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.2 Operation History Signal Setting 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.2.1 Purpose 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.7.2.3 Operation 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.3 Waveform Diagnosis Screen 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.3.1 Purpose 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.7.3.3 Operation 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.7.3.5 Operation 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.4 Memory Card Screen 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.4.1 Purpose 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.7.4.3 Operation 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8.1 Command Line 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8.2 PMC 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.9 POWER–ON RELATED PROCESSING PERFORMED ON THE IPL SCREEN 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.1 Overview 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.2 IPL Screen 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9.3 IPL Screen Menu/Item 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. HARDWARE 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


c–4

3.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 OVERALL CONNECTION DIAGRAM 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 CONNECTORS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Main CPU Board 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Sub–CPU Board 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 PLC Interface Board 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.4 HSSB Interface Board 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.5 DeviceNet Board 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.6 FL–net Board 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5 UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Basic Units 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.2 Control Unit Printed Circuit Boards 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.3 Units 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING OPTION BOARDS 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 Mounting and Demounting the Main CPU Board and Option Boards 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.1.1 Demounting the main CPU board or an option board 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.1.2 Mounting the main CPU board or an option board 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.2 Mounting and Demounting Mini–slot Option Boards (Other than the DeviceNet Board) 174. . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.2.1 Demounting a mini–slot option board 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.2.2 Mounting a mini–slot option board 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.3 Mounting and Demounting the DeviceNet Board 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.3.1 Demounting the DeviceNet board 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6.3.2 Mounting the DeviceNet board 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.1 Demounting a Card PCB 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.2 Mounting a Card PCB 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM MODULES 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1 Demounting a DIMM Module 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.2 Mounting a DIMM module 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING THE BACK PANEL 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.1 Demounting the Back Panel 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.2 Mounting the Back Panel 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.10 REPLACING THE FUSE IN THE CONTROL UNIT 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.11 REPLACING THE CONTROL UNIT BATTERY 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.12 REPLACING THE FANS IN THE CONTROL UNIT 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.13 REPLACING THE FUSE IN THE LCD UNIT 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.14 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.15 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.16 REPLACING THE FUSE IN EACH I/O MODULE 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.17 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE CABINET 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.18 HEAT OUTPUT OF EACH UNIT 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.19 ACTION AGAINST NOISE 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.1 Separating Signal Lines 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.2 Ground 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.3 Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit 199. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.4 Noise Suppressor 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–63395EN/01

c–5

4.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Outputting PMC Parameters 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.7 Outputting Part Program 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.8 Inputting CNC Parameters 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.9 Inputting PMC Parameters 212. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.10 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.11 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.12 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.13 Inputting Part Programs 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 BATCH DATA SAVING/LOADING WITH A MEMORY CARD 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 General 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Displaying the Memory Card Save/Load Screen and Save/Load Operation 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Messages 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Notes 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. MACHINE INTERFACE I/O TYPES 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 GENERAL 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 BUILT–IN PMC AND BUILT–IN PLC 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Built–in PMC 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Built–in PLC 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 INTERFACE MAPS FOR SPECIAL MACHINE 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 INTERFACE MAPS FOR LATHE 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.5 DETAILS OF THE PMC PARAMETERS FOR M–NET INTERFACE CONTROL 259. . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Keep Relay Setting 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2 Timers 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6 PMC SCREEN 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.1 Display Method 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.2 PMCLAD Screen (Only a machine tool builder’s sequence program) 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.3 PMCDGN Screen (Only a machine tool builder’s sequence program) 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.4 Memory Display (M.SRCH) 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.5 PMCPRM Screen 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. DIGITAL SERVO 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.1 Parameter Setting 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 ZERO POINT SETTING 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Touch Panel LCD 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2 Basic Operation Package 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 OVERVIEW OF SPINDLE CONTROL (SERIAL INTERFACE) 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1.1 Gear Change Method 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 SPINDLE SETTING AND TUNING SCREEN 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.1 Display Method 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.2 Spindle Setting Screen 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


c–6

7.2.3 Spindle Tuning Screen 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.4 Spindle Monitor Screen 310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.5 Correspondence Between Operation Mode and Parameters on Spindle Tuning Screen 312. . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF STANDARD PARAMETER 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. TROUBLESHOOTING 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.2 WHEN NO DATA IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD UNIT AT POWER–UP 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.3 LCD UNIT DISPLAY BLINKS 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.4 INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM I/O DEVICES IS DISABLED OR CANNOT BE PERFORMED NORMALLY 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.5 MANUAL HANDLE OPERATION IS IMPOSSIBLE 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.6 ALARM 401 (VRDY OFF) 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.7 ALARM 404 (VRDY ON) 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.8 ALARM 462 (INVALID CNC DATA TRANSFER) ALARM 463 (INVALID SLAVE DATA TRANSFER) 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.9 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.10 ALARM 701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.11 ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR) 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.12 ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK ACTIVATION FAILURE) 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.13 ALARM 5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY IS NOT SET)ALARM 5135 (FSSB: ERROR STATE OCCURRED)ALARM 5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR)ALARM 5197 (FSSB: OPEN STATE IS NOT SET)ALARM 5198 (FSSB: ID INFORMATION CANNOT BE READ) 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.14 ALARM 5136 (FSSB: INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF AMPLIFIERS) 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.15 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY) 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.16 ALARMS 912 THROUGH 919 (DRAM PARITY) 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.17 ALARMS 920 AND 921 (SERVO ALARM) 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.18 ALARM 926 (FSSB ALARM) 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.19 ALARM 930 (CPU INTERRUPT) 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.20 ALARM 935 (SRAM ECC ERROR) 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.21 ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.22 ALARM 951 (PMC WATCHDOG ALARM) 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.23 ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM ON AN OPTION BOARD) 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.24 ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM FOR UNKNOWN CAUSE) 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.25 ALARM 974 (F–BUS ERROR) 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.26 ALARM 975 (BUS ERROR) 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.27 ALARM 976 (LOCAL BUS ERROR) 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.28 SERVO ALARMS 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.29 SPC ALARMS 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.30 SPINDLE ALARMS 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–63395EN/01

c–7

APPENDIX

A. ALARM LIST 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.2 ALARMS (PMC) 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.3 SPINDLE ALARMS 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C. BOOT SYSTEM 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1 OVERVIEW 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.1.1 Starting the Boot System 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.2 System Files and User Files 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.3 Boot Slot Configuration Screen 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.1 System Data Loading Screen 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.2 System Data Check Screen 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.3 System Data Delete Screen 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.4 System Data Save Screen 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen 440. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.6 MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Screen 443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.7 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Function 444. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.8 LOAD BASIC SYSTEM Function 445. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D. INDICATIONS OF THE MAIN UNIT LED AND MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS 449. . . D.1 OVERVIEW 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.2 LOCATIONS OF THE 7–SEGMENT LED AND SWITCHES 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D.3 OPERATING PROCEDURES 451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3.1 Operation to be performed before power–on 451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3.2 Selectable function numbers 451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3.3 Indications of the 7–segment LED 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3.4 Procedures for operating the individual functions 455. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–63395EN/01 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI

1

1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI

This chapter describes how to display various screens by the functionkeys. The screens used for maintenance are respectively displayed.

1.1 VIRTUAL KEYBOARD 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS 4. . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER

POWER IS TURNED ON 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN 23. . . . . . . . . . 1.5 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 OPERATION HISTORY 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 HELP FUNCTION 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 NC STATE DISPLAY 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION 53. . . . . . . . 1.11 OPERATING MONITOR 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN

OPTION IS CHANGED 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 TOUCH PANEL ADJUSTMENT SCREEN 75. . . . . . . .

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–63395EN/01

2

With the FS18–LNA, use the keyboard on the touch panel screen (virtualkeyboard) instead of the conventional MDI keys to input data. Thefollowing shows the keyboard layouts.

Virtual keyboard layout when CNC screen is displayed

Position

Program

Operator’s panel screen

System

Message

Indexing axis control screen

Edit keys Cancel key Help key

Enter key

Shift key

Numeric keys

Reset key

Address keys

Special key

Chapter selection soft keys

Offset

Page change key

Cursor move key

Enter key

Cancel key

CNC screen

Return/continuous menu keys

1.1VIRTUAL KEYBOARD


3

Virtual keyboard layout when the PMC high–resolution mode screenis displayed

Full keypad (transparentdisplay)

Page change keys Cursor move keys

Cursor keys (display <2>)

Full keypad on/off key

Chapterselection softkeys

Function keys (display <1>)

Display<1>/<2>switch key

Position

Program


System

Message


Offset

Return menu key Continuous menu key

Special function key (SPCL)

When the SPCL key is pressed, it is held down and CNC entersSPCL mode.

In SPCL mode, other keys are disabled until the SPCL or ENT (orENTER) key is pressed.

When the SPCL key is pressed again in SPCL mode, SPCL modeis released and the SPCL key is also released from the hold state.At this time, the keys pressed in SPCL mode are canceled.

When the ENT (or ENTER) key is pressed in SPCL mode, SPCLmode is released and the SPCL key is also released from the holdstate. At this time, the last two keys pressed in SPCL mode areassumed to have been pressed simultaneously.


4

Operations and soft key display staturs for each function key are describedbelow:

To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a softkey. Soft keys are also used for actual operations.The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressingeach function key.

: Indicates a screen that can be displayed by pressing afunction key(*1)

: Indicates a soft key(*2)

: Indicates input from the MDI panel.

: Indicates a soft key displayed in green (or highlighted).

: Indicates the continuous menu key (rightmost soft key).

The symbols in the following figures mean as shown below :

: Indicates screens

*1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently.

*2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the option configuration.

1.2FUNCTION KEYSAND SOFT KEYS

1.2.1Soft Keys


5

[ABS]

Absolute coordinate display

[(OPRT)][REL] (Axis or numeral)

ORIGIN

[PRESET]

[ALLEXE]

[Axis name] [EXEC]

Relative coordinate display

Monitor screen

[ALL1]

POS

[MONI]

Soft key transition triggered by the function key POSPOSITION SCREEN

[ALL 2]

Current position display 2

[(OPRT)]

ORIGIN

[PRESET]

[ALLEXE]

[Axis name] [EXEC]

Current position display 1


6

[RSTR]

[BG–EDT]

[REWIND]

[O number][N number]

[ABS]

[(OPRT)] [BG–EDT][O SRH]

[PRGRM]

Program display screen

PRG

Soft key transition triggered by the function keyin the MEM mode

PRG

[N SRH]

[REWIND]

See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

[(OPRT)][CHECK]

Program check display screen

[REL]

Current block display screen

[(OPRT)] [BG–EDT][CURRNT]

Next block display screen

[(OPRT)] [BG–EDT][NEXT]

[O number][N number]

PROGRAM SCREEN



[O SRH][N SRH]


[RSTR]

File directory display screen

[(OPRT)][DIR] [SELECT][EXEC]

[File No. ] [F SET]


7

1/2

[(OPRT)] [BG–EDT](O number) [O SRH]

[PRGRM]

Program display

PRG

(Address) [SRH↓]

[REWIND](Address) [SRH↑]

[F SRH] [CAN](N number) [EXEC]

[READ] [CHAIN][STOP][CAN]

[EXEC][PUNCH] [STOP]

[CAN][EXEC]

[DELETE] [CAN][EXEC]

[EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR∼][∼CRSR][∼BTTM][ALL]

[MOVE] [CRSR∼][∼CRSR][∼BTTM][ALL]

[MERGE] [∼CRSR][∼BTTM]

[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]

(Address) [AFTER] [SKIP][1–EXEC][EXEC]

(1)(Continued on the next page)

(The cursor moves to the end of a program.)

(O number)

(O number)

(N number)

Soft key transition triggered by the function keyin the EDIT mode

PRGPROGRAM SCREEN

(O number) [EXEC]

(O number) [EXEC]

(O number) [EXEC]



8

(1)2/2


[LIB]

Program directory display



[CAN][EXEC]

(O number)

(O number)

Return to the programSee “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”


9

[(OPRT)] [BG–EDT][PRGRM]

Program display

PRG

Soft key transition triggered by the function keyin the MDI mode

PRGPROGRAM SCREEN

[(OPRT)] [BG–EDT][MDI]

Program input screen

(Address)(Address)

[SRH↓][SRH↑]






[(OPRT)] [BG–EDT][LIB]

!"





[REWIND]


10

[(OPRT)] [BG–EDT][PRGRM]

Program display

PRG

Soft key transition triggered by the function keyin the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode

PRGPROGRAM SCREEN






[(OPRT)] [BG–EDT][LIB]






11

1/2

[(OPRT)] [BG–END](O number) [O SRH]

[PRGRM]

Program display

PRG

(Address) [SRH↓]

[REWIND](Address) [SRH↑]

[F SRH] [CAN](N number) [EXEC]



[CAN][EXEC]

[DELETE] [CAN][EXEC]

[EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR∼][∼CRSR][∼BTTM][ALL]

[MOVE] [CRSR∼][∼CRSR][∼BTTM][ALL]

[MERGE] [∼CRSR][∼BTTM]

[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]

(Address) [AFTER] [SKIP][1–EXEC][EXEC]

(1)(Continued on the next page)

(The cursor moves to the end of a program.)

(O number)

(O number)

(N number)

Soft key transition triggered by the function key(When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed in all modes)

PRG

PROGRAM SCREEN

(O number) [EXEC]

(O number) [EXEC]

(O number) [EXEC]


12


[LIB]




[CAN][EXEC]

(1)

(O number)

(O number)

2/2

Return to the program


13

[(OPRT)][OFFSET]

Tool offset screen

Soft key transition triggered by the function key

OFFST

(Number)

(Numeral)(Numeral)

[NO SRH]

[+INPUT][INPUT]

[(OPRT)][SETING]

Setting screen

(Numeral)(Numeral)

[NO SRH]

[+INPUT][INPUT]

[ON:1][OFF:0]

[(OPRT)][WORK]

Work coordinate system setting screen

(Numeral)(Numeral)

[NO SRH]

[+INPUT][INPUT]

(Number)

(Number)

[(OPRT)][MACRO]

Macro variables display screen

(Numeral)

[NO SRH]

[INPUT]

(Number)(Axis name) [INP.C.]

[READ]

OFFST

OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN

[CLEAR] [ALL][WEAR][GEOM]

[READ] [CAN][EXEC]

[PUNCH] [CAN][EXEC]

[PUNCH]


14


[(OPRT)][PARAM]

Parameter screen

(Numeral)(Numeral)

[NO SRH]

[+INPUT][INPUT]

[ON:1][OFF:0]

(Number)

SYS

SYS

[READ] [CAN][EXEC]

[PUNCH] [CAN][EXEC]

[(OPRT)][DGNOS]

Diagnosis screen

[NO SRH](Number)

[PMCLAD][PMC]

PMC screen

(1) (Continued on the next page)

(2)

1/4

SYSTEM SCREEN

To enter a file number: Press , enter a file

number, then press on the PRGRM screen

N

INPUT

[TOP][BOTTOM][SRCH][W–SRCH][N–SRCH]

[F–SRCH][ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]

[SEARCH]

[TRGON][TRIGER][TRGOFF][START]

[SEARCH][DUMP]

[BYTE][WORD][D.WORD]

[DPARA]/[NDPARA][TRGSRC][INIT][DIVIDE][WINDOW][CANCEL][DELETE][SELECT][WIDTH]

(3)


15

(1) 2/4[SEARCH]

[BYTE][WORD][D.WORD]

[DRARA]/[NDPARA]

[DUMP]

(2) (3)

[PMCDGN] [TITLE][STATUS][ALARM]

[SEARCH]

[TRACE] [T.DISP]/[TRCPRM][EXEC]

[PMCPRM] [TIMER][COUNTR][KEEPRL][DATA] [G.DATA]

[G.CONT]

[INIT][NO.SRH]

[C.DATA][G–SRCH][SEARCH]

[SETTING] [YES]/[MANUAL]/[ROM][NO]/[AUTO]/[RAM]

[M.SRCH] [SEARCH][INPUT]

[I/O CHK] [I/O LNK] [PRV.PG][NXT.PG]

(4) (Continued on the next page)

Batch read/punch screen

[PRGRM][ALL IO] [F SRH]

[READ]

[(OPRT)] [CAN][EXEC][STOP]

[PUNCH]

[DELETE]

[PARAM] [READ]

[PUNCH]

[OFFSET]

[MACRO]

[M–CARD] [FORMAT]

[SAVE]

[LOAD]

[DELETE]

[CAN][EXEC][STOP][CAN][EXEC]

[CAN][EXEC]

[CAN][EXEC][CAN][EXEC]



[CAN][EXEC]

[CAN][EXEC]


[STOP]

[READ]

[PUNCH]

[READ]

[PUNCH]

[(OPRT)]

[(OPRT)]

[(OPRT)]

[(OPRT)]


16

[W.DGNS]

Waveform diagnosis screen

(4)

[W.PRM][W.GRPH] [STSRT]

[TIME→][←TIME][H–DOBL][H–HALF]

[STSRT][CH–1↑]

[V–DOBL][V–HALF]

[CH–1↓]

[STSRT][CH–2↑]

[V–DOBL][V–HALF]

[CH–2↓]

3/4

[(OPRT)][SV.PRM]

Servo parameter screen

[ON:1][OFF:0]

[SV.SET][SV.TUN]

Spindle parameter screen

[(OPRT)][SP.PRM]

[INPUT]

[ON:1][OFF:0]

[SP.SET][SP.TUN][SP.MON]

(Numeral) [INPUT]

[(OPRT)][PITCH]

Pitch error compensation screen

(Numeral)(Numeral)

[NO SRH]

[+INPUT][INPUT]

[ON:1][OFF:0]

(No.)

[READ] [CAN][EXEC]

[PUNCH] [CAN][EXEC]

To enter a file number: Press , enter a file

number, then press on the PRGRM screen

N

INPUT

[CAN][EXEC]

[W.MEM] [READ]

[PUNCH] [CAN]

[DELETE](5)(Continued on the next page)

[EXEC]


17

(5)Operatioin history screen

[OPEHIS] [OPEHIS]

[SG–SEL]

[TOP][END](NUMBER)

[(OPRT)]

[(OPRT)]

[PG–SRH]

[CAN][EXEC]

[READ]

[PUNCH] [CAN]

[CLEAR]

[EXEC]

[CAN]

[EXEC]

[CAN][EXEC]

[ALCLR]

[DELETE] [CAN]

[EXEC]

[ON:1]

[OFF:0]

[SYSTEM]

System configuration screen

4/4


18


[ALARM]

Alarm display screen

MSG

MSG

[MSG]

Message display screen

[HISTRY]

Alarm history screen

[(OPRT)] [CLEAR]

MESSAGE SCREEN


19

Soft key transition triggered by the function key CUST

CUST

CUSTOM SCREEN


[AX.1/2] [PARAM]

[AXIS–2]

[AXIS–1]

[(OPRT)]

[POS–2]

[POS–1]

[AX.3/4]

(Numeral)

[READ]

(Numeral)

[+INPUT]

[CAN]

[INPUT]

[PUNCH]

[EXEC]

[PARAM]

[AXIS–2]

[AXIS–1]

[POS–2]

[POS–1]

[(OPRT)] (Numeral)

[READ]

(Numeral)

[PUNCH]

[CAN]

[EXEC]

[+INPUT]

[CAN]

[INPUT]

[EXEC]

[CAN]

[EXEC]


20

Soft key transition triggered by the function key OPRT

OPRT

OPERATION SCREEN

* Operator’s panel screen created by the machine tool builder


[1 ALAM]


Alarm detail screen

HELP

HELP

[2 OPR]

Operation method screen

[3 PARA]

Parameter table screen

[(OPRT)] [SELECT]

HELP SCREEN

[(OPRT)] [SELECT]


21

Types of PCBs mounted on the slots are displayed.

If a hardware trouble or an incorrect mounting is found, this screen is

displayed.

SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY

0: 003E4000 0:1: 30464202 1:2: 00504303 2:3: 3:4: 4:5: 5: … …

Physical slot number (2ndary side)

Module ID of the PCB mounted (*1)

Physical slot number (primary side)

*1) Module ID of PCB

Internal slot numberModule function (software ID)Type of PCB (module ID)

∆ ∆

ID Name

D5 Series 16i motherboard

C5 Series 18i motherboard

CC Series 160i motherboard

EC Series 180i motherboard

CD Serial communication board: remote buffer/DNC2

Serial communication board: DNC1

C language board

CAP II board

CE Sub–CPU board

CF RISC board

A3 Data server board

1.3SCREEN DISPLAYEDIMMEDIATELY AFTERPOWER IS TURNEDON

1.3.1Slot Status Display

Slot state screen

Module ID


22

ID Name

D3 Loader control board

AA HSSB interface board

C9 PC function card

40 : Main CPU41 : C language43 : Sub CPU49 : CAP II 4A : Remote buffer 4F : PMC–RE53 : Loader control59 : RISC board for high–precision contour control5E : HSSB interface (with PC)

SLOT 01 (3046) : ENDSLOT 02 (0050) :

END : Settingcompleted

Module ID

Slot number

Space : Setting incom-pleted

BDG2–01

BDG2–01SERVO : 9090–01SUB : xxxx–xxOMM : yyyy–yyPMC : zzzz–zz

PMC

CNC controlsoftware

Digital servoROMSub CPU (Remote buffer)

Order mademacro/macrocompiler

Software ID

1.3.2Setting Module Screen

1.3.3Configuration Displayof Software


23

After the system has been installed correctly, you can find the PCBsinstalled and the softwares integrated on the system configuration screen.

(1)Press SYS key.

(2)Press soft key [SYSTEM], then the system configuration screen isdisplayed.

(3)The system configuration screen is composed of three screens and

each of them can be selected by the page keyPAGE

PAGE

.

SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT) PAGE01

SLOT MODULE ID SERIES VERSION 00 0090 : 40 B0B1 0006 0D 009A : 45 600M 0003 02 013F : 4A B401 0001 03 019D : 41 4068 0001

Software series of mod-ule with CPU

Module IDSlot No.(80 to 8F is 2ndside)

Software versionof module withCPU

Software ID (type)

1.4SYSTEMCONFIGURATIONSCREEN

1.4.1Display Method

1.4.2Configuration of PCBs

Screen


24

ID Name

D5 Series 16i motherboard

C5 Series 18i motherboard

CC Series 160i motherboard

EC Series 180i motherboard

CD Serial communication board: remote buffer/DNC2

Serial communication board: DNC1

C language board

CAP–II board

CE Sub–CPU board

CF RISC board

A3 Data server board

D3 Loader control board

AA HSSB interface board

C9 PC function card

40 : Main CPU41 : C language43 : Sub CPU49 : CAP II 4A : Remote buffer 4F : PMC–RE53 : Loader control59 : RISC board for high–precision contour control5E : HSSB interface (with PC)

Module ID

Software ID


25

SYSTEM CONFIG (SOFTWARE) 01234 N12345PAGE:02

SYSTEM BDG2 0001BASIC+OPTION–A1

SERVO 9090 0001PMC(SYS) 406A 0001

406B 00014099 0001

PMC(LAD) FS16 0001MACRO LIB BZG1 0001MACRO APL AAAA BBBBBOOT 60M3 0004GRAPHIC–1 600W 001Z

MEM **** *** *** 12:14:59[ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][(OPRT)]

Kind of softwareSoftware series

Software version

Software configuration

Character writtenon PMC title screen

Character writtenon macro compileror on CAP.

Configuration of the modules displayed on PCB.

SYSTEM CONFIG (MODULE) 01234 N12345PAGE:03

SLOT 00 MOTHER BOARD

AXIS CTRL CARD : 0DDISPLAY CTRL CARD : 0ECPU CARD : 01FROM DIMM : 47SRAM DIMM : 23DRAM DIMM : 86PMC CPU : 01

MEM **** *** *** 12:14:59[ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][(OPRT)]

(2)

(4)

(3)

(1)

Contents of display

(1)Slot number (The number is corresponding to PCB configurationscreen)

(2)Type of PCB mounted

(3)Name of card PCB or DIMM module

(4)Hardware ID of mounted card PCB or DIMM moduleRefer to “2.4.3 Printed Circuit Boards of the Control Unit” forcorrespondence with each hardware ID and drawing number.

Pressing the PAGE key PAGE

PAGE

displays the system configuration

screen of other PCBs.

1.4.3Software ConfigurationScreen

1.4.4Module ConfigurationScreen


26

Alarms generated in the NC are recorded. The latest 25 alarms generatedare recorded. The 26th and former alarms are deleted.

(1)Press MSG key .

(2)Press soft key [HISTRY] and an alarm history screen is displayed.

(3)Other pages are displayed by PAGE

or PAGE

key.

ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345

97/04/18 20:56:26506 OVERTRAVEL : +X97/04/18 19:58:11000 TURN OFF POWER97/04/18 19:52:45000 TURN OFF POWER97/04/18 19:48:43300 APC ALARM : X–AXIS ZERO RETURN REQUEST97/04/18 18:10:10507 OVERTRAVEL : +B

[ ALARM ][ MSG ][ HISTRY ][ ][(OPRT)]

(1)Press soft key [(OPRT)].(2)Press soft key [(CLEAR], then the alarm history is cleared.

When an external alarm (No. 1000 to 1999) or a macro alarm (No. 3000to 3999) is output, the alarm history function can record both the alarmnumber and message if so specified in the following parameter. Ifrecording of the message is not set or if no message is input, only anexternal alarm or macro alarm is displayed.

#73112

#6 #5 #4 #3EAH

#2 #1 #0

[Data type] Bit

#3 (EAH) The alarm history function:

0 : Does not record the messages output with external alarms or macroalarms.

1 : Records the messages output with external alarms or macro alarms.

1.5ALARM HISTORYSCREEN

1.5.1General

1.5.2Screen Display

1.5.3Clearing Alarm History

1.5.4Alarm Display


27

This function displays the key and signal operations performed by the NCoperator upon the occurrence of a fault or the output of an NC alarm,together with the corresponding NC alarms.This function records the following data:

(1)MDI key operations performed by the NC operator

(2)Status changes (ON/OFF) of input and output signals (selected signalsonly)

(3)Details of NC alarms

(4)Time stamp (date and time)

(5)Coordinates (absolute coordinates, slide position, and machinecoordinates)

#7OHS3106

#6 #5 #4OPH

#3 #2 #1 #0

[Data type] Bit

#4 (OPH) The operation history screen is:

0 : Not displayed.

1 : Displayed.

#7 (OHS) The operation history is:

0 : Sampled.1 : Not sampled.

3122 Interval at which the clock time is recorded in the operation history

[Data type] Word

[Units of data] Minutes

[Valid data range] 0 to 1439

The clock time is recorded to the operation history at specified intervals.If zero is set as the interval, ten minutes is assumed. The time is recordedonly when data is recorded within the corresponding interval.

1.6OPERATION HISTORY

1.6.1Parameter Setting


28

(1) Press the SYS function key.

(2)Press the continue menu key [ ]. The [OPEHIS] (operation history)soft key is displayed.

(3)Press the [OPEHIS] soft key twice. The operation history screen isdisplayed.

(4)The operation history screen or operation history signal selectionscreen appears. The arrangement of the soft keys changes as shownin Fig. 1. When the operation history signal selection screen isdisplayed, press the [OPEHIS] soft key. History data is displayed,starting from page 1, in the sequence in which the data was saved.

CAUTIONNo history data can be stored while the operation historyscreen is being displayed.

(5)To display the next part of the operation history, press the page down

key PAGE

. The next page is displayed.

To display the interface between two pages, press cursor key or

. The screen is scrolled by one row. Pressing the cursor key

scrolls the screen by half a page.

These soft keys can also be used:

1) Pressing the [TOP] soft key displays the first page (oldest data).

2) Pressing the [BOTTOM] soft key displays the last page (latestdata).

3) Pressing the [PG.SRH] soft key displays a specified page.

Example) By entering 50 then pressing the [PG.SRH] key, page 50 isdisplayed.

(6)Pressing the return menu key [ ] displays soft key [OPEHIS](operation history) again.

⇒ [ ] [ PARAM ] [DGNOS] [PMC] [SYSTEM] [(OPE)] [ ]push

[ ] [W.DGNS] [ ] [ ] [OPEHIS] [(OPE)] [ ] push

[ ] [ OPEHIS ] [SG–SEL] [ ] [ ] [(OPE)] [ ] push

[ ] [ TOP ] [BOTTOM] [ ] [ ] [PG.SRH] [ ]

Fig. 1.6.2 Soft keys display

1.6.2Screen Display Displaying the operation

history


29

One page of this screen can display up to 40 items of history information.The smaller the page and number, the older is the history displayed there.Every page has data numbers 1 to 40.

OPERATION HISTORY O1234 N12345Page : 123

No.DATA No.DATA No.DATA01 92/06/03 11 F0000.7↑ 21 F0001.0↓02 08:40:00 12 F0000.5↑ 22 <POS>03 <DELETE> 13 F0001.0↑ 23 <PROG>04 F0000.6↑ 14 F0000.5↓ 24 <RESET>05 MEM 15 P/S0010 25 EDIT06 G0009.0↑ 16 92/06/03 26 O07 G0009.1↑ 17 09:27:49 27 108 G0009.2↑ 18 <PROG> 28 209 ST↑ 19 <RESET> 29 310 ST↓ 20 F0000.7↓ 30 4

EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52[ TOP ][ BOTTOM ][ ][ ][PG.SRH]

Data displayed on the operation history screen

(1)MDI keys

Address and numeric keys are displayed after a single space.Soft keys are displayed in square brackets ([]).Other keys (RESET/INPUT, for example) are displayed in anglebrackets (<>).A key pressed at power–on is displayed in reverse video.For two–path control, the operations of path 2 are displayed in thesame way, but preceded by S_.

1) Function key: <POS>, <PRG>, <OFFST>, etc.

2) Address/numeric key: A to Z, 0 to 9, ; (EOB), +, –, (, etc.

3) Page/cursor key: <PAGE 1>, <CUR>, <CUR>

4) Soft key: [SF1], [SF2], etc.

5) Other key: <RESET>, <CAN>, etc.

6) Key pressed at power–on: RESET

(2) Input and output signalsGeneral signals are displayed in the following format:

S B K ↑

The ↑ mark indicates that the signal isturned on.The ↓ mark indicates that the signal isturned off.

Symbol name(Indicates that the single block switch is on.)

Operation history screen


30

Mode selection signals and rapid traverse override signalsare displayed as indicated below:

Mode

Inputsignal Input signal

Name Mode

EDIT MD1 MD2displayed

Edit mode 1 EDIT

Memory operation mode 0 0 0 MEM

Handle mode 0 1 0 HNDL

MDI modeStep mode

0 0 1 MDI

Memory operation mode 0 1 1 MEM

Input signal

ROVName displayed

1 R 100%

0 RF0%

(3)NC alarms

NC alarms are displayed in reverse video.P/S alarms, system alarms, and external alarms are displayed togetherwith their numbers. For other types of alarms, only the alarm type is displayed. (No detailsare displayed.)Example) P/S0050, SV_ALM, S_APC_ALM

(4)Time stamp (date and time)

The following time data (date and time) is recorded:

1) Date and time of power–on2) Date and time of power–off

3) Date and time when an NC alarm occurs

4) The clock time is recorded at predetermined intervals, togetherwith each new calendar day.

1) The power–on time is displayed as shown below:

92/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second

2) The power–off time and the time when an NC alarm occurred aredisplayed in reverse video.

92/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second

If a system alarm occurs, the date and time are not recorded.

3) At predetermined intervals, the clock time is displayed in reversevideo. Set the interval in minutes in parameter No. 3122. If zerois set, the time is stamped at ten–minute intervals.


31

09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:SecondEach new calendar day is displayed in reverse video.92/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day

NOTEThe clock time is recorded for a specified interval only whendata is stored within that interval.

(1)P ress the SYS function key.

(2)Press the continue menu key [ ]. The [OPEHIS] (operation history)soft key is displayed.

(3)Press the [OPEHIS] soft key.

(4)The operation history screen or operation history signal select screenis displayed.The soft key arrangement changes as shown in Fig. 1.6.2.When the operation history screen is displayed, press soft key[SG–SEL].

CAUTIONNo history data can be stored while the operation historysignal screen is displayed.

(5)Pressing the return menu key [ ] displays soft key [OPEHIS](operation history) again.

MDI **** *** *** *** 00:00:00[ OPHIS ][ SG–SEL ][ ][ ][ (OPE) ]

OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000SIGNAL SELECT =1 (0:INVALIDITY,1:VALIDITY)

NO.ADDRES SIGNAL NO.ADDRESS SIGNAL01 X1000 00011111 09 X1015 0000000102 X1002 00011000 10 Y1004 1000000003 X1003 00000011 11 Y1006 0000000104 X1001 11111111 12 ********05 Y1000 10001111 13 ********06 X1005 11111111 14 ********07 Y1001 10011100 15 ********08 Y1008 00010000 16 ********)

1.6.3Input Signal or OutputSignal to be Recordedin the OperationHistory Operation history screen

select signal


32

(1)Set all data, when the CNC is in the MDI mode.

CAUTIONIf at least one of the N0000 mode selection signal bits(MD1:BIT 0, MD2:BIT 1, EDIT:BIT2) is on, the history of allmode selection signals is memorized.

(2)To specify whether to enable signal selection, use soft key [ON:1] or

[OFF:0]. Alternatively press ”1” or ”0” and ENTER .

CAUTIONIf ”signal selection = 0” is not true, specifying signal datausing the following procedure does not cause the history ofonly that data to be memorized.

(3)On the operation history signal selection screen, press soft key[(OPRT)].Soft keys [ALLDEL], [DELETE], [ON:1], and [OFF:0] aredisplayed.

(4)Press the cursor key or to position the cursor to a desired

position.

(5)Key in a signal type (X, Y) and an address, then press the ENTER key.

Example) X1000 ENTER

(6)Signal address X1000 is set in the ADDRES column. Thecorresponding position in the SIGNAL column is initialized to000000000.

(7)Select the bit to be recorded.

To select all bits of the specified signal address, press the [ON:1] softkey while the cursor is positioned to 00000000 .

(8)To select a particular bit, position the cursor to that bit by pressing the

cursor key or , then press the [ON:1] soft key. To cancel

a selection made by pressing the [ON:1] soft key or to cancel apreviously selected signal, press the [OFF:0] soft key.

Setting the Input Signalor Output Signal to beRecorded in theOperation History


33

OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000

No. ADDRESSIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL01 X1000 00011110 11 ********02 ******** 12 ********03 ******** 13 ********04 ******** 14 ********05 ******** 15 ********06 ******** 16 ********07 ******** 17 ********08 ******** 18 ********09 ******** 19 ********10 ******** 20 ********> EDIT **** *** *** *** 00:00:00

[ ALLDEL ][ DELETE ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][ ]

(9)Up to 16 addresses can be specified by means of this signal selection.These addresses need not always be specified at consecutive positions,starting from No.1.

(10) Pressing the [ALLDEL] and [EXEC] soft keys deletes all data. Ifthe [ALLDEL] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled bypressing the [CAN] key.

(11) To delete a selected signal address, position the cursor to thecorresponding position then press the [DELETE] and [EXEC] softkeys. In the SIGNAL column, asterisks ******** are displayed inplace of the deleted data. In the ADDRES column, the correspondingposition is cleared.If the [DELET] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled bypressing the [CAN] key.

(12) Pressing the return menu key [ ] causes the [OPEHIS] (operationhistory) soft key to be displayed again.

NOTE1 A signal corresponding to a blank position is displayed as:

X1008.1 if X1008.1 is on2 A signal marked x will not be recorded. Similarly, a signal

that does not exist at the following addresses will not berecorded.

Input signals and outputsignals to be recorded inthe history


34

Special machine DI#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

AZ AX ROV MD1N0000 MD2EDITPNSCAY

ERS *SP SBK MP1N0001 MP2ZRNCYCNT*SP2

JST44 JST32 ST1 M35RSTN0002 BDT1BDT2STJST23

PN5C PN3C PN2C ST2N0003 RST23PN0CPN1CPN4C

TFIN PN10C PN00C PN6CN0004 PN7CPN8CPN9CPN20C

SVF MCCW MCW MFINN0005 BFIN*SSTPORCMCW2

PN40C BDT8 BDT7 BDT3N0006 BDT4BDT5BDT6PN30C

–INC INC6 INC5 INC1N0007 INC2INC3INC4+INC

SSVF PCCL3 PCCL2 G34FN0008 GRCLCPCCL1ST3

UI7 UI5 UI4 UI0N0009 UI1UI2UI3UI6

UI15 UI13 UI12 UI8N0010 UI9UI10UI11UI14

OPR7 OPR5 OPR4 POPR0N0011 OPR1OPR2OPR3OPR6

AFIN TL1 TL2 ORP8N0012 ORP9ORP10ORP11SLCK

CFINN0013 A4+JOG–JOG

× × × ×N0014 ××××

× × × ×N0015 ××××

× × × ×N0016 ××××

× × × ×N0017 ××××


35

Special machine DO#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

ZPM NZY NZX SAM0000 NCALOTALBTALNZZ

STL I4 I3 IT0LM0001 IT1EI1I2OP

T11C ORE M35 ST1LM0002 ST2LST2RM32M19

M12C M06 TF2 T12CM0003 T14CT18CTF1M11C

PSW1 M28C M24C M14CM0004 M18CM21CM22CMF

T28C T22C T21C PSW2M0005 PSW3PSW4PSW5T24C

BF2 B18C B14C SRDYM0006 ZS0B11CB12CBF1

CLRCH OMAX FINC B21CM0007 B22CB24CB28COFS0

UO7 UO5 UO4 UO0M0008 UO1UO2UO3UO6

UO15 UO13 UO12 UO8M0009 UO9UO10UO11UO14

CF M33 ST3L EPALM0010 G34EAXCALSENBAF

A28C A22C A21C A11CM0011 A12CA14CA18CA24C

C28C C22C C21C C11CM0012 C12CC14CC18CC24C

PSW10 PSW9 NZ4M0013 PSW6PSW7PSW8

× × × ×M0014 ××××


36

Recorded data can be output to an input/output unit connected via areader/punch interface. An output record can be input from theinput/output unit.Set the input/output unit to be used in setting parameters No. 0020 and0100 to 0135.To output the data, set a code in the ISO bit of a setting parameter (bit 1of parameter No. 0020).

(1)Select EDIT mode.

(2)Press the SYS key, then select the operation history display screen.

(3)Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] in thisorder.

The data output to the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FANUC FA Card isstored under file name OPERATION HISTORY.

(1)Select EDIT mode.

(2)Press the SYS key, then select the operation history display screen.

(3)Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], , [READ], and [EXEC] in thisorder.

For details of input/output with the FANUC floppy cassette and FA card,see “Input/output operations with FANUC floppy cassette and FA card.”

OPERATION HISTORY

NO.DATA NO.DATA NO.DATA NO.DATA 0192/06/03 11STL 21NCAL 31(INSERT)0208:40:00 12ST 22(POS) 3203DELETE 13NCAL 23(PROG) 33(INSERT)04SA 14STL 24(RESET) 34 N05NEM 15P/S0010 25EDIT 35 106PNSC 169/06/03 26 0 36 207PN7C 17092749 27 1 37 308CYCNT 18(PROG) 28 2 38 409ST 19(RESET) 29 3 39 5100P 200P 30 4 40 G

EDIT *** *** *** 10:00:00[ ] [ READ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ]

[ ] [ ] [ ] [CAN] [EXEC]

Press

Press

Press

Fig. 1.6.4 Soft keys

1.6.4Inputting andOutputting theOperation History Data

Output

Input


37

In the following descriptions, the FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE isreferred to as “the cassette,” while the FANUC FA Card is referred to as“the card.”

(1)DirectoryIf the cassette or card directory is displayed, the operation historyoutput file is registered as “OPERATION HISTORY.” The procedurefor displaying the directory is described later.

(2)Output to a cassette or card.The operation history is output to the cassette or card by means of thefollowing procedure.

(a) Select EDIT mode.

(b)Press the SYS key, then select the operation history display

screen.

(c) Open the write protect switch of the cassette or card.

(d)Press soft keys [(OPRT)], , [PUNCH], then [EXEC], in thisorder. The output file is assigned the largest file number on the cassetteor card.

The file will be named “OPERATION HISTORY.”If the cassette or card already contains a file having the same name, P/Salarm 86 occurs. A cassette or card can contain only one set of operationhistory data. If the target cassette or card already contains unnecessaryoperation history data, delete the file having the same name, beforeoutputting your file. The procedure for deleting a file is described later.

(3) Input from a cassette or cardOperation history is loaded into the CNC from the cassette or card bymeans of the following procedure.


(b)Locate the beginning of the operation history file on the directorydisplay screen.

(c) Press the SYS key, then select the operation history display

screen.

(d)Press soft keys [(OPRT)], , [READ], then [EXEC] in thisorder.

(e) Once the input operation has been completed, the input operationhistory is displayed on the screen.

(4)Displaying the directory for a cassette or card The directory of a cassette or card is displayed by means of thefollowing procedure.


(b)Press function key PROG , then select the program screen.

(c) Press , then [FLOPPY].

(d)Press the page switch key PAGE

.

A list of directories is displayed.

Input/output operationswith the FANUC FLOPPYCASSETTE and FA card


38

(5)Deleting a file from a cassette or cardA file is deleted from a cassette or card by means of the followingprocedure.


(b)Press function key PROG , then select the program screen.


(d)Press [FLOPPY].

(e) Press [F DELETE].

(f) Key in a file number, then press [F SET].

(g)Press [EXEC]. The file having the specified file number is deleted.

The numbers of the files that were subsequent to the deleted file in thelist are moved up by one after [EXEC] is pressed.

(1) Input/output data type

1. MDI/soft key

2. Signal

3. Alarm

4. For extension (date, time or coordinate value)

(2) Input/output format

The header and recorded operation data are output, in this order. Theoperation history data is divided into four parts by identifier words.Data other than the identifier words depends on the type.

T0 : HeaderT50 : MDI/soft keyT51 : SignalT52 : AlarmT53 : For extension (date, time or

coordinate value)

T(identifier word)

Output data format


39

1) Header

T 0 C O P E R A T I O N

H I S T O R Y ;

C: Data word

2) MDI/soft key

T 5 0 P 0 to 1 H * * ;

P0: Usually

P1: At power–on

H **: Key code (See the following table.)

3) Signal

0 to 2550 to 6T 5 1 P H * * ,N * * ;

New data Old dataP0: X0000 and above

P1: X1000 and above

P2: N0000 and above

P4: Y0000 and above

P5: Y1000 and above

P6: M0000 and above

N***: DI/DO number

H **: Signal information data (hexadecimal)


40

4) Alarm

0 to 10T 5 2 P * *N * * ;

P0: P/S No. 100

P1: P/S No. 000

P2: P/S No. 101

P3: P/S No. 0001 to 254

P4: Overtravel alarm

P5: Overheat alarm

P6: Servo alarm

P7: System alarm

P8: APC alarm

P9: Spindle alarm

P10: P/S alarm No. 5000 to 5999

P12: Machine alarm

N****: Alarm number (for P/S alarm, system alarm, and Machinealarm only)

5) For extension (date, time or coordinate value)

0 to 1

0 to 1T 5 3 P 0 *E * * ;D * * * * *Date

T 5 3 P 1 *E * * ;D * * *Time

P0: Usually

P1: At power–on

E0: Date

E1: Time

D*..*: Data Example) October 29, 1997

D 1 9 9 1 07 2 9

,

0T 5 3 P 2 *E * * ,D * * * * *Coordinatevalue

* * * * * ** * * ** , * * * ;

D*..*: As many values as the number of axesCoordinate values are output for each block separately, in the sequence of absolute, slide,then machine coordinate values.


41

The help function displays alarm information, operation method and a

table of contents for parameters. This function is used as a handbook.

Press HELP key on any screen other than PMC screen, then a help screen

appears.(However, it is not available when PMC screen/CUSTOM screen isdisplaying)

HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345

***** HELP *****1. ALARM DETAIL2. OPERATION METHOD3. PARAMETER TABLE

[1 ALAM] [2 OPE] [3 PARA] [ ] [ ]

(1)When an alarm is generated, press soft key [1 ALAM], then a helpmessage of the alarm is displayed.

HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345

NUMBER : 010M’SAGE : IMPROPER G CODEFUNCTION :ALARM :A G CODE NOT LISTED IN G–CODE TABLEIS BEING COMMANDEDALSO G–CODE FOR FUNCTION NOT ADDEDIS BEING COMMANDED

[1 ALAM] [2 OPE] [3 PARA] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

(2)Pressing soft key [(OPRT)],(alarm No.), and soft key [SELECT] inthis order, a help message corresponding to the input alarm number isdisplayed.

1.7HELP FUNCTION

1.7.1General

1.7.2Display Method

Display of help screen

Help for alarm


42

(1)Press [2 OPR], then a menu for operation method is displayed.

HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345

1. PROGRAM EDIT2. SEARCH3. RESET4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE6. OUTPUT7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE8. OUTPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE9. MEMORY CLEAR

[1 ALARM] [2 OPR] [3 PARA] [ ] [(OPRT)]

(2)Press [(OPRT)], (an item number) and soft key [SELECT], then anoperation method of the item is displayed.

Pressing PAGE key PAGE

or PAGE

displays another pages.

HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345<<1.PROGRAM EDIT>> 1/4DELETE ALL PROGRAMSMODE :EDITSCREEN :PROGRAMOPR :(0–9999) – (DELETE)

DELETE ONE PROGRAMMODE : EDITSCREEN : PROGRAMOPR :(0+PROGRAM NUMBER) – <DELETE>

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [SELECT]

Currentpage/ Totalpage

Help for operation


43

Press soft key [3 PARA], then a parameter table is displayed.

HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N12345 1/4

·SETTING (NO.0000~ )·READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (NO.0100~ )·AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (NO.1000~ )·COORDINATE SYSTEM (NO.1200~ )·STROKE LIMIT (NO.1300~ )·FEED RATE (NO.1400~ )·ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (NO.1600~ )·SERVO RELATED (NO.1800~ )·DI/DO (NO.3000~ )

[1 ALAM ] [2 OPR ][ 3 PARA ] [ ][SELECT]

Current page/ Totalpage

Another screen can be selected by the PAGE key PAGE

or PAGE

.

Parameter table


44

(1)Press SYS key.

(2)Press soft key [DGNOS], then a diagnostic screen is displayed.

000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL An auxiliary function is beingexecuted.

001 MOTION Travel command of cycleoperation is being executed.

002 DWELL DWELL Dwell is beingexecuted.

003 IN–POSITION CHECK In–position check is being done.004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Feedrate override is 0%.005 INTERLOCK/START LOCK Interlock or start lock is input.006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK Waiting for spindle speed

arrival signal.010 PUNCHING Data is being output through

reader/puncher interface.011 READING Data is being input through

reader/puncher interface.012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP Waiting for the end of index

table indexing013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Manual feedrate override is 0%.014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP,RRW OFF NC is in reset state.015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH External Program Number

Search External programnumber search is being done

016 BACKGROUND ACTIVE Background is being used.

1.8DISPLAYINGDIAGNOSTIC PAGE

1.8.1Displaying DiagnosticPage

1.8.2Contents Displayed Causes when the

machine does not travelin spite of giving acommand


45

1 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 0

020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN021 RESET BUTTON ON022 RESET AND REWIND ON023 EMERGENCY STOP ON024 RESET ON025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL

Input of emergency stop signal

Input of external reset signal

Reset button On of MDI

Input of reset & rewind

Servo alarm generation

Switching to other mode, Feed hold

Single block stop

030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH ALARM Position of the character thatcaused TH alarm. The positionis counted from the head.

031 TH DATA Data of the character that causedTH alarm.

#70202

#6CSA

#5BLA

#4PHA

#3RCA

#2BZA

#1CKA

#0SPHDGN

#6(CSA): Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal

#5(BLA): Battery voltage is low (warning)

#4(PHA): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is erroneous.

#3(RCA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.

#2(BZA): Battery voltage became 0.Replace the battery and set the reference position.

#1(CKA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.Internal block stopped.

#0(SPH): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.

#7DTE0203

#6CRC

#5STB

#4 #3 #2 #1 #0

DGN

#7(DTE): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.There is no response for communication.

#6(CRC): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.Transferred data is erroneous.

#5(STB): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.Transferred data is erroneous.

Cause of the cycle startLED turned off

State of TH alarm

Detail of Alarm 350 ofserial pulse coder

Detail of Alarm 351 ofserial pulse coder


46

#7OVL0200

#6LV

#5OVC

#4HCA

#3HVA

#2DCA

#1FBA

#0OFADGN

#7(OVL): Overload alarm

#6(LV): Insufficient voltage alarm

#5(OVC): Over current alarm

#4(HCA): Abnormal current alarm

#3(HVA): Overvoltage alarm

#2(DCA): Discharge alarm

#1(FBA): Disconnection alarm

#0(OFA): Overflow alarm#7

ALD0201#6 #5 #4

EXP#3 #2 #1 #0

DGN

Overload 0 – – – Motor overheatalarm 1 – – – Amplifier overheat

Disconnec- 1 – – 0 Built–in pulse coder (hand)tion alarm 1 – – 1 Disconnection of separated type pulse

coder (hard)

0 – – 0 Disconnection of pulse coder (software)

#7RAM0204

#6OFS

#5MCC

#4LDA

#3PMS

#2 #1 #0

DGN

#6(OFS): Abnormal current value result of A/D conversion of digital

#5(MCC): Contacts of MCC of servo amplifier is melted.

#4(LDA): Serial pulse coder LED is abnormal

#3(PMS): Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial pulse coder C or feedbackcable.

This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC.If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203)is set to 1.

#70280

#6AXS

#5 #4DIR

#3PLS

#2PLC

#1 #0MOT

#0 (MOT): The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside thepredetermined range.

#2 (PLC): The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified inparameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid.

#3 (PLS): The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified inparameter No. 2024, is zero or less. The value is invalid.

#4 (DIR): The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter No.2022 (the value is other than 111 or –111).

#6 (AXS): In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside therange of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For example, 4 isspecified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values specified in theparameter are not consecutive.

Details of digital servoalarm 414

Detail of digital servoalarm 417


47

0300 Position error of an axis in detection unitDGN

Position error= Feed rate [mm/min]

60servo loop gain [1/sec]

1

Detection unit×

0301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unitDGN

302 Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid pointDGN

[Data type] Two–word axis

[Units of data] 0.001 mm (metric output), 0.0001 inch (inch output)


380 Difference between the absolute position of the motor and offset dataDGN

M (absolute position of the motor) – S (offset data)λ(pitch interval)

The remainder resulting from the division is displayed.


[Units of data] Detection units

381 Offset data from the InductosynDGN

Off set data is displayed when CNC calculates the machine position.


[Units of data] Detection units

#70400

#6 #5 #4SAI

#3SS2

#2SSR

#1POS

#0SICDGN

This data indicates the offset data received by the CNC while it iscalculating the machine coordinates.

#4(SAI) 0 : Spindle analog control is not used.1 : Spindle analog control is used.

#3(SS2) 0 : Spindle serial doesn’t control 2nd spindle.1 : Spindle serial control 2nd spindle.

#2(SSR) 0 : Spindle serial control is not performed.1 : Spindle serial control is performed.

Position error amount

Machine position

Reference position shiftfunction

Diagnostic data relatedto the Inductosynabsolute position detector

Serial spindle


48

#1 (POS) A module required for spindle analog control is

0 : not mounted

1 : mounted

#0 (SIC) A module required for spindle serial control is

0 : not mounted

1 : mounted

0401 Serial spindle alarm state of 1st spindleDGN

0402 Serial spindle alarm state of 2nd spindleDGN

#7SSA0408

#6 #5SCA

#4CME

#3CER

#2SNE

#1FRE

#0CREDGN

#0 (CRE): A CRC error occurred. (Warning)

#1 (FRE): A framing error occurred. (Warning)

#2 (SNE): The transmission/reception target is invalid.

#3 (CER): An error occurred during reception.

#4 (CME): No response was returned during automatic scanning.

#5 (SCA): A communication alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side.

#7 (SSA): A system alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side.(These problems cause spindle alarm 749. Such problems are mainlycaused by noise, disconnection, or instantaneous power–off).

#70409

#6 #5 #4 #3SPE

#2S2E

#1S1E

#0SHEDGN

Refer to this diagnosis when alarm 750 has generated.

#3 (SPE) In spindle serial control serial spindle parameters

0 : Satisfy start condition of spindle unit1 : Do not satisfy start condition of spindle unit

#2 (S2E) 0 : 2nd spindle started normally in spindle serial control.

1 : 2nd spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.

#1 (S1E) 0 : 1st spindle started normally in spindle serial control.

1 : 1st spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.

#0 (SHE) 0 : Serial communication module is correct on CNC side.

1 : An error occurred in serial communication module on CNC side

0410 Load meter of 1st spindle [%]DGN

0411 Speed meter of 1st spindle [%]DGN

0412 Load meter of 2nd spindle [%]DGN


49

0413 Speed meter of 2nd spindle [%]DGN

0414 Position error in 1st spindle synchronous control modeDGN

0415 Position error in 2nd spindle synchronous control modeDGN

0416 Absolute value of synchronization error between 1st and 2nd spindlesDGN

0417 Feedback information of 1st spindle position coderDGN

0418 Position error of 1st spindle position loop modeDGN

0419 Feedback information of 2nd spindle position coderDGN

0420 Feedback information of 2nd spindle position coderDGN

450 Spindle position error during rigid tappingDGN

[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] Detection units

451 Spindle distribution during rigid tappingDGN

[Data type] Word


454 Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tappingDGN

[Data type] Two–word


455 Instantaneous difference for the move command, calculated in terms of the spindle,during rigid tapping (signed, accumulated value)

DGN

[Data type] Two–word


456 Instantaneous difference for the travel error, calculated in terms of the spindle, during rigid tapping (signed)

DGN

[Data type] Word


457 Width of synchronization error during rigid tapping (maximum value)DGN

[Data type] Word


Diagnostic data relatedto rigid tapping


50

Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple synchro-nas control

540DGN

DGN 540 indicates the difference in the position error between the masterand slave axes to simple synchronous control. The position error isindicated for the master axis.

DGN 540 indicate values in detection units.

0550 Closed loop error

[Data type] 2–word axis


[Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999

0551 Semi–closed loop error




0552 Error between semi–closed and closed loops

[Data type] word axis



0553 Amount of dual position compensation




Diagnostic data relatedto simple synchronouscontrol

Diagnostic data relatedto the dual positionfeedback function


51

The data items displayed on the diagnosis screen are obtained at thefollowing positions:

Semi–closed looperror (No. 551)

# Speed control

Machine

Conversioncoefficients

Timeconstant

Closed loop error$% &&'

Error between semi–closed and closedloops (No. 552)

Amount of dualposition compensa-tion (No. 553)

Motor

Servo amplifier

(Parameters No. 2078 and 2079)

(Parameter No. 2080)

(

( (

(

(

(

(

(

Command

)

)


52

ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010

X 217.940Y 363.233Z 0.000

PART COUNT 5RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38SACT.F 3000MM/M S 0 T0000

MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35

[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

MEM STRT MTN ***ALM/BAT (Alarm state/Low battery)

FIN (Waiting for auxiliaryfunciton finish)

MTN/DWL( Axis travelling/dwelling)

– –EMG– –/–RESET–(Emergency stop/reset state)

Mode displayEDIT/MEM/MDIHND/JOG/REF

EDIT: Edit modeMEM: Memory modeMDI: MDI operation modeHND: Handle feed modeJOG: Jog feed modeREF: Reference position

return mode

*1 MMI/MNTWAT/PMC STPMMI: Personal computer tool

function enabled.MNTWAT: Ready to connect to M–NET.PMC STP: PMC ladder stop

STRT/STOP/HOLD(Start/Stop/Hold state)

*1

1.9NC STATE DISPLAY


53

The following two types of waveform diagnosis functions are supported:(1)One–shot type

The one–shot type waveform diagnosis function can graphicallydisplay, as a waveform, any variation in those data items listed below.The start of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edgeof a machine signal. This function facilitates the adjustment of theservo and spindle motors.a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and

thermal simulation data for the servo motor of each axisb. Composite speed for the first, second, and third axesc. Spindle motor speed and load meter valued. On/off state of a machine signal specified with a signal address

(2)Storage typeThe storage type waveform diagnosis function enables the storingof any variation in the data items listed below and, if a servo alarmoccurs, the graphical display (as a waveform) of the stored data. Theend of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edgeof a machine signal. This function facilitates the estimation oferroneous locations. Stored data can be output via the reader/punchinterface.

a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, andthermal simulation data for the servo motor for each axis

NOTE1 To output stored waveform data, the optional reader/punch

interface must have been installed.2 The waveform diagnosis function is enabled when bit 0

(SGD) of parameter No. 3112 is set to 1. Note, however, thata graphics board is necessary to display waveforms.

(1)Set a parameter to utilize the servo waveform diagnostic function.

#73112

#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0SGD

#0(SGD) 0 : Do not display servo waveform.1 : Displays servo waveform.

(2)Turn off the power once and turn it on again.3120 Time between servo alarm and sampling stop (storage type)

[Data type] Word

[Unit of data] ms


1.10WAVE FORMDIAGNOSTICFUNCTION

1.10.1Setting Parameters


54

1. Press the SYS key to display a system screen such as aparameter.

2. Press the next menu key several times, and the soft key

[W.DGNS] is displayed.

3. Press [W.DGNS], then the parameter screen for the waveformdiagnosis is displayed.

Set the necessary data items. Position the cursor to the item to be set,

enter the corresponding data, then press INPUT . Data items for which

***** is displayed cannot be set. To assist in data setting, the frame onthe right side of the screen displays help information for that data to whichthe cursor is positioned. Help information which cannot fit into a singleframe is split into several pages, which the user can scroll through using

the page keys PAGE

and PAGE

.

WAVE DIAGNOSE (PARAMETER) O1234 N12345

GRP CONDITION 100

SAMPLING TIME *****MS

TRIGGER *******

(CH–1) (CH–2)

DATA NO. 11 22UNIT 1000 10SIGNAL ******* *******> S 0 T0000EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52[W.PRM] [W.GRPH] [ W.MEM ] [ ] [ ]

GRP CONDITION

(ONE–S TYPE)0:START1:START&TRG ↑2:START&TRG ↓(MEMORY TYPE)

100: DATA OF MEMORY

1/3

(1)Display start condition

0 : Starts data sampling upon the [START] key being pressed,samples data for the specified period, then draws a waveform.

1 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first rising edge ofthe trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples datafor the specified period, then draws a waveform.

2 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first falling edge ofthe trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples datafor the specified period, then draws a waveform.

(2)Sampling period: Set the period during which data will be sampled.

Valid data range: 10 to 32760Units: ms

(3)Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger thestart of data sampling, when 1 or 2 is set for the start condition.

Example) X1004.7: SKIP signal

1.10.2Waveform DiagnosticParameter Screen

Waveform diagnosisparameters (one–shottype)


55

(4)Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items forwhich a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 4).

Data No. Description Units

00 Does not display a waveform. –

0n Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis (positional devi-ation)

Pulses (detection units)

1n Pulse distribution for the n–th axis (move command)

Pulses (input increments)

2n Torque for the n–th axis (actual current) % (relative to maxi-mum current)



5n Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM

6n Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-mum current)

7n Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis % (OVC alarm ratio)

90 Composite speed for the first, second, and third axes Pulses (input increments)

99 On/off state of a machine signal specified with a sig-nal address

None

10n Actual spindle speed for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-mum rotation speed)

11n Load meter for the spindle for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-mum output)

16n Difference in a spindle conversion positioning devi-ation


(5)Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units areautomatically specified for each data item and need not be set unlessthe units must be changed for some reason.


[Unit] 0.001

(6)Signal address: PMC address and bit number. Set in the same way asthat for trigger, when the data number is 99.


56

(1) Start condition/(memory end condition)

100 : A servo alarm condition terminates data memorization.101 : A servo alarm condition or the positive–going edge of a trigger

signal terminates data memorization.102 : A servo alarm condition or the negative–going edge of a trigger

signal terminates data memorization.

(2)Sampling period: Invalid

(3)Trigger:

Specify a machine signal address and bit, when the currentmemorization end condition is 101 or 102.Both a servo alarm condition and a trigger signal can terminate datamemorization.Example) X1004.7......................SKIP signal

(4)Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items forwhich a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 4). Numbers for whichno data is stored cannot be specified.

Data No. Description Units

00 Does not display a waveform. –



1n Pulse distribution for the n–th axis (move command) Pulses (input increments)

2n Torque for the n–th axis (actual current) % (relative to maxi-mum current)

5n Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM

6n Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-mum current)

7n Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis % (OVC alarm ratio)

(5)Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units areautomatically specified for each data item and need not be set unlessthe units must be changed for some reason.


[Unit] 0.001

(6)Signal address: Invalid

Waveform diagnosisparameters (storagetype)


57

(1)Collecting one–shot type waveform diagnostic dataOne–shot type waveform diagnostic data is displayed graphically asit is being collected. Unlike servo alarm data, one–shot type waveformdiagnostic data is not stored in such a way that it can be input andoutput. The collection of one–shot type waveform diagnostic data istriggered by pressing the [START] key on the waveform diagnostic(graph) screen, provided the display start conditions are satisfied.Data collection continues for the specified sampling time.

(2)Storing servo alarm type waveform diagnostic dataThe storage of servo alarm type waveform diagnostic data is triggeredwhen 100, 101, or 102 is specified as the display start condition/(storeoperation end condition), and continues until the store operation endcondition is satisfied. It is possible to store data for up to 32,768 ms.Once this period has elapsed, if the store operation end condition is notsatisfied, the oldest data is overwritten with the most recently collecteddata. If 0, 1, or 2 is specified, and one–shot type waveform diagnosisis selected, the servo alarm type waveform diagnostic data is erased.If one–shot type waveform diagnosis has been selected, no data is stored.If data is being stored, the message “ Store operation under way ”blinks in reverse video in the lower right part of the screen.Once the store operation has been completed, the message“ Store operation completed ” is displayed in reverse video. Afterdata has been erased, the store operation is resumed. The end of thestore operation can be deferred by a period (in ms units) specified ina parameter (No. 3120).

1.10.3Graphic of WaveDiagnosis Data

Storing waveformdiagnostic data


58

(1)Press function key SYS , then the next menu key twice such that

soft key [W.DGNS] appears. Press [W.DGNS] to display thewaveform diagnostic (parameter) screen. For an explanation of howto set the waveform diagnostic parameters, see the previous item.

(2)Press [W.GRPH].

(3)The waveform diagnostic (graph) screen is displayed. The soft keydisplay changes to manipulation selection.

WAVE DIAGNOSE (GRAPHIC)

[START] [TIME] [TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF]

CH1 CH2

*** O1234 N12345

EDIT **** *** ***

(4)Pressing [START] causes “***” to blink at the top of the screen,indicating that data sampling has begun. Once data collection has beencompleted, the corresponding waveform appears automatically.



CH1 CH2

O1234 N12345

EDIT **** *** ***

Drawing waveforms ofone–shot type waveformdiagnostic data


59


soft key [W.DGNS] appears. Press [W.DGNS] to display thewaveform diagnostic (parameter) screen. For an explanation of howto set the waveform diagnostic parameters, see the previous item.

(2)Press [W.GRPH].

(3)The waveform diagnostic (graph) screen is displayed. The soft keydisplay changes to manipulation selection.



CH1 CH2

*** O1234 N12345

STORAGE COMPLETEDEDIT **** *** ***

(4)When the message “ Store operation completed ” is displayed inreverse video in the lower part of the screen, pressing [START] causesthe waveform of the stored data to be displayed. When the stored datais being retrieved, the message “Preparation under way” blinks in thelower left part of the screen. Once data retrieval has been completed,waveform display begins, and the message “Preparation under way”is cleared, then the date and time at which the data was collected isdisplayed.

NOTEPressing [START] does not trigger waveform drawing if datais being stored.

Drawing waveforms ofservo alarm typediagnostic data


60



CH1 CH2

*** O1234 N12345

STORAGE COMPLETEDEDIT **** *** ***

DATE92/02/19 16:35:40

W.PRM W.GRPH STORE

START TIME TIME WIDTH2 WIDTH1/2

[START]: Draws the waveform of the data to be analyzed.

[TIME]: Shifts the waveform on channels 1 and 2 to the right.

[TIME]: Shifts the waveform on channels 1 and 2 to the left.

[H–DOBL]: Doubles the time scale of the waveform on channels 1 and 2.

[H–HALF]: Halves the time scale of the waveform on channels 1 and 2.

[CH–1]: Shifts the zero point of channel 1 up.

[CH–1]: Shifts the zero point of channel 1 down.

[V–DOBL]: Doubles the height of a waveform on channels 1 and 2.

[V–HALF]: Halves the height of a waveform on channels 1 and 2.

[CH–2]: Shifts the zero point of channel 2 up.

[CH–2]: Shifts the zero point of channel 2 down.

START CH1 CH1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT1/2

Press

START CH2 CH2 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT1/2

Soft keys


61


soft key [W.DGNS] appears. Press [W.DGNS] to display thewaveform diagnostic (parameter) screen.

(2)Press soft key [STORE].

(3)The waveform diagnostic (store data) screen is displayed. The soft keydisplay changes to manipulation selection.

WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) O1234 N12345

SERVO MOTOR NUMBER

1. POS ERROR :01 to 042. MOTION CMD :11 to 143. CURRENT (%) :21 to 244. SPEED (RPM) :51 to 545. TORQUE CMD :61 to 646. HEAT SIMLT :71 to 74

DATE 92/02/19 16:35:40

[ ] [ ] [ ] [DELETE][ ]

EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52 STORAGE COMPLETED

(4) If, after analyzing the stored data, you want to delete the data, do soby means of the following procedure.

(Soft keys)

W.PRM W.GRPH W.MEM

Press

DELETE

Data is erased from storage, after whichthe store operation is restarted.

Press

1.10.4Servo Alarm TypeWaveform DiagnosticData

Display and erasure


62

It is possible to output servo alarm type waveform diagnostic data to anI/O unit, connected to the reader/punch interface, as well as input suchdata from the I/O unit.The I/O unit to be used must be specified using setting parameter No.0020 and parameter Nos. 0100 to 0135.For output, it is necessary to specify a code system using the ISO settingparameter (bit 1 of parameter No. 0020).

(1)Waveform diagnostic data outputThe following procedure is used to output servo alarm type waveformdiagnostic data to an I/O unit.


(b)Press function key SYS , then select the waveform diagnostic

(store data) screen.

(c) Press soft keys [STORE], [PUNCH] and [EXEC] in this order.

(2)Waveform diagnostic data inputThe following procedure is used to input servo alarm type waveformdiagnostic data from an I/O unit.


(b)Press function key SYS , then select the waveform diagnostic

(store data) screen.

(c) Press soft keys [STORE], [READ] and [EXEC] in this order.

WAVE DIAGNOSE (MEMORY) O1234 N12345

SERVO MOTOR NUMBER

1. POS ERROR :01 to 042. MOTION CMD :11 to 143. CURRENT (%) :21 to 244. SPEED (RPM) :51 to 545. TORQUE CMD :61 to 646. HEAT SIMLT :71 to 74

DATE 92/02/19 16:35:40<_

[ ] [ READ ] [ PUNCH ] [DELETE][ ]

EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52

Press

CAN EXEC

Press

Press

STORAGE COMPLETED

Servo alarm typewaveform diagnosticdata input/output


63

(1)DirectoryIf the cassette or card directory is displayed, the operation historyoutput file is registered as “WAVE DIAGNOS.” The procedure fordisplaying the directory is described later.

(2)Output to a cassette or FA cardThe following procedure is used to output the operation history to thecassette or card.


(b)Press the SYS key, then select the waveform diagnostic (store

data) screen.


(d)Press soft keys [STORE], [PUNCH], and [EXEC] in this order.

The output file is assigned the largest file number on the cassette or card.The file will be named “WAVE DIAGNOS.”If the cassette or card already contains a file having the same name, P/Salarm 86 occurs. A cassette or card can contain only one set of servo alarmtype waveform diagnostic data. If the target cassette or card alreadycontains unnecessary waveform diagnostic data, delete the file having thesame name, before outputting your file. The procedure for deleting a fileis described later.

(3) Input from a cassette or cardOperation history is loaded into the CNC from the cassette or card bymeans of the following procedure.

(a)Select EDIT mode.

(b)Locate the beginning of the servo alarm type waveform diagnosticdata file on the directory display screen.

(c) Press the SYS key, then select the waveform diagnostic (store

data) screen.

(d)Press soft keys [STORE], [READ], and [EXEC] in this order.

(e) Once the input operation has been completed, the date and time atwhich the data was stored is displayed on the screen.

(4)Displaying the directory for a cassette or card The directory of a cassette or card is displayed by means of thefollowing procedure.


(b)Press function key PRG , then select the program screen.

(c) Press , then [FLOPPY].

(d)Press the page switch key .

A list of directories is displayed.

Input/output operationswith a FANUC floppycassette and FA card


64

(5)Deleting a file from a cassette or cardA file is deleted from a cassette or card by means of the followingprocedure.


(b)Press function key PRG , then select the program screen.


(d)Press [FLOPPY].

(e) Press [DELETE].

(f) Key in a file number, then press [F SET].

(g)Press [EXEC]. The file having the specified file number is deleted.The numbers of the files that were subsequent to the deleted file inthe list are moved up by one after [EXEC] is pressed.

NOTEThe floppy directory display function is an option.

(1) Input/output data types

1 Positional deviation

2 Move command

3 Actual current

4 Actual speed

5 Current command

6 Thermal simulation

(2) Input/output formatIn the output format, the header precedes the servo alarm waveformdiagnostic data.The servo alarm type waveform diagnostic data is classified into seventypes, each being identified by an identifier word. The data under eachidentifier varies with the data type.

T0: HeaderT60: Positional deviationT61: Move commandT62: Actual currentT63: Actual speedT64: Current commandT65: Thermal simulationT69: Date and time

T (identifier word)

Format of servo alarmtype diagnostic data


65

1) Header

T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;

C: Data word

2) Positional deviation

T 6 0 D * * , * * , * * , * * ;

D*..*: Positional deviation data for four axes

3) Move command

T 6 1 D * * , * * , * * , * * ;

D*..*: Move command data for four axes

4) Actual current

T 6 2 D * * , * * , * * , * * ;

D*..*: Actual current data for four axes

5) Actual speed

T 6 3 D * * , * * , * * , * * ;

D*..*: Actual speed data for four axes

6) Current command

T 6 4 D * * , * * , * * , * * ;

D*..*: Current command data for four axes

7) Thermal simulation

T 6 5 D * * , * * , * * , * * ;

D*..*: Thermal simulation data for four axes


66

8) Date

T 6 9 D * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;

T 6 9 D 1 9 9 7 0 6 2 3 , 1 2 1 4 5 9 ;

D *..*: Data Example: 12:14 59 seconds on June 23, 1997

CAUTION1 Once the storage area is full, the oldest data is overwritten.2 The servo alarm type waveform diagnostic data is not lost

when the power is switched off. To delete it, use the[ERASE] procedure, described above.

3 If the SGD parameter (bit 0 of No. 3112) is 0, the waveformdiagnostic function is disabled.

4 The current date and time should be set correctly on thesetting screen.

NOTE1 There are two record types: Header records and data

records.2 “%” is used as an end–of–record mark.3 Each record begins with an identifier and ends with an

end–of–block mark.4 The data is represented in either the ISO or EIA code

system.5 The code system used for output depends on the state of

the ISO setting parameter (bit 1 of No. 0100). For the ISOcode system, whether the end of a block is identified by <IF>only or a set of <LF>, <CR>, and <CR> depends on thestate of the NCR setting parameter (bit 3 of No. 0100).

6 Whether to prefix and suffix output data with a feed codedepends on the setting made for the NFD parameter (bit 7of No. 01n1 where n is a channel number).

7 The time required for input/output is as follows:Output = about 30 minutesInput = about 15 minutes(The size of this file is equivalent to about 1200 meters ofpaper tape.)


67

Load meter of the servo axis and the serial spindle and the speed metercan be displayed.

1. Set a parameter to display operating monitor.

#73111

#6 #5OPM

#4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#5:(OPM)0 : Operating monitor is not displayed.

1 : Operating monitor is displayed.

2. Press the POS key to display the position display screen.

3. Press continuous menu key , then soft key [MONI] is displayed.

4. Press the soft key [MONI], then the operating monitor screen isdisplayed.

X : * * * 80% S1: 201%

Y : * * * * * 0% (SPEED METER RPM)

Z : * * * * * 0% S1: * * * 1500

PART COUNT 5RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38SACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T 0000

OPERATING MONITOR O0001 N00001 (LOAD METER)

[

MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

CAUTION1 The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200%.2 The bar graph for the speed meter shows the ratio of the

current spindle speed to the maximum spindle speed(100%). Although the speed meter normally indicates thespeed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicatethe speed of the spindle by setting bit 6 (OPMSP) ofparameter 3111 to 1.

3 The servo axes for their load meters are displayed are setto parameter No. 3151 to 3. If parameters 3151 to 3153 areall zero, the load meter of the basic axes are displayed.

1.11OPERATINGMONITOR

1.11.1Display Method


68

(1)Associated Parameters

3151 Axis number for which the 1st load meter for servo motor is displayed

3152 Axis number for which the 2nd load meter for servo motor is displayed

3153 Axis number for which the 3rd load meter for servo motor is displayed


69

* Each character string enclosed by angle brackets indicates an MDI key.Each character string enclosed by brackets indicates a function key onthe screen or a selection item on the menu.

* For IPL menu operations, see Section 2.9, ”POWER–ON RELATEDPROCESSING PERFORMED ON THE IPL SCREEN.”

Reset

Function Condition LCD/touch panelkey operation Basic Operating Package operation

Disabling NC softwareOT

At NC power–on No key operation Start the IPL menu. [SETTING] [IGNORE OVER TRAVEL ALARM] [CNC]

Resetting alarm 100(PARAMETER WRITEENABLE)

Condition 1 at right Condition 1: NonePress <SPCL>.<CAN><RESET><ENTER/ENT>

Condition 1: MDI mode or emergency stopPress <3> while holding down <Alt>. [CNC Setting/General] Turn parameter write enable off. Turn NC reset on.

Registration from MDI

Function Condition LCD/touch panel key operation Basic Operating Package operation

Inputting parameters PWE=1+

MDI mode oremergency stop

Press <SYS>. [PARAM] Input data.

Press <5> while holding down <Alt>. [Parameter] Input data.

Inputting offsets – Press <OFFST>. [OFFSET] Input data.

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. [Tool Offset] Input data.

Inputting settings MDI mode Press <OFFST>. Input data.

To change PWE:Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. [CNC Setting/General] Switch parameter write enable between

on and off.To input other data: Use the parameter screen.

Inputting PMC parameters (counter/data table)


Press <SYS>. [PMC] [PMCPRM] [COUNTER] / [DATA] Input data.

Press <6> while holding down <Alt>. [PMC] Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Count]/[Data] Input data.

Inputting PMC parameters (timer/keep relay)

PWE=1+


Press <SYS>. [PMC] [PMCPRM] [TIMER] / [KEEPRL] Input data.

Press <6> while holding down <Alt>. [PMC] Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Timer]/[Keep Relay] Input data.

1.12LIST OF OPERATIONS


70

Registration from an external I/O


Inputting parameters PWE=1+

Condition 2 at right

Condition 2: EDIT modeor emergency stopPress <SYS>. [PARAM] [(OPRT)] [READ] [EXEC]

Condition 2: MDI mode or emergency stopPress <3> while holding down <Alt>. [Data I/O] Press <F1> (Read). Select [Parameter]. Input the name of a file.

Inputting offsets EDIT mode Press <OFFST>. [OFFSET] [(OPRT)] [READ [EXEC]

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. [Data I/O] Press <F1> (Read). Select [Tool offset]. Input the name of a file.

Registering a program EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [READ] [EXEC]

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. [Data I/O] Press <F1> (Read). Select [Program]. Input the name of a file.

Inputting macro variables

EDIT mode Press <OFFST>. [MACRO] [(OPRT)] [READ] [EXEC]

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. [Data I/O] Press <F1> (Read). Select [Macro variable]. Input the name of a file.

Registration to an external I/O

Function Condition LCD/touch panel key operation Basic Operating Package operation

Outputting parameters EDIT mode Press <SYS>. [PARAM] [(OPRT)] [PUNCH] [EXEC]

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. [Data I/O] Press <F2> (Punch). Select [Parameter]. Input the name of a file.

Outputting offsets EDIT mode Press <OFFST>. [OFFSET] [(OPRT)] [PUNCH] [EXEC]

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. [Data I/O] Press <F2> (Punch). Select [Tool offset]. Input the name of a file.

Outputting macro vari-ables

EDIT mode Press <OFFST>. [MACRO] [(OPRT)] [PUNCH] [EXEC]

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. [Data I/O] Press <F2> (Punch). Select [Macro variable]. Input the name of a file.

Outputting all programs EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] Input O9999. [PUNCH] [EXEC]

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. Display the [data input/output] screen. Press <F2> (Punch). Select [Program]. Input O1 for Program from:. Input O9999 for until:.

Outputting a program EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] Input <O><number>. [PUNCH] [EXEC]

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. Display the [data input/output] screen. Press <F2> (Punch). Select [Program]. Input <O><number> for Program from:.


71

Search


Searching for a program number

MEM or EDITmode

Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] Input <O><number>. [O SRH]

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Directory] Press <F6> (Search). Input <O><number>.

Searching for a sequence number

MEM mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] Input <N><number>. [N SRH]

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Edit] Press <F1> (Progrm). Select a program to be edited. Press <F3> (Search). Input <N><number>.

Searching for an address word

EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] Input an address word. [SRH] or [SRH]

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Edit] Press <F1> (Progrm). Select a program to be edited. Press <F3> (Search). Input an address word.

Searching for an address

EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] Input an address. [SRH] or [SRH]

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Edit] Press <F1> (Progrm). Select a program to be edited. Press <F3> (Search). Input an address.

Searching for an offsetnumber

– Press <OFFST>. [OFFSET] [(OPRT)] Input a number. [NO SRH]

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. [Tool Offset] Press <F5> (Searh). Input a number.

Searching for a diagnostic number

– Press <SYS>. [DGNOS] [(OPRT)] Input a number. [NO SRH]

Press <5> while holding down <Alt>. [Diagnosis] Press <F5> (Search). Input a number.

Searching for a parameter number

– Press <SYS>. [PARAM] [(OPRT)] Input a number. [NO SRH]

Press <5> while holding down <Alt>. [Parameter] Press <F5> (Search). Input a number.


72

Edit


Displaying the usedmemory capacity

EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [LIB]

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Directory]

Deleting programs EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] Input <O><number>. <DEL>(To delete all programs,specify –9999 as the num-ber.)

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Directory] Move the cursor. <F5> (Delet)(To delete all programs, use the IPL menu.)

Deleting severalblocks

EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] Input <N><number>. <DEL>

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Edit] Press <F1> (Progrm). Select a program to be edited. Press <F9> (Select). Move the cursor to the target N number. <F5> (Delete)

Deleting a block EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] <EOB> <DEL>

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Edit] Press <F1> (Progrm). Select a program to be edited. <Shift> + <F5> (Delete)

Deleting a word EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] Word search <DEL>

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Edit] Press <F1> (Progrm). Select a program to be edited. Move the cursor. <F5> (Delete)

Changing a word EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] Word search Input a new word. <ALT>

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Edit] Press <F1> (Progrm). Select a program to be edited. Move the cursor. Input a new word. <F4> (Alter)

Inserting a word EDIT mode Press <PRG>. [PRGRM] Word search Input a word to be in-serted. <INS>

Press <2> while holding down <Alt>. [Edit] Press <F1> (Progrm). Select a program to be edited. Move the cursor. Input a word to be inserted. <Enter>

Zero point setting


Setting the zero point PWE=1 Position the cursor to 07Zero on the workpiececoordinate system settingscreen. [(OPRT)] [Zero]

Press <3> while holding down <Alt>. [Work Zero Offset] <F1> (Zero) Select a target axis.


73

Clear


Clearing all memory At NC power–on Position the rotary switchon the main board panelto 5. Push the switch. Push the switch.

Start the IPL menu. [MEMORY CLEAR] [ALL MEMORY] [ALL]

Clearing all programs PWE=1+

At NC power–on

No key operation at pow-er–onPerform the operation de-scribed in ”Deleting pro-grams” in ”Edit.”

Start the IPL menu. [MEMORY CLEAR] [ALL PROGRAM] [ALL]

Clearing parameters/offsets

PWE=1+

At NC power–on

No key operation at pow-er–on

Start the IPL menu. [MEMORY CLEAR] [PARAMETER AND OFFSET] [MAIN]

Clearing NC PMC parameters (retained type)

At NC power–on No key operation at pow-er–on

Start the IPL menu. [PMC] [PARAMETER] [CNC]

Resetting P/S alarm101

– Press <SPCL>. <PRG> <RESET> <ENTER/ENT>

* A program backup file is required.Start the IPL menu. Clear programs.Start the Basic Operating Package. Setting/data input–output screen Read the backup file.(See ”Registering a program” in ”Registrationfrom an external I/O.”)


74

This CNC displays a warning screen when the configuration of theoptions using the SRAM area is changed. The data for the functionindicated on the screen is cleared the next time the system is turned on.

WARNING

YOU SET THE PARAMETER NO.#

THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE CLEARED.

* PART PROGRAM MEMORY

PLEASE PRESS <DELETE> OR <CAN> KEY.<DELETE> : CLEAR ALL DATA<CAN> : CANCEL

*1

CAUTION (*1)This line varies with the parameter settings. Two or morefunction names may be displayed.

When an option which uses the SRAM area is added, the system softwaremay require more SRAM than is currently installed in the system. In thiscase, an allocation error screen appears the first time the system is turnedon after the addition of the option, thus restoring the state existing beforethe addition.

FILE ALLOCATION ERROR

S–RAM CAPACITY IS NOT SUFFICIENT.

(The CNC returns to the state in which it wasbefore the optional parameters were changed.)

1.13WARNING SCREENDISPLAYED WHENAN OPTION ISCHANGED Warning screen

Allocation error screen


75

Touch panel compensation is needed when:

1) The LCD unit is replaced,

2) The touch panel is replaced,

3) The touch panel control printed–circuit board is replaced, or

4) The memory is cleared to all 0s.

#73113

#6 #5DTPCL

#4 #3 #2 #1 #0

[Data type] Bit

DTPCL Specifies whether to enable compensation related to the touchpanel on the display, as follows:0: To disable1: To enable

1.14TOUCH PANELADJUSTMENTSCREEN

1.14.1Conditions RequiringCompensation



76

1) Set the DTPCL parameter (bit 5 of parameter No. 3113) to ”1”.

2) Press function key <SYS>.

3) Press the continuation menu key several times. Soft key [TP CAL] isdisplayed.

4) Press soft key [TP CAL]. The touch panel compensation screen isdisplayed.

CALIBRATION OF TOUCH PANEL

PLEASE PUSH CALIBRATED POINTS. IF CALIBRATION IS ENDED, PLEASE PUSH THIS LINE. IF CALIBRATION IS CANCELED, PLEASE PUSH THIS LINE. IF OPERATION IS ENDED, PLEASE PUSH THIS LINE.

+ + +

+ + +

+ + +

5) Press the touch panel pen against the nine compensation points(marked +) in any sequence. When the pen is pressed exactly on a +mark, the mark starts blinking. If the pen is pressed off the mark, themessage ”CARIBRATED POINT DOES NOT MATCH, PLEASEPUSH AGAIN.” appears.

6) When the pen is pressed against all the nine compensation points, andthe corresponding marks are blinking, press the pen against the linecontaining ”*1” in the above figure to exit compensation.

7) When compensation is terminated normally, the message”CARIBRATION WAS ENDED.” appears.

8) To abort or redo compensation, press the pen against the linecontaining ”*2” in the above figure.

9) Pressing the pen against the line containing ”*3” exits the touch panelcompensation screen, thus terminating the compensation work.

10) When you have finished with the compensation work, reset theDTPCL parameter (bit 5 of parameter No. 3113) to ”0”.

1.14.3CompensationProcedure

B–63395EN/012. BASIC OPERATING PACKAGE VIEWING

AND OPERATING

77

2 BASIC OPERATING PACKAGE VIEWING AND OPERATING

This chapter describes how to use the FANUC Series 18i–LNA BasicOperating Package (BOP), which enables the use of a personal computerto manipulate a CNC and view the data on it.

2.1 OVERVIEW 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 COMMON OPERATIONS 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 POSITION DISPLAY SCREENS 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 PROGRAM SCREENS 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 SETTING SCREENS 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 MESSAGE SCREENS 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 SYSTEM SCREENS 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 POWER–ON RELATED PROCESSING

PERFORMED ON THE IPL SCREEN 149. . . . . . . . . . .

CAUTION FANUC Limited owns the copyright to the FANUC Series

18i–LNA Basic Operating Package (BOP). No part of FANUC Series 18i–LNA Basic Operating

Package or its manuals may be used or reproduced withoutpermission.

* Microsoft, MS, and MS–DOS are registered trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation of the US.

* Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation of the US.* The company and product names mentioned herein are

trademarks of the respective companies.

2. BASIC OPERATING PACKAGE VIEWING AND OPERATING B–63395EN/01

78

The FANUC Series 18i–LNA Basic Operating Package (BOP) is asoftware package that has been developed to implement basic CNCoperation on a personal computer. Unlike conventional CNC screens, theBOP graphical screens enable the user to manipulate the CNC intuitively.

F10Large

(*2)

(*3)

(*4)

(*5)(*6)

1.Position 2.Program 3.Setting 4.Message 5.System 6.Others

Status

Message

(*1)

(*1) Menu barUsed to select a screen.

(*2) Title barDisplays the name of the current screen.

(*3) Application displayDisplays the currently selected screen (application).

(*4) Status displayDisplays the status of the CNC. See Section 2.2.3 for details.

(*5) CNC message displayDisplays alarm messages related to the CNC.

(*6) Function key displayDisplays the operation types that can be triggered using functionkeys. The display varies from one screen to another.

2.1OVERVIEW

2.1.1Purpose

2.1.2Configuration of BOP

BOP layout diagram

Displays


AND OPERATING

79

This section describes the operations common to all BOP screens. Beforeattempting to use BOP for the first time, read this section carefully.

BOP screens are selected using pull–down menus similar to those ofMS–Windows applications. Be careful when using the pull–down menusof BOP, because they differ slightly from those of common MS–Windowsapplications.

AllAll and monitorAbsoluteslideMachineDistanceQuit

F10Large

(*2)

1.Position 2.program 3.Setting 4.Message 5.System 6.Others

Status

Message

Program No. __Sequence No. __

Position(SLD):Status:Y 1.000 Memoryy 0.000 StartZ 0.000 MotionC 0.000

Date/Time:12/24/9317:25:30

Feedrate(mm/min):___Spindle(rpm):______

PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE

Õ

(*1)

(*1) Top menuThis menu remains displayed at the top of the screen. A gray cursoris always displayed in that portion of the screen selected using thetop menu.

(*2) Pull–down menuThe pull–down menus are displayed below the corresponding itemsof the top menu. Selected items in the pull–down menu are indicatedby a check mark to their left.

SubmenuA submenu is displayed when an item with a right arrow “” isselected.

2.2COMMONOPERATIONS

2.2.1Menus and ScreenSelection

2.2.1.1Purpose

2.2.1.2Menu configuration

Displays


80

This section explains how to use the menus.

Menuoperation Function Operation

Referencesin Section

2.2.1.3

Opening a menu Opening the currentpull–down menu

“Alt” (1)(a)

Opening a specified menu “Alt” + “Numerickey”

(1)(b)

Moving thecursor

Cursor movement “”, “” (2)(a) and (b)

Selecting Moving to the next menu “”, “” (3)(a) and (b)another menu

Moving to a specified menu “Numeric key” (3)(c)

Selecting amenu item

Selecting an item from themenu and exiting from themenu

“Enter” (4)(a)

Closing themenu

Closing the current menu,then exiting from it or returningto the previous menu

“Esc” (5)(a)

Canceling amenu

Exiting from the menu withoutselecting any item.

“Alt” (6)(a)

(1)Opening a menuThere are two methods of opening a menu. Opening a menu enablesits operation.

(a) Opening the current pull–down menu

Key operation: Press the “Alt” key.

Function: Pressing the Alt key opens the currently selectedmenu. If the “Program/Edit” screen is currentlyselected, for example, the “Program” menu isopened.

(b)Opening a specified menu

Key operation: Press the “Alt” key and a “Numeric key” simulta-neously.

Function: Pressing the Alt key and a numeric keysimultaneously opens a menu corresponding tothe numeric key. If 3 is entered, for example, the“Setting” menu is opened.

(2)Moving the cursor

(a) Moving the cursor up

Key operation: “”

Function: Pressing this key usually moves the cursor up. Ifthe cursor is at the very top of the menu, however,it is moved down to the bottom of the menu.

2.2.1.3Operation

Operating methods


AND OPERATING

81

(b)Moving the cursor downKey operation: “”Function: Pressing this key usually moves the cursor down.

If the cursor is at the very bottom of the menu,however, it is moved up to the top of the menu.

(3)Selecting another menu(a) Selecting a menu on the right

Key operation: “”Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the menu

item on the right. Usually, the cursor is movedto a pull–down menu having a higher number.If an item to which the cursor is positioned hasa “” mark, the corresponding submenu isopened, and the cursor is positioned to thatsubmenu.

(b)Selecting a menu on the leftKey operation: “”Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the menu

item on the left. Usually, the cursor is moved toa pull–down menu having a lower number. If thecursor is currently positioned to an item in asubmenu, the submenu is closed, and the cursor ismoved to the pull–down menu.

(c) Selecting a specific menuKey operation: “Numeric key”Function: Pressing a numeric key moves the cursor to the

pull–down menu corresponding to the numerickey.

(4)Selecting a menu item(a) Selecting a menu item and exiting from the menu

Key operation: “Enter”Function: Pressing the Enter key selects the item to which

the cursor is currently positioned, then exits fromthat menu. Then, the selected menu appears onthe screen.

(5)Closing a menuWhen a menu is closed, its behavior varies depending on whether themenu (to which the cursor is positioned) is a pull–down menu orsubmenu.If the cursor is positioned to a pull–down menu The pull–down menu is closed, and menu operation is terminated.

Menu operation can be resumed only by re–opening the menu.If the cursor is positioned to a submenu The submenu is closed, and the cursor is moved back to the

pull–down menu. Menu operation can be continued.(a) Closing a menu

Key operation: “Esc”Function: Pressing the Esc key closes the menu to which the

cursor is positioned.


82

(6)Canceling a menu(a) Exiting from a menu without selecting an item.

Key operation: Press the “Alt” key.

Function: Pressing the Alt key cancels menu operation andexits from that menu. The screen remains as is.

A dialog box is a window that is temporarily displayed by BOP when itis necessary to enter data or display information. The dialog box enablessimple, graphical input/output operation.

F10Large

1.Position 2.Program 3.Setting 4.Message 5.System 6.Others

Status

Message

(*2)

(*3)


Position(SLD):Status:Y 1.000 Memoryy 0.000 StartZ 0.000 MotionC 0.000

Date/Time:12/24/9317:25:30

Feedrate(mm/min):__Spindle(rpm):______


Dialog title

check box

radio button1 radio button2

(*4)

edit : 1234| (*5)

OK Cancel

(*7) (*6)

ÕÕÕÕ

(*1)

(*1) Dialog box windowWindow in which a dialog box is displayed.

(*2) Title barArea in which the name of the dialog box is displayed.

(*3) Check boxSquare box used to select an item. Usually, a check box is used toselect a single item. If a check mark appears in a check box, itindicates that the corresponding item is selected. When that item isdeselected, the check mark is cleared from the check box.

(*4) Radio buttonA round button used to select an item. Usually, a radio button is usedto select one of several options. When an option is selected, a dotappears in the center of the corresponding radio button. When thatoption is subsequently deselected, the radio button is cleared.

(*5) Edit boxBox used to enter text. Some edit boxes can be scrolled horizontally.

2.2.2Dialog Box andInput/Output

2.2.2.1Purpose

2.2.2.2Dialog box layout

Displays


AND OPERATING

83

(*6) PushbuttonA button used mainly to specify the behavior of a dialog box.Typical pushbuttons are “OK” and “Cancel”.

(*7) Default pushbuttonA special type of pushbutton that specifies the function of the“Enter” key. The periphery of the default pushbutton is displayedin a darker shade than an ordinary pushbutton.

This section explains how to operate dialog boxes. The followingdescriptions are not necessarily common to all dialog boxes. Some dialogboxes involve special operation. For details of such dialog boxes, see thecorresponding descriptions.

Dialog boxoperation

Function OperationReferencesin Section

2.2.2.3

Dialog box Closing a dialog box “Enter” (1)(a)

Canceling a dialog box “Esc” (1)(b)

Moving the cursor “”, “” (1)(c)

Moving the cursor “”, “” (1)(d)

Check box Turning on/off the checkmark

“Space”, “.” (2)(a)

Radio button Item selection (3)

Edit box Character insertion Keys whose key topindicates a character,number, or symbol thatcan be displayed on thescreen

(4)(a)

Character deletion “Back space” (4)(b)

Character deletion “Delete” (4)(c)

Moving the cursor withinan edit box

“”, “” (4)(d) and (e)

Pushbutton anddefault pushbutton

Pressing a button “Space”, “.” (5)(a)

2.2.2.3Operation

Operating methods


84

(1)Dialog box

(a) Closing a dialog box

Key operation: “Enter”

Function: Pressing the Enter key closes the dialog box. If thedialog box has a default pushbutton, pressing theEnter key has the same effect as selecting thedefault pushbutton. If the dialog box has nodefault pushbutton, pressing the Enter key isequivalent to pressing the “OK” key, thusvalidating the entered data.

(b)Canceling a dialog box

Key operation: “Esc”

Function: Pressing the Esc key cancels the data entered intothe dialog box and closes the dialog box. Pressingthis key is equivalent to selecting “Cancel”.

(c) Moving the cursor

Key operation: “”, “”

Function: Pressing these keys moves the cursor to the itemimmediately before the current cursor position,except in an edit box. In an edit box, pressing the“” key moves the cursor to the character on theleft.

(d)Moving the cursor

Key operation: “”, “”

Function: Pressing these keys moves the cursor to the itemthat is immediately after the current cursorposition, except in an edit box. In an edit box,pressing the “” key moves the cursor to thecharacter on the right.

(2)Check box

(a) Turning the check mark on/off

Key operation: “Spacebar” or “.”

Function: Pressing these keys turns the check mark in thecheck box on and off.

(3)Radio buttonAn item corresponding to a radio button is selected by moving thecursor of the dialog box to the radio button and selecting that button.

(4)Edit box

(a) Character insertion

Key operation: All keys whose key top indicates a character,number, or symbol that can be displayed on thescreen

Function: Pressing a key whose key top indicates a character,number, or symbol that can be displayed on thescreen enters the corresponding character,number, or symbol into the edit box. Note thatsome dialog boxes accept only specific types ofkey entries (for example, only numbers).


AND OPERATING

85

(b)Character deletion

Key operation: “Backspace”

Function: Pressing the backspace key deletes the character tothe left of the cursor.

(c) Character deletion

Key operation: “Delete”

Function: Pressing the delete key deletes the character towhich the cursor is currently positioned.

(d)Moving the cursor within an edit box


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the characteron the left in the edit box. When the cursor reachesthe extreme left end, pressing this key may causescrolling.

(e) Moving the cursor within an edit box


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the characteron the right in the edit box. When the cursorreaches the extreme right end, pressing this keymay cause scrolling.

(5)Pushbutton and default pushbutton

(a) Pressing a button

Key operation: “Spacebar” or “.”

Operation: A pushbutton is pressed.


86

With the status display, it is possible to view the current information forthe CNC.

F10Large

(*1)

1.Poistion 2.Program 3.Setting 4.Message 5.System 6.Others

Status

Message


Position(SLD):Status:Y 1.000 Memoryy 0.000 StartZ 0.000 MotionC 0.000 (*4)

(*3)Date/Time:

12/24/93(*5 17:25:30

Feedrate(mm/min):__Spindle(rpm):______


(*2)

(*6)(*7)

S 2000

Actual Feedrate(mm/min) (*6) Actual Spindle Speed(rpm) (*7)

N 00005

Program Number (*1 Sequence Number (*2)

Mode : MemoryRun : StartMotion : MotionMSTB : No MSTBEmergency : No ResetAlarm : No Alarm

Date/Time12/24/9317:25:31

O 0001

Position(Slide)(*3)

X 1.000Y 0.000Z 0.000C 0.000

Status

F 1000

(*4)

(*5)

2.2.3Status Display

2.2.3.1Purpose

2.2.3.2Screen layout

Status display layoutdiagram (standard)

Status display layoutdiagram (enlarged)


AND OPERATING

87

(*1) Program numberThis box displays a program number.

(*2) Sequence numberThis box displays a sequence number.

(*3) Position displayThis box displays the current position of the machine. By default,the current position is displayed using a slide coordinate system.

(*4) CNC statusThis box displays the status of the CNC. On the enlarged statusdisplay screen, edit information about the CNC is not displayed.

(*5) Date/timeThis box displays the date/time.

(*6) Actual speedThis box displays the actual speed.

(*7) Spindle speedThis box displays the speed of the spindle.

This section explains how to operate the status display screens.

Status displayoperation Function Operation


2.2.3.3

Enlarging the display Enlarging the statusdisplay

“F10” (1)(a)

(1)Enlarging the display

(a) Enlarging the status display

Key operation: “F10”

Function: Pressing the F10 key enlarges the CNC statusdisplay. To restore the normal display, press anykey.

Displays

2.2.3.3Operation


88

The overall position information screen displays all position informationand information relating to machining. It can also be used to setinformation about machining.

F5 F6 F10ClrPtsClrRun Large


Status

Message

Position/All

Absolute Machine Dist to go

Slide Condition Tolerance

(*1)

(*2)

Parts count: (*3)___Run time: (*4)___ Cycle time: (*5) ____

X 1.000 –2.000 3.000Y 0.000 0.000 0.000Z 0.000 0.000 0.000C 0.000 0.000 0.000

X 1.000 3.000Y 0.000 0.000Z 0.000 0.000C 0.000 0.000

(*1) Position display 1This box displays the absolute coordinates, machine coordinates,and the remaining amount of movement.

(*2) Position display 2This box displays the slide coordinates, the state of tolerance, andthe amount of tolerance.The following marks are used to indicate the state of tolerance.

“ ”: Out of tolerance“ ”: Tolerance decreasing“ ”: Tolerance increasing“ ”: Within tolerance

(*3) Machined parts countThis box displays the number of parts that have already beenmachined.

2.3POSITION DISPLAY SCREENS

2.3.1Overall PositionInformation

2.3.1.1Purpose


Overall positioninformation layoutdiagram

Displays


AND OPERATING

89

(*4) Total elapsed timeThis box displays the total elapsed time.

(*5) Machining timeThis box displays the machining time.

This section describes the operation related to the overall positioninformation.

Overall positioninformation

screen operationFunction Operation


2.3.1.3

Setting machininginformation

Clearing the machinedparts count

“F5” (1)(a)

Clearing the total elapsedtime

“F6” (1)(b)

(1)Setting machining information

(a) Clearing the machined parts count


Function: Pressing the F5 key clears the machined partscount in the CNC to 0.

(b)Clearing the total elapsed time


Function: Pressing the F6 key clears the total elapsed time,as counted by the CNC, to 0.

2.3.1.3Operation

Operating methods


90

This screen displays all position information, a load meter, and a speedindication.

F10Large


Status

Message

Position/All

Absolute Slide Machine Dist to go

(*1)

X 1.000 –2.000 3.000 –4.000Y 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000C 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

Operating monitor

Load meter (*2)

X: S1: 50 %

100 %

75 %

40 %

Speed meter (*3)3000rpm

Z: S1:

Y:

(*1) Position displayThis box displays the absolute coordinates, slide coordinates,machine coordinates, and the remaining amount of movement.

(*2) Load meterThis box displays load meters for those axes specified in parameterNos. 3151 to 3153, as well as for the main spindle. Each load metergraph can indicate up to 200%. When the graph exceeds 100%, itturns red. When all of parameter Nos. 3151 to 3153 are set to 0, theload meters for the three basic axes are displayed.

(*3) Speed indication This box displays the rotational speed of the main spindle or that ofthe spindle (if bit 6 of parameter No. 3111 is 1).

2.3.2Overall PositionInformation andMonitoring

2.3.2.1Purpose


Overall positioninformation andmonitoring screen layout

Displays


AND OPERATING

91

This screen displays the absolute coordinates (slide coordinates, machinecoordinates, or the remaining amount of movement)

F10Large


Status

Message

Position/Absolute

O 0001

N 00010

X 1.000Y 0.000Z 0.000C 0.000

F 1000

S 5000

(*1)

(*5)

(*2)

(*3)

(*4)

(*1) Program No.This box displays a program No.

(*2) Sequence No.This box displays a sequence No.

(*3) Position displayThis box displays position information such as the absolutecoordinates, slide coordinates, machine coordinates, or theremaining amount of movement.

(*4) Actual speedThis box displays the actual speed.

(*5) Spindle speedThis box displays the rotational speed of the spindle.

2.3.3Absolute Coordinates(Slide Coordinates,Machine Coordinates,or Remaining Amountof Movement)

2.3.3.1Purpose


Absolute coordinates(slide coordinates,machine coordinates, orthe remaining amount ofmovement) screenlayout diagram

Displays


92

The program screen is provided to enable the editing of NC programs.

Edit 01234 (*1) (*2 AREA

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10Progrm Window Search AlterDelete Copy Paste Help SelectLarge


Status

Message

O1234N10 G00 X100. Z100.;N20 G01 Y340. F100;N30 G44 X45.0 Z90.0 S500;N40 G01 X200. Z100. F100; (*3)N50 G00 X30. Y20.; N60 G01 X25. ; (*4)N70 G01 X500. Z700. /Y350. / F300.; N80 G00 T02; N90 G97 T32; N100 G01 X30. F400;

:::

Program/Edit

(*1) Name of program being editedThis box displays the name of the program that is currently beingedited.

(*2) Whether the specification of a range is on/offThis box displays whether the specification of a range is valid.When the specification of a range is valid, the word “Range” appearsin the box.

(*3) Editing area

(*4) Cursor

2.4PROGRAM SCREENS

2.4.1Editing

2.4.1.1Purpose

2.4.1.2Screen configuration

Program editing screenlayout diagram

Displays


AND OPERATING

93

The program editing screen is designed to enable the following three basicsteps.

Opens a program to be edited.

Edits or saves the program.

Closes the program.

Editor screenoperation Function Operation


2.4.1.3

Screen operation Cursor movementPop–up menuDialog boxOperation interruption

Cursor keys and othersSoft keySoft key and others“Esc”

(1)(a)(1)(c)(1)(d)(1)(e)

Programopening

Opening a program.Opening a new program.

“F1” Open“F1” Create

(2)(a)(2)(b)

Editing Word insertionBlock insertionWord deletionBlock deletionWord conversionBlock conversionWord searchRange specificationBuffer copyBuffer pastingProgram appending

Direct input“Shift” + “F6”“F5”“Shift” + “F5”“F4”“Shift” + “F4”“F3”“F9”“F6”“F7“F1” Append

(3)(a)(3)(a)(3)(b)(3)(b)(3)(c)(3)(c)(3)(d)(3)(e)(3)(f)(3)(g)(3)(h)

Edit buffer switchingMultiple–buffer display

“F2” Exchange Buffer“F2” Exchange window

(3)(i)(3)(j)

Help “F8” (3)(k)

Programsaving/closing

Program savingProgram closingProgram quitting

“F1” Save“F1” Close“F1” Quit

(4)(a)(4)(b)(4)(c)

First, item (1) of this section explains the specification of operations suchas cursor movement and scrolling. Then, items (2), (3), and (4) describethe operations related to this screen according to the three basic stepsdescribed at the beginning of this section.

(1)Screen operation(a) Cursor movement

Because this screen is provided to enable the editing of NCprograms, editing is performed in units of words, rather thancharacters. So, the cursor is moved up, down, and to the right andleft, in word units.

2.4.1.3Operation

Operating methods


94

(i) Moving the cursor up


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the firstword of the previous block.

If the cursor is already positioned to the first block of the page,pressing this key scrolls the display and moves the cursor to thefirst word of the previous block.

(ii) Moving the cursor down


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the firstword of the next block.

If the cursor is already positioned to the last block of the page,pressing this key scrolls the display and moves the cursor to thefirst word of the next block.

(iii) Moving the cursor to the left


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the wordto the left.

If the cursor is already positioned to the beginning of the page,pressing the key scrolls the display by one line and moves thecursor to the last word of the first line on the page.

(iv) Moving the cursor to the right


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the wordto the right.

If the cursor is on the last line but one of the page, pressing thekey scrolls the display by one line and moves the cursor to thefirst word of the same line; the cursor is never positioned to thelast line of the page.

(v) Page–up

Key operation: “Page Up”

Function: Pressing this key causes the previous page toappear and moves the cursor to the first wordof that page.

(vi) Page–down

Key operation: “Page Down”

Function: Pressing this key causes the next page toappear and moves the cursor to the first wordof that page.

(vii) Locating the beginning of a program

Key operation: Press the “Shift” and “Page Up” keyssimultaneously.

Function: Pressing the Shift and Page Up keyssimultaneously causes the first page of theprogram to appear and positions the cursor tothe beginning of that page.


AND OPERATING

95

(viii) Locating the end of a program

Key operation: Press the “Shift” and “Page Down” keyssimultaneously.

Function: Pressing the Shift and Page Down keyssimultaneously causes the last page of theprogram to appear and positions the cursor tothe end of the program.

(b)Pop–up menuPressing the F1, F2, or F4 key causes a pop–up menu to appear.Pressing the F1 soft key, for example, causes a pop–up menu toappear in the immediate vicinity of the current cursor position.

OpenCloseSaveCreateAppend Quit

Within a pop–up menu, the cursor is moved using the “” and“”keys. When the cursor is on a desired item, pressing the “Enter”key selects the item. To select “Save” from the above figure, forexample, first press the “F1” key to display the pop–up menu, thenpress the “” key twice. Then, press the “Enter” key. The following tables list the functions of each pop–up menu.

Pop–up menu displayed by pressing the “F1” key

Name Function

OpenCloseSaveCreateAppend Quit

Program openingProgram closingProgram savingNew–program openingExisting–program additionProgram end


Name Function

Exchange BufferExchange Window

Edit buffer switchingEditing window switching


Name Function

Current wordAllForwardBackward

Word replacement at the current cursor positionWord replacement throughout the programWord replacement up to the current cursor positionWord replacement subsequent to the current cursor position

(c) Dialog boxIn a dialog box, pressing the “” or “” key recalls up to the fivemost recently entered words. (“Recall” refers to the redisplay ofa previously entered character string.)


96

(d)Operation interruption Pressing the “Esc” key interrupts the operation.

(2)Program openingThis operation opens a program to be edited.

CAUTIONThis operation cannot open a program of a size greater thanthe memory capacity.

(a) Program opening

Key operation: “F1”Select “Open” from the pop–up menu.

Function: This operation opens and displays an existingprogram.

When a dialog box appears, specify the name of the program to bedisplayed in the dialog box, then press the “Enter” key. Thespecified program is opened and displayed on the screen. Inaddition, the name of the open program in the edit buffer isdisplayed in a box marked (*1) in the upper left part of the layoutdiagram (Section 2.4.1.2). If the “Enter” key is pressed whennothing is specified, a list of program names appears, from whichthe desired program can be selected using the cursor.

Program name list

Program/Directory

O0000O0004O0107O1000O2003

O0001O0100O0220O2000

O0002O0103O0235O2001

O0003O0104O0237O2002

The cursor keys can be used to move the cursor through theprogram name list. To open a program, position the cursor to thename of the program, then press the “Enter” key.

(b)New–program opening

Key operation: “F1” Select “New” from the pop–up menu.

Function: This operation opens and displays a new program.

When a dialog box appears, specify the name of the program to bedisplayed in the dialog box, then press the “Enter” key. Thespecified program is opened and displayed on the screen. Inaddition, the name of the newly opened program in the edit bufferis displayed in a box marked (*1) in the upper left part of the layoutdiagram (Section 2.4.1.2). If the specified program is already open,a warning message appears.


AND OPERATING

97

(3)Editing

(a) Word/block insertion

Key operation: Word insertion None

Block insertion Press the “Shift” and “F6”keys simultaneously.

Function: A word or block is inserted.

⋅ Block insertionWhen a dialog box appears, specify a character string to beinserted, then press the “Enter” key. The specified block isinserted to the right of the word to which the cursor ispositioned.

⋅ Word insertion

[1] Entering a character, number, or symbol that can bedisplayed causes a dialog box to appear. Suppose you enter“G”:

G |

[2] Specify the characters to be inserted, then press the “Enter”key. The specified word is inserted to the right of the wordto which the cursor is positioned.

(b)Word/block deletion

Key operation: Word deletion “F5”

Block deletion Press the “Shift” and “F5”keys simultaneously.

Function: A word or block is deleted from the current cursorposition.

If a range has been specified, pressing the “F5” key deletes wordsor blocks from the specified range, and saves the deletedinformation into the paste buffer. (See (f).) Note that it isimpossible to delete address O numbers, EOF (%), and blockscontaining an address O number and/or EOF.

(c) Word/block replacement

Key operation: Word replacement “F4”Block replacement Press the “Shift” and “F4”

keys simultaneously.

Function: Data is replaced with other data.

⋅ Block replacementPressing the “F4” key causes a dialog box to appear. Specifythe block to be replaced in the dialog box, then press the “Enter”key. Block replacement occurs for that block to which thecursor is currently positioned. If a word to be replaced cannotbe found or does not contain valid data, a warning messageappears.

⋅ Word replacementPressing the “F4” key causes the following pop–up menu toappear.


98

Current WordAllForwardBackward

The following table lists the functions of each item in the pop–upmenu.

Name Function

(1)(2)(3)(4)

Current WordAllForwardBackward

Word replacement at the current cursor positionWord replacement throughout the programWord replacement up to the current cursor positionWord replacement subsequent to the current cursorposition

Any function can be executed by selecting it using the “” or“” key, then pressing the “Enter” key. Operations (1) to (4) areexplained below.

(i) Word replacement at the current cursor position

Key operation: “F4” Select “Cursor position” fromthe pop–up menu.

Function: This operation triggers word replacement atthe current cursor position.

The operation causes a dialog box to appear. Specify areplacement word or words for replacement at the current cursorposition, then press the Enter key. Word replacement isperformed. If a word to be replaced cannot be found orconstitutes invalid data, a warning message appears.

(ii) Word replacement throughout the program

Key operation: “F4” Select “All” from the pop–upmenu.

Function: This operation causes all instances of a targetword to be replaced with a specified word,throughout the program.

[1] This operation causes a dialog box to appear. Specify asearch word (a word to be replaced) in the dialog box, thenpress the Enter key. (It is impossible to specify more thanone word.)

[2] Another dialog box appears. Specify a replacement word(a replacing word) in the dialog box, then press the Enterkey. (It is possible to specify more than one word.)

[3] The cursor is positioned to the first occurrence of the searchword, and the following message appears.

“Yes/No/All/Quit?”


AND OPERATING

99

[4] Enter “Y”, “N”, “A”, or “Q”.If you enter Y (Yes):

The search word to which the cursor is currentlypositioned is replaced with the replacement word, thecursor moves to the next occurrence of the search word,then the message in [3] appears again.

If you enter N (No):

The search word to which the cursor is currentlypositioned is not replaced, the cursor moves to the nextoccurrence of the search word, and the message in [3]appears again.

If you enter A (All):

All occurrences of the search word in the program arereplaced with the replacement word, and the number ofoccurrences of the search word is displayed on thescreen.

If you enter Q (Quit):

Replacement is canceled.

If a word to be replaced cannot be found or constitutesinvalid data, a warning message appears.

(iii) Word replacement subsequent to the current cursor position

Key operation: “F4” Select “Forward” from thepop–up menu

Function: All occurrences of a search word in the rangebetween the current cursor position and theend of the program may be replaced with areplacement word.

Basically, the procedure and the related displays are the sameas for (2). The only difference is that this item confinesreplacement to within the range between the current cursorposition and the end of the program.

(iv) Word replacement up to the current cursor position

Key operation: “F4” Select “Backward” from thepop–up menu

Function: All occurrences of a search word in the rangebetween the current cursor position and thebeginning of the program may be replacedwith a replacement word.

Basically, the procedure and the related displays are the sameas for (2). The only difference is that this item confinesreplacement to within the range between the current cursorposition and the beginning of the program.

(d)Word search


Function: Pressing the F3 key triggers a word search.

[1]When the F3 key is pressed, a dialog box appears. Enter a searchword in the dialog box, then press the “Enter” key.


100

[2]Pressing “Page Up” or “Page Down” key triggers a backwardor forward word search, respectively. If the specified word isfound, the cursor jumps to that occurrence of the word. If thespecified word is not found, a warning message appears in themessage box.

[3]Pressing a key other than “Page Up” or “Page Down” cancelsthe search.

(e) Range specification


Function: This operation specifies a copy range for item (f),“buffer copy.”

[1] If no range has been specified, pressing the “F9” key causes thecurrent cursor position to be memorized as the start point of arange. The word “Range” appears in the upper right part (*2)of the screen (the layout diagram in Section 2.4.1.2). Thisremains displayed as long as a range has been specified.

[2]Moving the cursor to any position causes that position (currentcursor position) to be memorized as the end point of the range.The range is then identified by a green background. Note thatthe current cursor position is included in the range.

[3]Pressing the “F9” key again cancels the range specification, andcauses the word “Range” to be cleared from the screen.

(f) Buffer copy


Function: Pressing the F6 key causes all the data in the rangespecified using (e) to be memorized in the pastebuffer. If a range has been specified, pressing the“F6” key saves all the data in the specified range(from the range start point to the current cursorposition) into the paste buffer. The rangespecification is cleared automatically upon thecompletion of copy to the buffer. To copy datafrom the specified range to the paste buffer andsubsequently delete that data, press the “F5” key(word deletion) when a range has been specified.Note that, upon the completion of deletion, thecursor is positioned to the word subsequent to thedeleted range.

(g)Buffer pasting


Function: Pressing the F7 key causes the contents of thepaste buffer to be inserted to the right of the currentcursor position.

If a range has been specified, it is impossible to perform insertionfrom the paste buffer. When pasting is performed, the paste buffercontents are not cleared; pressing the “F7” key again causes bufferpasting to be performed again. Upon the completion of insertionfrom the paste buffer, the cursor is positioned to the last word in thelast block of the inserted data.


AND OPERATING

101

(h)Program appending

Key operation: “F1”Select “Append” from the pop–up menu.

Function: This operation inserts a specified program into theprogram currently being edited.

[1]This operation causes a dialog box to appear. Specify the nameof a program to be inserted in the dialog box, then press theEnter key.

[2]A program specified in the dialog box is inserted immediatelybelow the current cursor position. The cursor moves to the endof the inserted program.

Pressing the “Enter” key without specifying anything causes aprogram list to appear (see (a) of (2)). Select a desired programusing the cursor.

(i) Edit buffer switching

Key operation: “F2”Select “Text Change” from the pop–upmenu.

Function: If more than one program is open, this operationswitches the edit buffer.

The name of a program in the selected edit buffer is displayed inthe upper left part of the screen ((*1) in the layout diagram inSection 2.4.1.2). Each program is selected sequentially. If threeprograms, A, B, and C, are open, for example:

Edit bufferA Press the “F2” key, then select “Text Change.”B Press the “F2” key, then select “Text Change.”C Press the “F2” key, then select “Text Change.”A

If only one or no program is open, edit buffer switching is notperformed.

(j) Window split display

Key operation: “F2”Select “Window Change” from thepop–up menu.

Function: This operation splits the window display into two.

Window splitting is performed as follows:“Full screen”

Press the “F2” key, then select “Window Change.”“Horizontal splitting”

Press the “F2” key, then select “Window Change.”“Vertical splitting”

Press the “F2” key, then select “Window Change.”“Full screen”If only one or no program is open, no window splitting occurs.


102

(k)Help


Function: Pressing the F8 key displays a simplified helpscreen, which consists of two pages.

[1]Pressing the “F8” key once displays page 1 of the help screen.

[2]Pressing the “F8” key again displays page 2 of the help screen.

[3]Pressing the “F8” key once again terminates the help screen.

(4)Program closing

(a) Program saving

Key operation: “F1”Select “Save” from the pop–up menu.

Function: This operation saves the program that is currentlyedited.

(b)Program closing

Key operation: “F1”Select “Close” from the pop–up menu.

Function: This operation closes the program that is currentlybeing edited.

[1]The following message appears.

“Same to CNC (Yes/No)?”

[2]Enter Y or N.If you enter Y (Yes):

The result of the editing is saved, and the program is closed.

If you enter N (No):

The program is closed without saving the result of theediting. Once a program is closed, another program (if open) isdisplayed.

(c) Program quitting

Key operation: “F1”Select “Quit” from the pop–up menu.

Function: A program currently being edited is closedwithout being saved.

After quitting a program, another program (if open) is displayed.


AND OPERATING

103

On the program list screen, it is possible to list and copy machiningprograms in the part program memory of the CNC.

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10Copy Append Rename New DeletSearchIDSearchFormat Large


Status

Message

00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 00006 0000700008 00009 00010 00011 00012 00013 0001400015 00016 00017 00018 00019 00020 0002100022 00023 00024 00025 00026 00027 0002800029 00030 00031 00032 00033 00034 0003500036 00037 00038 00039 00040 00041 0004200043 00044 00045 00046 00047 00048 0004900050 00051 00052 00053 00054 00055 0005600057 00058 00059 00060 00061 00062 0006300064 00065 00066 00067 00068 00069 0007000071 00072 00073 00074 00075 00076 0007700078 00079 00080 00081 00082 00083 0008400085 00086 00087 00088 00089 00090 00091

Program/Directory

(*1)

(*2)

Program No. Used: 200 Free: 200Memory Area Used: 24567 Free: 40969

(*1) This box lists program numbers.

(*2) This box displays the number of programs and the memory area size(in character units).

2.4.2Directory

2.4.2.1Purpose


Directory screen layout

Displays


104

Program list screenoperation Function Operation


2.4.2.3

Program operation CopyingLinkingRenamingNew programDeletion

“F1”“F2”“F3”“F4”“F5”

(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)

Preparation for operation Search “F6” (6)

Display Display switching “F8” (7)

(1)Program copyingProgram copy is triggered by pressing the “F1” key. Pressing the F1key causes the following dialog box to appear.

Copy Program

OK Cancel

00001From :

To :

From : The program to be copied is specified here. Initially, theprogram to which the cursor is currently positioned isselected as the program to be copied.

To : The program to which another program is to be copied isspecified here.

OK : Selecting this button executes program copying.

Cancel : Selecting this button cancels program copying.

2.4.2.3Operation

Operating methods


AND OPERATING

105

(2)Program linkingProgram linking is triggered by pressing the “F2” key. Pressing theF2 key causes the following dialog box to appear.

Append Program

OK Cancel

00001To :

00001From1 :

From2 :

From 1 : A program to be linked is specified here. Initially, theprogram to which the cursor is currently positioned isselected as the program to be linked.

From 2 : Another program to be linked is specified here.

To : The program to which other programs are to be linked isspecified here.

OK : Selecting this button executes program linking.

Cancel : Selecting this button cancels program linking.

(3)Program renamingProgram renaming is triggered by pressing the F3 key. Pressing theF3 key causes the following dialog box to appear.

Rename Program

OK Cancel

00001From :

To :

From : The program to be renamed is specified here. Initially, theprogram to which the cursor is currently positioned isselected as the program to be renamed.

To : The new program name is specified here.

OK : Selecting this button executes program renaming.

Cancel : Selecting this button cancels program renaming.


106

(4)New–program creationProgram creation is triggered by pressing the “F4” key. Pressing the “F4” key causes the following dialog box to appear.

New Program

OK Cancel

NEW :

NEW : The program to be created is specified here.

OK : Selecting this button executes program creation.

Cancel : Selecting this button cancels program creation.

(5)Program deletionProgram deletion is triggered by pressing the F5 key. Pressing the “F5” key causes the following dialog box to appear.

Delete Program

OK Cancel

00001DELETE :

DELETE : The program to be deleted is specified here. Initially, theprogram to which the cursor is currently positioned isselected as the program to be deleted.

OK : Selecting this button executes program deletion. Beforedeletion is actually performed, a confirmation dialog boxappears.

Cancel : Selecting this button cancels program deletion.


AND OPERATING

107

(6)Program searchProgram search is triggered by pressing the F6 key. Pressing the “F6” key causes the following dialog box to appear.

Serach Program

OK Cancel

00001SEARCH :

SEARCH : The program to be searched for is specified here.Initially, the program to which the cursor is currentlypositioned is selected as the program to be searched for.

OK : Selecting this button executes program search.

Cancel : Selecting this button cancels program search.

(7)Display format changePressing the “F8” key triggers program switching between a screen onwhich only program names are displayed and a screen on whichprogram names, the number of characters used, and comments aredisplayed.

Program names only

00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 00006 0000700008 00009 00010 00011 00012 00013 0001400015 00016 00017 00018 00019 00020 0002100022 00023 00024 00025 00026 00027 0002800029 00030 00031 00032 00033 00034 0003500036 00037 00038 00039 00040 00041 0004200043 00044 00045 00046 00047 00048 00049

Program names, number of characters used, and comments

00001 720( WORK#3227–MAIN)00002 560( WORK#5100–MAIN)00003 560( )00004 240( )00005 580( WORK#3225–MAIN)00006 1280( )00007 1520( )


108

(8)Message dialog boxUpon the completion of an operation, a dialog box may appear todisplay a corresponding message. The following messages are displayed in dialog boxes.

“Complete.”

⋅ This message appears when operation ends normally.

“Program not found.”

⋅ This message appears if a program specified for program copyingis not found in part program memory.

⋅ This message appears if a program specified for program linkingis not found in part program memory.

⋅ This message appears if a program specified for program renamingis not found in part program memory.

“Program is exist.”

⋅ This message appears if an existing program name is specified asa new program name in program renaming.

⋅ This message appears if an existing program name is specified asa program name in program creation.

“No more space to write”

⋅ This message appears if a part program memory shortfall occursduring program copying.

⋅ This message appears if a part program memory shortfall occursduring program linking.

“Program is already exist. Overwrite ?”

⋅ This message appears if an existing program name is specified asthe destination for program copying.

⋅ This message appears if an existing program name is specified asthe destination for program linking.If you respond with “Yes,” the existing program is overwritten withthe new program. If you respond with “No,” the current operationis canceled.

“Please change CNC mode MEM or EDIT”

⋅ This message appears if program search is specified when the CNCis in neither MEMO nor EDIT mode.


AND OPERATING

109

MDI operation enables the creation and execution of programs in MDImode, in the same way as ordinary programs.

Edit MDI (*1) (*2) MDI

F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10AlterDelete Copy Paste Help SelectLarge


Status

Message

00000; G00 X100. Z100.;G01 Y340. /F100/; % (*4)

(*3)

Program/MDI Program

(*1) Indication of program editing This indicator indicates that an MDI program is being edited.

(*2) Whether the specification of a range is on/offThis box displays whether the specification of a range is valid.When the specification of a range is valid, the word “Range” appearsin the box.

(*3) Editing area

(*4) Cursor

2.4.3MDI Program

2.4.3.1Purpose


MDI program screenlayout

Displays


110

Set the mode selection switch on the operator’s panel to MDI mode.

Create a program in the same way as for ordinary program editing.

Press the start button to begin operation.

Editor screenoperation Function Operation


2.4.1.3

Screen operation Cursor movementPop–up menuDialog boxOperation interruption

Cursor keys and othersSoft keySoft key and others“Esc”

(1)(a)(1)(c)(1)(d)(1)(e)

Program editing Word insertionBlock insertionWord deletionBlock deletionWord conversionBlock conversionWord searchRange specificationBuffer copyBuffer pasting

Direct input“Shift” + “F6”“F5”“Shift” + “F5”“F4”“Shift” + “F4”“F3”“F9”“F6”“F7”

(3)(a)(3)(a)(3)(b)(3)(b)(3)(c)(3)(c)(3)(d)(3)(e)(3)(f)(3)(g)

Help “F8” (3)(k)

Executing Starting operation Start button on theoperator’s panel

(1)EditingThe method of using this function is the same as that for the programediting screen. See the corresponding description. Note, however,that the MDI program screen cannot be used to edit programs in partprogram memory.

(2)ExecutingPress the operation switch on the operator’s panel. Execution startsfrom the beginning of a program once its editing has been completed.

(3)Re–editingAfter a single–block stop occurs in a program, the program can bere–edited and executed. Note, however, that it is impossible to re–edita block that has been executed. It is also impossible to re–edit aprogram while it is still being edited, or after a feed hold occurs.

(4)Re–executionTo re–execute a program, press the start button on the operator’s panel.If a program has been re–edited, execution begins from the block towhich the cursor is positioned.

(5)Erasing a programA program, once created, is erased if:

(a) It is executed up to its end, or

(b)“Reset” is pressed.

2.4.3.3Operation

Operating methods


AND OPERATING

111

A program check displays the program that is currently being executed,the current position, and modal information, all on the same screen, thusenabling the user to easily determine the execution status of the program.

F10Large


Status

Message

Dist to go>>N0001 G91 G00 X120.0 Y80.0; X 79.867 >N0002 G43 Z–32.0 H01; Y 53.245 N0003 G01 Z–21.0 F1000; Z 0.000 N0004 G04 P2000; C 0.000 N0005 G00 Z21.0; N0006 X30.0 Y–50.0; N0007 G01 Z–41.0; N0008 G00 Z41.0 N0009 X50.0 Y30.0;

Program/Program Check(*1) (*2)

Parts cpunt: 1994Run time: 97h30m00s Cycle time:86h50m00s

G00 G80 G15 F 2000 M 03 T 0101G17 G98 G42.1 MG91 G50 G25 H 1 MG94 G67 G13.1 D 2G20 G54G40 G64 S 5000G49 G69

(*4)

(*3)

(*1) This box displays the program that is currently being executed. Theblock that is currently being executed is displayed in green, with“>>” at the beginning of the corresponding line. A block that isbuffered in the CNC is also displayed in green, but with “>” at thebeginning of the corresponding line. All other blocks (those that arenot buffered) are displayed in black.

(*2) This box displays the remaining amount of movement for the blockthat is currently being executed.

(*3) This box displays the modal information for a block that is currentlybeing executed.

(*4) This block displays the machined parts count, the machining time,and total elapsed time.

None

2.4.4Program Check

2.4.4.1Purpose


Program check screenlayout

Displays

2.4.4.3Operation


112

The data input/output screen is provided to enable data input/outputbetween the CNC and personal computer.

1) Machining programs

2) Tool compensation amounts

3) Custom macro variables

4) Parameters

Communication StatusPath : C:OMMIOFILES (*1)Feed output : DisableEOB output : LFTV check : Disable

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F10Read Punch Stop DeleteRename Path PWE Large

(*2)


Status

Message

Status of Data I/O

Status Stop

(*3)

Message

(*1) This box displays the personal computer directory for which datainput/output is performed.

(*2) This box displays the current communication status. If the boxindicates “Stop,” it means that no communication is beingperformed. “Read under way” indicates that data is being input(from the personal computer to the CNC). “Punch under way”indicates that data is being output (from the CNC to the personalcomputer).

(*3) This box displays the data that is being transferred.

2.5SETTING SCREENS

2.5.1Data Input/Output

2.5.1.1Purpose


Data input/output screenlayout

Displays


AND OPERATING

113

Datainput/output

screenoperation


2.5.1.3

Input/outputoperation

Input (read)Output (punch)Input/output stopFile deletionFile renamingDirectory changeParameter write setting

“F1”“F2”“F3”“F4”“F5”“F6”“F7”

(1)(a) to (d)(2)(a) to (d)(3)(4)(5)(6)(8)

To use one of the functions listed above, click the corresponding soft key.For read and punch, clicking the corresponding soft key displays a dialogbox, into which a desired item can be input. In the read and punch dialogboxes, position the cursor to the desired item using the cursor movementkeys then press the “Enter” key. When a “Cancel” button is provided, the current operation can becanceled by positioning the cursor to the “Cancel” button and pressing the“Enter” key.

(1) Input (read)

“F1”: Enables the entry of data such as machining programs and toolcompensation amounts. Clicking this key displays the following dialog box to enableitem selection.

Data selector for read

OK Cancel

ProgramTool offsetMacro variableParameter

2.5.1.3Operation

Operating methods


114

(a) Machining program readingOn this screen, enter the name of the file to be read in the programname area. A new program number can be specified for the machiningprogram.

Read Program

OK Cancel

Program name :

New program No. :

(b)Tool compensation amount readingOn this screen, enter the name of the file to be read in the programname area.

Read tool offset

OK Cancel

Program name :

(c) Custom macro variable readingOn this screen, enter the name of the file to be read in the programname area.

Read macro variable

OK Cancel

Program name :

(d)Parameter readingOn this screen, enter the name of a file to be read in the programname area.

Read parameter

OK Cancel

Program name :


AND OPERATING

115

(2)Output (punch)

“F2”: Enables the output of data such as machining programs and toolcompensation amounts. Pressing this key displays the following dialog box to enableitem selection.

Data selector for punch

OK Cancel

ProgramTool offsetMacro variableParameter

(a) Machining program punchingOn this screen, enter the program number of a machining programto be punched. To punch more than one machining program,specify both the first and last program numbers. Also, specify the name of an output file in the program name area.

Punch Program

OK Cancel

Program from : until :

Program name :

(b)Tool compensation amount punching.Specify the name of an output file in the program name area.

Punch tool offset

OK Cancel

Program name :

(c) Custom macro variable punching.Specify the name of an output file in the program name area.

Punch macro variable

OK Cancel

Program name :


116

(d)Parameter punchingSpecify the name of an output file in the program name area.

Punch parameter

OK Cancel

Program name :

(3) Input/output stop

“F3”: Pressing this key during input or output stops the currentoperation.

(4)Deletion

“F4”: Pressing this key triggers file deletion. When the key is pressed,a dialog box appears. Specify the file to be deleted in the dialogbox.

(5)File renaming

“F5”: Pressing the F5 key triggers file renaming. When the key ispressed, a dialog box appears. Specify both the current name ofthe file to be renamed and a new file name in the dialog box.

(6)Directory change

“F6”: Pressing the F6 key triggers directory changing. When the keyis pressed, a dialog box appears. Change the displayed directoryin the dialog box.

Change Directory

OK Cancel

Directory : C:¥MMI¥FILES

If you specify a nonexisting directory then select “Execute,” thefollowing dialog box appears.

OK Cancel

Specified Directory is not exist.Create New Directory ?

If you select “Execute,” a directory is created. The path is set up forthe newly created directory. If a directory cannot be created (because,for example, the disk is write–protected or there is no free space towhich data can be written), or if you select “Cancel,” the directorychange dialog box again becomes active.


AND OPERATING

117

(7)Parameter write setting

“F7”: Pressing this key specifies whether to enable or disableparameter writing. When the key is pressed, the followingdialog box appears, in which it is possible to enable or disableparameter writing. ( indicates whether parameter setting iscurrently enabled.)

Paramete Write Enable

OK Cancel

Enable to write parametersDisable to write parameters

The CNC setting screens are provided to enable the specification ofsetting data. There are three screens: general, timer, and feedrate.

F9 F10Input Large

Parameter Write


StatusSetting/Genaral

(*1)Enable Input Unit

(*2)inch mm

Program No. 0

(*3) Sequence Stop

Sequence No.

Rotation Angle

0

(*4) (*5)Mirror Image Detach Axis

Scaling Magnification

0Initial

(*6)

(*7)

X(*8)Y

Z

C

X

Y

Z

C

X

Y

Z

C

0

0

0

0

0

Message

(*1) This box is used to specify whether to enable parameter writing (bit0 of parameter No. 8900).

(*2) This box is used to specify whether the inch or metric incrementsystem is to be used (bit 2 of parameter No. 0000).

(*3) This box is used to specify the program or sequence number at whichcollation is to stop.

2.5.2CNC Setting

2.5.2.1Purpose


CNC setting/generalscreen layout

Displays


118

(*4) This box is used to specify a mirror image for each axis (bit 0 ofparameter No. 0012).

(*5) This box is used to specify whether to deselect each axis as acontrolled axis (bit 7 of parameter No. 0012).

(*6) This box is used to specify the angle to be used if there is no anglespecification for coordinate system rotation (parameter No. 5410).

(*7) This box is used to specify the scaling factor to be used if no scalingfactor is specified (parameter No. 5411).

(*8) This box is used to specify a scaling factor for each axis (parameterNo. 5421).

M

M 0

M 0

M 0

M 0

Parts Total 0

Parts Required 0

Parts Count 0

F9 F10Input Large


StatusSetting/Timer

Parts

(*1)

(*2)

(*3)

Power on 0

Operating Time 0

Cutting Time 0

Free Purpose 0

Cycle Time 0

(*4)

(*5)

(*6)

(*7)

(*8)

Timer

H 0

H 0

H 0

H 0

H 0

S

S

S

SMessage

(*1) This box displays the machined parts count (parameter No. 6712).

(*2) This box is used to specify the required number of parts to bemachined (parameter No. 6713).

(*3) This box is used to specify the number of parts that have already beenmachined (parameter No. 6711).

(*4) This box displays the total power–on time (parameter No. 6750).

(*5) This box is used to specify the total automatic operation time(parameter Nos. 6751 and 6752).

(*6) This box is used to specify the total cutting time (parameter Nos.6753 and 6754).

(*7) This box is used to specify the total time during which thegeneral–purpose accumulation start signal (TMRON) is on(parameter Nos. 6755 and 6756).

(*8) This box is used to specify the maximum time allowed for a singleautomatic operation session (parameter Nos. 6757 and 6758).

CNC setting/timer screenlayout diagram

Displays


AND OPERATING

119

F1 0

F2 0

F3 0

F4 0

F5 0

F6 0

F7 0

F8 0

F9 0

F9 F10Input Large

Init Cutting Feedrate 0


StatusSetting/Feedrate

(*1)

(*2)

Message

F1 Digit Command Feedrate

(*1) Automatic–mode cutting feedrate at power–on time (parameter No.1411)

(*2) Feedrate corresponding to a one–digit F command such as F1 to F9(parameter Nos. 1451 to 1459)

This section explains how to specify data.

CNC settingscreen operation Function Operation


2.5.2.3

Button–type datasetting

Button–type datasetting

“Enter” (1)

Input–type data setting Data input Input via a dialogbox

(2)

One–digit F commandfeedrate setting

Data inputGraphics meter input

Data input settingButton setting

(3)(a)(3)(b)

Selection–type datasetting

Data selection Selection from adialog box

(4)

CAUTIONBefore performing the operation described above, place theCNC in MDI mode.

(1)Button–type data setting(Example) “Parameter writing” on the general screen

Key operation: “Enter”Function:Pressing the Enter key turns button–type

data setting on or off.

CNC setting/feedratescreen layout diagram

Displays

2.5.2.3Operation Operating methods


120

For button–type data, there are two types of setting, on and off. Theon state is indicated by the button appearing to be depressed and thelamp at the upper right being lit. For the “Increment system” on thegeneral screen, however, clicking the inch or metric button while it isoff selects the measurement unit corresponding to the clicked button.

(2) Input–type data setting

(Example) “Coordinate system rotation angle” on the generalscreen

Key operation: “F9”, “Enter”, “numeric”, “”, and“” keys

Function:Pressing these keys opens a dialog box fordata input.

Data is entered into the dialog box. This dialog box accepts onlynumeric, “+”, and “” keys. When a numeric, “+”, or “” key ispressed, it is entered into the dialog box as the first character. If theentered data falls outside the valid range (for example, immediatelyafter the power is switched on), an asterisk “*” is displayed.

(3)One–digit F command feedrate settingThe one–digit F command feedrate is displayed using either numericvalues or a graph. These two display types are interrelated; changingeither affects the other accordingly.

(a) Data inputSee item (2).

(b)Graphics meterThe buttons on either side of the meter are used to either increaseor decrease the setting. The increment/decrement rate is defined asfollows:“<<” and “>>”: 10% of the current value“<” and “>”: 1% of the current value

(4)Selection–type data setting

(Example) “Read data selection” on the data input/output screen

Key operation: F1 and Enter

Function:Pressing these keys enables thespecification of the item to which the cursor ispositioned. When either of these keys are pressed, adialog box appears in which an item can be selected.

An item is selected by clicking the corresponding radio button in thedialog box.


AND OPERATING

121

This screen is provided to enable the specification of a tool offset.

1. Tool offset memory B

No. Geometry Wear No. Geometry Wear001 1.000 2.000 021 0.000 0.000002 3.000 4.000 022 0.000 0.000003 5.000 6.000 023 0.000 0.000004 7.000 8.000 024 0.000 0.000005 9.000 10.000 025 0.000 0.000006 0.000 0.000 026 0.000 0.000007 0.000 0.000 027 0.000 0.000008 0.000 0.000 028 0.000 0.000009 0.000 0.000 029 0.000 0.000010 0.000 0.000 030 0.000 0.000011 0.000 0.000 031 0.000 0.000012 0.000 0.000 032 0.000 0.000013 0.000 0.000 033 0.000 0.000014 0.000 0.000 034 0.000 0.000015 0.000 0.000 035 0.000 0.000016 0.000 0.000 036 0.000 0.000017 0.000 0.000 037 0.000 0.000018 0.000 0.000 038 0.000 0.000019 0.000 0.000 039 0.000 0.000020 0.000 0.000 040 0.000 0.000

F5 F6 F7 F9 F10Searh Clear+Input Input Large


Status

Message

Setting/Tool Offset

(*1) (*2)(*3)

(*1) Tool offset number

(*2) Tool offset (geometry compensation)

(*3) Tool offset (wear compensation)

2.5.3Tool Offset

2.5.3.1Purpose


Machining center tooloffset screen layoutdiagram

Displays


122

Tool offset screenoperation Function Operation


2.5.3.3

Cursor movement Cursor movement “Cursor keys” (1)(a) to (d)

Page switching Page switching “Page Up”“Page Down”

(2)(a)(2)(b)

Number search Offset number search “F5” key (3)

Offset value setting Offset value inputOffset value +input

“F9” key“F7” keyDirect input

(4)(a)(4)(b)(4)(c)

Offset value erasing Offset value erasing “F6” key (5)

(1)Cursor movementThe cursor can be moved up, down, to the right, and left. Thefollowing keys can be used to move the cursor around the screen.

(a) Moving the cursor upKey operation: “”

(b)Moving the cursor downKey operation: “”

(c) Moving the cursor to the rightKey operation: “”

(d)Moving the cursor to the leftKey operation: “”

With the screen configuration described in Section 2.5.3.2:Pressing the “” key:

⋅ Usually, moves the cursor up.

⋅ Scrolls the screen down without changing the current cursorposition if the cursor is already positioned to the first geometry orwear compensation number on the screen.

Pressing the “” key:

⋅ Usually, moves the cursor down.

⋅ Scrolls the screen up without changing the current cursor positionif the cursor is already positioned to the last geometry or wearcompensation number on the screen.


⋅ Usually, moves the cursor to the right.

⋅ Scrolls the screen to the left without changing the current cursorposition if the cursor is already positioned to the wearcompensation number specified using offset Nos. 21 to 40.

2.5.3.3Operation

Operating methods


AND OPERATING

123


⋅ Usually, moves the cursor to the left.

⋅ Scrolls the screen to the right without changing the current cursorposition if the cursor is already positioned to the wearcompensation number specified using offset Nos. 1 to 20.

(2)Page switchingThe following keys can be used to switch the page.

(a) Previous page


Function: Pressing this key displays the previous page.

(b)Next page


Function: Pressing this key displays the next page.

(3)Number searchSoft key F5, or “SEARCH”

Key operation: “F5” In the dialog box, specify an offsetnumber for which a search is to be made,then press “Enter” key.

Function: This operation searches for the specified tool offsetnumber, and positions the cursor to it if found. Tocancel the search, press the “Esc” key.

(4)Tool offset setting

(a) Soft key F9, or “INPUT”

Key operation: “F9” Specify a desired offset in the dialogbox, then press the “Enter” key.

Function: This operation positions the cursor to the specifiedtool offset. To cancel the setting, press the “Esc”key.

(b)Soft key F7, or “+INPUT”


Function: This operation increases or decreases the specifiedoffset to which the cursor is currently positioned.To cancel the +input operation, press the “Esc”key.

(c) Direct input

⋅ InputA desired tool offset can be directly entered by pressing thecorresponding numeric keys, then the “Enter”, “”, “”, “”,“”, or “F9” key.

⋅ + inputA tool offset to be incremented or decremented can be entereddirectly by pressing the corresponding numeric keys, then the“F7” key.


124

(5)Erasing a tool offsetSoft key F6, or “ERASE”

Key operation: “F6” Select “Yes” in the dialog box.

To cancel the erasure, select “No” in thedialog box or press the “Esc” key.

Function: This operation causes all tool offsets to be cleared to0.

This screen is provided to enable the specification of the workpiece originoffset and the machine coordinate system.

1. Screen for the workpiece origin offset and workpiece coordinatesystem

4:G57 5:G58 6:G59 7:Zero

F1 F5 F7 F9 F10Zero Search +Input Input Large


StatusSetting/Work Zero Offset

0:Ext 1:G54 2:G55 3:G56(*1)

X 1.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000Y 2.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000Z 3.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000C 4.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000

X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 * 0.000Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 * 0.000Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 * 0.000C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 * 0.000

(*2)

(*3)

(*1) Workpiece coordinate system number

(*2) Workpiece origin offset

(*3) Mark indicating the completion of a return to the reference position

2.5.4Workpiece OriginOffset

2.5.4.1Purpose

2.5.4.2Screen configuration Screen layout for the

workpiece origin offset.

Displays


AND OPERATING

125

Workpiece originoffset screen

operationFunction Operation


2.5.4.3



(2)(a)(2)(b)

Number search Workpiece coordinatesystem number search

“F5” key (3)

Setting the workpieceorigin offset

Offset value inputOffset value +input


(4)(a)(4)(b)(4)(c)

Reference positionsetting

Machine coordinate systemsetting

“F1” key (5)






(2)Page switchingThe following keys can be used to switch the page.

(a) Previous pageKey operation: “Page Up”Function: Pressing this key displays the previous page.

(b)Next pageKey operation: “Page Down”Function: Pressing this key displays the next page.

(3)Number searchSoft key F5, or “SEARCH”

Key operation: “F5” In the dialog box, specify a workpiececoordinate system number, 0 to 7, for whicha search is to be made, then press the“Enter” key.

Function: This operation causes a search to be made for thespecified workpiece coordinate system number, andpositions the cursor to it if found.

To cancel the search, press the “Esc” key.

2.5.4.3Operation

Operating methods


126

(4)Setting the workpiece origin offset

(a) Soft key F9, or “INPUT”


Function: This operation positions the cursor to the specifiedworkpiece origin offset. To cancel the setting,press the “Esc” key.

(b)Soft key F7, or “+INPUT”


Function: This operation increases or decreases the specifiedworkpiece origin offset at the current cursorposition. To cancel the +input operation, press the“Esc” key.

(c) Direct input

⋅ InputA desired offset can be entered directly by pressing thecorresponding numeric keys, then the “Enter”, “” , “” , “”,“”, or “F9” key.

⋅ +inputAn offset to be incremented or decremented can be entereddirectly by pressing the corresponding numeric keys, then the“F7” key.

(5)Reference position settingSoft key F1, or “REF”

Key operation: “F1” Position the cursor to the desired axis forwhich the reference position is to be set inthe dialog box, then press the “spacebar”.

Set reference point

OK Cancel

Select all axis

X Y Z CAxis:

Function: A reference position is set using the values specifiedin “7:REF” as the machine coordinate system. Toenable the setting, turn the power off then on again.


AND OPERATING

127

This screen is provided to enable the assigning of values to macrovariables.

No. Variable No. Variable No. Variable100 1.000 120 0.000 141 0.000101 2.000 121 0.000 142 0.000102 3.000 122 0.000 143 0.000103 0.000 123 0.000 144 0.000104 0.000 124 0.000 145 0.000105 0.000 125 0.000 146 0.000106 0.000 126 0.000 147 0.000107 0.000 127 0.000 148 0.000108 0.000 128 0.000 149 0.000109 0.000 129 0.000110 0.000 130 0.000 500 0.000111 0.000 131 0.000 501 0.000112 0.000 132 0.000 502 0.000113 0.000 133 0.000 503 0.000114 0.000 134 0.000 504 0.000115 0.000 135 0.000 505 0.000116 0.000 136 0.000 506 0.000117 0.000 137 0.000 507 0.000118 0.000 138 0.000 508 0.000119 0.000 139 0.000 509 0.000

F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10Searh Clear+InputEmpty Input Large


Status

Message

Setting/Macro Variable

(*1) (*2)

(*1) Macro variable number

(*2) Value assigned to a macro variable

2.5.5Macro Variable

2.5.5.1Purpose

2.5.5.2Screen configuration Macro variable screen

layout

Displays


128

Macro variablescreen operation Function Operation


2.5.5.3



(2)(a)(2)(b)

Number search Macro variable numbersearch

“F5” key (3)

Macro variable valueassignment

Macro variable value inputMacro variable value +input


(4)(a)(4)(b)(4)(c)

Macro variable valueerasure

Macro variable valueerasure

“F6” key (5)

Macro variable valuenull input

Macro variable value nullinput

“F8” key (6)






With the screen configuration described in Section 2.5.5.2:Pressing the “” key:

⋅ Usually, moves the cursor up.

⋅ Scrolls the screen down without changing the current cursorposition if the cursor is already positioned to the first number onthe screen.


⋅ Usually, moves the cursor down.

⋅ Scrolls the screen up without changing the current cursor positionif the cursor is already positioned to the last number on the screen.


⋅ Usually, moves the cursor to the right.

⋅ Scrolls the screen to the left without changing the current cursorposition if the cursor is positioned to macro variable Nos. 140 to159.

2.5.5.3Operation

Operating methods


AND OPERATING

129

Pressing the “” key:⋅ Usually, moves the cursor to the left.⋅ Scrolls the screen to the right without changing the current cursor

position if the cursor is already positioned to macro variable Nos.100 to 119.

(2)Page switchingThe following keys can be used to switch the page.(a) Previous page

Key operation: “Page Up”Function: Pressing this key displays the previous page.

(b)Next pageKey operation: “Page Down”

Function: Pressing this key displays the next page.(3)Number search

Soft key F5, or “SEARCH”Key operation: “F5” In the dialog box, specify a macro

variable number for which a search is tobe made, then press the “Enter” key.

Function: This operation causes a search to be made for themacro variable number, and positions the cursor to itif found. To cancel the search, press the “Esc” key.

(4)Macro variable value setting(a) Soft key F9, or “INPUT”

Key operation: “F9” Specify a desired macro variable valuein the dialog box, then press the Enterkey. Alternatively, a desired macrovariable value can be entered directlyby pressing the corresponding numerickeys, then the F9 key. To cancel thesetting, press the Esc key.

Function: This operation positions the cursor to the specifiedmacro variable value.

(b)Soft key F7, or “+INPUT”Key operation: “F7” In the dialog box, specify the

macro variable value to be increased ordecreased, then press the “Enter” key.To cancel the +input operation, press the“Esc” key.

Function: This operation increases or decreases the macrovariable value at the current cursor position.

(c) Direct input⋅ Input

A desired macro variable value can be entered directly bypressing the corresponding numeric keys, then the “Enter”, “”,“”, “”, “”, or “F9” key.

⋅ + inputA macro variable value to be incremented or decremented canbe entered directly by pressing the corresponding numeric keys,then the “F7” key.


130

(5)Erasing a macro variable valueSoft key F6, or “ERASE”

Key operation: “F6” Select “Yes” in the dialog box.

Function: This operation causes all macro variable values to becleared to 0. To cancel the erasure, select “No” in thedialog box, or press the Esc key.

(6)Macro variable value null inputSoft key F8: Null input

Operation key: “F8”

Function: This operation nullifies the macro variable value towhich the cursor is currently positioned.


AND OPERATING

131

This screen is provided to enable the display of the history of the alarmsthat have occurred in the NC.

F1 F2 F6 F9 F10Top End AlClr RefresLarge


Status

Message

(*1) (*2) (*3) (*4)Message/Alarm History

Date Time No. Alarm Message

10/25 16:21 009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT10/25 15:36 077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING

(*1) Date on which alarm occurred

(*2) Time (hour and minute) at which alarm occurred

(*3) Alarm number

(*4) Alarm messageSome alarms are not displayed.

The 25 most recent NC alarms are displayed. Whichever alarm iscurrently active is displayed in red.

2.6MESSAGE SCREENS

2.6.1Alarm History

2.6.1.1Purpose


Alarm history screenlayout

Displays


132

This section describes how to move the cursor and specify signals.

Alarm screenoperation Function Operation


2.6.1.3

Screen movement Screen movement Cursor keys andother keys“F1”, “F2”

(1)(a) to (d)(1)(e) and (f)

Alarm history batcherasure

Alarm history batcherasure

“F6” (2)

Alarm history update Alarm history refresh “F9” (3)

(1)Screen movementThe following keys can be used to move the screen.

(a) Upward movement (scrolling down)


Function: Pressing this key scrolls the screen up by one line.

(b)Downward movement (scrolling down)


Function: Pressing this key scrolls the screen down by one line.

(c) Movement to the top of the screen


Function: Pressing this key locates the top of the screen, anddisplays the latest alarm message.

(d)Movement to the bottom of the screen


Function: Pressing this key locates the bottom of the screen,and displays the oldest alarm message that can bedisplayed on this screen.

(e) Movement to the top of the screen


Function: See item (c).

(f) Movement to the bottom of the screen


Function: See item (d).

(2)Alarm history batch erasure


Function: Pressing this key erases the entire alarm history.

(3)Alarm history refresh


Function: Pressing this key refreshes the alarm history, thuskeeping the alarm history data up–to–date.

2.6.1.3Operation

Operating methods


AND OPERATING

133

This menu is provided to enable the display of the internal status(diagnosis) of the CNC.

/400/: Spindle Serial, Analog Control StatusSAI SS2 SSR POS SIC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

401: 0 Spindle–1 Alarm Status402: 0 Spindle–2 Alarm Status408:SIC LSI Alarm Status

SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

409:Spindle Serial Control StatusSPE S2E S1E SHE

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

410: 0 Spindle–1 Load Meter (%)411: 0 Spindle–1 Speed Meter (RPM)412: 0 Spindle–2 Load Meter (%)413: 0 Spindle–2 Speed Meter (RPM)414: 0 Spindle–1 Motion Error415: 0 Spindle–2 Motion Error

F1 F5 F10Group Search Large


Message

Message

Diagnosis/Spindle Status

2.7SYSTEM SCREENS

2.7.1CNC Diagnosis

2.7.1.1Purpose

2.7.1.2Screen structure

Diagnostic screen layout


134

Diagnostic screenoperation Function Operation


2.7.1.3

Cursor movement Diagnostic screen “”, “” (1)(a)(b)

Scrolling Diagnostic screen “”, “” (2)

Page switching Page up and down “Page Up”“Page Down”

(3)

Data number search Search function “F5” (4)

Group selection Group selection function “F1” (5)

(1)Cursor movementThe cursor can be moved through the data numbers by using thefollowing keys.

(a) Key operation: “”

Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the previousdata.

(b)Key operation: “”

Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the next data.

(2)ScrollingWhen the cursor is moved, if the target data number cannot bedisplayed, scrolling occurs. Scrolling is performed line by line. Thecursor remains positioned to the current data number until the nextdata number appears.

(Example) If the “” key is pressed:

/204/: SERVO ARARM No.414RAM OFS MCC

X 0 0 0Y 0 0 0Z 0 0 0


X 0 0 0Y 0 0 0Z 0 0 0


X 0 0 0Y 0 0 0Z 0 0 0

/205/: SERVO ARARM No.417

(3)Page switching


Function: Pressing this key displays the page of data prior to thatwhich is currently displayed.

2.7.1.3Operation

Operating methods


AND OPERATING

135


Function: Pressing this key displays the page of data subsequentto that which is currently displayed.

(4)Data number search


Function: Pressing this key starts a search for an input datanumber. When the F5 key is pressed, a dialog boxopens. When a number, for which a search is to bemade, is input into the dialog box, the screen isredisplayed with the input data number at the top.

(5)Group selection function


Function: Pressing this key displays a group selection screen.When the F1 key is pressed, the group selectionscreen appears, which contains diagnosis informationfor a specific group.

This screen is provided to enable the registration of signals to be displayedas history on the operation history screen.

F1 F2 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10Top End AlClr Clear ON OFF Large


Status

Message

(*1) (*2) (*3)

System/Signal History Setting

No. Signal Bit MaskAddress 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 G0000 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 2 G0002 1 1 0 1 1 1 1/0/ 3 G0007 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 4 G0126 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 5 G0232 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 6 F0001 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 : : : : : : 18 X0004 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 019 ***** * * * * * * * *20 ***** * * * * * * * *

2.7.2Operation HistorySignal Setting

2.7.2.1Purpose


Operation history signalsetting screen layout


136

(*1) Selection numberThis number is used only on this screen.

(*2) Signal addressThe signal addresses that can be input include:

X0000 to 9999Y0000 to 9999G0000 to 9999F0000 to 9999

(*3) Signal bit maskIf a bit mask value is 1, any change in the corresponding signal isdisplayed as history on the operation history screen. If a bit maskvalue is 0, any change in the corresponding signal is not displayedon the operation history screen. To display the history of a signal,the bit mask for the signal must be set.

Up to 20 signals can be set using this screen. If less than 20 signals havebeen set, asterisks are displayed for unregistered signal addresses and bitmasks.

This section explains how to position the cursor and specify signals.

Operation with theoperation historysignal selection

screen


2.7.2.3

Cursor movement Cursor movement “Cursor keys”“F1”, “F2”

(1)(a) to (d)(1)(e) and (f)

Signal address setting Signal address setting Direct input (2)

Signal bit mask setting Turning a signal bit on “F8” (3)(a)(3)(c)

Turning a signal bit off “F9” (3)(b)(3)(c)

Canceling signal setting Canceling the setting ofall signalsCanceling the setting ofan individual signal

“F6”

“F7”

(4)(a)

(4)(b)

(1)Cursor movementThe cursor can be moved up, down, to the right, and to the left. If the key is pressed, for example, the cursor moves as follows:Signal address All bit masks Bit mask 7 Bit mask 6 ... Bit mask 0 Next signal addressIf the key is pressed, the cursor moves in the opposite direction.If the cursor is currently positioned to bit mask 0 for the last selectionnumber (20), pressing the key positions the cursor to the firstselection number (1). If the key is pressed, the cursor moves in theopposite direction.

Displays

2.7.2.3Operation

Operating methods


AND OPERATING

137

The following keys can be used to move the cursor around the screen.

(a) Moving the cursor up


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor up (in signalunits).

(b)Moving the cursor down


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor down (in signalunits).

(c) Moving the cursor to the left

Key operation: “ ”

Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the left (inbit units).

(d)Moving the cursor to the right


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the right (inbit units).

(e) Moving the cursor to the top of the screen


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the top of thescreen.

(f) Moving the cursor to the bottom of the screen


Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the bottomof the screen.

(2)Signal address settingSignal address setting can be performed when the cursor is currentlypositioned to a signal. To set a signal, specify it (X, G, F, or Y), enterits address, then press the Enter key. (When a signal is specified, adialog box appears). Provided a valid signal has been specified, the input signal address isdisplayed at the current cursor position. When the cursor is positionedso as to select all–bit mask data, the initial values become 00000000.Up to 20 signals can be set using this screen. It is unnecessary to packthem according to the sequence of the selection number.

(3)Signal bit mask settingThe data at the current cursor position can be changed using either ofthe following two methods:If the cursor is positioned to the mask data for individual bits

the mask data for an individual bit is set.If the cursor is positioned to the entire bit mask data

one byte of data is set.

(a) Turning a signal bit on


Function: If “data for an individual bit” is specified:Pressing the F8 key sets the signal bit at the currentcursor position to 1.


138

If “one byte of data” is specified:Pressing the F8 key sets all the bits for the signalat the current cursor position to 1.

(b)Turning a signal bit off


Function: If “data for an individual bit” is specified:Pressing the F9 key resets the signal bit at thecurrent cursor position to 0.If “one byte of data” is specified:Pressing the F8 key resets all the bits for the signalto which the cursor is currently positioned to 0.

(c) Direct inputIf “data for an individual bit” is specified:Pressing a numeric key causes the corresponding value to beentered. (When a numeric key is pressed, a dialog box appears, inwhich the corresponding value is entered automatically.) If thevalue is valid (1 or 0), it is set at the current cursor position.

If “one byte of data” is specified:Eight bits of data (eight numbers) can be entered by pressing thecorresponding numeric keys sequentially, then pressing the“Input” key. (Each time a numeric key is pressed, a dialog boxappears, in which the corresponding value is enteredautomatically.) If fewer than 8 bits are entered, the entered bits arearranged, starting from bit 0. If 101 is entered, for example,00000101 is assumed.

(4)Canceling signal setting

(a) “F6”, or “ALL CANCEL”

Key operation: “F6” Select “Yes” in the displayed dialogbox.

Function: This operation cancels the setting of all selectedsignal addresses, disabling the display of thesignal history on the operation history screen.Instead, asterisks are displayed.

If “No” is selected in the dialog box, all–signal address setting isnot canceled.

(b)“F7”, or “CANCEL”

Key operation: “F7” Select “Yes” in the displayed dialogbox.

Function: This operation cancels the setting made for aselected signal address, disabling the display ofthat signal on the operation history screen.Instead, asterisks are displayed.

If “No” is selected in the dialog box, individual–signal addresssetting is not canceled.


AND OPERATING

139

This screen is provided to enable the representation of the state of theservo motor of each axis and the spindle as waveform data.

F1 F5 F6 F10Graph Start Stop Large


Status

Message

System/Wave Diagnosis

Sampling Type One ShotStart Condition [Start]

Sampling Time 5000ms

Ch. Data Kind Sampling Axis/Addr1 Pulse Distribution Enable X2 Servo Error (8ms) Enable X

(*1)

Now Sampling...

(*1)(*2)

(*3)

Start

Sampling

Time← Sampling Time →

(*4) (*5) (*6)

(*7)

(*1) Waveform diagnosis typeSwitching is performed between one–shot type and servo alarmtype.

(*2) Start condition type

(*3) Sampling time

(*4) Sampling data type

(*5) Whether sampling is enabled or disabled

(*6) Axis/address

(*7) Sampling stateWhile sampling is being performed, the corresponding messageappears here.

2.7.3Waveform DiagnosisScreen

2.7.3.1Purpose


Waveform diagnosticscreen (parametersetting screen) layout

Displays


140

This section explains how to position the cursor and perform on–screenoperations.

Waveformdiagnostic screen

operationFunction Operation


2.7.3.3


Waveform diagnosis typesetting

Switching betweenwaveform diagnosistypes

“Direct input” (2)

Start condition typesetting

Switching between startconditions


Sampling time setting Setting the sampling time “Direct input” (4)

Data type setting Switching the samplingdata.


Enabling/disabling Specifying whether toenable sampling


Axis/address setting Switching the axis andaddress


Graph Displaying the waveformdisplay screen

“F1” (8)

Start Starting sampling “F5” (9)

Stop Stopping sampling “F6” (10)

(1)Cursor movementThe cursor can be moved up, down, to the right, and to the left.The following keys can be used to move the cursor around the screen.(a) Moving the cursor up


Function: Pressing this key moves up the cursor by one item.(b)Moving the cursor down

Key operation: “”Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor down by one

item.(c) Moving the cursor to the left

Key operation: “”Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the left. This

operation is valid when the cursor is positioned tothe channel data type, sampling, or axis/address.

(d)Moving the cursor to the rightKey operation: “”Function: Pressing this key moves the cursor to the right.

This operation is valid when the cursor ispositioned to the channel data type, sampling, oraxis/address.

2.7.3.3Operation

Operating methods


AND OPERATING

141

(2)Waveform diagnosis type settingPressing the “Enter” key displays a dialog box, in which a one–shottype can be selected.

(3)Start condition type settingPressing the “Enter” key displays a dialog box, in which “Start,” “Start& Trigger rising edge,” or “Start & Trigger falling edge” can beselected.

(4)Sampling time settingPressing the “Enter” key displays a dialog box, in which the samplingtime can be set. A sampling time of between 10 and 8192 ms can beset.

(5)Data type selectionPressing the “Enter” key displays a dialog box, in which the followingsampling data types can be selected.

1. Servo error amount (8 ms)2. Pulse distribution amount3. Actual current4. Servo error amount (2 ms)5. Actual speed6. Electric current command7. Thermal simulation data8. Synthesized speed9. Actual speed (spindle)

10. Load meter (spindle)11. Spindle conversion positional deviation difference12. Machine signal

(6)Enabling/disablingPressing the “Enter” key displays a dialog box, which enables theselection of whether to enable sampling for each channel.

(7)Axis address settingPressing the “Enter” key displays a dialog box in which the axis to besampled can be selected.

(8)GraphA screen on which sampled data is represented graphically appears.The related screen layout and operation are described in Section2.7.3.4.

(9)StartSampling is started.

(10) StopSampling is stopped.


142

Wave1 Wave2Pulse Distribution Servo Error(8ms)X Axis X Axis(pulse) (pulse)

400.00+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+ 400.00|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|

300.00 +–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+ 300.00|–––|–+–––+–––+–––+–|–––|–––|–––|

200.00 +–––+–|–+–––+–––+–|–+–––+–––+–––+ 200.00––––––+–|–––|–––|–|–|–––|–––|–––|

100.00 +–––+–––+–––+–––+–|–+–––+–––+–––+ 100.00|–––|–––|–––|–––|–+––––––––––––––

100.00 +–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+ 0.00|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|

-100.00 +–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+ -100.00|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|

-200.00 +–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+ -200.00|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|

-300.00 +–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+ -300.00|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|–––|

-400.00 +–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+–––+ -400.000 2000 4000 6000 8000(ms)

Sampling Started = 1996/08/20 10:00:00

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9Param W1/W2SelectZeroDn ZeroUp W Wide W Magn T Wide T Magn


Status

Message

System/Wave Diagnosis

(*1) (*2)

(*3)

(*4)

(*1) Waveform display 1This area displays the type of a waveform sampled from channel 1.

(*2) Waveform display 2This area displays the type of a waveform sampled from channel 2.

(*3) Waveform displayThis area displays the type of a waveform sampled from channel 1or 2.

(*4) Sampling timeThis area displays the date and time at which a waveform wassampled.


Waveform diagnosticscreen (graph displayscreen) layout

Displays


AND OPERATING

143

This section explains the operation.

Waveformdiagnostic

(graph) screenoperation


2.7.3.5

Parameter Displaying the waveformdata setting screen

“F1” (1)

Waveform 1 or 2 Switching screen operationbetween waveforms 1 and2

“F2” (2)

Selection Performing switchingrelated to a channelselected by “Waveform 1 or2”

“F3” (3)

Zero level lowering Scrolling up a selectedwaveform display

“F4” (4)

Zero level raising Scrolling down a selectedwaveform display

“F5” (5)

Waveform reduction Decreasing the amplitudeof waveform 1 or 2,whichever is selected

“F6” (6)

Waveformenlargement

Increasing the amplitude ofwaveform 1 or 2, whicheveris selected

“F7” (7)

Time reduction Reducing the time axis(horizontal axis) of thescreen

“F8” (8)

Time enlargement Enlarging the time axis(horizontal axis) of thescreen

“F9” (9)

Cursor movement Scrolling the screen up,down, to the right, and tothe left.

“Cursor keys” (10)(a) to (d)

(1)ParameterThe sampling data setting screen (Section 2.7.3.2) is displayed.

(2)Waveform 1 or 2Whether waveform 1 or 2 is to be manipulated is selected.

(3)SelectionA dialog box appears, in which the type of data displayed by“Waveform 1 or 2” can be switched, and either waveform 1 orwaveform 2 can be hidden.

(4)Zero level loweringThe horizontal axis of a selected waveform is lowered, thus causingupward scrolling.

2.7.3.5Operation

Operating methods


144

(5)Zero level raisingThe horizontal axis of a selected waveform is raised, thus causingdownward scrolling.

(6)Waveform reductionThe vertical axis of a selected waveform is reduced.

(7)Waveform enlargementThe vertical axis of a selected waveform is enlarged.

(8)Time reductionThe horizontal axis (duration) of the screen is reduced.

(9)Time reductionThe horizontal axis (duration) of the screen is enlarged.

(10) Cursor movementThe following keys can be used to scroll the screen up, down, to theright, and to the left.

(a) Upward movement


Function: Pressing this key moves the screen up.

(b)Downward movement


Function: Pressing this key moves the screen down.

(c) Movement to the left


Function: Pressing this key moves the screen to the left.

(d)Movement to the right


Function: Pressing this key moves the screen to the right.


AND OPERATING

145

This screen is provided to enable the batch saving of CNC system data andthe formatting of a memory card.

System data includes the following:1.SRAM data2.Ladder programs created by machine tool builders3.Machine operator’s panel software4.Macro programs

This screen cannot be used to restore saved data.To restore saved data, use the following functions.(For the operation methods, see the explanation of each restorationfunction.)

1.Data restoration on the BOOT screen2.Batch restoration using the rotary switch on the control unit main

board

This screen is provided to enable the batch saving of CNC system data andthe formatting of a memory card.

F1 F2 F10Save Format Large

(*1)


Status

Message

!System/Wave Diagnosis

status: Stop

(*2)

(*1) Operation statusStop: Neither saving nor formatting is being performed.Saving:Data is being saved. The save status is displayed in the box

indicated by (*2).Formatting: A memory card is being formatted.

(*2) Name of the system data file being saved and the data sizeExample) When CNC SRAM data is being saved, the status is

displayed as shown below:

2.7.4Memory Card Screen

2.7.4.1Purpose


Memory card screenlayout

Displays


146

(*a): Name of the file being saved(*b): Number of bytes saved

To perform either of the following operations, set a memory card in theCNC and place the CNC in the emergency stop state.

Memory cardscreen

operationFunction Operation References in

Section 2.7.4.3

Batch saving System data batch saving F1 (1)–

Formatting Memory card formatting F2 (2)–

(1)”F1” SaveKey operation: ”F1” A dialog box appears.

Select ”OK.”To cancel batch saving, select ”Cancel.”

Save to memory card

OK Cancel

All Save start? (The file of same name is overwritten.)

Function: This operation saves system data onto the memory card set inthe CNC.Once batch saving is complete, the following dialog box appears:

OK

Save completion

Selecting ”OK” closes the dialog box.If the unused memory card space becomes insufficient duringsaving, the following dialog box appears:

OK Cancel

The area of memory card is insufficient.Please exchange the memory card.

To replace the memory card and continue the saving, select”OK.” To cancel the saving, select ”Cancel.”

2.7.4.3Operation

Operating methods


AND OPERATING

147

(2)”F2” FormatKey operation: ”F2” A dialog box appears.

Select ”OK.”To cancel formatting, select ”Cancel.”

Format of memory card.

OK Cancel

Format start?

Function:This operation formats the memory card set in the CNC.

When the formatting is complete, the following dialog boxappears:

OK

Format completion

Selecting ”OK” closes the dialog box.


148

The command acceptable state is entered, when selected. Entering “exit”returns control to BOP.

The PMC screen is displayed, when selected. Upon exiting from the PMCscreen, control is returned to BOP.

2.8MISCELLANEOUS

2.8.1Command Line

2.8.2PMC


AND OPERATING

149

If the CNC is not provided with a LCD/MDI, the IPL screen can be usedto perform that processing (such as memory clearing) related to thepower–on sequence of the CNC.The power–on processing performed on the IPL screen is of one–shottype. Once the processing has been asserted, the IPL screen is closed.The IPL screen menus are displayed as a tree structure.

2.9POWER–ONRELATEDPROCESSINGPERFORMED ON THEIPL SCREEN

2.9.1Overview


150

The IPL screen can be started by executing BOOT/I on the personalcomputer when the CNC is switched on.

The IPL screen has a tree structure. The main menu screen appears first.

Pressing a numeric key and the Enter key activates the lower–level menu,

or upper–level or lower–level screen, corresponding to the pressednumeric key.

Each item can also be selected by pressing a numeric key and the Enter

key. When an item is selected, a message appears, prompting the user tospecify whether to perform the selected processing. Selecting 1 causesthe processing to be performed, after which the IPL screen is closed.Selecting 0 displays the main menu screen again.

Entered values can be canceled using Backspace .

IPL MENU(MENU)0. EXIT1. MEMORY CLEAR2. SETTING

9. OTHERS

← →

← →

IPL MENU(MENU)0. CANCEL1. P–CODE LOADER

<==><==>

<==>

<==>

2.9.2IPL Screen


AND OPERATING

151

(Heading) (CNC key)0. EXIT1. MEMORY CLEAR

0. CANCEL1. ALL MEMORY

0. CANCEL1. ALL <DEL><RESET>

2. PARAMETER AND OFFSET0. CANCEL1. MAIN <RESET>

3. ALL PROGRAM0. CANCEL1. ALL <DEL>

4. PMC0. CANCEL1. PARAMETER

0. CANCEL1. CNC <Z><O>

2. PROGRAM0. CANCEL1. CNC <X><O>

2. SETTING0. CANCEL1. IGNORE OVER TRAVEL ALARM

0. CANCEL1. CNC <CAN><P>

2. START WITHOUT LADDER0. CANCEL1. CNC SIDE <CAN><Z>

3. C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR0. CANCEL1. MAKE VOID C–EXEC <M><0>2. BOOST UP C–EXEC APL <M><3>

9. OTHERS0. CANCEL1. P–CODE LOADER <CAN><PRG>

2.9.3IPL Screen Menu/Item

3. HARDWARE B–63395EN/01

152

3 HARDWARE

This chapter describes structure of CNC control section, connection ofunits and the functions of PCBs and modules mounted on PCBs.

3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 OVERALL CONNECTION DIAGRAM 155. . . . . . . . . 3.4 CONNECTORS AND CONFIGURATIONS OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 170. . . . . 3.6 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING OPTION

BOARDS 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS 177. 3.8 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM

MODULES 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING

THE BACK PANEL 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 REPLACING THE FUSE IN THE CONTROL

UNIT 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 REPLACING THE CONTROL UNIT BATTERY 184. . 3.12 REPLACING THE FANS IN THE CONTROL

UNIT 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 REPLACING THE FUSE IN THE LCD UNIT 187. . . . 3.14 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT 188. . . . . . . . . . 3.15 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) 190. . . . . . . . . . . 3.16 REPLACING THE FUSE IN EACH I/O MODULE 1923.17 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE

THE CABINET 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 HEAT OUTPUT OF EACH UNIT 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 ACTION AGAINST NOISE 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–63395EN/01 3. HARDWARE

153

LCD unit/personal computer

Servo amplifier module/spindle amplifier module

I/O link

Servo motor/spindle motor

Machine operator’s panel,power magnetic circuit, etc.

Distributed I/O module, I/O unit–MODEL A, etc.

Control unit

3.1HARDWARECONFIGURATION


154

Mini slot 2

Mini slot 1

Optionslot 2

Slot 1

To slot 1

To slot 2PLC interface board

PLC interface and I/O

Main CPU board

CNC control CPU

– Power supply– Servo six–axis control– Spindle interface

– I/O link– PMC–SB6– RS–232C– Memory card interface

– Display interface

HSSB interface board

High–speed serial bus interface (personal computer interface)

Single–slot rack orthree–slot rack

To mini–slot1 or 2

Optionslot 3

Sub–CPU board

Two–path (loader) control sub CPU– Servo four–axis control– Spindle interface

To slot 3

FL–net board

FL–net function

DeviceNet board

DeviceNet function

3.2OVERVIEW OFHARDWARE


155

Control unit

24V–IN(CP1)

24V–OUT(CP2)

LCD(COP20A)

LINK(JD45)

SPDL&POS(JA41)

FSSB(COP10A)

2000V AC200V AC

MCC

SVM

SVM

SVM

SVM

SPM

TB1 CX2A JX1A

TB1 CX2B JX1B

TB1 CX2B JX1B

CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A

CX1B TB1 JX1B

COP10B

JA7A

JA7B

COP10A

COP10B

COP10A

JF1

JY2

TB2

TB2

CX4

CX3CX1A TB2

COP10B

COP10B

COP10A

COP10A

PSM

SV–CHK(CA54)

Up to six axes (In this figure, the 1–axis amplifier is used.)

Detachable LCD/MDI

LCD unit (touch panel)

When the LCD unit is notbeing used, the operator’spanel I/O module is used.

JD1A

R232–1(JD5A)

COP20BCP1A

CP1B

JD1B

JD1A

CA55

JA60

CE56

Connector panel (I/O module for connection)

RS–232CI/O unit

JD1A

JD1B

CE62

CE63

CE64

XT1

Manual pulse generator

Main CPU board

Slo

t 1

Servo card

24–VDC power supply

Optical fiber cable

Operator’s panel

Memory card

Powermagneticscabinet

AC reactor

Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker

Position coder

To the second spindle Serial spindle motor

First–axis servo motor

Second–axisservo motor

Third–axis servo motor

Fourth–axis servo motor

Servo check board

Optical fiber cable

3.3OVERALLCONNECTIONDIAGRAM


156

Control unit

PLC interface board

Servo check board

SVM

SVM

SVM

SPM

PSM

Spindle motor

Sub third–axisservo motor

Sub second–axis servomotor

Sub first–axisservo motor

Up to four axes

To the secondspindle

Position coder

COP10B

COP10A

SPDL&POS(JA41)

Servo card

FSSB(COP10A)

SV–CHK(CA54)

COP10B

COP10A

COP10B

COP10A

SVM

Sub fourth–axis servomotor

COP10B

COP10A

Sub–CPU board

DeviceNet board

To another unit(TBL)

Optical fiber cable(*)

FL–net board

HSSB(COP70)Optical fiber cable

Power magneticscabinet

(C80)

(C81)

To another unit(CD38N)

HSSB board

Personal computer

Slo

t 2S

lot 3

Min

i–sl

otM

ini–

slot

Min

i–sl

ot


157

Name Specification

Series 18i–LNA main CPU board A16B–3200–0325

JD5A : RS–232C serial port

JD1A : I/O link

JA41 : Serial spindle

JD5 : Display link (detachable LCD/MDI)

LEDs

CP1(right) : 24VDC INCP2(left) : 24VDC OUT

STATUS : Seven–segment LED display

MTSW: Rotary switch

COP20A : LCD unit connection

COP10A’FSSB (Servo amplifier connection)

CA54 : Servo check

SG connection terminal (used for a single–slot control unit)

Battery case

CNM1B : Memory card

PSW : Push switch

FUSE : Blown fuse detection LED

BAT1 : Battery

Seven–segment LED : For setting and maintenance operations with rotary switch MTSW and pushdisplay STATUS switch PSW, described below

Rotary switch MTSW: For setting and maintenance with the seven–segment LED display and pushswitch PSW

Push switch PSW: For setting and maintenance with the seven–segment LED display and rotaryswitch MTSW

3.4CONNECTORS ANDCONFIGURATIONSOF PRINTED CIRCUITBOARDS

3.4.1Main CPU Board Specification

Locations of connectors,LEDs, etc.


158

<1> CPU card

<2> Display control card

<3> Axis control card

<4> DRAM module

<5> FROM module

<6> SRAM module

The DRAM module is mounted on the CPU card.

No. Name Specification Function Remarks

<1> CPU card A20B–3300–0170 CNC control Main CPU

<2> Display control card A20B–3300–0161 Display interface LCD unit(NOTE)

A20B–3300–0162 Detachable LCD/MDI unit

<3> Axis control card A17B–3300–0201 Axis control Six axes Supports servo software90A0 series.

<4> DRAM module A20B–3900–0130 CNC system RAM 12MB

A20B–3900–0131 8MB

<5> FROM module A20B–3900–0011A20B–3900–0071

CNC systemServo system

12MB

A20B–3900–0012A20B–3900–0072

PMC systemPMC ladder 8MB

<6> SRAM module A20B–3900–0061 System SRAM 1MB

NOTEThe display control card <2> may not be mounted. (It is notmounted when a personal computer is connected using theHSSB board.)

Locations of cards andDIMM modules


159

Blown fuse detection LED

FUSE (red) On when a fuse is blown

LED display at power–on : Off : On

Seven–segment

LED display

STATUS Status

The power is off.

8 The CPU is not started immediately after power–on.

F The boot system starts loading the NC system.

9 NC system activation and RAM initialization are com-plete.

8 The system waits for the ID of each processor in thesystem to be set.

7 Setting of the ID of each processor in the system iscomplete.Display circuit initialization is complete.

6 FANUC bus initialization is complete.

5 Loading from flash memory is complete.PMC initialization is complete.The series and edition screen appears.

4 Setting of hardware configuration information of eachprinted circuit board in the system is complete.

3 PMC ladder initial running is complete.

2 The system waits for digital servo and spindle initializa-tion.

1 Digital servo and spindle initialization is complete.

0 Initialization is complete and normal operation is per-formed.

LED display while automatic operation is being performedWhen automatic operation signal STL (F0.5) is set to ”1,” theseven–segment LED display cycles as follows:

LED display when a battery alarm occurs

ALARM The SRAM backup battery is exhausted.

LED display


160

LED display when a system alarm occurs : Off : On : Blinking

ALARM System failure. Software detects an error and stops the system.

ALARM An error occurs in the local bus on the main CPU board.

ALARM System emergency. Hardware detects an error.

ALARM An open CNC–LCD optical cable is detected, or the LCD printedcircuit board is faulty.When an open cable is detected, the dot on the seven–segment LED display lights.When an open cable is detected, the LCD unit display blinks.

ALARM An SRAM parity or SRAM ECC error is detected.

ALARM A DRAM parity error is detected.

ALARM A bus error occurs in the main CPU.

NOTE1 If one of these system alarms occurs, the hardware may be

faulty.2 When an open CNC–LCD optical cable is detected at

power–on, the ALARM LEDs cycle back and forth between and .

Seven–segment LED display when a system alarm occursWhen a system alarm occurs, the number corresponding to the systemalarm number blinks as follows:

Seven–segment

LED display

Systemalarm

numberSystem alarm type

0 900 to 909 ROM parityParity of the system ROM stored in FROM

1 910 to 919 SRAM or DRAM parity

2 920 to 929 Servo alarm

3 930 to 939 CPU interrupt or SRAM ECC error

5 950 to 959 PMC system alarm

7 970 to 979 Bus error or nonmaskable interrupt

8 Others Other system alarms

NOTEIf one of these system alarms occurs, the hardware may befaulty.


161

Dis

play

link

(to

deta

chab

le L

CD

/MD

I)

DIM

M m

odul

e or

car

d pr

inte

d ci

rcui

t boa

rd

F–B

US

(to

back

pan

el)

HS

SB

(to

LCD

uni

t)F

SS

B

(to

serv

o am

plifi

er)

Ser

ial s

pind

leM

emor

y ca

rd

I/O li

nkR

S–2

32–C

Loca

l bus

CP

Uca

rd

CP

U

DIM

Mm

odul

eD

RA

M

G/A

LCD

link

cont

rol

BO

OT

softw

are

G/A

CP

U

Dis

play

con

trol

car

d

(Thi

s ca

rd m

ay n

ot b

e m

ount

ed.)

1/2

axis

G/A

PM

C c

ontr

olF

–bus

con

trol

Mai

n C

PU

bo

ard

Ser

vo c

ard

DS

P

PM

CC

PU

G/A

DS

P c

ontr

ol

SR

AM

I/O S

RA

M

HS

SB

CF

SS

BC

DIM

M m

odul

eF

LAS

H R

OM

SR

AM

Cal

enda

r fu

nctio

n

G/A

Per

iphe

ral

3–V

lith

ium

bat

tery

Pow

er s

uppl

y

5V, 3

.3V,

12

V,

15V

DC

24V

G/A

Dis

play

link

cont

rol

Sel

ect e

ither

.

3/4

axis

5/6

axis

DIM

M m

odul

e

perip

hera

ls

cont

rol

inte

rfac

e

Block diagram


162

Name Specification

Sub–CPU board A16B–2203-0431

JA41–2 : Serial spindle

LEDs

COP10A : FSSB2 CA54B : Servo check

STATUSALARM

3.4.2Sub–CPU Board Specification



163

<1> CPU card

<2> Axis control card

<3> DRAM module The DRAM module is mounted on the CPU card.

No. Name Specification Function Remarks

<1> CPU card A20B–3300–0170 CNC control Main CPU

<2> Axis control card A17B–3300–0120 Axis control Four axes Supports servo software90A0 series.

<3> DRAM module A20B–3900–0130 CNC system RAM 8MB

A20B–3900–0131 12MB

LED display at power–on : Off : On

STATUS Status

STATUS The power is off.

STATUS The CPU is not started immediately after power–on.

STATUS Normal operation is performed.

LED display when a system alarm occurs : Off : On : Blinking

ALARM Servo alarm

ALARM A DRAM parity error is detected.

ALARM A bus error occurs in the sub CPU.

Locations of cards andDIMM module

LED display


164

NOTEIf one of these system alarms occurs, the hardware may befaulty.

F–BUS(to back panel)

FSSB (to servo amplifier)

Serial spindle

Local bus

CPU card

CPU

DIMM moduleDRAM

G/ACPU

peripherals

G/A

Bus conversion

Sub–CPU board

G /APeripheral control

1/2 axis

Servo card

DSP

G/ADSP control

SRAM

FSSBC

3/4 axis

DIMM module or card printed circuit board

Block diagram


165

Name Specification

PLC interface board A16B–2203-0200

C80(right) : I/O

C81(left) : I/O

PLC connectors,etc.

NOTE1 The PLC interface board has no LED.2 For the connectors and LEDs on the PLC, refer to the

manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

3.4.3PLC Interface Board Specification

Locations of connectors


166

Name Specification

HSSB interface board A20B–8001-0730

COP7 : High–speed serial bus (HSSB) interface

SW1High–speed serial bus setting switch

JNAF–bus backplane connector

LEDBLEDALED4LED3LED2LED1

Description of red LEDs

LEDB HSSB communication stops.

LEDA A parity alarm occurs in common RAM. The common RAM ismounted on this board to exchange information between the CNCand personal computer. It is not battery–backed up.

Status display by green LEDs : Off : On

4 3 2 1 Status

Immediately after power–on

The HSSB board is being initialized.

The system waits for the personal computer to boot up.

The CNC screen is displayed on the personal computer.

Start–up terminates normally. Normal operation is being performed.

HSSB communication stops.

A parity alarm occurs in common RAM.

A communication error occurred.

This rotary switch is normally positioned to ”1.” Change the switchposition only when required, such as for maintenance. For details, see”Boot and IPL operations on the personal computer” in the Appendix.

3.4.4HSSB Interface Board Specification


LED display

High–speed serial bussetting switch


167

Name Specification

DeviceNet board A20B–8100-0490

TBL : DeviceNet interface

TM1 Master/slave setting pin

JNAF–bus backplane connector

LEDA LED3 LED2 LED1

Daughterboard (manufacturedby other than

FANUC)

LED MNS

LED HEALTH

3.4.5DeviceNet Board Specification



168


LEDA On when an error occurs on the daughterboard.When this LED is lit, replace the DeviceNet board.

Description of green LEDs

3 2 1 Status

This board is set as the master board.

This board is set as the slave board.

LEDs on the daughterboard

MNS DeviceNet module/network status LEDThis LED indicates whether the power to the DeviceNet board is onand whether DeviceNet communication is being performed normally.For the meaning of the on/off state of this LED, refer to the specifica-tions issued by ODVA.

HEALTH Daughterboard status LEDAfter power–on, this LED lights in red. When firmware is loaded onthe internal daughterboard, this LED lights in green. After that, itremains lit in green.When this LED does not light in green, replace the DeviceNet board.

Use this setting pin to switch between the DeviceNet master and slavefunctions.

The DeviceNet board can be demounted only after the main CPU boardis demounted. For the procedure, see the section titled ”MOUNTINGAND DEMOUNTING OPTION BOARDS.”A daughterboard manufactured by other than FANUC is mounted on theDeviceNet board. The daughterboard alone cannot be replaced.

LED display

Master/slave setting pin

Notes


169

Name Specification

FL–net board A20B–8100-0530

CD38N : FL–net interface

TM1 Setting pin

(fixed to the B side)

JNA F–bus backplane connector

HER COM POK LNK RES ROS

LILCOL


HER A parity alarm occurs in the DRAM on the FL–net board.The board may be faulty.

COL On when data collision occurs in the line

Description of green LEDs

COM On when data is being transmitted

POK On when parameters are normally set

LNK Indicates the link status. On when the FA link is connected

RES Reserved. Normally off

POS On when the OS is running on the FL–net board

LIL On when the hub is normally connected

This setting pin is fixed to the B side. No change is required.

3.4.6FL–net Board Specification


LED display

Setting pin (TM1)


170

Product name Drawing number Remarks

Single–slot basic unit A02B–0266–B501

Three–slot basic unit A02B–0266–B505

Type Product name Drawing number ID Remarks

Main CPU board A16B–3200–0325 E9

Card PCB CPU card A20B–3300–0170 11

Display control card LCD unit A20B–3300–0161 – LCD unit

Display link A20B–3300–0162 – Detachable LCD/MDI

Axis control card Six axes A17B–3300–0201 06 Supports servo software 90A0 series.

Four axes A20B–3300–0120 05

Display control card 10.4” color A20B–3300–0151 GraphicsMounted on the printed circuit boardon the back of the LCD unit

DIMM module DRAM module A20B–3900–0131 A6 8MB

SRAM module A20B–3900–0061 03 1MB

FROM module A20B–3900–0072 53 8MB

Option PCB Sub–CPU board A16B–2203–0431 0xF1 Mounted in slot 3

PLC interface board A16B–2203–0200 00CB Mounted in slot 2

HSSB interface board A20B–8001–0730 7xAA Mounted in a mini–slot

DeviceNet board A20B–8100–0490 xxEF Mounted in a mini–slot

FL–net board A20B–8100–0530 xx59 Mounted in a mini–slot

Back panel Back panel A20B–2002–0850 – Single slot

A20B–2002–0801 – Three slots

Distributed I/O Operator’s panel I/O module A20B–2002–0520 – General–purpose DI inputWith an MPG interface

Connector panel I/O Basic A20B–2100–0150 –module

Additional A20B–2100–0411 –

Additional (2–Aoutput)

A20B–2100–0320 –

3.5Units and PrintedCircuit Boards

3.5.1Basic Units

3.5.2Control Unit PrintedCircuit Boards


171

Type RemarksIDDrawing numberProduct name

Others LCD control printed circuit board A20B–8100–0620 – Mounted on the back of the LCD unitWith the operator’s panel I/O function

Inverter 10.4” color A20B–8001–0920 – Mounted on the back of the LCD unit

Touch panel control board A20B–8001–0620 –

Personal computer HSSB board A20B–8001–0583 – For one channel

A20B–8001–0582 – For two channels

Connector panel printed circuit board A16B–2203–0550 –

Product name Drawing number Remarks

10.4” color LCD unit A02B–0265–C087 With a touch panelWith the opera-tor’s panel I/Ofunction

Detachable LCD/MDI unit A02B–0166–C291#R

Connector panel I/O Basic module A03B–0815–C001module (mounted onthe connector panelprinted circuit board)

Additional mod-ule

A03B–0815–C003 With no MPG in-terface

A03B–0815–C004 2–A output

Fan unit For one slot A02B–0265–C101

For two slots A02B–0260–C021

3.5.3Units


172

WARNINGOnly those personnel who have received approved safetyand maintenance training may perform this replacementwork.When opening the cabinet and replacing an option board,be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (markedwith and fitted with an insulating cover). Touching theuncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremelydangerous electric shock hazard.

CAUTIONBefore starting any replacement work, back up the contents(such as parameters and programs) of the SRAM memoryof the CNC. Otherwise, the contents of the SRAM memorymay be lost during the replacement work.

1) Disconnect all cables other than the battery cable. (The battery cableis connected to the main CPU board.)

2) Hold the two removal knobs, A and B.

3) Pull the printed circuit board out while pushing down the hook of knobA and pushing up the hook of knob B.

NOTE1 The battery is pulled out together with the main CPU board

because it is mounted on the front face of the main CPUboard.

2 When the DeviceNet board is mounted in a mini–slot, themain CPU board can be demounted only afterdisconnecting the DeviceNet connector. The main CPUboard can be demounted without demounting anothermini–slot option. If the cable connected to another mini–slotoption interferes with your work, disconnect the cable.

3.6MOUNTING ANDDEMOUNTINGOPTION BOARDS

3.6.1Mounting andDemounting the MainCPU Board and OptionBoards

3.6.1.1Demounting the mainCPU board or an optionboard


173

1) Hold the two removal knobs, A and B, insert the printed circuit boardinto the slot, and fit it into the connector on the back panel.

2) Connect the cables correctly.

Knobs AEach knobhas a hook atthe top.

Knobs BEach knob hasa hook at thebottom.

3.6.1.2Mounting the main CPUboard or an option board


174

1) Disconnects the cable connected to the mini–slot option board and thecables which would interfere with the removal of the mini–slot optionboard.

2) Hold the two removal knobs, C and D.

3) Pull the printed circuit board out while pushing the latch of knob C tothe right.

NOTEA mini–slot option board can be demounted withoutdemounting the main CPU board.

1) Hold the two removal knobs, C and D, insert the option board into theslot, and fit it into the connector on the back panel.

2) Connect the cables correctly.

Knob CThis knob has ahook at the left.

Knob D

3.6.2Mounting andDemounting Mini–slotOption Boards (Otherthan the DeviceNetBoard)

3.6.2.1Demounting a mini–slotoption board

3.6.2.2Mounting a mini–slotoption board


175

1) Remove the terminal block from the connector on the DeviceNetboard. Loosen the screws at both ends of the terminal block, then pullthe terminal block out. The terminal block can be removed withoutdisconnecting the cables.

Screws

2) Demount the main CPU board. The main CPU board can bedemounted only after removing the terminal block of the DeviceNetconnector.

3) Hold the two knobs on the DeviceNet board, C and D, and pull theDeviceNet board out while pushing the latch of knob C to the right.

NOTEThe DeviceNet board can be demounted only afterdemounting the main CPU board. An attempt to pull theDeviceNet board out by force without demounting the mainCPU board may damage the printed circuit board.

1) Demount the main CPU board before mounting the DeviceNet board.

NOTEThe DeviceNet board can be mounted only afterdemounting the main CPU board. An attempt to mount theDeviceNet board by force without demounting the mainCPU board may damage the printed circuit board.

2) Remove the terminal block from the connector on the DeviceNetboard. (See ”Demounting the DeviceNet board” above.)

3) Mount the DeviceNet board with the main CPU board not mounted.Hold the two knobs, C and D, insert the DeviceNet board into the slot,and fit it into the connector on the back panel.

3.6.3Mounting andDemounting theDeviceNet Board

3.6.3.1Demounting theDeviceNet board

3.6.3.2Mounting the DeviceNetboard


176

4) Mount the main CPU board after mounting the DeviceNet board.

5) Mount the terminal board removed from the connector in step 2).Tighten the screws securely.

Knob CThis knob has ahook at the left.

Knob D


177

WARNINGOnly those personnel who have received approved safetyand maintenance training may perform this replacementwork.When opening the cabinet and replacing a card PCB, becareful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked andfitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncoveredhigh–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerouselectric shock hazard.

CAUTIONBefore starting replacement work, back up the contents(such as parameters and programs) of the SRAM memoryof the CNC. Otherwise, the contents of the SRAM memorymay be lost during replacement work.

3.7MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS


178

1) Pull outward the claw of each of the four spacers used to secure thecard PCB, then release each latch. (See Fig. a.)

2) Extract the card PCB upward. (See Fig. b.)

Card PCB Card PCB

Card PCB

Card PCB

Fig. a Spacer

Spacer

Connector

Connector

Fig. b

3.7.1Demounting a CardPCB


179

1) Check that the claw of each of the four spacers is latched outward, theninsert the card PCB into the connector. (See Fig. c.)

2) Push the claw of each spacer downward to secure the card PCB. (SeeFig. d.)

Card PCB

Card PCBCard PCB

Card PCB

Fig. c Spacer

Spacer

Connector

Connector

Fig. d

3.7.2Mounting a Card PCB


180

WARNINGOnly those personnel who have received approved safetyand maintenance training may perform this replacementwork.When opening the cabinet and replacing a module, becareful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked andfitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncoveredhigh–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerouselectric shock hazard.

CAUTIONBefore starting replacement work, back up the contents(such as parameters and programs) of the SRAM memoryof the CNC. Otherwise, the contents of the SRAM memorymay be lost during replacement work.Before replacing an SRAM module, be sure to back up thecontents of the SRAM module.

3.8MOUNTING ANDDEMOUNTING DIMMMODULES


181

1) Open the claw of the socket outward. (See Fig. a.)

2) Extract the module slantly upward. (See Fig. b.)

1) Insert the module slantly into the module socket, with side B facingupward. (See Fig. b.)

2) Push the module downward until it is locked. (See Fig. c.)At this time, push the two points marked with I that are shown in thefigure.

Fig. c

Fig. b

Fig. a

3.8.1Demounting a DIMMModule

3.8.2Mounting a DIMMmodule


182

WARNINGOnly those personnel who have received approved safetyand maintenance training may perform this replacementwork.When opening the cabinet and replacing a back panel, becareful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked with and fitted with an insulating cover). Touching theuncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremelydangerous electric shock hazard.

CAUTIONBefore starting any replacement work, back up the contents(such as parameters and programs) of the SRAM memoryof the CNC. Otherwise, the contents of the SRAM memorymay be lost during the replacement work.

1) Demount all of the main CPU board and option boards in advance.

2) Disconnect the fan connectors from the back panel.3) Push down the latches that hold the back panel and release the latches.

4) Slide the back panel down, and then pull it backwards and out.

1) Insert the back panel from the back while fitting the positioning pinsinto the positioning holes on the back panel.

2) Slide the back panel up until it latches.3) Connect the fan connectors to the back panel.

4) Mount the main CPU board and option boards.

Latches

Back panel

Fan connectors

Back panel

3.9MOUNTING ANDDEMOUNTING THEBACK PANEL

3.9.1Demounting the BackPanel

3.9.2Mounting the BackPanel


183

WARNINGBefore replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to first removethe cause of the blown fuse.For this reason, only those personnel who have receivedapproved safety and maintenance training may perform thiswork.When opening the cabinet and replacing a fuse, be carefulnot to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked with andfitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncoveredhigh–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerouselectric shock hazard.

A fuse is mounted on the main CPU board in the control unit.

CPU card

Fuse

CP1, CP2

Main CPU board

Display control card

Ordering specification Rating Part specification

A02B–0265–K100 7.5A A60L–0001–0046#7.5

3.10REPLACING THEFUSE IN THECONTROL UNIT

Location of the fuse inthe control unit

Fuse orderingspecification


184

Prepare A02B–0200–K102 (FANUC specification: A98L–0031–0012)in advance.

1) Turn the power to the machine (CNC) on and keep it on for about 30seconds. Then, turn the power off.

2) Remove the battery at the top of the main CPU board.First disconnect the cable, and then remove the battery from the batterycase.

3) Replace the battery, and then connect the cable. Push the battery intothe case.

MAIN

Lithium batteryA02B–0200–K102

Battery case

Connector

WARNINGA battery replaced may explode if inserted incorrectly.Use only the specified battery (A02B–0200–K102).

3.11REPLACING THECONTROL UNITBATTERY Replacing the battery


185

CAUTIONPerform steps 1) to 3) within thirty minutes.If the control unit remains in the no battery state for morethan thirty minutes, the contents of memory may be lost.If replacement cannot be completed within thirty minutes,perform batch saving of the contents of the SRAM memoryonto a memory card. If the contents of the memory are lost,therefore, they can easily be restored.

Dispose of the used battery according to the related municipallaws or rules. Before disposal, insulate the terminals with tape toprevent short–circuits.


186

WARNINGWhen opening the cabinet and replacing a fan unit, becareful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked with and fitted with an insulating cover). Touching theuncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremelydangerous electric shock hazard.

Ordering specification Number of units

For the single–slot rack A02B–0265–C101 1

For the two–slot rack A02B–0260–C021 1

1) Before replacing a fan unit, always turn the power to the machine(CNC) off.

2) Pull the fan unit to be replaced towards you.

3) Lift the fan unit out of the rack.

4) Put a new fan unit on the top of the rack.

5) Push the fan unit in until you hear it click and fit it into the fanconnector.

Rack

Fan unit

3), 4)

2), 5)

3.12REPLACING THEFANS IN THECONTROL UNIT

Fan unit orderingspecification

Replacing a fan unit


187

WARNINGBefore replacing a blown fuse, it is first necessary to removethe cause of the blown fuse.For this reason, only those personnel who have receivedapproved safety and maintenance training may perform thisreplacement work.When opening the cabinet and replacing a fuse, be carefulnot to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked with andfitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncoveredhigh–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerouselectric shock hazard.

FuseFUSE

LCD unit (back)

CP

1BC

P1A

Ordering specification: A02B–0265–K101Rating: 2.0 APart specification: A60L–0001–0290#LM20C

3.13REPLACING THEFUSE IN THE LCDUNIT

Location of the fuse

Fuse specification


188

WARNINGOnly those personnel who have received approved safetyand maintenance training may perform this replacementwork.When opening the cabinet and replacing the unit, be carefulnot to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked with andfitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncoveredhigh–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerouselectric shock hazard.

Backlight Ordering specification Part specification

For the 10.4” LCD A02B–0236–K116 A61L–0001–0168#BL

1) Disconnect touch panel signal cable connector CN1, then remove theescutcheon.

Escutcheon

3.14REPLACING THELCD BACKLIGHT

Backlight orderingspecification

Replacing the backlight


189

2) Disconnect inverter cable connector CP1 and video signal cableconnector CN8, and then remove the LCD panel from the unit.

LCD panelCP1 CN8

3) Release the latch by pressing the projection, pull the case containingthe backlight out, then replace the backlight, as shown in the followingfigure:

Connector

Backlight

Back of the LCD panel

Projection

Projection hole

ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ

4) After replacing the backlight, reverse steps 1) to 3) to assemble theLCD unit.While assembling the unit, be careful not to allow dirt or dust to enterthe unit.


190

The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen. Fortouch panel operation, be sure to use the FANUC–supplied pen(A02B–0236–K111) provided with the touch panel. If the LCD screen istouched using a sharp–tipped pen, the surface of the LCD screen may bedamaged. Moreover, the LCD screen must not be touched by with yourfingers. Otherwise, the operability may be degraded, and the screen islikely to become dirty.

A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel toprotect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. The protection sheet isitself covered by a film to protect against damage in transit. Afterconnecting the CNC to the machine, peel off the film as shown below.The protection film is less transparent, so the display screen will be lessvisible if the protection film is not removed.

Protection film

When replacing the protection sheet, use the procedure below.

Remove the protection sheet from the front of the LCD. Then, wipeaway any moisture or oil from the front of the LCD.

Peel off the white backing sheet from the back (side which attaches tothe LCD) of a new protection sheet.

When the white protection sheet is removed, the protection sheet isready to be applied. Attach the protection sheet onto the front of theLCD. At this time, do not allow dirt and dust to enter between the LCDand protection sheet.

Finally, remove the film from the protection sheet.Ordering code of the protection sheet: A02B–0236–K110

3.15LIQUID CRYSTALDISPLAY (LCD)

LCD with a touch panel

Protection sheet for thetouch panel


191

Old protection sheet

White backing of new protection sheet


192

WARNINGBefore replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to first removethe cause of the blown fuse.For this reason, only those personnel who have receivedapproved safety and maintenance training may perform thisreplacement work.When opening the cabinet and replacing a fuse, be carefulnot to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked with andfitted with an insulating cover). Touching the uncoveredhigh–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerouselectric shock hazard.

Fuse

Additional module 1

Basic module(A03B–0815–C001)

I/O link cable

Additional module 2

Additional module 3

NOTEThe additional modules have no fuses. Only the basicmodule has a fuse.

Fuse specification: A03B–0815–K002

3.16REPLACING THEFUSE IN EACH I/OMODULE

Location of the fuse inthe connector panel I/Omodule


193

JD1A

JD1B

JA3

I/O connectors

Power connectorFuse

Fuse specification: A03B–0815–K001

Location of the fuse inthe operator’s panel I/Omodule


194

The peripheral units and the control unit have been designed on theassumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this manual“cabinet” refers to the following:

Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing thecontrol unit or peripheral units;

Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, forhousing the control unit or operator’s panel.

Equivalent to the above.

The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shallconform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation anddesign conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.

Condition LCD Control Unit

Ambient Operating 0°C to 58°C 0°C to 55°CAmbient Temperature Storage, Transport –20°C to 60°C

TemperatureChange Max. 1.1°C/min.

Normal 75%RH or less, no condensation

Humidity Short period (lessthan 1 month)

95%RH or less, no condensation

Operating 0.5 G or lessVibration

Non–operating 1.0 G or less

Meters above Operating to 1000 mMeters abovesea level Non–operating to 12000 m

Environment

Normal machine shop environment(The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in alocation where the density of dust, coolant, and/or organic sol-vent is relatively high.)

3.17ENVIRONMENTALREQUIREMENTSOUTSIDE THECABINET


195

Table 3.18 (a) Heat output (for stand–alone type control units)

Unit Heatoutput Remarks

Stand–alone type con- 1–slot rack 35W (*1) (*2)trol unit (includingmain CPU board) 3–slot rack 35W (*1) (*2)

Option board HSSB board 4W

Sub–CPU board 14W

FL–net board 6W

DeviceNet board 4W

Ethernet board 6W

PLC interface board 30W (*3)

10.4″ LCD unit 30W (*4)

NOTE1 The heat outputs of the boards in the option slots and

mini–slots are not included.2 The heat outputs of units connected to the CNC and

memory cards are not included.3 The heat output of the PLC mounted on the PLC interface

board is included.4 The heat output of the operator’s panel I/O function is

included. (when 50% of the input signals are on)

Table 3.18 (b) Heat output

Unit Heat output(W) Remarks

MDI unit 0W

Operator’s panel I/O module 12W (*1)

Connector panel I/O module (basic) 8W (*1)

Connector panel I/O module (additional) 5W (*1)

NOTE1 The indicated values are when 50% of the module input

signals are ON.2 Heat output generated within the separate detector is not

included.

3.18HEAT OUTPUT OFEACH UNIT


196

The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount andcustom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also isdesigned to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult tomeasure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise hasmany uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from beinggenerated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. Thisprecaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generatingnoise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into theCNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and groundloops.When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in themachine as described in the following section.

The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in thefollowing table:Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.

Group Signal line Action

Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A

Secondary AC power line separately (Note 1) from groups B

AAC/DC power lines (containing thepower lines for the servo andspindle motors)

and C, or cover group A with anelectromagnetic shield (Note 2).

See Section 3.19.4 and connect

AC/DC solenoidspark killers or diodes with thesolenoid and relay.

AC/DC relaysolenoid and relay.

DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoidand relay.

DC relay (24VDC) Bind the cables in group Bseparately from group A, or cover

B DI/DO cable between the CNC andpower magnetics cabinet

group B with an electromagneticshield.

Separate group B as far from

DI/DO cable between the CNC andmachine

Group C as possible.

It is more desirable to cover groupB with the shield.

Cable between the CNC and servoamplifier

Bind the cables in group Cseparately from group A, or cover

Cable for position and velocityfeedback

group C with an electromagneticshield.

Cable between the CNC andspindle amplifier

Separate group C as far fromGroup B as possible.

Cable for the position coder Be sure to perform shield

C Cable for the manual pulsegenerator

processing in Section 3.19.5.

Cable between the CNC and theMDI

RS–232C interface cable

Cable for the battery

Other cables to be covered withthe shield

3.19ACTION AGAINSTNOISE

3.19.1Separating SignalLines


197

NOTE1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another

when binding the cables in each group.2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between

groups with grounded steel plates.3 The shield is not required when the cable between the CNC

and MDI is shorter than 30 cm.

Cables of group A

Cabinet

Spindleamplifier

Servo amplifier

Controlunit

DuctTo the opera-tor’s panel, motors, etc.

Section

Group A Groups Band C

Shield

Cables ofgroups B and C


198

The CNC machine tool uses the following three types of grounding:

Signal groundingSignal grounding supplies a reference potential (0 V) for electricalsignals.

Grounding for protectionGrounding for protection is performed for safety reasons as well as toshield against external and internal noise. This type of groundingincludes, for example, the equipment frames, cases and panels ofunits, and the shielding on interface cables connecting the equipment.

Protective grounding (PE)Protective grounding (PE) is performed to connect protection groundsprovided for equipment or between units to ground together at onepoint as a grounding system.

Display

DistributedI/O

α amplifier

AC powersupply

24–V powersupply

AC input

PE (ground plate of cabinet)

CNC

AC powersupply

Cabinet on machine side

Frame

Frame

Operator’spanel

Path for grounding

Path for protective grounding (PE)

Pendant box

The ground resistance in protective grounding (PE) must be 100 Ω orless (type D grounding).

The cable used for protective grounding (PE) must be of a sufficientcross section to allow current to flow safely into protective ground(PE) if an accident such as a short–circuit occurs. (Generally, a crosssection equal to or greater than that of the AC power cable is required.)

The cable connected to protective ground (PE) must be incorporatedinto the AC power wire such that power cannot be supplied with theground wire disconnected.

3.19.2Ground

Notes on grounding


199

PE

Single–slot rack Three–slot rack

Signal ground terminal(Faston terminal)

Signal ground terminal

M4 (threaded hole)

M3 (threaded hole)

Ground cable2 mm2 or more

Grounding plate of the cabinet

Connect the 0–V lines of the electronic circuits in the control unit to theground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground terminal.

Note that the grounding method differs depending on whether option slotsare present.

Use the Faston terminal (FANUC specification: A02B–0166–K330).See Appendix A.

3.19.3Connecting the GroundTerminal of the ControlUnit


200

The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices areturned on or off.This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuitsto be disturbed.

Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. Thistype of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUCtherefore recommends a CR spark killer.)

The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shallconform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DCresistance of the stationary coil:

1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil

2) Capacitance (C) :20

I2(µF)to

I2

10

I : Current at stationary state of the coil

Equivalent circuit of the spark killerR C

Spark killer

Spark killer

Motor

ACrelay

Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.

Note) Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise eliminatorsclamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot suppress a sharp rising edge.

Use a diode which can withstand avoltage up to two times the appliedvoltage and a current up to two timesthe applied current.

Diode

DC relay

Diode (used for direct–current circuits)

– +

3.19.4Noise Suppressor

Notes on selecting thespark killer


201

If a cable connected to the CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, orother device requires shielding, clamp the cable as shown below. Theclamp both supports and shields the cable. Use this clamp to ensure stableoperation of the system.Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp bythe plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must bemade by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :

40 m

m to

80

mm

Cable

Metal fittings for clamp

Ground plate

Fig. 3.19.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)

3.19.5Cable Clamp andShield Processing


202

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Control unit

Ground plate

Metal fittings for clamp

Shield cover

Machine sideinstallationboard

Fig. 3.19.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)

Prepare ground plate like the following figure.

Mount screw hole

Hole for securing metal fitting clamp

Ground terminal(grounded)

Fig. 3.19.5 (c) Ground plate

For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surfaceis plated with nickel.


203

12mm

20mm

8mmGroundplate

Fig. 3.19.5 (d) Ground plate holes

(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.

17mm

28mm

6mm

Max. 55mm

Fig. 3.19.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp

Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp A02B–0124–K001 (8 pieces)

4. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–63395EN/01

204

4 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

After you change a SRAM module, you must set various data again. This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the parameters,the part programs and the tool offset values.

4.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT 205. . . 4.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 BATCH DATA SAVING/LOADING WITH

A MEMORY CARD 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–63395EN/01 4. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

205

1. Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.

2. Press OFFST key several times or press soft key [SETING] to display

SETTING (HANDY) screen.

3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press 1 and ENTER

keys in this order. Here alarm 100 will be displayed.

4. Press SYS key several times to display the following screen.

PARAMETER (SETTING) O1234N123450000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001 FCV

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00012 RMV MIR

X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0020 I/O CHANNELS 0 T0000

MDI **** *** *** 10:15:30[ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ ]

To make the cursor display in bit unit, press the cursor key or .

5. Press soft key[(OPRT)] and the following operation menu isdisplayed.1) Soft key [NO. SRH] : Searched by number.

Examination) Parameter number → [NO. SRH].2) Soft key [ON : 1] : Item with cursor position is set to 1

(bit parameter)3) Soft key [OFF : 0] : Item with cursor position is set to 0

(bit parameter)4) Soft key [+INPUT] : Input value is added to the value at cursor

(word type)5) Soft key [INPUT] : Input value is replaced with the value at

cursor (word type)6) Soft key [READ] : Parameters are input from reader/puncher

interface.7) Soft key [PUNCH] : Parameters are output to reader/puncher

interface.6. After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE on

the SETTING screen to 0. Press RESET to release alram 100.

4.1SETTINGPARAMETERSFOR INPUT/OUTPUT Setting procedure of

parameters


206

7. Convenient method

1) To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor key or ,

then the cursor becomes bit length and you can set parameters bitby bit (Bit parameter only).

2) To set data consecutively, use EOB key.

(Ex.1) 1234 EOB 99994567 EOB ENTER

0 1234 0 ⇒ 4567 0 9999

0 0

(Ex.2) 1234 EOB 9999EOB ENTER

0 1234 0 ⇒ 0 0 9999

0 0

3) To set the same data use = .(Ex.) 1234 EOB == EOB ENTER

0 1234 0⇒ 1234 0 1234

0 0

4) For bit parameters,(Ex.) 1 EOB == EOB ENTER1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⇒ 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

8. After the required parameters are set, set PARAMETER WRITE to0.


207

The main CPU memorized the following data. Outputting the data 1/O device while the CNC is rurnning normally

(1)CNC paramter

(2)PMC parameter

(3)Pitch error compensation amount

(4)Custom macro variable values

(5)Tool compensation amount

(6)Part program (machining program, custom macro program)

Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status.Parameters required for output are as follows :(Before changing parameters, put the CNC in the MDI mode or at anemergency stop.)

#70000

#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1ISO

#0

#1 (ISO) 0 : Output with EIA code

1 : Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)

0020 Selection of I/O channel

0 : Channel 1 (JD5A OF MAIN CPU)

1 : Channel 1 (JD5A OF MAIN CPU)

2 : Channel 2 (JD5B OF MAIN CPU)

Note) In this example of operation, connect an I/O unit to JD5A for datainput/output. (I/O channel = 0)

#7NFD0101

#6 #5 #4 #3ASI

#2 #1 #0SB2

#7 (NFD) 0 : Specifies to output feed codes when punching out data.

1 : Specifies not to output feed codes when punching out data.

#3 (ASI) 0 : Specifies to use the EIA or ISO code at input/output.

1 : Specifies to use the ASCII code.

#0 (SB2) 0 : Specifies to use one stop bit.

1 : Specifies to use two stop bits.

4.2INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA

4.2.1Confirming theParameters Required forData Output


208

0102 pecification number of input/output device

0 RS–232–C (if the following units are not used)

1 FANUC bubble cassette B1/B2

2 FANUC Floppy cassette adapter F1

3 PROGRAM FILE Mate. FANUC FA card adapter ,FANUCFloppy cassette adapter, FSP–H

4 Not used

5 Portable tape reader

6 FANUC PPR, FSP–G, FSP–H

0103 Baud Rate

1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400

2: 100 6: 300 10: 4800

3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600

4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]

In case of PPR, steps 2 and 3 are not required.

1. Select EDIT mode.

2. PRG Press PROG key and soft key PRGRM to select a program text.

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key .

And then, put out the head of file by pressing [FSRH] 0 [EXEC].

4. Press SYS key and soft key [PARAM] to display parameter screen.

5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] ,and soft key .

6. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC],and the parameters are startedto be output.

4.2.2Outputting CNCParameters


209

1. Select MDI mode.

2. Press OFFST key then soft key [SETTING] to select a setting screen.

3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and input 1 and ENTER .

At this time, alarm 100 will be generated.

4. Press SYS key and soft key [PMC].

5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL]6. Set the cursor to K17 and set the first bit to 1.

X X X X X X 1 X ENTER

Where, mark x is a former value

Thus, data input/output screen has been selected.7. Select EDIT mode.

8. Press soft key then key .

9. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters on I/O.Item selection cursor moves to the following item after data of an itemis set.

10.In CHANNEL NO item, input 1 ENTER to select I/O channel 1.

11.In DEVICE item, press soft key [FDCAS] to select the floppy cassette.12.In KIND DATA item, press soft key [PARAM].13.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [WRITE].14.In FILE No item, specify a file name. In this example input as follows:

@ P M C ENTER

15.Press soft key [EXEC]. Then PMC parameters are started to be output.16.After the PMC parameters have been output, set PARAMETER

WRITE to 0.

17.Press RESET to release alarm 100.

NOTEThe PMC parameters are output together with the CNCparameters. (The procedure described above is foroutputting only the PMC parameters.)


2. Press SYS key several times, press soft key [PARAM], and

[PITCH] to select the SETTING screen for pitch error amount.

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and .

4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then pitch error compensationamount is started to be output.

4.2.3Outputting PMCParameters

4.2.4Outputting Pitch ErrorCompensation Amount


210

When custom macro function is equipped, values of variable no. 500 andlater are output.

1. Press OFFST key.

2. Press key and soft key [MACRO] to select custom macro

variable screen.

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then key .

4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then custom macro variablevalues are output.


2. Press OFFST key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool

compensation amount screen.

3. Press [(OPRT)] key and soft key .

4. Press soft key [PUNCH] an [EXEC] key, and the tool compensationamount is started to be output.

1. Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set to the MDI mode andset it to 0.

#73202

#6 #5 #4NE9

#3 #2 #1 #0NE8

#4 (NE9) 0 : Programs of 9000s are edited.

1 : Programs of 9000s can be protected.

#0 (NE8) 0 : Programs of 8000s are edited.

1 : Programs of 8000s can be protected.


3. Press PRG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to display program text.

4. Press [(OPRT)] key and press soft key .

5. Input a program number to be output. To output all programs input as:

O – 9 9 9 9

6. Press [PUNCH] and [EXEC] key, then program output is started.

4.2.5Outputting CustomMacro Variable Values

4.2.6Outputting ToolCompensation Amount

4.2.7Outputting Part Program


211

1. Set to the emergency stop state.

2. Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct.

1) Press OFFST key several times, and press [SETING] to display

SETTING screen.

2) Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.

3) Press SYS key to select the parameter screen.

0020 Selectionof I/O channel

0 : Channel 1 (JD5A of MAIN CPU board)

1 : Channel 1 (JD5A of MAIN CPU board)

2 : Channel 2 (JD5B of MAIN CPU board)

3 : Channel 3 (JD5C of Option 1)

#7NFD0101

#6 #5 #4 #3ASI

#2 #1 #0SB2

#7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when punching out.

1 : Feed is not output when punching out.

#3 (ASI) 0 : EIA or ISO code is used.

1 : ASCII code is used.

#0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.

1 : No. of stop bits is 2.

0102 Specification number of I/O device

0 RS–232–C (if the following units are not used)

1 FANUC Bubble cassette B1/B2

2 FANUCFloppy cassette F1

3 PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card adapter, FANUCFloppy casette adapter, FSP–H

4 Not used

5 Portable tape reader

6 FANUC PPR, FSP–G, FSP–H

4.2.8Inputting CNCParameters


212

0103 Baud rate

1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400

2: 100 6: 300 10: 4800

3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600

4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]

3. Press soft key soft key

4. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters arestarted.

5. Because alarm 300 will generate for the system with absolute pulsecoder, set parameter 1815#5 to 0.

#71815

#6 #5APCx

#4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#5(APCx) 0 : Position detector is other than absolute pulse coder.

1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.

6. After the parameters have been input, turn off the power once then turnit on.Note) The CNC stays at an emergency stop.

Set the emergency stop state.Operation of 12 is not required when PPR is used.

1. Turn off (KEY4=1) the program protect key.

2. Press OFFST key and soft key [SETTING] to select the SETTING

screen.

3. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.

4. Press SYS key and soft key [PMC].

5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL].

6. Set the cursor to K17 and set bit 1 to 1.

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 ENTER .

7. Press key and key.

8. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters required for I/O.Item selection cursor displays the next item after an item is set.

9. In CHANNEL item , press 1 ENTER to select channel 1.

10.In DEVICE item, press [FDCAS] key to select the floppy cassette.

11.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [READ] to input data

12.In FILE NO item, press 2 ENTER to select file no. 2.

13.Press soft key [EXEC] and the PMC parameters are started to be input.

14.After data has been read, turn off power and turn it on.

4.2.9


213

NOTEThe PMC parameters are input together with the CNCparameters. (The procedure described above is forinputting only the PMC parameters.)

1. Release the emergency stop and select EDIT mode.

2. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1 on the setting screen.

3. Press PRG key and soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents.

4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], , [F SRH], and 3 [EXEC] to select

the pitch error compensation file.

5. Press SYS key several times, soft key [PARAM], and

[PITCH] to select the screen for pitch error compensation amount.

6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.

7. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then the pitch errorcompensation amount is started to be input.

8. After data has been input, press OFFST key twice to display the

SETTING screen and return the PARAMETER WRITE to 0.

If the system is equipped with the custom macro fucntion, input thevariable values.For PPR, item 4 is not required.

1. Check that EDIT mode is selected.

2. Press the PRG key, then soft key [PRGRM], to select the program

text display screen.

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)], , [F SRH], X , then [EXEC] to

select a custom macro variable file.

4. Press the OFFST key and key. Then, press soft key [MACRO] to

display the custom macro variable screen.

5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] then the key.

6. Press soft keys [READ] then [EXEC]. Data input starts.

Item 4 is not required for PPR.

1. Select the EDIT mode.

2. Press PRG key, and press soft key[PRGRM] to display the program

contents screen.

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)], , [F SRH], and [EXEC] to select

the tool compensation amount file.

4.2.10Inputting Pitch ErrorCompensation Amount

4.2.11Inputting Custom MacroVariable Values

4.2.12Inputting ToolCompensation Amount


214

4. Press OFFST key, and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool

compensation amount screen.

5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.

6. Press [READ] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.

Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set it to 0.(Change it in MDI mode).

#73201

#6NPE

#5 #4 #3 #2 #1RAL

#0

#6 (NPE) When programs are registered in part program storage area, M02,M30and M99 are:

0 : regarded as the end of program.

1 : not regarded as the end of porgram.

#1 (RAL) When programs are registered:

0 : All programs are registered.

1 : Only one program is registered.

#73202

#6 #5 #4NE9

#3 #2 #1 #0NE8

#4 (NE9)

0 : Programs of 9000s can be edited.

1 : Programs of 9000s are protected.

#0 (NE8)

0 : Programs of 8000s can be edited.

1 : Programs of 8000s are protected.

For PPR, item 4 is not required.

1. Confirm that mode is EDIT mode.

2. Press PRG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to select a part program

file.

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [F SRH], and X [EXEC] to select

a part program file.

4. Press soft key ,[(OPRT)] and key.

5. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then data input is started.

4.2.13Inputting Part Programs


215

The data on the CNC (main board) can be batch–saved onto a memorycard in MS–DOS format. It includes battery–backed–up data (SRAMdata), PMC ladder programs, indexing axis control programs (macroapplications), and operator’s panel control programs (C applications anddata).Save data using soft keys on the CNC screen while the CNC is operating.The following two methods are available: method for batch–saving theSRAM data and application programs created by the machine tool builderand that method for selecting and saving individual data items.This screen can also be used to format a memory card, delete a file froma memory card, and restore (load) the SRAM data.

(1)Press next–menu key [>>] on the [ALL IO] screen to display other softkeys. Press soft key [M.CARD].

(2)Set the CNC to emergency stop state.

(3) Insert a memory card. The memory card statuses (*2 and *3) aredisplayed as illustrated below.

4.3BATCH DATA SAVING/LOADING WITH A MEMORY CARD

4.3.1General

4.3.2Displaying the MemoryCard Save/Load Screenand Save/LoadOperation

Screen


216

(1/1)

[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ CAN ] [ EXEC ]

READ/PUNCH(M–CARD) 01234 N12345

CNC RAM Memory card

1M byte 2.000M byte S–RAM

File

SRAM1.0A.FDB 524288 byte 97/07/07

[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ CAN ] [ EXEC ]

Select: All data

EDIT ****––EMG–– 12:15:00[FORMAT] [ SAVE ] [ LOAD ] [DELETE] [ EXEC ]

Message

COMPLETED.TURN OFF POWER.

*1: CNC memory size

*2: Memory card size and type

*3: Names, sizes, dates, and number of files held on the memory card

*4: Operation message

*5: When selecting [LOAD], select the data to be loaded.

When [FORMAT], [SAVE], or [F.DELETE] is selected

When [LOAD] is selected

Fig. 4.3.2

NOTE1 The CNC memory size (*1) is always displayed.2 When there is no memory card in the slot, a message

prompting the operator to insert a memory card appears inthe message field (*4). Meanwhile, the memory cardstatuses (*2 and *3) are not displayed.

3 If an incompatible memory card (memory card withoutattribute memory or with attribute memory containing nodevice information) is inserted, an error message appearsin the message field (*4). Meanwhile, the memory cardstatuses (*2 and *3) are not displayed.

4 This screen cannot be operated from the path 2 side.5 No directory on the memory card can be specified.

(1)Press soft key [SAVE]. Different soft keys appear as shown in Fig.4.3.2 and the type of data to be saved is displayed at the bottom of thescreen.

(2)To save individual data, press soft key [SELECT] to select data to besaved. The display indicating the selected type of data cycleswhenever the soft key is pressed.

Alldata

S–RAM Ladder Macro application

C application C data

(3)Select a file for saving data. If satisfactory, press soft key [EXEC].(4)While memory data is being saved, the [SAVING] message blinks in

the message field. The number of bytes that have been saved is alsodisplayed.

Saving memory data


217

(5)As soon as saving has been completed, [FINISHED] appears in themessage field. On the second line, [PRESS THE RESET KEY]appears.

(6)Pressing the RESET key clears the displayed messages.

(7)The following table lists the save file names. The SRAM file namedepends on the size of the SRAM mounted on the CNC. (The memorydata is saved in units of 512 kilobytes, in one or more files.)

Save file type File name

All data All data save

S–RAM SRAM 1M: SRAM1_0A.FDB, SRAM1_0B.FDB

SRAM 2M : SRAM2_0A.FDB, SRAM2_0B.FDBSRAM2_0C.FDB, SRAM2_0B.FDB

PMC ladder PMC–RB.MEM

Macro application PD1M256K.MEM, PD2M256K.MEM

C application CEX2_0M.MEM

C data CEX0FPDT.MEM

NOTE1 If the memory card does not have sufficient unused space,

a message prompting the operator to replace the memorycard appears. Replace the memory card.

2 Once all data has been saved, files having the same filenames as for individual data save are individually created.

(1)Press soft key [LOAD]. Different soft keys appear as illustrated inFig. 4.3.2.

(2)Press MDI key or to select the SRAM file to be loaded.

(3)A confirmation message appears. If satisfactory, press soft key[EXEC].

(4)While the data is being loaded, [LOADING] blinks in the messagefield. The name of the file being loaded and the number of bytes thathave been loaded are also displayed.

(5)Upon the completion of the load operation, [FINISHED] appears inthe message field. [PRESS THE RESET KEY] is displayed on thesecond line.

NOTE1 When loading multiple files from multiple memory cards, a

message prompting the operator to change the memorycard is displayed.

2 When the saved data and the CNC system into which thedata is loaded are in the following statuses, an errormessage appears in the message field (*4). The saved file and the CNC RAM are of different sizes. The saved files have different extensions.

Loading memory data


218

(1)Press soft key [FORMAT]. Different soft keys appear as illustratedin Fig. 4.3.2.

(2)A confirmation message appears. If satisfactory, press soft key[EXEC].

(3)While the memory card is being formatted, [FORMATTING] blinksin the message field.

(4)Upon the completion of the format operation, [FINISHED] appearsin the message field.

NOTEData can be saved only to a formatted memory card.

(1)Press soft key [F.DELETE]. Different soft keys appear as illustratedin Fig. 4.3.2.

(2)Press MDI key or to select the file to be deleted.

(3)After selecting the desired file, press soft key [EXEC].(4)While the file is being deleted, [DELETING] blinks in the message

field.

(5)Upon the completion of deletion, [FINISHED] appears in themessage field.

NOTESRAM data of 1 megabyte or greater will consist of two ormore files. To delete the SRAM data, delete all the files.

Formatting a memorycard

Deleting a file


219

Message Descripiton

INSERT MEMORY CARD No memory card is inserted.

UNUSABLE MEMORY CARD No device information is held in attribute memory.

FORMAT MEMORY CARD The memory card is not formatted. Format thememory card before attempting to use it.

THE FILE IS UNUSABLE The format or extension of the file to be loaded isinvalid. Alternatively, the data recorded on thememory card does not match the CNC memorysize.

REPLACE MEMORY CARD Replace the memory card.

FILE SYSTEM ERROR An error occurred during file system processing. is a file system error code.

SET EMERGENCY STOP STATE A save/load operation can be performed only in theemergency stop state.

WRITE–PROTECTED Save operation: The protect switch of the memorycard is not released.Load operation: Parameter write is disabled.

VOLTAGE DECREASED The battery level of the memory card is low. (Re-place the battery.)

DEVICE IS BUSY Another user is using the memory card. Alterna-tively, the device cannot be accessed because au-tomatic operation is in progress.

SRAM & FROMMEMORYCARD?

This message prompts the user to confirm whetherthe save operation is to be started.

MEMORY CARDSRAM? This message prompts the user to confirm whetherthe load operation is to be started.

DO YOU WANT TO DELETEFILE(S)?

This message prompts the user to confirm whetherdata is to be deleted.

DO YOU WANT TO PERFORMFORMATTING?

This message prompts the user to confirm whetherto format a memory card.

SAVING Save operation is in progress.

LOADING Load operation is in progress.

DELETING A file is being deleted.

FORMATTING A memory card is being formatted.

COMPLETED Save or load operation has been completed.

PRESS RESET KEY Press the RESET key.

TURN OFF POWER Turn the power off, then back on again.

NO USE (2 PATH SIDE) This screen cannot be operated from the sub–pathside of a two–path system. Switch the path to themain path.

4.3.3Messages


220

Code Descripiton

102 The memory card does not have sufficient free area.

105 No memory card is inserted.

106 A memory card is already inserted.

110 The specified directory cannot be found.

111 No more directories can be added because the root directory con-tains the maximum allowable number of files.

114 The specified file name cannot be found.

115 The specified file is protected.

117 The file is not opened.

118 The file has already been opened.

119 The file is locked.

122 An invalid file name has been specified.

124 An invalid file extension has been specified.

129 The specified function is not supported.

130 An invalid device has been specified.

131 An invalid pathname has been specified.

133 Multiple files are opened simultaneously.

135 The device is not formatted.

140 The file has the read–/write–disabled attribute.

(1)The size of a memory card must be greater than or equal to that of thedata to be saved. If the size is insufficient, the message ”REPLACEMEMORY CARD” appears.

(2)Use an SRAM memory card or ATA flash memory card conformingto PCMCIA Ver. 2.0 or JEIDA Ver. 4.1.

(3) Information saved to a memory card can be used with any CNCprovided it has the same hardware configuration and the same optionconfiguration.

(4)The contents of a memory card can also be displayed, formatted, anddeleted when the status is other than emergency stop state. However,they cannot be displayed, formatted, or deleted while automaticoperation is being performed (when STL [M001.7 for a millingmachine or M001.4 for a lathe] is set to 1). In this case, the message”DEVICE IS BUSY” appears. Place the CNC in the reset, automaticoperation stop, or halt state.

File system error codes

4.3.4Notes

B–63395EN/01 5. MACHINE INTERFACE I/O TYPES

221

5 MACHINE INTERFACE I/O TYPES

This chapter describes the concept of signal transmission between thePLC and NC and a signal map. It also describes screens displayed by themachine interface feature (PMC) included in the NC and how to operatethem, as well as parameters used by the PMC sequence program (PMCladder).

5.1 GENERAL 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 BUILT–IN PMC AND BUILT–IN PLC 223. . . . . . . . . . 5.3 INTERFACE MAPS FOR SPECIAL MACHINE 225. . 5.4 INTERFACE MAPS FOR LATHE 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 DETAILS OF THE PMC PARAMETERS FOR

M–NET INTERFACE CONTROL 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 PMC SCREEN 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. MACHINE INTERFACE I/O TYPES B–63395EN/01

222

The 18i–LNA uses a built–in PMC or built–in PLC to provide an interfacebetween the CNC and machine.When either the built–in PMC or built–in PLC is used, the signals forinterfacing with the CNC (M–NET interface) are mapped to PMCaddresses M and N. For details on the signals, see Sections 5.3 and 5.4.Special PMC parameters are provided to allow you to select M–NETinterface functions and set delays. For details on the PMC parameters forM–NET interface control, see Section 5.5 ”Details of the PMCParameters for M–NET Interface Control.”

5.1GENERAL


223

The PMC that is built into the CNC as standard controls the CNC andexternal input/output units without needing extra hardware.When the built–in PMC is used, the PMC simultaneously executes twosequence programs to process signals as follows:

18i–LNA

CNC PMCsequence program<2>

M–NET board,FL net board, or DeviceNet board

I/O

M

N

PMCsequence program<1>

Operator’spanel

Highernetwork

R

Sequence program <2> (M–NET converter) converts the interface signalsof the CNC into M–NET interface signals. Sequence program <2> iscreated and incorporated in the CNC by FANUC. During normaloperation, the user need not consider this sequence program.The sequence program <1> is to be created by the machine tool builder.As with other CNCs, this CNC allows you to use the FAPT LADDER–IIand ladder edit card to edit this sequence program. For details on how toedit the program by using these functions, refer to the following manuals:

Programmingfunction

Manual name (drawing number)

FAPT LADDER–II FAPT LADDER–II Operator’s Manual (B–66184EN)

Ladder edit card FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6Ladder Language Programming Manual (B–61863E)

5.2BUILT–IN PMC ANDBUILT–IN PLC

5.2.1Built–in PMC


224

The built–in PLC consists of two printed circuit boards: a mother boardmanufactured by FANUC and a daughter board (PLC) supplied by thePLC manufacturer. The PLC is incorporated into the CNC.When the built–in PLC is used, the PMC and PLC each execute asequence program as follows:

18i–LNA

CNC PMCsequence program<2>

I/O

M

N

PMCsequence program<3>

Operator’spanel

Highernetwork

PMCsequenceprogram <1>

The PMC executes the sequence program <2> (M–NET converter) toconvert the interface signals of the CNC into M–NET interface signals.This sequence program is the same as that used when the built–in PMCis used. The program <1> is used for input/output unit assignment anddoes not process signals. Sequence programs <1> and <2> are bothcreated and incorporated into the CNC by FANUC. During normaloperation, the user need not consider these sequence programs.

CAUTIONWhenever the built–in PLC is used, both sequenceprograms <1> and <2> are required. Since sequenceprogram <1> can be overwritten and deleted, make abackup copy of the sequence program.

Sequence program <3> is to be created by the machine tool builder. Fordetails on the connection of the PLC, refer to the manual supplied by thePLC manufacturer.

5.2.2Built–in PLC


225

NOTE1 In the following tables, the upper row of each frame in the

address column contains a FANUC PMC address, while thelower row (in parentheses) contains a bit address.

2 There are two interface map types: the specification forspecial machines and that for lathes. The type to use isdetermined according to a CNC parameter (bit 0 ofparameter No. 17900).

FANUC Series 18i–LNA M–NET interface (specification for special machines: input)7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

N0000

(0000)

Handle axis 3

(axis selection 3)

Handle axis 2

(axis selection 2)

Handle axis 1

(axis selection 1)

Rapid traverse

override

Program number

search enabled

Editing enabled Mode 2 Mode 1

AZ AY AX ROV PNSC EDIT MD2 MD1

N0001

(0008)

External reset Feed hold 2 Feed hold 1 Single block Cycle continua-

tion enable

Machine zeropoint

Handle magnifier2

Handle magnifier1

ERS *SP2 *SP1 SBK CYCNT ZRN MP2 MP1

N0002

(0010)

I4–I4 search I2–I3 start I3–I2 start Return and start Start Optional blockskip 2

Optional blockskip 1

JST44 JST23 JST32 ST1 ST BDT2 BDT1

N0003

(0018)

Program number

selection 5

Program number

selection 4

Program number

selection 3

Program number

selection 2

Program number

selection 1

Program number

selection 0

Slide–in start Slide–out 1 start

PN5C PN4C PN3C PN2C PN1C PN0C RST23 ST2

N0004

(0020)

T function fin-ished

Program number

selection 20

Program number

selection 10

Program number

selection 00

Program number

selection 9

Program number

selection 8

Program number

selection 7

Program number

selection 6

TFIN PN20C PN10C PN00C PN9C PN8C PN7C PN6C

N0005

(0028)

Servo off Spindle forward

inching 2

Spindle backward

inching

Spindle forward

inching

Spindle stop at

specified position

Spindle stop B function fin-ished

M function fin-ished

SVF MCW2 MCCW MCW ORC *SSTP BFIN MFIN

N0006

(0030)

Program number

selection 40

Program number

selection 30







PN40C PN30C BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3

N0007

(0038)

Incremental off-set sign –

Incremental off-set sign +

Incremental off-set 6






–INC +INC INC6 INC5 INC4 INC3 INC2 INC1

N0008

(0040)

Spindle servo–off Slide–out 2 start Current limit com-mand

Spindle gear External position-

ing finished

SSVF ST3 CLC GR G34F

N0009

(0048)

User macro input7

User macro input6

User macro input5

User macro input4

User macro input3

User macro input2

User macro input1

User macro input0

UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0

N0010

(0050)

User macro input15

User macro input14

User macro input13

User macro input12

User macro input11

User macro input10

User macro input9

User macro input8


N0011

(0058)

Orientation posi-tion 7








ORP7 ORP6 ORP5 ORP4 ORP3 ORP2 ORP1 ORP0

N0012

(0060)

Third auxiliary

function finished

Operation with

spindle turned off

Spindle torquelimit 1






AFIN SLCK TL1 TL2 ORP11 ORP10 ORP9 ORP8

(Continued)

5.3INTERFACE MAPSFOR SPECIALMACHINE


226


N0013

(0068)




Second soft-

ware–based limit

enabled

–JOG feed +JOG feed Handle axis 4

(axis selection 4)

Fourth auxiliary

function finished

BDT11 BDT10 BDT9 SLTS –JOG +JOG A4 CFIN

N0014

(0070)









BDT19 BDT18 BDT17 BDT16 BDT15 BDT14 BDT13 BDT12

N0015

(0078)

Simplified syn-chronization con-

trol

Output coordinate

selection 3

Output coordinate

selection 2

Output coordinate

selection 1

Status output

axis selection 2

Status output

axis selection 1


SYNC POS3 POS2 POS1 AXS2 AXS1 BDT20

N0016

(0080)

Data transfercontrol flag A

Cs contour con-trol

B–axis clamp fin-ished

B–axis unclamp

finished

Fourth axis ser-vo–off

Fourth axis inter-lock

Spindle outputstatus 2


CTRFA CSON ECLPB EUCLPB SVF4 *IT4 RCHHGA RCHA

N0017

(0088)

Second spindle

servo–off

Second spindle

forward inching 2

Second spindle

backward inching

Second spindle

forward inching

Second spindlestop at specified

position

Second spindlestop

Second spindle

output status 2

Second spindle

output status 1

SSVFB MCW2B MCCWB MCWB ORCB *SSTPB RCHHGB RCHB

N0018

(0090)









ORPB7 ORPB6 ORPB5 ORPB4 ORPB3 ORPB2 ORPB1 ORPB0

N0019

(0098)

Spindle synchro-nization control

Second spindle

torque limit 1

Second spindle

torque limit 2





SPSYC TL1B TL2B ORPB11 ORPB10 ORPB9 ORPB8

N0020

(00A0)

TDNO7 TDNO6 TDNO5 TDNO4 TDNO3 TDNO2 TDNO1 TDNO0

N0021

(00A8)

TDBY7 TDBY6 TDBY5 TDBY4 TDBY3 TDBY2 TDBY1 TDBY0

N0022

(00B0)

TDST7 TDST6 TDST5 TDST4 TDST3 TDST2 TDST1 TDST0

N0023

(00B8)

TDSTF TDSTE TDSTD TDSTC TDSTB TDSTA TDST9 TDST8

N0024

(00C0)

AXP07A AXP06A AXP05A AXP04A AXP03A AXP02A AXP01A AXP00A

N0025

(00C8)


N0026

(00D0)

Compensation re-

set

Jog clamp speed3

Jog clamp speed2

Jog clamp speed1

Mode jog Mode operation Mode editing

OFSRSA JGSP3A JGSP2A JGSP1A AXJOGB AXMEMB AXEDTB

N0027

(00D8)

Servo off Torque limit on Alarm reset Jog feed + Jog feed – Indexing direction+

Indexing direction–

SRVOFA TRQLMA ALMRSA +JOGA –JOGA POSDPA POSDMA

N0028

(00E0)

Mode handle

AXHNDA

N0029

(00E8)

N0030

(00F0)

(Continued)

For

the

sec

ond

spin

dle

Transfer data type

For

dat

a tr

ansf

er

Number of transfer data bytes

Transfer data start number (LOW)

Transfer data start number (HIGH)

Indexing position command units digitF

or c

ontr

ollin

g th

e fir

st in

dexi

ng a

xis

Indexing position command tens digit Indesing position command units digit


227


N0031

(00F8)

N0032

(0100)

AXP7B AXP6B AXP5B AXP4B AXP3B AXP2B AXP1B AXP0B

N0033

(0108)


N0034

(0110)

Compensation re-set

Jog clamp speed3

Jog clamp speed2

Jog clamp speed1


OFSRSB JGSP3B JGSP2B JGSP1B AXJOGB AXMEMB AXEDTB

N0035

(0118)



SRVOFB TRQLMB ALMRSB +JOGB –JOGB POSDPB POSDMB

N0036

(0120)

Mode handle

AXHNDB

N0037

(0128)

N0038

(0130)

N0039

(0138)

N0040

(0140)

Handle axis 3

(axis selection 3)

Handle axis 2

(axis selection 2)

Handle axis 1

(axis selection 1)

Rapid traverse

override

Program number

search enabled


AZ AY AX ROV PNSC EDIT MD2 MD1

N0041

(0148)


tion enable

Machine zeropoint

Handle magnifier2

Handle magnifier1

ERS *SP2 *SP1 SBK CYCNT ZRN MP2 MP1

N0042

(0150)

I4–I4 search I2–I3 start I3–I2 start Return and start Start Optional blockskip 2


JST44 JST23 JST32 ST1 ST BDT2 BDT1

N0043

(0158)

Program number

selection 5

Program number

selection 4

Program number

selection 3

Program number

selection 2

Program number

selection 1

Program number

selection 0

Slide–in start Slide–out 1 start

PN5C PN4C PN3C PN2C PN1C PN0C RST23 ST2

N0044

(0160)


Program number

selection 20

Program number

selection 10

Program number

selection 00

Program number

selection 9

Program number

selection 8

Program number

selection 7

Program number

selection 6

TFIN PN20C PN10C PN00C PN9C PN8C PN7C PN6C

N0045

(0168)

Servo off Spindle forward

inching 2

Spindle backward

inching

Spindle forward

inching

Spindle stop at

specified position

Spindle stop B function fin-ished


SVF MCW2 MCCW MCW ORC *SSTP BFIN MFIN

N0046

(0170)

Program number

selection 40

Program number

selection 30







PN40C PN30C BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3

N0047

(0178)










(Continued)

Indexing position command units digit

For

con

trol

ling

the

seco

nd in

dexi

gng

axis


For

tw

o–pa

th c

ontr

ol


228


N0048

(0180)

Spindle servo–off Slide–out 2 start Current limit com-mand

Spindle gear External position-

ing finished

SSVF ST3 CLC GR G34F

N0049

(0188)

User macro input7

User macro input6

User macro input5

User macro input4

User macro input3

User macro input2

User macro input1

User macro input0


N0050

(0190)

User macro input15

User macro input14

User macro input13

User macro input12

User macro input11

User macro input10

User macro input9

User macro input8


N0051

(0198)










N0052

(01A0)

Third auxiliary

function finished

Operation with

spindle turned off







AFIN SLCK TL1 TL2 ORP11 ORP10 ORP9 ORP8

N0053

(01A8)




Second soft-

ware–based limit

enabled

–JOG feed +JOG feed Handle axis 4

(axis selection 4)

Fourth auxiliary

function finished

BDT11 BDT10 BDT9 SLTS –JOG +JOG A4 CFIN

N0054

(01B0)










N0055

(01B8)

Output coordinate

selection 3

Output coordinate

selection 2

Output coordinate

selection 1

Status output

axis selection 2

Status output

axis selection 1


POS3 POS2 POS1 AXS2 AXS1 BDT20

N0056

(01C0)

Cs contour con-trol


B–axis unclamp

finished



Spindle output

status 2

Spindle output

status 1

CSON ECLPB EUCLPB SVF4 *IT4 RCHHGA RCHA

N0057

(01C8)

Second spindle

servo–off

Second spindle

forward inching 2

Second spindle

backward inching

Second spindle

forward inching


position

Second spindlestop

Second spindle

output status 2

Second spindle

output status 1


N0058

(01D0)










N0059

(01D8)

Spindle synchro-nization control 2

Second spindle

torque limit 1

Second spindle

torque limit 2





SPSYC2 TL1B TL2B ORPB11 ORPB10 ORPB9 ORPB8

(01E0) Return enabled Start/reset andstart

General alarm Door open Full work No work Operating Reserved 1

PL8 PL7 PL6 PL5 PL4 PL3 PL2

(01E8) Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3 Reserved 2 Reserved 9

N0062

(01F0)

N0063

(01F8)

(Continued)


229


N0064

(0200)

N0065

(0208)

N0066

(0210)

N0067

(0218)

N0068

(0220)

N0069

(0228)

N0070

(0230)

N0071

(0238)

N0072

(0240)

N0073

(0248)

N0074

(0250)

N0075

(0258)

N0076

(0260)

N0077

(0268)

N0078

(0270)

N0079

(0278)

(Continued)

Reserved area


230


N0080

(0280)

N0081

(0288)

N0082

(0290)

N0083

(0298)

N0084

(02A0)

N0085

(02A8)

N0086

(02B0)

N0087

(02B8)

N0088

(02C0)

N0089

(02C8)

N0090

(02D0)

N0091

(02D8)

N0092

(02E0)

N0093

(02E8)

N0094

(02F0)

N0095

(02F8)

Note) Addresses from N0096 (0300) to N0254 (07F7) are also for the interface area for the operator’s panel.

(Continued)

Interface area for operator’s panel


231


N0256

(0800)


N0257

(0808)


N0258

(0810)

Compensation re-

set

Jog clamp speed3

Jog clamp speed2

Jog clamp speed1



N0259

(0818)




N0260

(0820)

Mode handle

AXHNDA

N0261

(0828)

N0262

(0830)

N0263

(0838)

N0264

(0840)


N0265

(0848)


N0266

(0850)

Compensation re-

set

Jog clamp speed3

Jog clampspeed 2

Jog clamp speed1



N0267

(0858)




N0268

(0860)

Mode handle

AXHNDB

N0269

(0868)

N0270

(0870)

N0271

(0878)


For

con

trol

ling

the

third

inde

xing

axi

s



For

con

trol

ling

the

four

th in

dexi

ng a

xis



232

FANUC Series 18i–LNA M–NET interface (specification for special machines: output)7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

M0000

(0000)

Zero point return

finished

Near the third

axis zero point

Near the second

axis zero point

Near the first axis

zero point

Battery alarm Overtravel alarm NC alarm Servo ready

ZPM NZZ NZY NZX BTAL OTAL NCAL SA

M0001

(0008)

Automatic opera-

tion started

Program execu-tion–in–progress

I4 flag point I3 flag point I2 flag point I1 flag point Return enabled In–tolerance

STL OP I4 I3 I2 I1 ITIE ITOL

M0002

(0010)

T code data 1 Spindle stop atspecified position

mode

Spindle at speci-

fied position

Program end 2 Slide–out 1 fin-ished

Slide–in–in–prog-ress

Slide–out 1–in–progress

Return–in–prog-ress

T11C M19 ORE M35 M32 ST2R ST2L ST1L

M0003

(0018)

M code data 2 M code data 1 Tool changeinstruction

T function strobe2

T function strobe1

T code data 8 T code data 4 T code data 2

M12C M11C M06 TF2 TF1 T18C T14C T12C

M0004

(0020)

PSW function 1 First M function

strobe

M code data 80 M code data 40 M code data 20 M code data 10 M code data 8 M code data 4

PSW1 MF1 M28C M24C M22C M21C M18C M14C

M0005

(0028)

T code data 80 T code data 40 T code data 20 T code data 10 PSW function 5 PSW function 4 PSW function 3 PSW function 2

T28C T24C T22C T21C PSW5 PSW4 PSW3 PSW2

M0006

(0030)

B function strobe2

B function strobe1

B code data 8 B code data 4 B code data 2 B code data 1 Spindle speedzero

Spindle normal

BF2 BF1 B18C B14C B12C B11C ZS0 SRDY

M0007

(0038)

Current limitreached

Offset clear fin-ished

Maximum offset

reached

Offset finished B code data 80 B code data 40 B code data 20 B code data 10

CLRCH OFS0 OMAX FINC B28C B24C B22C B21C

M0008

(0040)

User macro out-put 7








UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0

M0009

(0048)










M0010

(0050)

Fourth auxiliary

function strobe

Third auxiliary

function strobe

Slide–out 2 fin-ished


Spindle enable Axis clamp alarm External position-

ing finished

External position-

ing alarm

CF AF M33 ST3L SENB AXCAL G34E EPAL

M0011

(0058)

Third auxiliary

function code 80

Third auxiliary

function code 40

Third auxiliary

function code 20

Third auxiliary

function code 10

Third auxiliary

function code 8

Third auxiliary

function code 4

Third auxiliary

function code 2

Third auxiliary

function code 1

A28C A24C A22C A21C A18C A14C A12C A11C

M0012

(0060)

Fourth auxiliary

function code 80

Fourth auxiliary

function code 40

Fourth auxiliary

function code 20

Fourth auxiliary

function code 10

Fourth auxiliary

function code 8

Fourth auxiliary

function code 4

Fourth auxiliary

function code 2

Fourth auxiliary

function code 1

C28C C24C C22C C21C C18C C14C C12C C11C

M0013

(0068)

Third M function

strobe

Second M func-

tion strobe

PSW function 10 PSW function 9 PSW function 8 PSW function 7 PSW function 6 Near the fourth

axis zero point

MF3 MF2 PSW10 PSW9 PSW8 PSW7 PSW6 NZ4

M0014

(0070)

Second M func-

tion code 80

Second M func-

tion code 40

Second M func-

tion code 20

Second M func-

tion code 10

Second M func-

tion code 8

Second M func-

tion code 4

Second M func-

tion code 2

Second M func-

tion code 1

M228C M224C M222C M221C M218C M214C M212C M211C

M0015

(0078)

Third M function

code 80

Third M function

code 40

Third M function

code 20

Third M function

code 10

Third M function

code 8

Third M function

code 4

Third M function

code 2

Third M function

code 1


(Continued)


233


M0016

(0080)

Error code output28

Error code output24

Error code output22

Error code output21

Error code output18

Error code output14

Error code output12

Error code output11

ER28 ER24 ER22 ER21 ER18 ER14 ER12 ER11

M0017

(0088)

Error code output48

Error code output44

Error code output42

Error code output41

Error code output38

Error code output34

Error code output32

Error code output31


M0018

(0090)

Error code output68

Error code output64

Error code output62

Error code output61

Error code output58

Error code output54

Error code output52

Error code output51


M0019

(0098)

PSW function 18 PSW function 17 PSW function 16 PSW function 15 PSW function 14 PSW function 13 PSW function 12 PSW function 11

PSW18 PSW17 PSW16 PSW15 PSW14 PSW13 PSW12 PSW11

M0020

(00A0)

PSW function 20 PSW function 19

PSW20 PSW19

M0021

(00A8)

Tolerance status

indication 3

Tolerance status

indication 2

Tolerance status

indication 1

Spindle current

limit reached

Spindle synchro-nization finished

Cs contour con-

trol–in–progress

YA3 YA2 YA1 SCLR FSPSY FSCSL

M0022

(00B0)

Coordinate outputdata 7








MN7 MN6 MN5 MN4 MN3 MN2 MN1 MM0

M0023

(00B8)









MN15 MN14 MN13 MN12 MN11 MN10 MN9 MN8

M0024

(00C0)










M0025

(00C8)










M0026

(00D0)

Spindle stop de-tected

B axis clampcommand

B axis unclamp

command

Periodic mainte-nance–specifiedservice life ex-

piration

Spindle outputchangeover com-

mand

Data transfer er-ror flag

Data transfercontrol flag B

SPSTDT CLPB UCLPB LIFOVR RCHPA CTRER CTRFB

M0027

(00D8)

Second spindle

stop detected

Second spindle

at specified posi-

tion

Second spindlecurrent limit

reached

Second spindle

enable

Second spindleoutput change-over command

Second spindle

speed zero

Second spindle

normal

SPSTDTB OREB SCLRB SENBB RCHPB ZS0B SRDYB

M0028

(00E0)

M0029

(00E8)

M0030

(00F0)

M0031

(00F8)

(Continued)

Data transfer area

For

dat

a tr

ansf

er


234


M0032

(0100)

M0033

(0108)

M0034

(0110)

M0035

(0118)

M0036

(0120)

M0037

(0128)

M0038

(0130)

M0039

(0138)

M0040

(0140)

M0041

(0148)

M0042

(0150)

M0043

(0158)

M0044

(0160)

IPS7A IPS6A IPS5A IPS4A IPS3A IPS2A IPS1A IPS0A

M0045

(0168)


M0046

(0170)

Position output 7 Position output 6 Position output 5 Position output 4 Position output 3 Position output 2 Position output 1 Position output 0

POT7A POT6A POT5A POT4A POT3A POT2A POT1A POT0A

M0047

(0178)

Position output15

Position output14

Position output13

Position output12

Position output11

Position output10

Position output 9 Position output 8


(Continued)

Data transfer area

In–position output units digit

For

con

trol

ling

the

first

inde

xing

axi

s

In–position output tens digit In–position output units digit


235


M0048

(0180)

Torque limitreached

Indexing com-

pensation 0

External position-

ing finished

TQLONA OFSZRA EXPFNA

M0049

(0188)

M0050

(0190)

M0051

(0198)

M0052

(01A0)

M0053

(01A8)

IPS7B IPS6B IPS5B IPS4B IPS3B IPS2B IPS1B IPS0B

M0054

(01B0)


M0055

(01B8)



M0056

(01C0)

Position output15

Position output14

Position output13

Position output12

Position output11

Position output10



M0057

(01C8)

Torque limitreached

Indexing com-

pensation 0

External position-

ing finished

TQLONB OFSZRB EXPFNB

M0058

(01D0)

M0059

(01D8)

M0060

(01E0)

M0061

(01E8)

M0062

(01F0)

Zero point return

finished

Near the thirdaxis origin

Near the second

axis origin

Near the first axisorigin

Battery alarm Overtravel alarm NC alarm Servo ready

ZPM NZZ NZY NZX BTAL OTAL NCAL SA

M0063

(01F8)

Automatic opera-

tion started


I4 flag point I3 flag point I2 flag point I1 flag point Return enabled In–tolerance

STL OP I4 I3 I2 I1 ITIE ITOL

(Continued)


For

con

trol

ling

the

seco

nd in

dexi

ng a

xis

In–position output tens digit In position output units digit

For

tw

o–pa

th c

ontr

ol


236


M0064

(0200)

T code data 1 Spindle stop atspecified position

mode

Spindle at speci-

fied position

Program end 2 Slide–out 1 fin-ished

Slide–in–in–prog-ress



T11C M19 ORE M35 M32 ST2R ST2L ST1L

M0065

(0208)

M code data 2 M code data 1 Tool changeinstruction

T function strobe2

T function strobe1

T code data 8 T code data 4 T code data 2

M12C M11C M06 TF2 TF1 T18C T14C T12C

M0066

(0210)

PSW function 1 First M function

strobe

M code data 80 M code data 40 M code data 20 M code data 10 M code data 8 M code data 4

PSW1 MF1 M28C M24C M22C M21C M18C M14C

M0067

(0218)

T code data 80 T code data 40 T code data 20 T code data 10 PSW function 5 PSW function 4 PSW function 3 PSW function 2

T28C T24C T22C T21C PSW5 PSW4 PSW3 PSW2

M0068

(0220)

B function strobe2

B function strobe1

B code data 8 B code data 4 B code data 2 B code data 1 Spindle speedzero

Spindle normal

BF2 BF1 B18C B14C B12C B11C ZS0 SRDY

M0069

(0228)

Current limitreached


Maximum offset

reached

Offset finished B code data 80 B code data 40 B code data 20 B code data 10

CLRCH OFS0 OMAX FINC B28C B24C B22C B21C

M0070

(0230)










M0071

(0238)










M0072

(0240)

Fourth auxiliary

function strobe

Third auxiliary

function strobe

Slide–out 2 fin-ished


Spindle enable Axis clamp alarm External position-

ing finished

External position-

ing alarm

CF AF M33 ST3L SENB AXCAL G34E EPAL

M0073

(0248)

Third auxiliary

function code 80

Third auxiliary

function code 40

Third auxiliary

function code 20

Third auxiliary

function code 10

Third auxiliary

function code 8

Third auxiliary

function code 4

Third auxiliary

function code 2

Third auxiliary

function code 1


M0074

(0250)

Fourth auxiliary

function code 80

Fourth auxiliary

function code 40

Fourth auxiliary

function code 20

Fourth auxiliary

function code 10

Fourth auxiliary

function code 8

Fourth auxiliary

function code 4

Fourth auxiliary

function code 2

Fourth auxiliary

function code 1


M0075

(0258)

Third M function

strobe

Second M func-

tion strobe

PSW function 10 PSW function 9 PSW function 8 PSW function 7 PSW function 6 Near the fourth

axis zero point

MF3 MF2 PSW10 PSW9 PSW8 PSW7 PSW6 NZ4

M0076

(0260)

Second M func-

tion code 80

Second M func-

tion code 40

Second M func-

tion code 20

Second M func-

tion code 10

Second M func-

tion code 8

Second M func-

tion code 4

Second M func-

tion code 2

Second M func-

tion code 1


M0077

(0268)

Third M function

code 80

Third M function

code 40

Third M function

code 20

Third M function

code 10

Third M function

code 8

Third M function

code 4

Third M function

code 2

Third M function

code 1


M0078

(0270)

Error code output28

Error code output24

Error code output22

Error code output21

Error code output18

Error code output14

Error code output12

Error code output11


M0079

(0278)

Error code output48

Error code output44

Error code output42

Error code output41

Error code output38

Error code output34

Error code output32

Error code output31


(Continued)


237


M0080

(0280)

Error code output68

Error code output64

Error code output62

Error code output61

Error code output58

Error code out-put 54

Error code output52

Error code output51


M0081

(0288)



M0082

(0290)


PSW20 PSW19

M0083

(0298)

Tolerance status

indication 3

Tolerance status

indication 2

Tolerance status

indication 1

Spindle current

limit reached


2

Cs contour con-


YA3 YA2 YA1 SCLR FSPSY2 FSCSL

M0084

(02A0)










M0085

(02A8)










M0086

(02B0)










M0087

(02B8)










M0088

(02C0)


B–axis clampcommand

B–axis unclamp

command


piration


mand

SPSTDT CLPB UCLPB LIFOVR RCHPA

M0089

(02C8)

Second spindle

stop detected

Second spindle

at specified posi-

tion


reached

Second spindle

enable


Second spindle

speed zero

Second spindle

normal

SPSTDTB OREB SCLRB SENBB RCHPB ZS0B SRDYB

(02D0) Individual Continuous Reserved 2 Reserved 1 Continuation off Start/reset andstart

Return Execution

SSW2 SSW1 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1

(02D8) Axis selectionSixth axis

Axis selectionFifth axis

Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3

H6 H5

(02E0) Axis selection1/2 path

Magnifier×100

Magnifier×10

Magnifier×1

Axis selectionB

Axis selectionZ

Axis selectionY

Axis selectionX

SEL2 X100 X10 X1 HB HZ HY HX

M0093

(02E8)

M0094

(02F0)

M0095

(02F8)

(Continued)


238


M0096

(0300)

M0097

(0308)

M0098

(0310)

M0099

(0318)

M0100

(0320)

M0101

(0328)

M0102

(0330)

M0103

(0338)

M0104

(0340)

M0105

(0348)

M0106

(0350)

M0107

(0358)

M0108

(0360)

M0109

(0368)

M0110

(0370)

M0111

(0378)

(Continued)

Reseved area


239


M0112

(0380)

M0113

(0388)

M0114

(0390)

M0115

(0398)

M0116

(03A0)

M0117

(03A8)

M0118

(03B0)

M0119

(03B8)

M0120

(03C0)

M0121

(03C8)

M0122

(03D0)

M0123

(03D8)

M0124

(03E0)

M0125

(03E8)

M0126

(03F0)

M0127

(03F8)

Note) Addresses from M0128 (0400) to M0254 (07F7) are also for the interface area for the operator’s panel.

(Continued)



240


M0256

(0800)


M0257

(0808)


M0258

(0810)



M0259

(0818)

Position output15

Position output14

Position output13

Position output12

Position output11

Position output10



M0260

(0820)

Torque limitreached

Indexing com-

pensation 0

External position-

ing finished


M0261

(0828)

M0262

(0830)

M0263

(0838)

M0264

(0840)

M0265

(0848)


M0266

(0850)


M0267

(0858)



M0268

(0860)

Position output15

Position output14

Position output13

Position output12

Position output11

Position output10



M0269

(0868)

Torque limitreached

Indexing com-

pensation 0

External position-

ing finished


M0270

(0870)

M0271

(0878)


For

con

trol

ling

the

third

inde

xing

axi

s

In–position output tens digit In–position output digit


For

con

trol

ling

the

fout

h in

dexi

ng a

xis



241

FANUC Series 18i–LNA M–NET interface (specification for special machines:direct input)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

(X0007/

X1004)

Skip signal Parameter write

protection

Skip signal#2 Parameter write

protection#2

SKIP PWES SKIP#2 PWES#2

(X0008/

X1008)

Emergencystop#2

Emergency stop

*ESP#2 *ESP

(X0009/

X1034)


B–axis unclamp

finished





ECLPB EUCLPB SVF4 *IT4 RCHHGA RCHA

NOTE1 Letters A and B in the address notation ”(A/B)” correspond

to the FANUC PMC address for the built–in PMC and thatfor the built–in PLC, respectively.

2 #2 applies to the interface for two–path control.3 For the built–in PMC, K5.2 controls switching between

”X0009.0 to 5” and ”N0016.0 to 5.”

FANUC Series 18i–LNA M–NET interface (specification for special machines:direct input)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

(Y0007/

Y1034)


PMC operating B–axis clampcommand

B–axis unclamp

command


mand

Servo ready#2 Servo ready

SPSTDT PMCRUN CLPB UCLPB RCHPA SA#2 SA




”Y0007.2 to 5 and 7” and ”M0026.2 to 5 and 7.”4 PMCRUN (Y0007.6) is effective only when the built–in PMC

is used.


242

NOTE1 In the following tables, the upper row of each frame in the

address column contains a FANUC PMC address, while thelower row (in parentheses) contains a bit address.

2 There are two interface map types: the specification forspecial machines and that for lathes. The type to use isdetermined according to a CNC parameter (bit 0 ofparameter No. 17900).

FANUC Series 18i–LNA M–NET interface (specification for lathes: input)7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

N0000

(0000)

Handle magnifier2

Handle magnifier1

Handle axis 2

(axis selection 2)

Handle axis 1

(axis selection 1)

Rapid traverse

override


MP2 MP1 AZ AX ROV EDIT MD2 MD1

N0001

(0008)



tion enable

Zero point return

BDT1 ERS *SP2 *SP1 SBK CYCNT ZRN

N0002

(0010)

Program number

selection 4

Program number

selection 3

Program number

selection 2

Program number

selection 1

Program number

selection 0

Slide–out 1 start Return and start Start

PN4C PN3C PN2C PN1C PN0C ST2 ST1 ST

N0003

(0018)

Program number

selection 20

Program number

selection 10

Program number

selection 00

Program number

selection 9

Program number

selection 8

Program number

selection 7

Program number

selection 6

Program number

selection 5

PN20C PN10C PN00C PN9C PN8C PN7C PN6C PN5C

N0004

(0020)










N0005

(0028)

Spindle stop at

specified position

Spindle stop Program number

selection 40

Program number

selection 30

B function fin-ished



External position-

ing finished

ORC *SSTP PN40C PN30C BFIN MFIN TFIN G34F

N0006

(0030)

Operation with

spindle turned off

Spindle forward

inching 2

I3–I2 start Spindle servo–off I2–I3 start Optional blockskip 2

Spindle backward

inching

Spindle forward

inching

SLCK MCW2 JST32 SSVF JST23 BDT2 MCCW MCW

N0007

(0038)

User macro input7

User macro input6

User macro input5

User macro input4

User macro input3

User macro input2

User macro input1

User macro input0


N0008

(0040)

User macro input15

User macro input14

User macro input13

User macro input12

User macro input11

User macro input10

User macro input9

User macro input8


N0009

(0048)










N0010

(0050)

Servo off Spindle gear Spindle torquelimit 1






SVF GR TL1 TL2 ORP11 ORP10 ORP9 ORP8

N0011

(0058)

–JOG feed +JOG feed Fourth auxiliary

function finished

Third auxiliary

function finished

Current limit com-mand

–JOG +JOG CFIN AFIN CLC

N0012

(0060)








Second soft-

ware–based limit

enabled

BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 SLTS

N0013

(0068)










N0014

(0070)

Output coordinate

selection 3

Output coordinate

selection 2

Output coordinate

selection 1

Status output

axis selection 2

Status output

axis selection 1




POS3 POS2 POS1 AXS2 AXS1 BDT20 BDT19 BDT18

(Continued)

5.4INTERFACE MAPSFOR LATHE


243


N0015

(0078)

Simplified syn-chronization con-

trol

Spindle output

status 2

Spindle output

status 1

SYNC RCHHGA RCHA

N0016

(0080)

Data transfercontrol flag A

Cs contour con-trol

CTRFA CSON

N0017

(0088)

Second spindle

servo–off

Second spindle

forward inching 2

Second spindle

backward inching

Second spindle

forward inching


position

Second spindlestop

Second spindle

output status 2

Second spindle

output status 1


N0018

(0090)










N0019

(0098)

Spindle synchro-nization control

Second spindle

torque limit 1

Second spindle

torque limit 2





SPSYC TL1B TL2B ORPB11 ORPB10 ORPB9 ORPB8

N0020

(00A0)

TDNO7 TDNO6 TDNO5 TDNO4 TDNO3 TDNO2 TDNO1 TDNO0

N0021

(00A8)

TDBY7 TDBY6 TDBY5 TDBY4 TDBY3 TDBY2 TDBY1 TDBY0

N0022

(00B0)

TDST7 TDST6 TDST5 TDST4 TDST3 TDST2 TDST1 TDST0

N0023

(00B8)

TDSTF TDSTE TDSTD TDSTC TDSTB TDSTA TDST9 TDST8

N0024

(00C0)


N0025

(00C8)


N0026

(00D0)

Compensation re-set

Jog clamp speed3

Jog clamp speed2

Jog clamp speed1



N0027

(00D8)




N0028

(00E0)

Mode handle

AXHNDA

N0029

(00E8)

N0030

(00F0)

N0031

(00F8)

(Continued)

For

the

sec

ond

spin

dle

Transfer data type

For

dat

a tr

ansf

er

Number of transfer data bytes

Transfer data start number (LOW)

Transfer data start number (HIGH)


For

con

trol

ling

the

first

inde

xing

axi

s

Indexing position command tens digit indexing position command units digit


244


N0032

(0100)


N0033

(0108)


N0034

(0110)

Compensation re-set

Jog clamp speed3

Jog clamp speed2

Jog clamp speed1



N0035

(0118)




N0036

(0120)

Mode handle

AXHNDB

N0037

(0128)

N0038

(0130)

N0039

(0138)

N0040

(0140)

Handle magnifier2

Handle magnifier1

Handle axis 2

(axis selection 2)

Handle axis 1

(axis selection 1)

Rapid traverse

override


MP2 MP1 AZ AX ROV EDIT MD2 MD1

N0041

(0148)



tion enable

Zero point return

BDT1 ERS *SP2 *SP1 SBK CYCNT ZRN

N0042

(0150)

Program number

selection 4

Program number

selection 3

Program number

selection 2

Program number

selection 1

Program number

selection 0

Slide–out 1 start Return and start Start

PN4C PN3C PN2C PN1C PN0C ST2 ST1 ST

N0043

(0158)

Program number

selection 20

Program number

selection 10

Program number

selection 00

Program number

selection 9

Program number

selection 8

Program number

selection 7

Program number

selection 6

Program number

selection 5

PN20C PN10C PN00C PN9C PN8C PN7C PN6C PN5C

N0044

(0160)










N0045

(0168)

Spindle stop at

specified position

Spindle stop Program number

selection 40

Program number

selection 30

B function fin-ished



External position-

ing finished

ORC *SSTP PN40C PN30C BFIN MFIN TFIN G34F

N0046

(0170)

Operation with

spindle turned off

Spindle forward

inching 2

I3–I2 start Spindle servo–off I2–I3 start Optional blockskip 2

Spindle backward

inching

Spindle forward

inching

SLCK MCW2 JST32 SSVF JST23 BDT2 MCCW MCW

N0047

(0178)

User macro input7

User macro input6

User macro input5

User macro input4

User macro input3

User macro input2

User macro input1

User macro input0


(Continued)


For

con

trol

ling

the

seco

nd in

dexi

ng a

xis

Indexing position command tens digit indexing position command units digit

For

tw

o–pa

th c

ontr

ol


245


N0048

(0180)

User macro input15

User macro input14

User macro input13

User macro input12

User macro input11

User macro input10

User macro input9

User macro input8


N0049

(0188)










N0050

(0190)

Servo off Spindle gear Spindle torquelimit 1






SVF GR TL1 TL2 ORP11 ORP10 ORP9 ORP8

N0051

(0198)

–JOG feed +JOG feed Fourth auxiliary

function finished

Third auxiliary

function finished

Current limit com-mand

–JOG +JOG CFIN AFIN CLC

N0052

(01A0)








Second soft-

ware–based limit

enabled

BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 SLTS

N0053

(01A8)










N0054

(01B0)

Output coordinate

selection 3

Output coordinate

selection 2

Output coordinate

selection 1

Status output

axis selection 2

Status output

axis selection 1




POS3 POS2 POS1 AXS2 AXS1 BDT20 BDT19 BDT18

N0055

(01B8)

Spindle output

status 2

Spindle output

status 1

RCHHGA RCHA

N0056

(01C0)

Cs contour con-trol

CSON

N0057

(01C8)

Second spindle

servo–off

Second spindle

forward inching 2

Second spindle

backward inching

Second spindle

forward inching


position

Second spindlestop

Second spindle

output status 2

Second spindle

output status 1


N0058

(01D0)










N0059

(01D8)

Spindle synchro-nization control 2

Second spindle

torque limit 1

Second spindle

torque limit 2





SPSYC2 TL1B TL2B ORPB11 ORPB10 ORPB9 ORPB8

(01E0) Return enabled Start/reset andstart

General alarm Door open Full work No work Operating Reserved 1

PL8 PL7 PL6 PL5 PL4 PL3 PL2

(01E8) Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3 Reserved 2 Reserved 9

N0062

(01F0)

N0063

(01F8)

(Continued)


246


N0064

(0200)

N0065

(0208)

N0066

(0210)

N0067

(0218)

N0068

(0220)

N0069

(0228)

N0070

(0230)

N0071

(0238)

N0072

(0240)

N0073

(0248)

N0074

(0250)

N0075

(0258)

N0076

(0260)

N0077

(0268)

N0078

(0270)

N0079

(0278)

(Continued)

Reseved area


247


N0080

(0280)

N0081

(0288)

N0082

(0290)

N0083

(0298)

N0084

(02A0)

N0085

(02A8)

N0086

(02B0)

N0087

(02B8)

N0088

(02C0)

N0089

(02C8)

N0090

(02D0)

N0091

(02D8)

N0092

(02E0)

N0093

(02E8)

N0094

(02F0)

N0095

(02F8)

Note) Addresses from N0096 (0300) to N0254 (07F7) are also for the interface area for the operator’s panel.



248


N0256

(0800)


N0257

(0808)


N0258

(0810)

Compensation re-set

Jog clamp speed3

Jog clamp speed2

Jog clamp speed1



N0259

(0818)




N0260

(0820)

Mode handle

AXHNDA

N0261

(0828)

N0262

(0830)

N0263

(0838)

N0264

(0840)


N0265

(0848)


N0266

(0850)

Compensation re-set

Jog clamp speed3

Jog clamp speed2

Jog clamp speed1



N0267

(0858)




N0268

(0860)

Mode handle

AXHNDB

N0269

(0868)

N0270

(0870)

N0271

(0878)


For

con

trol

ling

the

third

inde

xing

axi

s

Indexing position command tens digit Indexing position command units digit


For

con

trol

ling

the

four

th in

dexi

ng a

xis

Indexing position command tens digit Indexing position command units digit


249

FANUC Series 18i–LNA M–NET interface (specification for lathes: output)7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

M0000

(0000)

Near the second

axis zero point

Near the first axis

zero point

Spindle speedzero

Spindle normal Battery alarm Overtravel alarm NC alarm Servo ready

NZZ NZX ZS0 SRDY BTAL OTAL NCAL SA

M0001

(0008)

Offset finished Slide–out 1–in–progress


Automatic opera-

tion started


I1 flag point In–tolerance Zero point return

finished

FINC ST2L ST1L STL OP I1 ITOL ZPM

M0002

(0010)

T function strobe1

T code data 8 T code data 4 T code data 2 T code data 1 Spindle at speci-

fied position


Maximum offset

reached

TF1 T18C T14C T12C T11C ORE OFS0 OMAX

M0003

(0018)

M code data 20 M code data 10 M code data 8 M code data 4 M code data 2 M code data 1 Tool changeinstruction

I2 flag point

M22C M21C M18C M14C M12C M11C M06 I2

M0004

(0020)

PSW function 5 PSW function 4 PSW function 3 PSW function 2 PSW function 1 First M function

strobe

M code data 80 M code data 40

PSW5 PSW4 PSW3 PSW2 PSW1 MF1 M28C M24C

M0005

(0028)

T code data 20 T code data 10 B function strobe2

B function strobe1

B code data 8 B code data 4 B code data 2 B code data 1

T22C T21C BF2 BF1 B18C B14C B12C B11C

M0006

(0030)

Spindle stop atspecified position

mode

Program end 2 B code data 80 B code data 40 B code data 20 B code data 10 T code data 80 T code data 40

M19 M35 B28C B24C B22C B21C T28C T24C

M0007

(0038)

I3 flag point T function strobe2

Spindle enable Current limitreached

Axis clamp alarm External position-

ing alarm

External position-

ing finished

I3 TF2 SENB CLRCH AXCAL EPAL G34E

M0008

(0040)










M0009

(0048)










M0010

(0050)

Spindle current

limit reached

PSW function 10 PSW function 9 PSW function 8 PSW function 7 PSW function 6 Fourth auxiliary

function strobe

Third auxiliary

function strobe

SCLR PSW10 PSW9 PSW8 PSW7 PSW6 CF AF

M0011

(0058)

Third auxiliary

function code 80

Third auxiliary

function code 40

Third auxiliary

function code 20

Third auxiliary

function code 10

Third auxiliary

function code 8

Third auxiliary

function code 4

Third auxiliary

function code 2

Third auxiliary

function code 1


M0012

(0060)

Fourth auxiliary

function code 80

Fourth auxiliary

function code 40

Fourth auxiliary

function code 20

Fourth auxiliary

function code 10

Fourth auxiliary

function code 8

Fourth auxiliary

function code 4

Fourth auxiliary

function code 2

Fourth auxiliary

function code 1


M0013

(0068)

Second M func-

tion code 80

Second M func-

tion code 40

Second M func-

tion code 20

Second M func-

tion code 10

Second M func-

tion code 8

Second M func-

tion code 4

Second M func-

tion code 2

Second M func-

tion code 1


M0014

(0070)

Third M function

code 80

Third M function

code 40

Third M function

code 20

Third M function

code 10

Third M function

code 8

Third M function

code 4

Third M function

code 2

Third M function

code 1


M0015

(0078)

Error code output28

Error code output24

Error code output22

Error code output21

Error code output18

Error code output14

Error code output12

Error code output11


(Continued)


250


M0016

(0080)

Error code output48

Error code output44

Error code output42

Error code output41

Error code output38

Error code output34

Error code output32

Error code output31


M0017

(0088)

Error code output68

Error code output64

Error code output62

Error code output61

Error code output58

Error code output54

Error code output52

Error code output51


M0018

(0090)



M0019

(0098)


PSW20 PSW19

M0020

(00A0)

Third M function

strobe

Second M func-

tion strobe

Cs contour con-



MF3 MF2 FSCSL FSPSY

M0021

(00A8)










M0022

(00B0)










M0023

(00B8)










M0024

(00C0)










M0025

(00C8)

Tolerance status

indication 3

Tolerance status

indication 2

Tolerance status

indication 1

YA3 YA2 YA1

M0026

(00D0)


piration


mand

Data transfer er-ror flag

Data transfercontrol flag B

LIFOVR RCHPA CTRER CTRFB

M0027

(00D8)

Second spindle

at specified posi-

tion


reached

Second spindle

enable


Second spindle

speed zero

Second spindle

normal

OREB SCLRB SENBB RCHPB ZS0B SRDYB

M0028

(00E0)

M0029

(00E8)

M0030

(00F0)

M0031

(00F8)

(Continued)

Data transfer area

For

dat

a tr

ansf

er


251


M0032

(0100)

M0033

(0108)

M0034

(0110)

M0035

(0118)

M0036

(0120)

M0037

(0128)

M0038

(0130)

M0039

(0138)

M0040

(0140)

M0041

(0148)

M0042

(0150)

M0043

(0158)

M0044

(0160)


M0045

(0168)


M0046

(0170)



M0047

(0178)

Position output15

Position output14

Position output13

Position output12

Position output11

Position output10



(Continued)

Data transfer area


For

con

trol

ling

the

first

inde

xing

axi

s



252


M0048

(0180)

Torque limitreached

Indexing com-

pensation 0

External position-

ing finished


M0049

(0188)

M0050

(0190)

M0051

(0198)

M0052

(01A0)

M0053

(01A8)


M0054

(01B0)


M0055

(01B8)



M0056

(01C0)

Position output15

Position output14

Position output13

Position output12

Position output11

Position output10



M0057

(01C8)

Torque limitreached

Indexing com-

pensation 0

External position-

ing finished


M0058

(01D0)

M0059

(01D8)

M0060

(01E0)

M0061

(01E8)

M0062

(01F0)

Near the second

axis origin

Near the first axisorigin

Spindle speedzero

Spindle normal Battery alarm Overtravel alarm NC alarm Servo ready

NZZ NZX ZS0 SRDY BTAL OTAL NCAL SA

M0063

(01F8)

Offset completion Slide–out 1–in–progress


Automatic opera-

tion started


I1 flag point In–tolerance Zero point return

finished

FINC ST2L ST1L STL OP I1 ITOL ZPM

(Continued)


For

con

trol

ling

the

seco

nd in

dexi

ng a

xis

In–position output tens digit In–position outpu units digit

For

tw

o–pa

th c

ontr

ol


253

FANUC Series 18i–LNA M–NET interface (specification for lathes: output)7 6m 5 4 3 2 1 0

M0064

(0200)

T function strobe1

T code data 8 T code data 4 T code data 2 T code data 1 Spindle at speci-

fied position

Offset clearcompletion

Maximum offset

reached

TF1 T18C T14C T12C T11C ORE OFS0 OMAX

M0065

(0208)

M code data 20 M code data 10 M code data 8 M code data 4 M code data 2 M code data 1 Tool changeinstruction

I2 flag point

M22C M21C M18C M14C M12C M11C M06 I2

M0066

(0210)

PSW function 5 PSW function 4 PSW function 3 PSW function 2 PSW function 1 First M function

strobe

M code data 80 M code data 40

PSW5 PSW4 PSW3 PSW2 PSW1 MF1 M28C M24C

M0067

(0218)

T code data 20 T code data 10 B function strobe2

B function strobe1

B code data 8 B code data 4 B code data 2 B code data 1

T22C T21C BF2 BF1 B18C B14C B12C B11C

M0068

(0220)

Spindle stop atspecified position

mode

Program end 2 B code data 80 B code data 40 B code data 20 B code data 10 T code data 80 T code data 40

M19 M35 B28C B24C B22C B21C T28C T24C

M0069

(0228)

I3 flag point T function strobe2

Spindle enable Current limitreached

Axis clamp alarm External position-

ing alarm

External position-

ing finished

I3 TF2 SENB CLRCH AXCAL EPAL G34E

M0070

(0230)










M0071

(0238)










M0072

(0240)

Spindle current

limit reached

PSW function 10 PSW function 9 PSW function 8 PSW function 7 PSW function 6 Fourth auxiliary

function strobe

Third auxiliary

function strobe

SCLR PSW10 PSW9 PSW8 PSW7 PSW6 CF AF

M0073

(0248)

Third auxiliary

function code 80

Third auxiliary

function code 40

Third auxiliary

function code 20

Third auxiliary

function code 10

Third auxiliary

function code 8

Third auxiliary

function code 4

Third auxiliary

function code 2

Third auxiliary

function code 1


M0074

(0250)

Fourth auxiliary

function code 80

Fourth auxiliary

function code 40

Fourth auxiliary

function code 20

Fourth auxiliary

function code 10

Fourth auxiliary

function code 8

Fourth auxiliary

function code 4

Fourth auxiliary

function code 2

Fourth auxiliary

function code 1


M0075

(0258)

Second M func-

tion code 80

Second M func-

tion code 40

Second M func-

tion code 20

Second M func-

tion code 10

Second M func-

tion code 8

Second M func-

tion code 4

Second M func-

tion code 2

Second M func-

tion code 1


M0076

(0260)

Third M function

code 80

Third M function

code 40

Third M function

code 20

Third M function

code 10

Third M function

code 8

Third M function

code 4

Third M function

code 2

Third M function

code 1


M0077

(0268)

Error code output28

Error code output24

Error code output22

Error code output21

Error code output18

Error code output14

Error code output12

Error code output11


M0078

(0270)

Error code output48

Error code output44

Error code output42

Error code output41

Error code output38

Error code output34

Error code output32

Error code output31


M0079

(0278)

Error code output68

Error code output64

Error code output62

Error code output61

Error code output58

Error code output54

Error code output52

Error code output51


(Continued)


254


M0080

(0280)



M0081

(0288)


PSW20 PSW19

M0082

(0290)

Third M function

strobe

Second M func-

tion strobe

Cs contour con-



2

MF3 MF2 FSCSL FSPSY2

M0083

(0298)










M0084

(02A0)










M0085

(02A8)










M0086

(02B0)










M0087

(02B8)

Tolerance status

indication 3

Tolerance status

indication 2

Tolerance status

indication 1

YA3 YA2 YA1

M0088

(02C0)


piration

LIFOVR

M0089

(02C8)

Second spindle

at specified posi-

tion


reached

Second spindle

enable


Second spindle

speed zero

Second spindle

normal

OREB SCLRB SENBB RCHPB ZS0B SRDYB

(02D0) Individual Continuous Reserved 2 Reserved 1 Continuation off Start/reset andstart

Return Execution

SSW2 SSW1 PB4 PB3 PB2 PB1

(02D8) Axis selectionSixth axis

Axis selectionFifth axis

Reserved 8 Reserved 7 Reserved 6 Reserved 5 Reserved 4 Reserved 3

H6 H5

(02E0) Axis selection1/2 path

Magnifier×100

Magnifier×10

Magnifier×1

Axis selectionB

Axis selectionZ

Axis selectionY

Axis selectionX

SEL2 X100 X10 X1 HB HZ HY HX

M0093

(02E8)

M0094

(02F0)

M0095

(02F8)

(Continued)


255


M0096

(0300)

M0097

(0308)

M0098

(0310)

M0099

(0318)

M0100

(0320)

M0101

(0328)

M0102

(0330)

M0103

(0338)

M0104

(0340)

M0105

(0348)

M0106

(0350)

M0107

(0358)

M0108

(0360)

M0109

(0368)

M0110

(0370)

M0111

(0378)

(Continued)

Reserved area


256


M0112

(0380)

M0113

(0388)

M0114

(0390)

M0115

(0398)

M0116

(03A0)

M0117

(03A8)

M0118

(03B0)

M0119

(03B8)

M0120

(03C0)

M0121

(03C8)

M0122

(03D0)

M0123

(03D8)

M0124

(03E0)

M0125

(03E8)

M0126

(03F0)

M0127

(03F8)

Note) Addresses from M0128 (0400) to M0254 (07F7) are also for the interface area for the operator’s panel.



257


M0256

(0800)


M0257

(0808)


M0258

(0810)



M0259

(0818)

Position output15

Position output14

Position output13

Position output12

Position output11

Position output10



M0260

(0820)

Torque limitreached

Indexing com-

pensation 0

External position-

ing finished


M0261

(0828)

M0262

(0830)

M0263

(0838)

M0264

(0840)

M0265

(0848)


M0266

(0850)


M0267

(0858)



M0268

(0860)

Position output15

Position output14

Position output13

Position output12

Position output11

Position output10



M0269

(0868)

Torque limitreached

Indexing com-

pensation 0

External position-

ing finished


M0270

(0870)

M0271

(0878)


For

con

trol

ling

the

third

inde

xing

axi

s



For

con

trol

ling

the

four

th in

dexi

ng a

xis



258

FANUC Series 18i–LNA M–NET interface (specification for lathes: direct input)7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

(X0007/

X1004)

Skip signal Parameter write

protection

Skip signal#2 Parameter write

protection#2

SKIP PWES SKIP#2 PWES#2

(X0008/

X1008)

Emergencystop#2

Emergency stop

*ESP#2 *ESP

(X0009/

X1034)

Spindle output

status 2

Spindle output

status 1

RCHHGA RCHA




”X0009.0 and 1” and ”N0016.0 and 1.”

FANUC Series 18i–LNA M–NET interface (specification for lathes: direct input)7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

(Y0007/

Y1034)

PMC operating Spindle outputchangeover com-

mand

Servo ready#2 Servo ready

PMCRUN RCHPA SA#2 SA




”Y0007.2 to 5 and 7” and ”M0026.0 to 5 and 7.”4 PMCRUN (Y0007.6) is effective only when the built–in PMC

is used.


259

NOTEThe addresses indicated at the top are for path 1, whilethose at the bottom are for path 2.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

K00

K10Use of fourth

axisHigh–speed

MSTSpindle cut Use of Z–axis

(3rd axis)Use of Y–axis

(2nd axis)Use of X–axis

(1st axis)

P.4AIS P.HMST P.SLCK P.ZAIS P.YAIS P.XAIS

Explanation

Bit Symbol Explanation

K00.0K10.0

P.XAIS Set this bit to 1 when using the X–axis (first axis).

K00.1K10.1

P.YAIS Set this bit to 1 when using the Y–axis (second axis).

K00.2K10.2

P.ZAIS Set this bit to 1 when using the Z–axis (third axis). For special machine specification only.

K00.3K10.3

Not to be used

K00.4K10.4

P.SLCK Set this bit to 1 when performing a spindle cutting operation.

K00.5K10.5

P.HMST Set this bit to 1 when using the high–speed MST function. NC parameter setting is also required.Setting this bit to 1 speeds up the interface between the NC and PMC.

K00.6K10.6

P.4AIS Set this bit to 1 when using the fourth axis. For special machine specification only.

K00.7K10.7

Not to be used

5.5DETAILS OF THEPMC PARAMETERSFOR M–NETINTERFACECONTROL

5.5.1Keep Relay Setting


260

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

K01

K11

No clamp atreference

position return

Toolcompensation

memoryselection

Spindleswitchingmethod

selection 2

Spindleswitchingmethod

selection 1

Fourth axisservo–off

Z–axis servo–off

Y–axisservo–off

X–axisservo–off

P.NCZR P.INC0 P.SPD2 P.SPD1 P.SVF4 P.SVFZ P.SVFY P.SVFX

Explanation


K01.0K11.0

P.SVFX Set this bit to 1 when enabling the servo–off function for the X–axis (first axis).

K01.1K11.1

P.SVFY Set this bit to 1 when enabling the servo–off function for the Y–axis (second axis).

K01.2K11.2

P.SVFZ Set this bit to 1 when enabling the servo–off function for the Z–axis (third axis). For special ma-chine specification only.

K01.3K11.3

P.SVF4 Set this bit to 1 when enabling the servo–off function for the fourth axis. For special machinespecification only.

K01.4K11.4

K01.5K11.5

P.SPD1

P.SPD2

Selection of a spindle output switching method

P.SPD1 P.SPD2 Function 0 0 Spindle output switching is not used. 0 1 Switching is performed according to the speed detection signal. The speed

level is set in a serial spindle parameter. 1 0 Switching to the speed set with keep relays K02 and K03 is per formed. 1 1 Spindle output switching is not used.

K01.6K11.6

P.INCO This bit sets the method used for selecting tool compensation memory.Setting this bit to 0 allows ten memory areas to be selected with a binary code consisting of theDI signals INC1 to INC4.Setting this bit to 1 allows six memory areas to be selected with DI signals INC1 to INC6.

K01.7K11.7

P.NCZR Set this bit to 1 to prevent clamping after reference position return caused by DI signal ZRN whenthe fourth–axis unclamp/clamp function is used (keep relays K4.4/K14.4 = 1).Available only for special machine specification.


261

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

K02

K12

Spindle output switching speed: Lower 8 bits

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

K03

K13

Spindle output switching speed: Upper 8 bits

ExplanationThese keep relays are valid when keep relay K1.4/K11.4 is set to 1, andkeep relay K1.5/K11.5 is set to 0. These keep relays set the switchingspeed with a binary value. The PMC compares the NC spindle commandwith the value set in these keep relays and performs spindle outputswitching.If, for example, the switching speed is 1000 min–1 (3E8H in binary code),then these keep relays are set as follows:

0 0 0 0(0)

0 0 1 1(3)

Set in K03/K13

1 1 1 0(E)

1 0 0 0(8)

Set in K02/K12


262

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

K04

K14

JOG override

Orientationposition setting

All–axismachine lock

Fourth axisclamp function

Parameter forlow–speed

spindleoperation

Mode selectionswitching

M30reset

Orientationre–output

P.JGOV P.EORM P.MLCK P.CLMP P.GR2 P.SMOD P.M30R P.ORST

Explanation


K04.0K14.0

P.ORST Set this bit to 1 when turning on the orientation completion signal again after the emergency stopstate entered at the time of spindle orientation completion is released. In this case, appropriatevalues must be set in timer Nos. 22, 24, and 25/ Nos. 45, 47, and 48.

K04.1K14.1

P.M30R Set this bit to 1 when performing a reset as soon as M30 is executed, without waiting for DI signalMFIN.

K04.2K14.2

P.SMOD This bit selects a mode when the DI signals MD1 and MD2 are 1.To set JOG mode, set this bit to 0.To set memory operation mode, set this bit to 1.

K04.3K14.3

P.GR2 This bit allows the switching of spindle control parameters when the spindle output switchingfunction is used. The relationship between gear selection signal GR, spindle characteristics, andselected parameters is as follows:

Spindle output Selected parameter Selected parameter GR characteristic (normal operation) (orientation rigid tapping)

0 High speed HIGH MEDIUM LOW (LOW)0 Low speed HIGH LOW (LOW)1 High speed HIGH HIGH (HIGH)1 Low speed HIGH MEDIUM HIGH (HIGH)

K04.4K14.4

P.CLMP Set this bit to 1 when using the fourth–axis unclamp/clamp function.Available only for special machine specification.

K04.5K14.5

P.MLCK Set this bit to 1 when using all–axis machine lock control by M26 and M27.

K04.6K14.6

P.EORM When performing spindle orientation with the stop position set externally, set this bit to 1 to useM25 to change the stop position to macro output.When this bit is set to 1, the spindle stop detection signal (parallel DO) is output by spindle speedzero and spindle load level arrival detection.Available only for special machine specification.

K04.7K14.7

P.JGOV Set this bit to 0 to always set the JOG feedrate override to 100%.When selecting an override value by using DI signals MP1 and MP2, set this bit to 1. In thiscase, the override value is set as follows:

MP1 MP2 Override value1 1 100%1 0 100%0 1 10%0 0 1%


263

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

K05

K15

Two–pathsetting

Second spindleorientation nogear change

Second spindleorientation re–output

Direct DI/DOswitching

Orientationno gearchange

Follow–up

P.TTSP P.SPOB P.ORSB P.SDIO P.SPOR P.FWUP

Explanation


K05.0K15.0

P.FWUP Set this bit to 0 when follow–up operation is not performed in the servo–off state. Set this bit to 1to perform follow–up operation.

K05.1K15.1

P.SPOR Set this bit to 0 to perform spindle orientation by switching to low–speed winding when thespindle output switching function is used. When this bit is set to 1, spindle orientation is per-formed with the currently selected winding.K05.2

K05.2

For path 2, nosetting is made.

P.SDIO For the built–in PMC, set this bit to 0 when assigning the following signals to M0016.0 to M0016.5(input) and N0026.2 to N0026.5 and N0026.7 (output):I/O signal Input : RCHA, RCHHGA, *IT4, SVF4, EUCLPB, ECLPB

Output : RCHPA, MOVE4, UCLPB, CLPB, SPSTDTSet this bit to 1 when assigning these signals to X0009.0 to X0009.5 (input) and Y0007.2 toY0007.5 and Y0007.7 (output).

K05.3K15.3

P.ORSB Set this bit to 1 when turning on the orientation completion signal again after the emergency stopstate, set at spindle orientation completion for the second spindle, is released. In this case, ap-propriate values must be set in timer Nos. 30, 31, and 32/Nos. 53, 54, and 55.

K05.5K15.5

P.SPOB Set this bit to 0 to perform spindle orientation by switching to the low–speed winding when thespindle output switching function is used for the second spindle. When this bit is set to 1, spindleorientation is performed with the currently selected winding.

K05.7

For path 2, nosetting is made.

P.TTSP For a two–path machine, set this bit to 1. For other machines, set this bit to 0.


264

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

K06

K16

Cs contouraxis selection

2


1


0

Simplesynchronouscontrol axisselection 2



P.CSA2 P.CSA1 P.CSA0 P.SYN2 P.SYN1 P.SYN0

Explanation


K06.0

K06.1

K06.2For path 2, no

setting is made.

P.SYN0

P.SYN1

P.SYN2

These bits set the slave axis for simple synchronous control.

P.SYN2 P.SYN1 P.SYN0 Slave axis0 0 0 Invalid0 0 1 1st axis0 1 0 2nd axis0 1 1 3rd axis1 0 0 4th axis

K06.3K16.3

K06.4K16.4

K06.5K16.5

P.CSA0

P.CSA1

P.CSA2

These bits set the Cs contour control axis.

P.CSA2 P.CSA1 P.CSA0 Cs axis0 0 0 Invalid0 0 1 1st axis0 1 0 2nd axis0 1 1 3rd axis1 0 0 4th axis


265

All the timers described in this subsection have an increment system of8 ms. The minimum value that can be set for each timer is 0 ms unlessotherwise noted.

NOTEThe upper timer No. is for path 1, and the lower timer No.(equal to the upper timer No. plus 23) is for path 2.

TMR11

TMR34

Feed delay timer for reference position returnWhen reference position return is performed by DI signal ZRN, the start of axis feed operation is delayed. As theZRN signal state changes, the NC performs a reset. Setting this timer prevents any axis move command frombeing issued during reset processing. Set a value of 32 or more.

Standard setting: 32

TMR12TMR13TMR14

TMR35TMR36TMR37

T code output delay timerTF2 output delay timerTF1/TF2 off delay timer

Txx M06; sequence

Txx; M06; sequence

Txx M06; M06; sequence

Set these timers according to the application.

T∆x Txx

TMR12

T CODE

M06

TF2

TFIN

TMR13

Txx M06;

T∆x Txx

TMR12

T CODE

M06

TF2

TFIN

TMR13

T∆x Txx

TMR12 TMR13TMR14

TF1

Txx; M06;

T∆x Txx

TMR12

T CODE

M06

TF2

TFIN

TMR13

Txx M06; M06;

5.5.2Timers


266

TMR15TMR16

TMR38TMR39

B code output delay timerBF2 output delay timer


B∆x Bxx

TMR15

B CODE

BF1

BF2

BFIN

TMR16

Bxx;

TMR17

TMR40

MF1 output delay timer (first M code strobe signal)


MxxM CODE

MF1

MFIN

TMR17

Mxx;

TMR18

TMR41

AF output delay timer


AxxA CODE

AF

AFIN

TMR18

Axx;

TMR19

TMR42

Spindle orientation completion output delay timer 1Set the time from when the NC detects the completion of spindle orientation internally until the DO signal ORE(spindle orientation completion signal) is turned on.

Standard setting: 0

TMR29

TMR52

Second–spindle orientation completion output delay timer 1Set the time from when the NC detects the completion of spindle orientation internally until the DO signal OREB(second–spindle orientation completion signal) is turned on.

Standard setting: 0


267

TMR20

TMR43

CF output delay timer


CxxC CODE

CF

CFIN

TMR20

Cxx;

TMR21

TMR44

Rigid mode start delay timerThis delay timer is used to wait until spindle excitation is stabilized at the start of rigid mode. Parameter No. 4099of the NC has the same meaning as this timer. Set 400 (standard setting) in parameter No. 4099, and set 0 in thistimer.

Standard setting: 0

TMR22

TMR45

Spindle orientation completion check timer 1When the emergency stop state entered at spindle orientation completion has been released, the NC may not de-tect the spindle orientation completion state even after the time set in this timer elapses. In such a case, spindleorientation mode is released.This timer is valid when the keep relay K4.0/K14.0 is set to 1.


TMR30

TMR53

Second–spindle orientation completion check timer 1When the emergency stop state entered at spindle orientation completion for the second spindle has been re-leased, the NC may not detect the spindle orientation completion state even after the time set in this timer elapses.In such a case, spindle orientation mode is released.This timer is valid when the keep relay K5.3/K15.3 is set to 1.


TMR23

TMR46

M25 spindle orientation start delay timerSetting keep relay K4.6/K14.6 to 1 allows spindle orientation to be performed by M25. This timer delays the start ofspindle orientation operation by M25.

Standard setting: 0

TMR24TMR25

TMR47TMR48

Spindle orientation completion check timer 2Spindle orientation completion check timer 3

When there is a time difference in emergency stop input between the spindle amplifier and NC, the DO signal ORE(spindle orientation completion signal) may not be turned on again after the emergency stop state entered at thetime of spindle orientation completion is released. These timers are used to absorb this time difference.These timers are valid when keep relay K4.0/K14.0 is set to 1.


TMR31TMR32

TMR54TMR55

Second–spindle orientation completion check timer 2Second–spindle orientation completion check timer 3

When there is a time difference in emergency stop input between the spindle amplifier and NC, the DO signalOREB (second–spindle orientation completion signal) may not be turned on again after the emergency stop stateentered at the time of spindle orientation completion is released. These timers are used to absorb this time differ-ence.These timers are valid when the keep relay K5.3/K15.3 is set to 1.



268

TMR26

TMR49

Spindle orientation completion output delay timer 2Set the time from the release of the emergency stop state entered at spindle orientation competion until the DOsignals ORE (spindle orientation completion signal) and OREB (second–spindle orientation completion signal) areturned on again. Set these timers when ORE and OREB are not to be turned on unless the spindle and servo mo-tor are excited after the emergency stop state is released. These timers are valid when keep relays K4.0/K14.0 and K5.3/K15.3 are set to 1.


TMR27

TMR50

MF2 output delay timer (second M code strobe signal)


MyyM CODE

MF2

MFIN

TMR27

Mxx Myy;

TMR28

TMR51

MF3 output delay timer (third M code strobe signal)


MzzM CODE

MF3

MFIN

TMR28

Mxx Myy Mzz;

B–63395EN/01 5. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

269

The 18i–LNA simultaneously processes two sequence programs: thatprovided by the machine tool builder, and that (M–NET converter) thatconverts the CNC interface to an M–NET interface. (When a built–inPLC is used, a dummy sequence program provided by FANUC is usedinstead of the machine tool builder’s sequence program.)PMC operations are performed on the screen specific to a sequenceprogram of the machine tool builder or separately on the screen specificto the M–NET converter.When the screen is switched from the CNC screen to the PMC screen, thePMC screen for operating the machine tool builder’s sequence programis displayed. To switch to the PMC screen for the M–NET converter,press the cursor keys (<> and <>) on the PMC control system menuscreen. By turning off K909.1 of the sequence program of the machinetool builder timer, the display of the PMC screen for the M–NETconverter can be disabled.

CNCscreen

PMC screen for operating

a sequence program of

the machine tool builder

PMC screen for M–NET

interface control

PMCLAD

PMCDGN

PMCPRM

RUN/STOP

EDIT

I/O

SYSPRM

MONIT

PMCPRM

(Switching is disabled by setting K909.1 to 0.)

<> key

<> key

On the PMC screen for the M–NET converter, only the display and settingof the PMC parameters for M–NET interface control are allowed. In thelower–right corner of the PMC screen for the M–NET converter, ”PRG2”is displayed.

5.6PMC SCREEN

5. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–63395EN/01

270

The PMC parameters for M–NET interface control are input/outputtogether with CNC parameters. When CNC parameters are output duringnormal operation, the PMC parameters for M–NET converter control areoutput at the same time.


271

(1)Press the SYS key.

(2)Pressing the soft key [PMC] displays the PMC screen for operating amachine tool builder’s sequence program with the following soft keys:

[ ] [ ]

PMC parameter screen

PMC I/O signal state display

Dynamic sequence program display

(1)Press the SYS key.

(2)Pressing the soft key [PMC] displays the PMC screen for a machinetool builder’s sequence program.

(3)Pressing the cursor key <> displays the PMC screen for the M–NETconverter with the soft keys shown below. (In the lower–right cornerof the screen, ”PRG2” is displayed.)

PMC parameter screen

5.6.1Display Method

Display of the PMCscreen for operating amachine tool builder’ssequence program

Display of the PMCscreen for the M–NETconverter


272

Press soft key [PMCLAD], and a sequence program is displayeddynamically and operation monitoring can be confirmed :

LADDER NET 0001–0004

LOG1

TOP BOTTOM SRCH

Number of net displayed

CommentMONIT RUN

LOG1

LOG1

X008.4 *ESP

PORD POR

END1

ALWAYS1

EMERGENCY

POWER ON

STOP

RESET

W–SRCH N–SRCH

Ladder display

F–SCRH ADRESS

Other soft keys

SYMBOL

Switched eachtime pressed

RUN/STOP status

1. Low brightness display Contacts :open Relay :off

2. High brightness display Contacts : closed Relay : on

1. Use the cursor keys or the page keys PAGE

PAGE

to change

display positions.

2. [TOP]:Searches top of ladder.

3. [BOTTOM]:Search bottom of ladder.

4. Address.bit,[SRCH] or Signal name, [SRCH]5. Address.bit,[W–SRCH] or Signal name ,[W–SRCH]6. Net no. [N–SRCH]:Ladder is displayed from the specified net.

7. Functional instruction no. [F–SRCH] or Functional instruction name[F–SRCH]

8. [ADRESS]:Signal is displayed by address and bit no.

9. [SYMBOL]:Signal is displayed by signal name (symbol).(If symbol is not registered at program preparation time, the addressof the signal is displayed).

5.6.2PMCLAD Screen(Only a machine toolbuilder’s sequenceprogram)

Contents displayed

Search method


273

[Remarks]

⋅ The search function searches a signal in the forward direction anddisplays the ladder with the searched signal at its head. Because theremay exist plural contacts, repeat the search operation to find plurallocations, repeat the search operation to find plural locations with thespecified signal.

⋅ If a specified signal is not found up to the end of the program (ladder),execution returns to the head of a program and search continues.

Ladder diagram and signal status dump can displayed together.The dump is displayed over 2 lines at the last line of ladder diagram bypressing the [DUMP] soft key.

PAGE

PAGE

keys or [SEARCH] soft key is used for changing of PMC

address.

The [DUMP] soft key has the follwing functions.

(1) [BYTE]: Byte type display (1 BYTE)“G0000 00 14 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00”“G0016 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00”

(2) [WORD] : Word type display (2 BYTE)“G0000 1400 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000”“G0016 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000”

(3) [D.WORD]: Long word type display (4 BYTE) “G0000 00001400 00000001 00000000 00000000”

“G0016 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000”

The value of parameter of a functional instruction is displayed in thefunctional instruction of a ladder diagram.

The function of the soft key is as follows:

(1) [DPARA] : The value of parameter is displayed in functional instruction.

(2) [NDPARA] : The value of parameter is not displayed in functionalinstruction.

Dump display on ladderdiagram

Parameter display onladder diagram


274

Press soft key [PMCDGN] then PMC’s diagnostic screen is displayed.

The title data registered when a ladder program is prepared is displayed.

SERIES : 406A EDITION : 08

PMC TITLE DATA #1

TITLE STATUS ALARM

MONIT RUN

TRACE

M.SRCH

Other soft keys

PMC PROGRAM NO. :

EDITION NO. :PMC CONTROL PROGRAM

MEMORY USED : KBLADDER :

SYMBOL

MESSAGE

SCAN TIME

: KB

KB

:

: MSEC

KB

Page number

PMC TYPE CONTROL : RB6 PROGRAM : RB6

SCAN MAX : 016 MS MIN : 008 MS

1st page PMC PROGRAM NO. :EDITION NO. :

PMC CONTROL PROGRAMSERIES : EDITION : Series and edition of PMC

control softwareMEMORY USED : KBLADDER : KBSYMBOL : KBMESSAGE : KBSCAN TIME : MSEC

Memory used and execution time is displayed.

ÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄÄÄÄÄ

Set when PMCis prepared

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

ÄÄ ÄÄ

5.6.3PMCDGN Screen(Only a machine toolbuilder’s sequenceprogram)

TITLE screen


275

On/Off state of input/output signals and internal relay is displayed.

PMC SIGNAL STATUS

SEARCH

MONIT RUN

Signalname

ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0G0000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8G0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0G0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

G0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FING0004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Signal state0:Off1:On

Signal statereverses for signals with *.0: On1: Off

[Search Method]• Page key :Forward and Backward by screen• Cursor key :Forward and Backward by diagnostic number• To search a specified address or signal name, input an address number

or signal name and press [SEARCH].

Displays an alarm generated in PMC.

PMC ALARM MESSAGE

TITLE STATUS ALARM

MONIT RUN

TRACE

Alarm dis-play

ER32 NO I/O DEVICE

ALM Blinked

For detailsof alarms,refer toAppendix2 List ofAlarms.

STATUS screen

Alarm screen


276

Every time a specified signal changes, the signal status is memorized inthe trace memory. This function is useful for identifying intermittenttroubles.

1 Trace parameter screen

PMC SIGNAL TRACE

T.DISP EXEC

MONIT RUN

Changes to a trace memory display screen (Screen onthe next page)

TRACE MODE :

(0:1BYTE/1:2BYTE/2:WORD)

1STTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION

ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)

ADDRESS :MASK DATA :

2NDTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION

ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)

ADDRESS :

MASK DATA :

Select each item by cursor key

a. TRACE MODE: Select the trace mode0=Records changes of 1–byte signals1=Records changes of independent 2–byte signals2=Records changes of consecutive 2–byte signals

b. ADDRESS TYPE: 0=PMC address is used for tracing address.1=Physical address is used for tracing address.(Mainly used for C–language program)

c. ADDRESS:Set a tracing address.

d. MASK DATA: The bits to be traced are specified by a hexadecimalnumber (2 digits).For example, to trace the signals at bit 7,6,5 and 0, set E1(hexadecimal) to MASK DATA.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0E1% 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1However, even if bit 4,3,2 and 1 changes, tracing (memoryregistration) cannot be done but signal status is memorized when atracing is executed.[Correspondence of binary and hexadecimal number]

00002 : 016 00012 : 116 00102 : 216 00112 : 31601002 : 416 01012 : 516 01102 : 616 01112 : 71610002 : 816 10012 : 916 10102 : A16 10112 : B1611002 : C16 11012 : D16 11102 : E16 11112 : F16

TRACE screen


277

2 Trace memory contents display screen

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

PMC SIGNAL TRACE

TRCPRM

MONIT RUN

Trace addressand maskdata(in pa-rentheses)

1ST ADDRESS=X008(E1)

NO.000000010002000300040005000600070008

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0. . . . . . . .I * * * * * * *I I * * * * * ** I * * * * * *. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .

2ND ADDRESS=G000(FF)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0. . . . . . . .* * * * * * * ** * * * * * * ** * * * * * * *. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .

STOP

Latest statusI mark : 1* mark : 0

a. Soft key [TRCPRM]:Return to the trace parameter setting screen(screen of previous page)

b. Soft key [EXEC]: Starts tracing.Trace memory is cleared and each time aspecified signal changes, its status is recorded.Trace memory is 256 bytes and if tracing isexecuted 128 times by 2–byte tracing, tracingis executed again from the head of memory.

c. Soft key [STOP]: Ends the tracing.

*The tracing parameters are held even if the power is turned off.

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

#7k017

#6ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#5 0 : Tracing starts by [EXEC].

1 : Tracing starts automatically after power on


278

1) Pressing the [M.SRCH] soft key changes the screen to that shown inFig. 5.6.4. The displayed soft keys also change.

2) Enter a physical address in hexadecimal from which the contents of thememory are to be displayed. Then pressing the [SEARCH] keydisplays 256 byte of stored data starting from the specified address.

Example) Enter 100000, then pressing the [SEARCH] keydisplaysthe contents of the memory starting from 100000H.

3) An address can be changed using the PAGE

or PAGE

key.

4) Pressing either the [BYTE], [WORD], or [D.WORD] soft keydisplays data of the corresponding type.If an address at which the memory is not used is specified, a systemerror occurs.

To store data in memory, set bit 4 of keep relay K17 to 1, move the cursorto a position at which the address of the data to be changed in RAM isdisplayed, and enter data in units of data type in hexadecimal.

Example) Entering 0F41, then pressing the ENTER key stores

0F41 at the address specified by the cursor

INPUTSEARCH

PMC CONTENTS OF MEMORY MONIT RUN

100000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................100010 4142 4344 4546 4748 494A 4B4C 4D4E 4F50 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP100020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 100030 5152 5354 5556 5758 595A 2020 2020 2020 QRSTUVWXYZ

100040 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................ 100050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................ 100060 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................ 100070 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................

100080 4641 4E55 4320 434F 2E2C 5444 0000 0000 FANUC CO.LTD.... 100090 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................ 1000A0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................ 1000B0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................

1000C0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................ 1000D0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................ 1000E0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................ 1000F0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................

Fig. 5.6.4

5.6.4Memory Display(M.SRCH)

Display of Screen andOperation

Function of storememory


279

1 Place the system in MDI mode or the emergency stop state.

2 Set the parameter write protection signal to 0 and “Parameter Write”in the setting screen to 1.

3 Press any of the following soft keys to select the corresponding displayscreen.

[TIMER] : Timer screen[KEEPRL] : Keep relay screen

4 Press the cursor keys to position the cursor to the desired number.

5 Specify data using numeric keys, then press the ENTER key. The data

is entered.

6 After data entry is completed, set the parameter write protection signalto 1.

This screen is used to set the time for the functional instruction timer(SUB3). For details of each timer number, see Section 5.6.6.

PMC PARAMETER (TIMER) #001

TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL

MONIT RUN

DATA

Page number (To scroll the screen up or down, use the page keys.)

NO.ADDRESS DATA

01 T00 480

02 T02 960

03 T04 0

04 T06 005 T08 0

06 T10 0

07 T12 0

08 T14 0

09 T16 010 T18 0

NO.ADDRESS DATA

11 T20 0

12 T22 0

13 T24 0

14 T26 015 T28 0

16 T30 0

17 T32 0

18 T34 0

19 T36 020 T38 0

Timer number specified by a functionalinstruction

Timerdelaytime(ms)

Address specified by a ladderprogram

Timer set time: For timers 1 to 8, the maximum set time is 1572.8seconds and the timer precision is 48 ms.For timer 9 and subsequent timers, the maximum settime is 262.1 seconds and the timer precision is 8 ms.

5.6.5

Inputting PMCparameters from the MDI

TIMER screen


280

For details of each bit, see Section 5.6.6.

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

TIMER

PMC PARAMETER (KEEP REALAY) #001

COUNTR KEEPRL

MONIT RUN

DATA

NO.ADDRESS DATA

01 K00 00000000

02 K01 00000000

03 K02 00000000

04 K03 0000000005 K04 00000000

06 K05 00000000

07 K06 00000000

08 K07 00000000

09 K08 0000000010 K09 00000000

NO.ADDRESS DATA

11 K10 00000000

12 K11 00000000

13 K12 00000000

14 K13 0000000015 K14 00000000

16 K15 00000000

17 K16 00000000

18 K17 00000000

19 K18 0000000020 K19 00000000

: Used by the PMCsystem. These bitsmust not be modified.


ÀÀÀÀ


KEEPRL (keep relay)screen

B–63395EN/01 6. DIGITAL SERVO

281

6 DIGITAL SERVO

This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance ofdigital servo and adjustment of reference position.Refer to FANUC CONTROL MOTOR α Series MAINTENANCEMANUAL

6.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS 282. . . . . . 6.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 ZERO POINT SETTING 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. DIGITAL SERVO B–63395EN/01

282

This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is usedfor field adjustment of machine tool.

1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition.

2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen.#7

3111#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

SVS

#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.

1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.

3. Turn off the power once then turn it on again.

4. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following

operation: SYSTEM key [SV.PARA].

5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.

SERVO SETTINGX AXIS Y AXIS

(1)INITIAL SET BIT 00000000 00000000(2)MOTOR ID NO. 47 47(3)amr 00000000 00000000(4)cmr 2 2(5)FEED GEAR N 1 1(6) (N/M) M 125 125(7)DIRECTION SET 111 111(8)VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8192 8192(9)POSITION PULSE NO. 12500 12500(10)REF.COUNTER 8000 8000

PRM 2000PRM 2020PRM 2001PRM 1820PRM 2084PRM 2085PRM 2022PRM 2023PRM 2024PRM 1821

(1) INITIAL SET BIT#7

2000#6 #5 #4 #3

PRMCAL

#2 #1DGPRM

#0PLC01

#3 (PRMCAL) 1 : Turns to 1 when the initial setting is done.The following parameters are set automatically inaccordance with the no. of pulses of pulse coder:PRM 2043(PK1V), PRM 2044(PK2V), PRM 2047(POA1),PRM 2053(PPMAX),PRM 2054(PDDP),PRM 2056(EMFCMP), PRM 2057(PVPA), PRM 2059(EMFBAS), PRM 2074(AALPH),PRM 2076(WKAC)

#1 (DGPRM) 0 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done.

1 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not done.

#0 (PLC01) 0 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are used as they are:

1 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are multiplied by 10.

6.1INITIAL SETTINGSERVOPARAMETERS


283

(2)MOTOR NUMBER

For α series servo motor

Model name α α α α α

Drawingnumber

Format number


Drawingnumber

Format number


Drawingnumber

Format number


Drawingnumber

Format number

For α L series servo motor


Drawingnumber

Format number or or or

For α C series servo motor

Model name α α α α

Drawingnumber

Format number

For α HV series servo motor

Model name α α α

Drawingnumber

Format number

For α E and β series servo motor

Model name α β

α β

α β

α β

α

Drawingnumber

Format number


284

For α M series servo motor


Drawingnumber

Format number

Model name α α α

Drawingnumber

Format number

Model name α α α α

Drawingnumber

Format number

For linear motor

Model name

Drawingnumber

Format number

(3)ARBITARY AMR(for 5–0S to 3–0S)#7

AMR72001#6

AMR6#5

AMR5#4

AMR4#3

AMR4#2

AMR3#1

AMR2#0

AMR1PRM

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Motor model

100

000

000

000

000

000

110

010

5–0S4–0S, 3–0Sother than above

Set “00000000” for serial pulse coder C.


285

(4)CMR

1820 Command multiply ratioDGN

1) When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27

2) When CMR is 0.5 to 48

(5)Turn off power once, then turn it to on.

(6)Feed gear N/M

2084 n of flexible feed gearFRM

2085 m of flexible feed gearFRM

1) For serial pulse coder A or B, and serial a pulse coder.

For serial pulse coder B, set 250,000 pulses or less to parameter 2084.

Examples of calculation

1/1000 mm 1/10000 mm

1 rotation 8mmof motor 10mm

12mm

n=1/m=125n=1/m=100n=3/m=250

n=2/m=25n=1/m=10n=3/m=25

2) For serial pulsecoder C

Examples of calculation

1/1000 mm

1 rotation 8mmof motor 10mm

12mm

n=1/m=5n=1/m=4n=3/m=10

(7)Direction of Travel

2022 Direction of motor rotationPRM

111 : Positive (CCW) –111 : Reverse (CW)

Set value= 1CMR

+100

Set value=2×CMR

No. of feedback pulses per revolution of motor1000000=n

m

No. of feedback pulses per revolution of motor40000=n

m


286

(8)No. of velocity pulses and position pulses1) For serial pulse coder A or B and serial α pulse coder

Para– Resolution 1/1000mm Resolution 1/10000mmmeter

no. Full close Semi close Full close Semi close

High resolu-tion setting

2000 xxxx xxx 0 xxxx xxx 1

Separate detector

1815 0010 0010 0010 0000 0010 0010 0010 0000

Velocity feed-back pulses

2023 8192 819

Position feed-back pulses

2024 NS 12500 NS/10 1250

NS is the no. of position feedback pulses times 4.For 5–0S to 3–0S motor, since the no. of poles is different, set parameter2001.Even if the system is of full closed loop PMR 2002#3=1 #4=0.(9)Reference counter

1821 Reference counter capacity(099999999)PRM

6. Turn off power then turn on power.(10) FSSB display and setting screen

Connecting the CNC control unit to servo amplifiers via ahigh–speed serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), whichuses only one fiber optics cable, can significantly reduce the amountof cabling in machine tool electrical sections. Axis settings are calculated automatically according to theinterrelationships between axes and amplifiers entered on the FSSBsetting screen. Parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919, 1936, and1937 are specified automatically according to the results of thecalculation.

The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB–based amplifier and axisinformation. This information can also be specified by the operator.

1. Press function key SYS .

2. To display [FSSB], press continuous menu key several times.

3. Pressing soft key [FSSB] causes the AMP SET screen (or thepreviously selected FSSB setting screen) to appear, with the followingsoft keys displayed.

AMP (OPRT)MAINTEAXIS

The FSSB setting screens include: AMP SET, AXIS SET, and AMPMAINTENANCE.

Pressing soft key [AMP] causes the AMP SET screen to appear.Pressing soft key [AXIS] causes the AXIS SET screen to appear.Pressing soft key [MAINTE] causes the AMP MAINTENANCEscreen to appear.

Display


287

1) Amplifier setting screenThe amplifier setting screen consists of two sections: the first sectiondisplays information about the slave, while the second sectiondisplays information about the pulse modules.

AMPLIFIER SETTING O1000 N00001NO. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. AXIS NAME1 A1–L α SVM–HV 40AL 1 X2 A1–M α SVM 12A 2 Y3 A2–L β SVM 40A 3 Z4 A3–L α SVM 20A 4 A5 A3–M α SVM 40A 5 B7 A4–L α SVU 240A 6 C

NO. EXTRA TYPE PCB ID6 M1 A 0000 DETECTOR(8AXES)8 M2 B 12AB

>_MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][(OPRT)]

The amplifier setting screen consists of the following items:

NO. (slave number)

The numbers of up to ten slaves (up to eight amplifiers and up to twopulse modules) connected via the FSSB are displayed sequentially,with the one nearest to the CNC being number 1.

AMP (amplifier type)

The amplifier type display consists of the letter A, which stands for”amplifier,” a number that indicates the placing of the amplifier, ascounted from that nearest to the CNC, and a letter such as L (first axis)or M (second axis) indicating the placing of the axis in the amplifier.

AXIS NO. (controlled axis number)

The axis number of each controlled axis specified in parameters (Nos.1920 to 1929) is displayed. If a number specified in these parametersfalls outside the range of between 1 and the maximum number ofcontrolled axes, 0 is displayed.

NAME (controlled axis name)

The axis name assigned to a parameter (No. 1020) corresponding toa particular controlled axis number is displayed. If the controlled axisnumber is 0, – is displayed.

The following items are displayed as amplifier information:

⋅ UNIT (servo amplifier unit type)

⋅ SERIES (servo amplifier series)

⋅ CURRENT (maximum rating)

The following items are displayed as pulse module information:

⋅ SEPARATE

This display consists of the letter M, which stands for ”pulsemodule” and a number indicating the placing of the pulse module,as counted from that nearest to the CNC.

⋅ TYPE


288

This display is a letter indicating the type of the pulse module.

⋅ PCB ID

This display consists of four digits indicating the pulse module ID(hexadecimal). The pulse module ID is followed by DETECTOR(8 AXES) for the eight–axis separate detector module orDETECTOR (4 AXES) for the four–axis separate detector module.

2) Axis setting screen

The axis setting screen displays the information shown below:

AXIS SETTING O1000 N00001AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1–DSF Cs TNDM1 X A1–L 0 0 0 0 12 Y A1–M 1 0 1 0 03 Z A2–L 0 0 0 1 04 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 25 B A3–M 0 0 0 0 06 C A4–L 0 0 0 0 0

>_MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][(OPRT)]

This axis setting screen displays the following items:


This item is the placing of the NC controlled axis.

NAME (controlled axis name)

AMP (type of the amplifier connected to each axis)

M1 (connector number for pulse module 1)

This item is the number of the connector for pulse module 1, specifiedin parameter No. 1931.


This item is the number of the connector for pulse module 2, specifiedin parameter No. 1932.

TWO AXES

This item is the value specified in bit 0 (parameter 1 DSP) of parameterNo. 1904. It is 1 for an axis (such as a learning control axis, high–speedcurrent loop axis, or high–speed interface axis) that exclusively usesa DSP, which is usually shared by two axes.

Cs: Cs contour controlled axis

This item is the value specified in parameter No. 1933. It is 1 for theCs contour controlled axis.

TANDEM (M series only)

This item is the number specified in parameter No. 1934. Consecutiveodd and even numbers are displayed for the master and slave axes fortandem control.


289

3) Amplifier maintenance screenThe amplifier maintenance screen displays maintenance informationfor servo amplifiers. This screen consists of the following two pages,

either of which can be selected by pressing the or key.

AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE O1000 N00001AXIS NAME AMP SERIES UNIT AXES CUR.1 X A1–L α SVM–HV 2 40AL2 Y A1–M α SVM 2 12A3 Z A2–L β SVM 1 40A4 A A3–L α SVM 2 20A5 B A3–M α SVM 2 40A6 C A4–L α SVU 1 240A

MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][ ]

AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE O1000 N00001AXIS NAME EDITION TEST MAINTE–NO.1 X 01A 970123 012 Y 01A 970123 013 Z 01A 970123 014 A 02B 970123 015 B 02B 970123 016 C 02B 970123 01

MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56[ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][ ]

The amplifier maintenance screen displays the following items:

AXIS NO. (controlled axis number) NAME (controlled axis name) AMP (type of amplifier connected to each axis) SERIES (servo amplifier series of an amplifier connected to each axis) UNIT (unit type of a servo amplifier connected to each axis) NO. OF AXES (maximum number of axes controlled by an amplifier

connected to each axis) CURRENT (maximum rating for amplifiers connected to each axis) VERSION (unit version number of an amplifier connected to each

axis) TEST DATE (date of test performed on an amplifier connected to each

axis)Example) 970123 = January 23, 1997


290

MAINTENANCE NO. (engineering change number for an amplifierconnected to each axis)

On an FSSB setting screen (other than the amplifier maintenance screen),pressing soft key [(OPRT)] displays the following soft keys:

SET INPUTREAD

To enter data, place the machine in MDI mode or the emergency stop state,position the cursor to the point where a desired item is to be input, then

enter the desired data and press soft key [INPUT] (or the ENTER key on the

MDI panel).When soft key [SET] is pressed after data has been entered, a warningmessage is displayed if the entered data contains an error. When the datais satisfactory, the corresponding parameter is set up.To restore the previous value of a parameter if, for example, an enteredvalue is incorrect, press soft key [READ].When the power is turned on, values are read from the parameters anddisplayed on the screen.

CAUTION1 For the parameters to be specified on the FSSB setting

screen, do not attempt to enter values on the parameterscreen using the MDI or a G10 command. Use only theFSSB screen to enter values for these parameters.

2 If pressing soft key [SET] results in a warning messagebeing displayed, retry data entry, or press soft key [READ]to clear the warning message. Note that pressing the resetkey does not clear the warning message.

1) Amplifier setting screen

AMPLIFIER SETTING O1000 N00001NO. AMP SERIES UNIT CUR. AXIS NAME1 A1–L α SVM–HV 40AL 1 X2 A1–M α SVM 12A 2 Y3 A2–L β SVM 40A 3 Z4 A3–L α SVM 20A 4 A5 A3–M α SVM 40A 5 B7 A4–L α SVU 240A 6 C

NO. EXTRA TYPE PCB ID6 M1 A 0000 DETECTOR(8AXES)8 M2 B 12AB

>_MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56[SETTING][ ][ READ ][ ][ INPUT ]

The amplifier setting screen displays the following items:


Setting


291

For this item, enter a value of between 1 and the maximum number ofcontrolled axes. If a number that falls outside this range is entered, thewarning message ”INVALID FORMAT” appears. If the enteredcontrolled axis number is duplicate or 0, the warning message”SPECIFIED DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” appears when soft key[SET] is pressed to assert the entered value. In this case, no value canbe entered for the parameter.

2) Axis setting screen

AXIS SETTING O1000 N00001AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1–DSF Cs TNDM1 X A1–L 0 0 0 0 12 Y A1–M 1 0 1 0 03 Z A2–L 0 0 0 1 04 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 25 B A3–M 0 0 0 0 06 C A4–L 0 0 0 0 0

>_MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56[SETTING][ ][ READ ][ ][ INPUT ]

On the axis setting screen, the following items can be specified:


For an axis that uses pulse module 1, enter a connector number usinga number in the range of between 1 and the maximum number of axesfor pulse module 1. When pulse module 1 need not be used, enter 0.If a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the warningmessage ”INVALID FORMAT” is displayed.


For an axis that uses pulse module 2, enter a connector number usinga number in the range of between 1 and the maximum number of axesfor pulse module 2. When pulse module 2 need not be used, enter 0.If a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the warningmessage ”INVALID FORMAT” is displayed.

TWO AXES

Enter 1 for the following axes, each of which exclusively uses a DSP,which is usually shared by two axes. If a number other than 0 or 1 isentered, the warning message ”INVALID FORMAT” is displayed.

⋅ Learning control axis

⋅ High–speed current loop axis

⋅ High–speed interface axis

Cs (Cs contour controlled axis)

Enter 1 for the Cs contour controlled axis. If a number other than 0or 1 is entered, the warning message ”INVALID FORMAT” isdisplayed.

TANDEM


292

Enter odd and even numbers for the master and slave axes for tandemcontrol. These numbers must be consecutive and in the range ofbetween 1 and 8. If a number that falls outside the valid range isentered, the warning message ”INVALID FORMAT” is displayed.

When soft key [SET] is pressed on the axis setting screen after data entry,the warning message ”SPECIFIED DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” isdisplayed if any of the following conditions is satisfied.

Both M1 and M2 are nonzero for an axis.

Any two of TWO AXES, Cs, and TANDEM are nonzero for an axis.

A duplicate value is specified for M1.

A duplicate value is specified for M2.

A duplicate value is specified for Cs.

A duplicate value is specified for TANDEM.

An invalid master/slave axis pair is specified for TANDEM.


293

Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen.

#73111

#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0SVS

#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.

1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.

1. Press SYS key and soft key [SV. PARA] in this order.

2. Press soft key [SV.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.

SERVO TUNING 01234 N12345(PAMAMETER) (MONITOR) FUN.BIT 00000000 ALARM 1 00000000LOOP GAIN 3000 ALARM 2 00000000TURNING SET. 0 ALARM 3 10000000SET PERIOD 50 ALARM 4 00000000INT.GAIN 113 ALARM 5 00000000PROP.GAIN –1015 LOOP GAIN 2999FILER 0 POS ERROR 556VELOC.GAIN 125 CURRENT% 10

SPEED RPM 100

SV SET SV TUN OPE

(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

(9)(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)(15)(16)(17)

(1) Function bit : PRM 2003

(2) Loop gain : PRM 1825

(3) Tuning start : (Used by automatic servo tuning function)

(4) Set period : (Used by automatic servo tuning function)

(5) Integral gain : PRM 2043

(6) Proportional gain : PRM 2044

(7) Filter : PRM 2067

(8) Velocity gain (PRM 2021)+256

256Set value= ×100

(9) Alarm 1 : DGN 200 (Details of alarm 400 and 414)

(10) Alarm 2 : DGN 201 (Details of disconnection alarm, overload)

(11) Alarm 3 : DGN 202 (Details of alarm 319)



(14) Loop gain : Actual loop gain

(15) Position error : Actual position error(DGN 300)

(16) Current(%) : Indicate current with % to the rated value.

(17) Speed RPM : Number of motor actual rotation

6.2SERVO TUNINGSCREEN


6.2.2


294

#7OVLAlarm1

#6LV

#5OVC

#4HCA

#3HVA

#2DCA

#1FBA

#0OFA

DGN (200) :

#7 (OVL) : Overload alarm

#6 (LV) : Insufficient voltage alarm

#5 (OVC) : Overcurrent alarm

#4 (HCA) : Abnormal current alarm

#3 (HVA) : Excessive voltage alarm

#2 (DCA) : Discharge alarm

#1 (FBA) : Disconnection alarm

#0 (OFA) : Overflow alarm#7

ALDAlarm2#6 #5 #4

EXP#3 #2 #1 #0

DGN (201) ⇓

Over- 0 — — — Amplifier overheatloadalarm 1 — — — Motor overheat

Discon-nection

1 — — 0 Built–in pulse coder disconnection(Hardware)

alarm1 — — 1 Separate type pulse coder disconnec-

tion (Hardware)

0 — — 0 Pulse coder disconnection (software)

#7Alarm3

#6CSA

#5BLA

#4PHA

#3RCA

#2BZA

#1CKA

#0SPH

DGN (202) :

#6 (CSA) : Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal.

#5 (BLA) : Battery voltage is in low (warning).

#4 (PHA) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is abnormal.Counting the feedback signal is in error.

#3 (RCA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.Counting is in error.If the RCA bit is set to 1 when both the FBA bit (bit 1 of alarm 1) andALD bit of alarm 2 are set to 1 and the EXP bit of alarm 2 (internalhardware disconnection) is set to 1, a count miss alarm (CMAL)occurs in the α pulse coder.

#2 (BZA) : Battery voltage becomes 0.Replace batteries and set the reference position.

#1 (CKA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.Internal block has stopped.

#0 (SPH) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.Counting the feedback signal is in error.


295

#7DTEAlarm4

#6CRC

#5STB

#4 #3 #2 #1 #0

DGN (203) :

#7 (DTE) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.There is no response.

#6 (CRC) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.Transmitted data is in error.

#5 (STB) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.Transmitted data is in error.

#7Alarm3

#6OFS

#5MCC

#4LDM

#3PMS

#2 #1 #0

DGN (204) :

#6 (OFS) : A/D conversion of current value of digital servo is abnormal.

#5 (MCC) : Contacts of electro–magnetic contactor of servo amplifier is blown

#4 (LDM) : LED of serial pulse coder is abnormal.

#3 (PMS) : No. of feedback pulses are in error because serial pulse coder C orfeedback cable is faulty.


296

When a servo motor, pulse coder, or axis card is replaced, the zero pointneeds to be set again.When setting a new machine coordinate system, move the machine to amachine–specific point in manual mode (by pressing the machine againsta stopper, for example), then set a machine coordinate system at that point.

(1)Enable the writing of parameters. Set PWE to 1. (If parameter writeprotection signal PWES is entered, no setting can be changed.)

(2)Move the machine to a machine–specific point with the manual pulsegenerator. (Usually, press the machine against a stopper.)Start moving the machine from a location that is one motor revolutionor more distant. (In manual handle mode, a torque limit is appliedaccording to the ratio set in parameter No. 17008.)

(A) Ordinary movement

(B) Movement for zero point setting

6.3ZERO POINTSETTING

6.3.1Touch Panel LCD


297

(3)Press the OFFST key to display the offset screen.

(4)Press the soft key [COORDINATE SYSTEM] to select the workpiececoordinate system screen.

WORK COORDINATE SETTING O1234 N1234

No. VALVE 04 X 0.000 06 X 0.000(G57) Y 0.000 (G59) Y 0.000

Z 0.000 Z 0.000

05 X 0.000 07 *X 11.000 (G58) Y 0.000 ORIGIN Y 0.000

Z 0.000 Z 0.000

S 0 T0000 MDI **** *** *** ALM 12:34:56 [ OFFSET ] [ SETING ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

(5)Move the cursor to ZERO POINT in the lower–right part of the screen.

(6)When changing a currently set value, move the cursor to <X>, <Y>,or <Z>, then enter (reference position shift amount) and press<ENTER>.

(7)When no reference position shift amount is entered, press soft key[(OPRT)].

(8)Press soft key [ORIGIN].

(9)For an axis that has been set, the mark * is displayed at the left on the zeropoint setting screen. (An entered coordinate is automatically set inparameter No. 17003.)

Zero point setting distance for each axis (semiautomatic)


[Unit of data] 0.001 mm


(10) Turn off the power and then turn on the power again.Perform an idle operation or trial cutting to determine the differencefrom the previous zero point. Parameter No. 17005 can be used tomake a fine zero point adjustment.

Jƒ%ƒƒƒKJ]ƒ% K

K (–123)

Jƒ%ƒƒƒK


298

Zero point shift amount for each axis




– After changing the setting, turn off the power and then turn on thepower again.

– When parameter No. 17003 is set, the value of parameter No.17005 is automatically set to 0.

(11) Select MDI mode, and then reset PWE to 0.

(1)Until a zero point is set, perform the operation below so that nosoftware stroke limit check is made.

1) By using the RS–232C cable provided in the basic operationpackage (MMI), connect the personal computer to the CNC.

2) Turn off the power to the CNC.

3) The directory in which MMI is installed includes the boot software(BOOT.BAT). Start the boot software from the DOS prompt ofWindows as described below. (In the example, C:\MMI is used.)

\

4) Turn on the power to the CNC. The screen of the personalcomputer displays the following:

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1 – 14

1.SYSTEM DATA LOADING 2.SYSTEM DATA CHECK 3.SYSTEM DATA DELETE 4.SYSTEM DATA SAVE 5.SRAM DATA BACKUP 6.MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE 7.MEMORY CARD FORMAT

10.END *** MESSAGE *** SELECT MENU AND HIT Enter KEY.

The cursor (blue) can be moved with the and keys on thekeyboard of the personal computer.Be careful not to hold down the cursor keys and Enter key.

5) Move the cursor to ”10.END” with the cursor key , and then pressthe Enter key. Then, the following message appears at the bottomof the screen:

*** MESSAGE *** ARE YOU SURE ? HIT ’Y’ OR ’N’.

6.3.2Basic OperationPackage


299

6) Press the Y key on the personal computer. The display at thebottom of the screen changes as follows:

10.END *** MESSAGE ***

LOADING BASIC TO DRAM.

7) The screen display on the personal computer changes as follows:

Boot menu end

FANUC Series 18–LNB BOOT/IPL Soft Version 1.00 (MS–DOS/RS–232–C)Copyright(C) FANUC LTD. 1996. All rights reserved.Communication with the CNC starts. Wait a while.Turn on the power.

SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY0;00B24000 0;1; 1;2;00CB6C02 2;3; 3;4; 4;5; 5;6; 6;7; 7;8; 8;9; 9;A; A;B; B;C; C;D; D;E; E;F; F;

8) The IPL screen appears.

IPL MENU(MENU)0. EXIT1. MEMORY CLEAR2. SETTING

9. OTHERSSELECT NO.:

9) Enter 2, and then press the Enter key. The 2.SETTING screenappears.

IPL MENU(MENU) SETTING0. CANCEL1. IGNORE OVER TRAVEL ALARM2. START WITHOUT LADDER3. C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR

SELECT NO.:


300

10) Enter 1, then press the Enter key. The 1.IGNORE OVER TRAVELALARM screen appears.

IPL MENU(MENU) IGNORE OVER TRAVEL ALARM0. CANCEL1. CNC2. LOADER

SELECT NO.:

11) Enter 1, and then press the Enter key. The 1.CNC screen appears.

IPL MENU(MENU) IGNORE OVER TRAVEL ALARM0. CANCEL1. CNC2. LOADER

SELECT NO.: 1 SURE ?: (NO=0,YES=1)

12) Enter 1, and then press the Enter key. (Select 1.YES.) Thefollowing screen appears:

B D G 2 – B 5

COPYRIGHT FANUC LTD 1995–1996SLOT 02 (00CB) : END

NOT READY

13) The screen of the personal computer displays the followingmessage, indicating the completion of the setting to disable thesoftware stroke limit:

IPL menu end


301

(2)Enable the writing of parameters. Set PWE to 1. (If parameter writeprotection signal PWES is entered, no settings can be changed.)

(3)Move the machine to a machine–specific point with the manual pulsegenerator. (Usually, press the machine against a stopper.)Start moving the machine from a location that is one motor revolutionor more distant. (In manual handle mode, a torque limit is appliedaccording to the ratio set in parameter No. 17008.)(A) Ordinary movement

(B) Movement for zero point setting

(4)Display the setting/workpiece origin offset screen.

(5)When changing the currently set zero point setting distance, positionthe cursor to <X>, <Y>, or <Z>, and then enter (zero point settingdistance) and press <ENTER>.


302

(6)Press the function key <F1 ZERO POINT> to display the dialog boxfor zero point setting.

(7)Position the cursor to an axis for which a zero point is to be set (or movethe cursor to SELECT ALL AXES when setting a zero point for allaxes), then press the <SPACE> key.

(8)Upon the completion of axis selection, click OK.

(9)For an axis that has been set, * appears at the left side of the zero pointsetting screen. (An entered coordinate is automatically set in parameterNo. 17003.)

Zero point setting distance for each axis (semiautomatic)





303

(10) Turn the power off then back on again.Perform an idle operation or trial cutting to find a difference from theprevious zero point. Parameter No. 17005 can be used to make a finezero point adjustment.

Jƒ%ƒƒƒKJ]ƒ% K

(–123)K

Jƒ%ƒƒƒK

Zero point shift for each axis




– After changing the setting, turn the power off then back on again.

– When parameter No. 17003 is set, the value of parameter No.17005 is automatically set to 0.

(11) Select MDI mode, then reset PWE to 0.

7. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–63395EN/01

304

7 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

This chapter describes the parameter tuning screen of serial interfacespindle amplifier.Refer to FANUC CONTROL MOTOR α Series MAINTENANCEMANUAL.

7.1 OVERVIEW OF SPINDLE CONTROL (SERIAL INTERFACE) 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 SPINDLE SETTING AND TUNING SCREEN 307. . . . 7.3 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF STANDARD

PARAMETER 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–63395EN/01 7. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

305

S

PC

NC PMC

M19, etc.

FIN

*SSTP

MCW,MCCW

GR1,GR2

*ESP,MRDY,SFR,ORCM,TLML,TLMH, etc.

SST, SDT, SAR, ORAR etc.

*SSTP,SSVFMCW,MCCW,GR, etc.

ORE,SRDY,ZS0SENB, etc.

PLC

S command M command

Motor speed

Communication function

Serial spindle amplifier

Communication function

Spindle motor

Spindle

(PRM 3735 to 3752)

Optical cable

7.1OVERVIEW OFSPINDLE CONTROL(SERIAL INTERFACE)


306

4095 Max

0

0 PRM3741 PRM3742 PRM3743 PRM3744

Output Motor speed

Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 Gear 4

S code

A gear is selected according to the GR signal and spindle winding state.For details, refer to the connection manual.

7.1.1Gear Change Method


307

1. Confirm the parameters

#73111

#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1SPS

#0

#1 (SPS) 0 : Spindle tunign screen is not displayed.

1 : Spindle tuning screen is displayed.

2. Press SYS key.

3. Press soft key .

4. Press soft key [SP–PRM] and the spindle tuning screen is displayed.

5. The following screens are available and they can be selected by softkey.

1) [SP.SET] : Spindle setting screen

2) [SP.TUN] : Spindle tuning screen

3) [SP.MON] : Spindle monitor screen

SPINDLE SETTING(1)GEAR SELECT : 1(2)SPINDLE : S11

(PARAMETER)(3)GEAR RATIO 50(4)MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000(5)MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000(6)MAX C AXIS SPEED 100

Shows gear selected on the machine side.

CTH1 CTH2Display

0011

0101

1234

Shows spindle concernedS11: Main spindle amp. of 1st spindleS12 : Sub spindle amp. of 1st spindleS21 : Main spindle amp. of 2nd spindleS22 : Sub spindle amp. of 2nd spindle

7.2SPINDLE SETTINGAND TUNINGSCREEN

7.2.1Display Method

7.2.2Spindle Setting Screen

Gear select

Spindle


308

4216 4216

4217 4217

S11:1st Main S12:1st Sub S21:2nd Main S22:2nd Sub

Gear ratio(HIGH) 4056 4056

Gear ratio(MIDIUM HIGH) 4057 4057

Gear ratio(MIDIUM LOW) 4058 4058

Gear ratio(LOW) 4059 4059

Max. spindle speed(gear1)

3741

3742 3742

3743 3743

3744 3744

Max. motor speed 4020 4196 4020 4196

Max. C axis speed 4021 None 4021 None

3741




OPERATION : SPEED CONTROLGEAR SELECT : 1SPINDLE : S11

(MONITOR)MOTOR SPEED 100SPINDLE SPEED 150POS ERR S1 100POS ERR S2 103SYN.ERR 3

SPINDLE TUNING

(PARAMETER)PROP.GAIN 20INT.GAIN 50LOOP GAIN 3000MOTOR VOLT 30TIME CONST 100REF. SHIFT 2046

1 : Speed control (normal mode)

2 : Spindle Orientation

3 : Synchronization control

4 : Rigid tapping

5 : Spindle contouring control (Cs axis control)

6 : Spindle positioning control

Parameter

7.2.3Spindle Tuning Screen

Operation mode


309

The displayed parameters vary depending on the operation mode.

Spindle positioningcontrol Normal operation Orientation Synchronous control Rigid tapping

Proportional gainIntegral gainLoop gainMotor voltage ZRN gain (%) Reference positionshift

Proportional gainIntegral gainMotor voltage Regenerative power

Proportional gain Integral gainLoop gainMotor voltageORAR gain (%)Stop position shift Reference positionshift

Proportional gain Integral gainLoop gainMotor voltageAcceleration/decelera-tion constant (%)Reference positionshift

Proportional gain Integral gainLoop gainMotor voltageZRN gainReference positionshift

NOTEThe parameter Nos. corresponding to the displayed parameters are given in Section 7.2.5.

The displayed monitor items vary with the operation mode.

Spindle positioningcontrol Normal operation Orientation Synchronous control Rigid tapping

Motor speedFeedratePosition deviation S1

Motor speedSpindle speed

Motor speedSpindle speedPosition deviation S1

Motor speedSpindle speedPosition deviation S1Position deviation S2Synchronous deviation

Motor speedSpindle speedPosition deviation S1Position deviation ZSynchronous deviation

*1)

Motor speed [rpm] Spindle data

16383 Maximum motor speed (* 1)

(*1) PRM 4020: MainPRM 4196: Sub.

Display of parameters

Display of monitor items


310

SPINDLE MONITOR SCREEN ALARM : AL–27(POSITION CODER DIS.) OPERATION : Cs AXIS OONTROL SPINDLE SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM

LOAD METER (%)

CONTROL INPUT : ORCM MRDY *ESPCONTROL OUTPUT : SST SDT ORAR

0 50 100 150 200

1: Motor overheated2: Speed deviation excessive3: Fuse blow of DC link4: Fuse blow of AC inputline5: Fuse blow of DC voltage7: Excessive speed9: Heat sink overheat10: Low voltage of AC input11: Excess voltage in DC link12: Excess current in DC link13: CPU internal data memory error18: ROM SUM check error19: U phase current offset excessive20: V phase current offset excessive24: Serial data transmission abnormal25: Serial data transmission stop26: Cs axis speed detecting signal failure27: Position coder signal disconnection28: Cs pos.detect signal disconnection29: Short time overload30: Input circuit excess current31: Speed detecting signal disconnection32: SLC LSI internal RAM abnormal33: DC link charging insufficient34: Parameter abnormal setting35: Gear ratio data excessive36: Error counter overflow37: Speed detecting unit error setting38: Magnetic sensor signal abnormal39: Alarm of one revolution signal for Cs axis control is detected40: Alarm of one revolution signal for Cs axis control is not detected41: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal42: Undetection of the position coder one revolution signal46: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal on threading47: Abnormal position coder signal48: Erroneous detection of position coder one revolution signal

7.2.4Spindle Monitor Screen

Spindle alarm


311

Following 6 modes are available:

a. Normal operation

b. Orientation

c. Synchronous operation

d. Rigid tapping

e. Cs contour cotrol

f. Spindle positioning control

The load meter displays spindle load in a unit of 10%.

1) Load meter[%] Load meter data3276

Max.output value

(*) PRM 4127: Main PRM 4274: Sub.

of load meter (*)

Max.10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:

TLML : Torque limit command (low)

TLMH : Torque limit command (high)

CTH1 : Gear signal 1

CTH2 : Gear signal 2

SRV : Spindle reverse rotation

SFR : Spindle forward rotation

ORCM : Spindle orientation

MEDY : Machine ready

ARST : Alarm reset signal

*ESP : Emergency stop

SPSL : Spindle selection signalMCFN : Power line switchingSOCN : Soft start/stop cancelRSL : Output switching requestRCH : Power line state confirmINDX : Orientation stop pos.

changeROTA : Rotation direction of

ORCMNRRO : Shor–cut of ORCMINTG : Speed integral control

signalDEFM : Referencial mode

command

Max. 10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:

ALM : Alarm signalSST : Speed zero signalSDT : Speed detecting signalSAR : Speed arrival signalLDT1 : Load detecting signal 1LDT2 : Load detecting signal 2

TML5 : Torque limitationORAR : Orientation end signalCHP : Power line switched signalCFIN : Spindle switch completeRCHP : Output switch signalRCFN : Output switch complete

signal

Operation

Load meter

Control input signal

Control output signals


312

S11:1st Main

S12:1st Sub

S21:2nd Main

S22:2nd Sub

Proportional gain(HIGH) 4040 4206 4040 4206

Proportional gain (LOW) 4041 4207 4041 4207

Integral gain(HIGH) 4048 4048

Integral gain(LOW) 40494212

40494212

Motor voltage 4083 4236 4083 4236

Regenerative power 4080 4231 4080 4231

S11:1st Main

S12:1st Sub

S21:2nd Main

S22:2nd Sub


Proportional gain (LOW) 4043 4209 4043 4209



40514213

Loop gain (HIGH) 4060 4060

Loop gain (MID, HIGH) 40614218

40614218

Loop gain (MID, LOW) 4062 4062

Loop gain (LOW) 40634219

40634219

Motor voltage 4084 4237 4084 4237

Gain change upon completionof orientation

4064 4220 4064 4220

Stop position shift 4077 4228 4077 4228

PC–type orientation stop posi-tion

4031 4204 4031 4204

7.2.5CorrespondenceBetween OperationMode and Parameterson Spindle TuningScreen

Normal operation mode

Orientation mode


313

Numerals are parameter numbers :

S11:1st Main

S12:1st Sub

S21:2nd Main

S22:2nd Sub


Proportional gain(LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211



40534214

Position loop gain(HIGH) 4065 4221 4065 4221

Position loop gain(MID,HIGH) 4066 4066

Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4067 4222 4067 4222

Position loop gain(LOW) 4068 4068

Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238

Acc./Dec. time constant 4032 4032

Shift amount 4034 4034


S11:1st Main

S12:1st Sub

S21:2nd Main

S22:2nd Sub


Proportional gain(LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211



40534214

Position loop gain(HIGH) 4065 4221 4065 4221


Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4067 4222 4067 4222


Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238

ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239

Grid shift amount 4073 4223 4073 4223

Synchronization controlmode

Rigid tapping mode


314


S11:1st Main

S12:1st Sub

S21:2nd Main

S22:2nd Sub

Proportional gain(HIGH) 4046 4046

Proportional gain (LOW) 4047 4047


Integral gain(LOW) 4055 4055

Position loop gain(HIGH) 4069 4069


Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4071 4071


Motor voltage 4086 4086

ZRN gain % 4092 4092

Reference position shift 4135 4135

Spindle contouringcontrol mode (Cs axis control)


315

Standard parameters those are specific to each motor model can be set ata time by this operation.Note that, however, depending on the conditions under which a motor isused, the machine tool builder may determine unique values to theparameters.Therefore, always set the parameters (No.4000 and later) according to theparameter list attached to the machine.

1. Turn on power under emergency stop condition.

2. Set PRM4019#7 to 1.#7

LDSP4019#6LV

#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

#7(LDSP) Serial interface spindle parameters are:

0 : Not set automatically.

1 : Set automatically.

#6(LV) Insufficiency voltage alarm

3. Set a motor model code.

4133 Motor model code

Refer to FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α Series PARAMETERMANUAL.

4. Turn off power once, then turn it on again.

7.3AUTOMATICSETTING OFSTANDARDPARAMETER

8. TROUBLESHOOTING B–63395EN/01

316

8 TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure.

8.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES 318. . . . . . . 8.2 WHEN NO DATA IS DISPLAYED ON

THE LCD UNIT AT POWER–UP 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 LCD UNIT DISPLAY BLINKS 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM I/O DEVICES

IS DISABLED OR CANNOT BE PERFORMED NORMALLY 323. . . . . . .

8.5 MANUAL HANDLE OPERATION IS IMPOSSIBLE 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.6 ALARM 401 (VRDY OFF) 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 ALARM 404 (VRDY ON) 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 ALARM 462 (INVALID CNC DATA TRANSFER)

ALARM 463 (INVALID SLAVE DATA TRANSFER) 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.9 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) 333. . . 8.10 ALARM 701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) 334. . . . . . 8.11 ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE

COMMUNICATION ERROR) 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.12 ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK

ACTIVATION FAILURE) 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13 ALARM 5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY IS NOT SET)

ALARM 5135 (FSSB: ERROR STATE OCCURRED)ALARM 5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR)ALARM 5197 (FSSB: OPEN STATE IS NOT SET)ALARM 5198 (FSSB: ID INFORMATION CANNOT BE READ) 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.14 ALARM 5136 (FSSB: INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF AMPLIFIERS) 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.15 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY) 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.16 ALARMS 912 Through 919 (DRAM PARITY) 344. . . . 8.17 ALARMS 920 AND 921 (SERVO ALARM) 346. . . . . . 8.18 ALARM 926 (FSSB ALARM) 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19 ALARM 930 (CPU INTERRUPT) 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.20 ALARM 935 (SRAM ECC ERROR) 354. . . . . . . . . . . . 8.21 ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) 356. . . . . . . . . 8.22 ALARM 951 (PMC WATCHDOG ALARM) 359. . . . . . 8.23 ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM ON AN OPTION

BOARD) 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.24 ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM FOR UNKNOWN

CAUSE) 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.25 ALARM 974 (F–BUS ERROR) 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.26 ALARM 975 (BUS ERROR) 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B–63395EN/01 8.TROUBLESHOOTING

317

8.27 ALARM 976 (LOCAL BUS ERROR) 367. . . . . . . . . . . 8.28 SERVO ALARMS 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.29 SPC ALARMS 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.30 SPINDLE ALARMS 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


318

When a failure occurs, it is important to correctly grasp what kind offailure occured and take appropriate action, to promptly recover themachine.Check for the failure according to the following procedure :

Recovery

With whatoperation?

What failure?

Appropriate action

When?

Grasp the kind of failure

↓

↓

(1) When and how many times (frequency of occurrences)(2) With what operation(3) What failure occurred

1 When did the failure occur?

⋅ Date and time?⋅ Occurred during operation? (how long was the operation?)⋅ Occurred when the power was turned on?⋅ Was there any lightening surge, power failure, or other disturbances

to the power supply?How many times has it occurred⋅ Only once?⋅ Occurred many times ? (How many times per hour, per day, or per

month?)

2 With what operation did it occur ?

What was the NC mode when the failure occurred?Jog mode/memory operation mode /MDI mode /reference positionreturn modeIf during program operation,

1) Where in the program ?

2) Which program No. and sequence No. ?

3) What program ?

4) Occurred during axial movement ?

5) Occurred during the execution of an M/S/T code ?

6) Failure specific to the program ?

Does the same operation cause the same failure ?(Check the repeatability of the failure.)Occurred during data input/output ?

<Feed axes and spindles>For a failure related to feed axis servo

1) Occurred at both low feedrate and high feedrate ?

2) Ocurred only for a certain axis ?

8.1CORRECTIVEACTION FORFAILURES

8.1.1Investigating theConditions underwhich Failure Occurred


319

For a failure related to spindlesWhen did the failure occur ? (during power–on, acceleration, deceleration, or constant rotation)

3 What failure occurred ?

Which alarm was displayed on the alarm display screen on the CRT?(Check the axis along which an alarm has occurred for alarms 300 to599.)

For alarm 350 : Examine diagnostic 202

For alarm 351 : Examine diagnostic 203

Is the screen correct ?If machining dimensions are incorrect

1) How large is the error ?

2) Is the position display on the CRT correct ?

3) Are the offsets correct ?

4 Other information

⋅ Is there noise origin around machine?If the failure has not occurred frequently, the cause may be externalnoise to the power supply or inductive noise on machinery cables.Operate other machines connected to the same power line and seeif noise come from the relays or compressors.

⋅ Is it taken any countermeasure for noise in machine side?

⋅ Check the following for the input power supply voltage :

1) Is there variation in the voltage ?

2) Is the standard voltage supplied ?

⋅ How high is the ambient temperature of the CNC?(0C to 55C during operation)

⋅ Has excessive vibration been applied to the control unit?(0.5 G or less during operation)

5 When you contact our service center, specify the following items :

1) Name of the NC unit

2) Name of the machine tool builder and type of machine

3) Software series/version of the NC

4) Specifications of the servo amplifier and motor

(for a failure related to the servo)

5) Specifications of the spindle amplifier and spindle motor

(for a failure related to a spindle)

See the drawing issued by the machine tool builder for the locationsof the NC unit and servo/spindle amplifiers.

We use the following specification codes : Servo /spindle amplifier : A06B––H

Servo/spindle amplifier : A06B––B

( represents a number)


320

If no data is displayed on the LCD unit when the power is turned on, orif the LCD unit displays ”GRAPHICS IS READY. BOOT START.” butdisplays no further information, the cause may be one of the following:

The power supply is not connected to the LCD unit.

The optical cable (HSSB) is not connected between the CNC andLCD unit.

There is a wiring failure in the LCD unit.

The main CPU board, display control card, or LCD unit is faulty.

If ”GRAPHICS IS READY. BOOT START.” appears, the LCD unit hasstarted normally, but the CNC has not started, or communication has notyet been established.

Check if the power cable is connected to connector CP1A of the LCD unit.

ÅÅÅ

ÅÅÅÅ

ÅÅÅ

ÅÅÅÅ

Optical cable COP20B

For 24V branching CP1B

24V input CP1A

LCD control printed circuit board

ÅÅM4 stud for ground connection

ÅÅÅÅ

Inverter printed circuit board

ÅÅ

Backlight connector

ÅÅÅ

LCD panel connector

MDI signal inputCA55

Check if an abnormal force is applied to the optical cable and if the opticalcable is bent excessively. Also check if the optical cable is connectedsecurely.If the wiring is normal, replace the optical cable.

8.2WHEN NO DATA ISDISPLAYED ON THELCD UNIT ATPOWER–UPCauses and remedies

Power supply of the LCDunit

Optical cable


321

Check if the cables are attached to the backlight connector and LCD panelconnector firmly. These cables are attached before shipment fromFANUC. Pay particularly careful attention after detaching these cablesfor maintenance.

Replace the display control card mounted on the main CPU board.

Replace the LCD unit, or the control printed circuit board on the back ofthe LCD unit.

If the remedies described above do not solve the problem, replace themain CPU board or CPU card.

CPU card


Axis control card

Main CPU board

LCD unit wiring


LCD unit

Main CPU board

Mounting locations ofdisplay control card andCPU card


322

If disconnection of the optical cable (HSSB) between the main CPU boardand LCD unit is detected, the LCD display blinks.

Check whether excessive force is applied to the optical cable and whetherthe optical cable is bent excessively.If the wiring is normal, replace the optical cable.

Replace the display control card mounted on the main CPU board.

Replace the LCD unit, or the control printed circuit board on the back ofthe LCD unit.

CPU card


Axis control card

Main CPU board

8.3LCD UNIT DISPLAYBLINKS

Causes and remedies

Optical cabledisconnection


LCD unit

Mounting location ofdisplay control card


323

If an I/O link cannot be established, an input signal from an I/O devicecannot be recognized normally by the CNC, or an output signal from theCNC is not transferred to an I/O device, the cause may be one of thefollowing:

The power to the I/O device is not turned on, or an incorrect voltageis applied.

The I/O link cable is not connected normally.

The connection of the I/O signals is incorrect.

I/O link assignment is not performed, or is performed incorrectly.

If ”NO I/O DEVICE” is displayed on the PMC alarm screen, none of theI/O devices are recognized.

If you choose [PMCDGN], [IOCHK], and then [IOLNK] on the PMCscreen, the I/O devices recognized by the CNC are displayed on thescreen. Using this screen, you can check which I/O device is connectednormally.

Example of screen display:

In this example, the following I/O link connections are made:

Main CPU board

JD1A

I/O module for con-nection (connectorpanel)

JD1B

JD1A

Operator’s panel I/O module JD1B

JD1A

Group 0

Group 1

8.4INPUT/OUTPUT TOAND FROM I/ODEVICES ISDISABLED ORCANNOT BEPERFORMEDNORMALLYCauses and remedies

PMC alarm ”NO I/ODEVICE”

PMC IOCHK screen


324

Correspondence between IDs and I/O devices

ID Kind of unit I/O device

A9 I/O MODULE I/O module for connection (connector panel)

A8 OTHER UNIT Operator’s panel I/O module

Check whether the power supply is connected to the I/O device, andwhether the specified voltage is applied.Check that the power–on procedure is correct.

I/O device power–on timing: Before the power to the CNC is turned on, or within 500 ms after thepower to the CNC is turned on

When the power to the CNC is turned off, the power to the I/O devicesmust also be turned off. (Otherwise, the I/O link cannot be establishedwhen the power to the CNC is next turned on.)

An I/O link cable connects JD1A to JD1B as shown in the example above.JD1A on a high–order unit is connected to JD1B on a low–order unit.Also check whether the cable is connected normally.

Check whether I/O signals are connected to each I/O device correctly. Forinput signals, check if 0V or +24V is connected to the common settingpin. For output signals, check whether +24V is connected to the DOcommon pin.

Check whether the I/O link assignment is correct. For assignmentconfirmation, a ladder editing card is required.When you choose [EDIT] and then [MODULE] on the PMC screen, theassignment editing screen appears.Upon completion of assignment editing, be sure to write the results ofediting to the FROM through the [I/O] screen. Otherwise, assignmentinformation after editing is lost when the power is turned off.

I/O device power check

Cable connection

I/O connection

I/O link assignment


325

If manual handle operation is impossible, the cause may be one of thefollowing:

Servo activation has not yet been performed.

The manual pulse generator is not correctly connected to theoperator’s panel I/O module.

I/O link assignment for the operator’s panel I/O module is notperformed, or is performed incorrectly.

There is a parameter setting error, or related input signals are notentered.

Check whether the LED on the servo amplifier indicates 0. If the LEDindicates other than 0, servo activation has not yet been performed. In thiscase, jog operation and automatic operation are also disabled.Check the servo–related parameters and wiring.

Using the figures below, check for cable disconnections, short–circuits,and any other failures.

CNC (main CPU board)

Operator’s panel I/O module

Manual pulse generatorJA3

IOLINK JD1B(JD1A)

Manual pulse generator

JA3JD1BJD1A

SIN(01) (03)SOUT HA1HB1(02)HA1(01)

SOUT(03)*SIN(02) (04)*SOUT

(01)SINHB1

+5V(09)

0V(11)*SOUT(04) (02)*SIN 0V

+5V0V(12)

0V(12)

0V(14)0V(13)

(11)0V(12)0V

(14)0V(13)0V

ShieldShield

CNC (main CPU board) Operator’s panel I/O module

8.5MANUAL HANDLEOPERATION ISIMPOSSIBLE

Causes and remedies

Servo activation has notyet been performed

Manual pulse generatorcheck

a. Cable failure (such asdisconnection)


326

When the manual pulse generator is rotated, the following signals areoutput. Using an oscilloscope, perform measurement at the screwterminal block on the back of the manual pulse generator. If no signal isoutput, measure the +5V voltage as well.

Back of the manual pulse generator

+5V 0V HA HB

Screw terminal block HA: Phase–A signal of the manual pulse generator

HB: Phase–B signal of the manual pulse generator

When the manual pulse generatoris rotated in the positive direction

+5V

0V+5V

0V

HA

HB

1/4 (phase difference)1/41 : 1

1 : 1

ON OFF

When the manual pulse generatoris rotated in the negative direction

ON OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

Check also the ON/OFF ratio and HA/HB phase difference.

If the operator’s panel I/O module is not assigned correctly in I/O linkassignment, the pulses from the manual pulse generator are nottransferred to the CNC, thus disabling manual handle operation.For assignment confirmation, a ladder editing card is required. When youchoose [EDIT] and then [MODULE] on the PMC screen, the assignmentediting screen is displayed.Upon the completion of assignment editing, write the results of editingto the FROM through the [I/O] screen. Otherwise, assignmentinformation after editing is lost when the power is turned off. With theSeries 18i–LNA, 16 bytes from X64 are assigned to operator’s panel I/Omodule input, and X76 is assigned to the manual pulse generator.

Manual pulse generatorarea

Operator’s panel I/O module 16 bytes (128 points)

X64

X76

X79

b.Manual pulse generatorfailure

I/O link assignment foroperator’s panel I/Omodule


327

If assignment is correct, the bits count up/down in the X76 area when themanual pulse generator is rotated. Choose [PMCDGN] and then[STATUS] on the PMC screen to display X76, and then rotate the manualpulse generator to check whether the bits count up/down.

If the check above reveals no problem in the connection with the manualpulse generator, check the related parameters and related input signals.

Related parameters

7110 Number of manual pulse generators used (to be set to 1)

7113 Manual handle feed magnification m (1 to 127)

7114 Manual handle feed magnification n (0 to 1000)

Related input signals

Referring to the connection manual (function), check the states of thefollowing signals:

Mode selection signal

Axis selection signal

Magnification selection signal

Parameter and relatedinput signal check


328

This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of the servoamplifier is not turned on, or is turned off during operation.This alarm may be issued secondarily after the issue of another servoalarm. In such a case, correct the cause of the first alarm.Check the power magnetic circuit around the amplifier. In addition, theservo amplifier, or the axis control card in the CNC may be faulty.

CNC(Main CPU board)

(Sub–CPU board)

Servo amplifier

MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier

(A request is made to turn on the MCC and activatethe servo motor.)

VRDY: From the servo amplifier to the CNC

(Servo ready state is posted.)

These information items are transferred via the FSSB (optical cable).

PSM

Control powersupply

ESP

MCC

SPMSVMSVM

(Servo amplifier)

Spindle motor

Servo motor

ACreactor

MCCCircuit breaker

3–phase

Single phase

AC200V

Emergency stop circuit

CNC

FSSB FSSB

Serial spindle

(Main CPU board)

(Sub–CPU board)(Servo amplifier)

Servo motor

Circuit breaker

8.6ALARM 401 (VRDY OFF)

Causes and remedies

VRDY

Example of connectionsaround the amplifier(stylized diagram)


329

Check the following:

Is the control power supply of PSM turned on?

Is emergency stop state released?

Is a terminating connector connected to the JX1B connector of theterminating amplifier?

Is MCC turned on? If an MCC sequence is used externally inaddition to the MCC contact of PSM, check it as well.

Is the power for driving MCC fed?

Is the circuit breaker on?

Is any alarm issued from the PSM or SPM?

If the power magnetic circuit around the amplifier is normal, replace theservo amplifier.

If the remedies described above do not correct the problem, replace theaxis control card.

CPU card


Axis control card

Main CPU board

CPU card

DRAM module

Sub–CPU board

Axis control card

Servo amplifierreplacement

Axis control cardreplacement


330

This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of the servoamplifier remains on.The servo amplifier, or the axis control card on the CNC may be faulty.

CNC(Main CPU board)

(Sub–CPU board)

Servo amplifier

MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier

(A request is made to turn on the MCC and activatethe servo motor.)

VRDY: From the servo amplifier to the CNC

(Servo ready state is posted.)

These information items are transferred via the FSSB (optical cable).This alarm is issued if VRDY continues to be on when the CNC turns offMCON, or if VRDY is on before the CNC turns on MCON.

The servo amplifier may be faulty. Replace the servo amplifier.

8.7ALARM 404 (VRDY ON)

Causes and remedies

VRDY

Servo amplifierreplacement


331

If servo amplifier replacement does not solve the problem, replace the axiscontrol card.

CPU card


Axis control card

Main CPU board

CPU card

DRAM module

Sub–CPU board

Axis control card

Axis Control CardReplacement


332

Alarm 462 is issued if correct data cannot be received by the slave (servoamplifier) because of an FSSB communication error.Alarm 463 is issued if correct data cannot be received by the CNC becauseof an FSSB communication error.If one of these alarms is issued, an alarm message, including the faultyaxis number (axis name) is displayed.

The optical cable between the amplifier of the axis having the numberdisplayed in the alarm message and the CNC control section may be faulty.Alternatively, the amplifier before that of the axis having the displayednumber may be faulty.

The axis control card mounted on the main CPU board may be faulty. If these alarms are issued from the sub–CPU board, the axis control cardmounted on the sub–CPU board may be faulty.

CPU card


Axis control card

Main CPU board

CPU card

DRAM module

Sub–CPU board

Axis control card

8.8ALARM 462 (INVALID CNC DATATRANSFER)ALARM 463 (INVALID SLAVEDATA TRANSFER)Causes and remedies

Servo amplifier or opticalcable

Axis control card

Mounting locations ofaxis control cards


333

This alarm is issued if the ambient temperature of the CNC control unitis abnormally high. The ambient temperature of the CNC must not exceedthe specified temperature (55C).

A temperature monitor circuit is provided on the main CPU board, andissues this alarm if the ambient temperature becomes excessively high.To maintain the ambient temperature within the specified range (0C to55C), make provisions in the power magnetics cabinet where the CNCcontrol unit is housed.If the ambient temperature is normal, the main CPU board may be faulty.

8.9ALARM 700(OVERHEAT:CONTROL UNIT)

Causes and remedies

Ambient temperature


334

This alarm is issued if the fan motor is abnormal (for example, if it stopsduring CNC operation).

The fan motor is located at the top of the CNC control unit. The fan motorhas an alarm detection circuit. If the fan motor is abnormal (for example,if it stops during CNC operation), the circuit notifies the CNC and thenissues this alarm.If this alarm is issued, replace the fan motor.

Fan motor for a2–slot rack

Fan motor for a1–slot rack

Specification

For a 1–slot rack A02B–0265–C101

For a 2–slot rack A02B–0260–C021

8.10ALARM 701(OVERHEAT: FANMOTOR)

Causes and remedies

Fan motor

Fan motor specification


335

This alarm is issued if a communication error occurs between the serialspindle amplifier (SPM) and CNC. The possible causes are:

Poor contact of the connection cable

The main CPU board or sub–CPU board is faulty.

The spindle amplifier is faulty.

Noise

Check for a poor contact of the cable between the serial spindle amplifier(SPM) and CNC.Check that the connector is inserted firmly, and check if any wire is aboutto break.Use twisted pair cable. Check that the cable is connected as specified inthe connection manual.

The spindle control circuit of the CNC is mounted on the main CPU boardand sub–CPU board. If this alarm is issued from the main CPU board,replace the main CPU board. If this alarm is issued from the sub–CPUboard, replace the sub–CPU board.

If the remedies described above do not correct the problem, check thenoise environment around the connection cable.Referring to the description of noise protection, take actions such asreinforcing the shielding of the cable and separating it from the powerline.

8.11ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLECOMMUNICATIONERROR)

Causes and remedies

Connection cable

Main CPU board orsub–CPU board

Noise environment


336

This alarm is issued if a serial spindle amplifier (SPM) is not activatednormally when the power to the CNC is turned on.This alarm is not issued after the CNC system including spindleamplifiers starts up normally, but is issued if processing at power–up timeis abnormal. The possible causes are:

Poor contact of a connection cable, wiring error, connection error

The power to the CNC was turned on when the spindle amplifieris in the alarm state.

Parameter setting error

The main CPU board or sub–CPU board is faulty.

A spindle amplifier is faulty.

With the Series 18i–LNA, up to two serial spindle amplifiers (SPM) canbe connected to the main CPU board, and up to two serial spindleamplifiers can be connected to the sub–CPU board, as shown below.

Series 18–LNA

Main CPU board

JA41

PSM (first unit)

JA7B

JA7A

PSM (second unit)

JA7B

JA7A

Sub–CPU board

JA41 JA7B

JA7A

JA7B

JA7A

PSM (first unit)

PSM (second unit)

8.12ALARM 750(SPINDLE SERIALLINK ACTIVATIONFAILURE)

Causes and remedies

Connection


337

Check if the cables are connected as shown above. Be careful not toconfuse JA7B with JA7A.Also check whether the cables are latched securely.Referring to the connection manual (hardware), check if the connectionsare correct.

This alarm is issued if the power to the CNC is turned on when the LEDof the spindle amplifier indicates a state other than 24.Correct the cause of the alarm on the spindle amplifier. Next, turn off thepower to the spindle amplifier and CNC, and then turn on the power tothe system. This applies to the second spindle amplifier.

If this alarm is issued, the details can be checked using diagnosis number409.

#7Diagnosis No. 409

#6 #5 #4 #3SPE

#2S2E

#1SIE

#0SHE

SPE 0: In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters satisfy theactivation condition of the spindle amplifier.

1: In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do notsatisfy the activation condition of the spindle amplifier.

S2E 0: In activation based on spindle serial control, the second spindleis normal.

1: In activation based on spindle serial control, an abnormalitywas detected on the second spindle.

S1E 0: In activation based on spindle serial control, the first spindle isnormal.

1: In activation based on spindle serial control, an abnormalitywas detected on the first spindle.

SHE 0: The serial communication control circuit in the CNC is normal.1: An abnormality was detected in the serial communication

control circuit in the CNC.

1) When SPE is set to 1Recheck those serial spindle parameters whose numbers are inthe four thousands.

2) When S2E is set to 1An abnormality was detected on the second spindle. So, checkthe connections and parameter settings. The alarm is also issuedif the parameter setting specifies the use of the second parameterwhen only the first spindle is used.

3) When S1E is set to 1An abnormality was detected on the first spindle. So, check theconnections and parameter settings.

If the remedies described above do not correct the problem, themain CPU board, sub–CPU board, or spindle amplifier may befaulty.

4) When SHE is set to 1Replace the main CPU board or sub–CPU board.

Spindle amplifier state

Alarm details


338

These alarms are issued for causes such as a failure detected in slaves suchas a servo amplifier connected to the FSSB, in an optical cable, and in theaxis control card on the main CPU board.

No. Message Description

5134 FSSB: OPEN READY IS NOT SET. At initialization time, the FSSB is notplaced in the open ready state.

5135 FSSB: ERROR STATE OCCURRED. The FSSB made a transition to errormode.

5137 FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR The FSSB detected a configuration error.

5197 FSSB: OPEN STATE IS NOT SET. Although the CNC allowed the FSSB toopen, the FSSB does not open.

5198 FSSB: ID INFORMATION CANNOTBE READ.

Temporary assignment failed, so thatthe initial information of the amplifiercould not be read.

8.13ALARM 5134 (FSSB: OPENREADY IS NOT SET)ALARM 5135 (FSSB: ERRORSTATE OCCURRED)ALARM 5137 (FSSB:CONFIGURATIONERROR)ALARM 5197 (FSSB: OPEN STATEIS NOT SET)ALARM 5198 (FSSB: IDINFORMATIONCANNOT BE READ)Causes and remedies


339

At power–up, FSSB processing makes the following transitions:

1. The CNC initializes the FSSB and servo system.2. The servo system returns the first ready signal.3. The first ITP interrupt is generated.4. The CNC waits until the FSSB is placed in the open ready state.5. The CNC checks if the FSSB has detected a configuration error.6. The CNC allows the FSSB to open.7. The CNC checks if the FSSB has opened.8. The servo system returns the second ready signal.9. Normal operation starts.

If the open ready state is not set in step 4, alarm 5134 is issued.

If an error is detected in step 5, alarm 5137 is issued.

If the FSSB does not open within a certain time in step 7, alarm 5197 isissued.

If the ready signal is not returned within a certain time in step 8, alarm5198 is issued.

Check whether the FSSB–related parameters are set correctly.

Check the power supply of each servo amplifier connected to the FSSB.

Replace the axis control card on the main CPU board.If any of these alarms is issued from the sub–CPU board, replace the axiscontrol card on the sub–CPU board.Replace the optical cables and servo amplifiers sequentially to isolate thefault.

FSSB processing atpower–up

Parameter settingconfirmation

Servo amplifier powersupply

Replacement of the axiscontrol cards, opticalcables, and servoamplifiers


340

CPU card


Axis control card

Main CPU board

CPU card

DRAM module

Sub–CPU board

Axis control card

Mounting locations ofthe axis control cards


341

For the number of controlled axes, the number of servo amplifiers that canbe recognized on the FSSB is insufficient.

In the state in which the alarm is issued, display the amplifier settingscreen of the FSSB setting screen. On the amplifier setting screen, onlythose amplifiers that are recognized on the FSSB are displayed.

The optical cable connecting the last recognized amplifier to the nextamplifier may be faulty.Alternatively, one of the two amplifiers connected by the optical cablemay be faulty. Also chick the power supply of the amplifier.

The axis control card mounted on the main CPU board may be faulty. Ifthis alarm is issued from the sub–CPU board, the axis control cardmounted on the sub–CPU board may be faulty.

CPU card


Axis control card

Main CPU board

CPU card

DRAM module

Sub–CPU board

Axis control card

8.14ALARM 5136 (FSSB:INSUFFICIENTNUMBER OFAMPLIFIERS)

Causes and remedies

FSSB setting screen

Optical cable or servoamplifier

Axis control card



342

A ROM parity error occurred.Software such as the CNC system software, servo software, PMCmanagement software, and PMC ladders is stored in flash memory on theFROM module. When the power is turned on, software is loaded intoRAM such as the DRAM module or servo card before the software isexecuted.A ROM parity error occurs if the software stored in the FROM moduleis destroyed.

The screen displays the series of the software in which an error wasdetected. Rewrite the software with the boot system.Software stored in the FROM module may include FANUC softwareproducts, as well as software such as PMC ladders created by the machinetool builder.

Replace the FROM module.After replacement, all of the originally stored software must be written.The boot system is used to write the software.

If the remedies described above do not correct the problem, replace themain CPU board.

8.15ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY)

Causes and remedies

Rewriting software

FROM modulereplacement

Main CPU boardreplacement


343

CPU card


Axis control card

DRAM module

FROM module

SRAM module

The FROM module is mounted under thedisplay control card.

Main CPU board

Mounting location ofFROM module


344

The CNC management software is loaded from FROM to DRAM atpower–up, and executed in DRAM.These alarms indicate the occurrence of a parity error on DRAM.These alarms are issued if data in DRAM is destroyed as a result of anexternal cause, or if the DRAM module or CPU card fails.

Replace the DRAM module mounted on the CPU card.

If the remedy above does not correct the problem, replace the CPU card.

CPU card


Axis control card

DRAM module

FROM module

SRAM moduleMain CPU board

The DRAM module is mounted on the CPUcard.

8.16ALARMS 912Through 919 (DRAM PARITY)

Causes and remedies

DRAM modulereplacement

CPU card replacement

Mounting locations ofthe CPU card and DRAMmodule


345

If alarm 972 is issued, and the screen indicates the occurrence of a DRAMparity error on the sub–CPU board, take the same actions as describedabove for the sub–CPU board.


CPU card

Axis control card

DRAM module The DRAM module is mounted on the CPU card.

Sub–CPU board

DRAM parity on thesub–CPU board


346

A watchdog error or RAM parity error occurred in a circuit of the axiscontrol card.If alarm 920 is issued, such an error occurred in one of the first to fourthcontrol circuits. If alarm 921 is issued, such an error occurred in one ofthe fifth to eighth control circuits.The axis control card, CPU card, or main CPU board may be faulty.

The servo control circuitry monitors the operation of the main CPU board.If an abnormality occurs in the CPU or peripheral circuitry, and thewatchdog timer is not reset, a watchdog error occurs.

Replace the axis control card.

Replace the CPU card and DRAM module.

If the remedies described above do not correct the problem, replace themain CPU board.

CPU card


Axis control card

DRAM module

FROM module



8.17ALARMS 920 AND921 (SERVO ALARM)

Causes and remedies

Watchdog error




Mounting locations ofcards and modules


347

If alarm 972 is issued, and the screen indicates that a servo alarm is issuedon the sub–CPU board, takes the same actions as described above for thesub–CPU board.


!

CPU card

Axis control card


Sub–CPU board

Servo alarm on thesub–CPU board


348

An abnormality occurred in the FSSB (serial servo bus) connecting theCNC to the servo amplifiers.This alarm is issued if an abnormality is detected in any of the axis controlcards, optical cables, or servo amplifiers that make up the FSSB.

A fault location can be determined from the 7–segment LEDs mountedon the servo amplifiers.

AB

CNC Amplifier

0 1 2 3 4 5

Example of FSSB connection

Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier Amplifier

If dashed section A contains a fault, the LEDs of the servo amplifiersprovide the following indications:

AmplifierNo.

Amplifier0

Amplifier1

Amplifier2

Amplifier3

Amplifier4

Amplifier5

LED indication ”–” ”–” ”L” or ”–” ”U” ”U” ”U”

In this case, the following faults may be present:

1) The optical cable connecting the section where the servo amplifierLED indication changes from ”L” or ”–” to ”U” may be faulty. Inthe figure above, the optical cable of section A may be faulty.

2) One of the servo amplifiers on both ends of the section where theservo amplifier LED indication changes from ”L” or ”–” to ”U”may be faulty. In the figure above, amplifier 2 or amplifier 3 maybe faulty.

If dashed section B contains a fault, the LEDs of the servo amplifiersprovide the following indications:

AmplifierNo.

Amplifier0

Amplifier1

Amplifier2

Amplifier3

Amplifier4

Amplifier5

LED indication All ”–” or all ”U”

In this case, the following faults may be present:

1) The optical cable connected to the CNC may be faulty. In the figureabove, the optical cable of section B may be faulty.

2) The axis control card in the CNC may be faulty.3) The first servo amplifier connected to the CNC may be faulty. In

the figure above, amplifier 0 may be faulty.

8.18ALARM 926 (FSSB ALARM)

Causes and remedies

Fault isolation methodusing the LEDs of theservo amplifiers


349

If alarm 926 is issued, the information indicated below is displayed in thelower part of the CNC screen. This information can be used for faultisolation.

NMIC 11100000 00100000 11110111 11111111

00000001 10000000 01010100 00010101

15 """ 8 7 """ 0 15 """ 8 7 """ 0

Bit Bit

Mode information

Status information

Bits 12 through 15 of the mode information represent the number of theslave from which the alarm was issued. The slave unit (such as a servoamplifier) closest to the CNC is assigned slave number 0. For a 2–axisamplifier, for example, a number is assigned to the first axis, and thatnumber incremented by one is assigned to the second axis.

Details of mode information

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 0

Mean-ing

Number of slave fromwhich the alarm wasissued

Ignored

0000: Indicates that the alarm was issued from slave number 0.0001: Indicates that the alarm was issued from slave number 1.

1001: Indicates that the alarm was issued from slave number 9.

From the bits of the status information, the details of a fault can beestimated.

Details of status information

Bit 15 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0

Mean-ing

Ignored Externalalarm

Master portdisconnec-

tion

Slave portdisconnec-

tion

Ignored Externalalarm

Ignored Slave error Ignored

A x x x x 0 0 0 x x 1 x 0 x x x x

A x x x x 0 1 0 x x 0 x 1 x x x x

B x x x x 0 0 1 x x 0 x 1 x x x x

C x x x x 1 0 0 x x 0 x 1 x x x x

Status information matches one of the patterns A, B, and C. (x can be 0 or 1.)

Fault isolation methodusing the screen displayof the CNC


350

When the status information pattern is A

1) The optical cable that connects the slave represented by bits 12 to15 of the mode information to the preceding slave may be faulty.Alternatively, one of the slaves at the ends of that optical cable maybe faulty.

2) The supply voltage fed to the slave amplifier has decreased.

3) The axis control card in the CNC may be faulty.

When the status information pattern is B

1) The optical cable that connects the slave represented by bits 12 to15 of the mode information with the following slave may be faulty.Alternatively, one of the slaves on both sides of that optical cablemay be faulty.


When the status information pattern is C

1) The slave represented by bits 12 to 15 of the mode information maybe faulty.


If the axis control card on the main CPU board is found to be faulty,replace it.

CPU card


Axis control card

DRAM module

FROM module

SRAM module Main CPU board


Mounting location of theaxis control card


351

If alarm 972 is issued, and the screen indicates that the FSSB alarm isissued on the sub–CPU board, apply the same action as that describedabove for the sub–CPU board.


#

CPU card

Axis control card

DRAM module

Sub–CPU board

FSSB alarm on thesub–CPU board


352

An interrupt that is normally not generated in normal operation wasgenerated.Fault isolation is impossible, but a fault may have occurred in the CPUperipheral circuitry.If the fault is recovered when the power is turned off and then back on,the fault may be due to noise.

CPU card


Axis control card

DRAM module

FROM module



Referring to the description of noise protection, check the noiseenvironment around the CNC.

8.19ALARM 930 (CPU INTERRUPT)

Causes and remedies

Replacement of the CPUcard, DRAM module, andmain CPU board.

Noise environmentcheck


353

If alarm 972 is issued, and the screen indicates that a CPU interrupt isgenerated on the sub–CPU board, apply the same action as that describedabove for the sub–CPU board.


$

CPU card

Axis control card


Sub–CPU board

CPU interrupt on thesub–CPU board


354

An ECC error occurred in the SRAM in which data such as parametersand machining programs is stored.This alarm is issued when the battery mounted on the face plate of themain CPU board is dead, or SRAM data is destroyed due to some externalcause. Alternatively, the SRAM module or main CPU board may befaulty.

The ECC check method is used to check the data stored in SRAM. TheECC check method is employed instead of the conventional parity checkmethod.With the ECC check method, 8–bit data for correction is assigned to16–bit data. Even if an error occurs with one of the 16 bits, the error isautomatically corrected using the correction data to allow CNC operationto continue. If an error occurs with two or more bits, this alarm is issued.With the conventional parity check method, a system error occurs evenif a one–bit data error occurs.

The battery is rated at 3 V. If the battery voltage decreases to 2.6 V, thebattery alarm is issued, and ”BAT” blinks on the screen.When the battery alarm is issued, replace the battery with a new oneimmediately.

Perform a memory all clear operation, and then start the CNC. If SRAMbackup data is available, restore the data. The boot system is used forSRAM data backup and restoration.

If memory all clear operation and backup data restoration cannot correctthe problem, replace the SRAM module.After replacing the SRAM module, perform a memory all clear operationand then start the CNC. In this case, all the data must be set again.If backup data is available, restore the data before starting the CNC.

If the remedies described above do not correct the trouble, replace themain CPU board.

8.20ALARM 935 (SRAM ECC ERROR)

Causes and remedies

ECC check

Battery check

Clearing all memory

SRAM modulereplacement



355

CPU card


Axis control card

DRAM module

FROM module


The SRAM module is mounted under theaxis control card.

Mounting location of theSRAM module


356

This alarm is issued if an abnormality is detected on the PMC.The cause may be a communication error on the I/O link, or a failure inthe PMC control circuit.

The I/O link is a serial interface that connects I/O devices with the CNCand transfers I/O signals at high speed between the CNC and devices.If multiple devices are connected via an I/O link, one device functions asa master, while the other devices function as slaves. The state of inputsignals from slaves is transferred to the master at regular intervals. Outputsignals from the master are transferred to the slaves at regular intervals.With the Series 18i–LNA, the CNC (main CPU board) functions as amaster.I/O signals transferred via an I/O link can be used with a PMC ladder.

Master

station

(CNC)JD1A

Slave station #0JD1B

JD1A

Slave station #1JD1B

JD1A

Group 0

Group 1

16 groups maximum

If alarm 950 is issued, and ”PC050” appears on the screen, an I/O linkcommunication error may have occurred.

Example screen display:

% % &&''

In the example screen display shown above, the cause of the alarm can beinferred from xx:yy. xx and yy each represent a hexadecimal number.

8.21ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEMALARM)Causes and remedies

I/O link connection

I/O link communicationerror PC050


357

1) If bit 0 of xx represented in binary is 1, it indicates that the master(CNC) has received invalid communication data. For example, if thefollowing is displayed:

% % ((

xx represents 41 in hexadecimal, or 01000001 in binary. Bit 0, that is,the least significant bit (rightmost bit), is 1. In this case, check the following:

1) Noise environment around the I/O link cableNoise can adversely affect data on the I/O link, and cause amalfunction.

2) I/O link cable contactCheck the contact of the I/O link cable. Check that the cable is notabout to become unplugged, and is latched firmly.

3) Cable connection faultCheck if the I/O link cable is connected correctly.

4) Device failureThe main CPU board or an I/O device connected to the I/O link maybe faulty. Determine a faulty device by replacing the devicessequentially.

When bit 1 (second bit from the right) is also 1, see 2) below.

2) If bit 1 of xx represented in binary is 1, it indicates that an error wasdetected on a slave station (I/O device). For example, if the followingis displayed:

% % ($

xx represents 43 in hexadecimal, or 01000011 in binary. Bit 1 (secondbit from the right) is 1.In this case, yy indicates the information described below:

Number obtained by subtracting 1 from the number represented bybits 0 to 4 of yy: Group number of the slave station where an errorwas detected

Bit 5 of yy: Invalid communication data was detected on the slave.

Bit 6 of yy: Another type of error was detected on the slave.

Bit 7 of yy: A watchdog error or parity error was detected on theslave.

In the example above, yy represents 42 in hexadecimal, or 10000010in binary. Bits 0 to 4 represent 00010 (2 in binary), and the numberobtained by subtracting 1 from this number is the number of the groupin which an error was detected. Bit 7 is 1. This indicates that awatchdog error or parity error was detected on the slave station ofgroup 1.


358

In this case, check the following:

1) When bit 5 of yy is 1Make a check using to the same procedure as that for 1).

2) When bit 6 of yy is 1, or bit 7 of yy is 1First, replace the slave station of the indicated group number.If the trouble cannot be corrected yet, make a check using thesame procedure as that for 1) to determine the cause.

3) If bit 2 of xx represented in binary is 1, the link between the masterstation (CNC) and slave stations is disconnected. For example, if thefollowing is displayed:

% % (

xx represents 84 in hexadecimal, or 10000100 in binary. Bit 2 (thirdbit from the right) is 1.In this case, check the following:

1) Power–off of a slave stationCheck if the power to a slave station is turned off. Check alsofor a momentary power failure and insufficient power supplycapacity.

2) I/O link cable disconnectionCheck if the I/O link cable is unplugged or disconnected.

3) If this does not clear the problem, make a check using to thesame procedure as that for 1).

4) If bit 3 or bit 4 of xx represented in binary is 1, it indicates that a parityerror occurred in the PMC control circuit on the main CPU board.In this case, replace the main CPU board.

The main CPU board may be faulty. Replace the main CPU board. Other problems


359

This alarm is issued when an abnormality (watchdog alarm) is detectedon the PMC. The cause may be a failure in the PMC control circuit.

The PMC control circuit is provided on the main CPU board. Replace themain CPU board.

8.22ALARM 951 (PMC WATCHDOGALARM)Causes and remedies



360

This alarm indicates that an error was detected on an option board otherthan the main CPU board. With the Series 18i–LNA, the following optionboards may be mounted:

Sub–CPU board

PLC interface board


FL–net board

DeviceNet board

If alarm 972 is issued, the following screen display is provided:


$

SLOT indicates the slot number where the option board is mounted. Analarm number issued on the option board may be displayed. In such acase, take the action corresponding to the alarm for the option board. Inthe above example, alarm 930 was issued on the sub–CPU board.

8.23ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM ON ANOPTION BOARD)Causes and remedies

Screen display


361

The slot number of each option slot is shown below.

SLOT 10

SLOT 9

SLOT 1SLOT 2Sub–CPU board

PLC interface board


FL–net board

DeviceNet board

Replace the option board mounted in the slot having the indicated slotnumber.

Slot number

Option boardreplacement


362

An error that does not occur during normal operation occurred. Faultisolation is impossible.

Replace all mounted printed circuit boards (including cards, modules,back panels) sequentially to determine the faulty printed circuit board.Replace the CPU card, main CPU board, and other printed circuit boardsin this order.

8.24ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM FORUNKNOWN CAUSE)Causes and remedies

Printed circuit boardreplacement


363

A bus error occurred on the FANUC–BUS that connects an option board.This alarm indicates that an abnormality occurred in data transfer betweenthe main CPU and an option board.This alarm is also issued when an abnormality occurs in data transferbetween the main CPU and PMC control circuit.

Replace the CPU card on the main CPU board.

Replace the main CPU board.

Replace the mounted options boards sequentially.

Replace the back panel.

CPU cable


Axis control card

DRAM module

FROM module

SRAM module Main CPU board

8.25ALARM 974 (F–BUS ERROR)

Causes and remedies



Option boardreplacement

Back panel replacement

Cards and modules onthe main CPU board


364

If alarm 972 is issued, and the screen indicates that an F–BUS erroroccurred on the sub–CPU board, replace the CPU card on the sub–CPUboard or the sub–CPU board itself.In this case, the back panel or main CPU board may be faulty. Take thesame actions as those described in the preceding items.


( "

CPU card

Axis control card

DRAM module

Sub–CPU board

F–BUS error on thesub–CPU board


365

A bus error occurred on the main CPU board.This alarm indicates that an abnormality occurred in data transfer withinthe main CPU board.


Replace the display control card, axis control card, DRAM module,FROM module, and SRAM module sequentially.


CPU card


Axis control card

DRAM module

FROM module





8.26ALARM 975 (BUS ERROR)

Causes and remedies


Replacement of othercards and modules




366

If alarm 972 is issued, and the screen indicates that a bus error occurredon the sub–CPU board, replace the CPU card, DRAM module, and axiscontrol card on the sub–CPU board, and then the sub–CPU board itself,sequentially.


%

CPU card

Axis control card

DRAM module

Sub–CPU board


Bus error on thesub–CPU board


367

A bus error occurred on the local bus within the main CPU board.This alarm indicates that an abnormality occurred in data transfer withinthe main CPU board.


Replace the display control card, axis control card, DRAM module,FROM module, and then the SRAM module, sequentially.


CPU card


Axis control card

DRAM module

FROM module





8.27ALARM 976 (LOCAL BUS ERROR)

Causes and remedies


Replacement of othercards and modules




368

If alarm 972 is issued, and the screen indicates that an L–BUS erroroccurred on the sub–CPU board, replace the CPU card, DRAM module,and axis control card on the sub–CPU board, and then the sub–CPU boarditself, sequentially.


# "

CPU card

Axis control card

DRAM module

Sub–CPU board


Bus error on sub–CPUboard


369

For the servo alarms listed below, refer to the ”FANUC Servo Motor αseries Maintenance Manual (B–65165E).”

AlarmNo. Message Description *

417 AXIS n: INVALID PARAMETER The setting of a servo–related pa-rameter is invalid.

417

430 AXIS n: SERVO MOTOR OVER-HEAT

The servo motor has overheated. 400

431 AXIS n: OVERLOAD ON THEMAIN CONVERTER CIRCUIT

PSM: Overheat

432 AXIS n: CONVERTER CONTROLVOLTAGE DECREASED/MIS-SING

PSM: Input voltage is missing.PSMR: The control supply voltageis decreased.

414

433 AXIS n: LOW CONVERTER DCLINK VOLTAGE

PSM: The DC link voltage has de-creased.PSMR: The DC link voltage hasdecreased.

434 AXIS n: LOW INVERTER CON-TROL SUPPLY VOLTAGE

SVM: The control supply voltagehas decreased.

435 AXIS n: LOW INVERTER DCLINK VOLTAGE

SVM: The DC link voltage has de-creased.

436 AXIS n: SOFT THERMAL (OVC) The digital servo software detectedsoft thermal (OVC).

437 AXIS n: CONVERTER INPUTCIRCUIT OVERCURRENT

PSM: An overcurrent was de-tected in the input circuit.

438 AXIS n: ABNORMAL INVERTERCURRENT

SVM: The motor current is exces-sively high.

439 AXIS n: CONVERTER DC LINKOVERVOLTAGE

PSM: An excessively high voltageis applied to the DC link.

440 AXIS n: EXCESSIVE CONVERT-ER DECELERATION POWER

PSMR: The regenerative dis-charge amount is excessive.

441 AXIS n: ABNORMAL CURRENTOFFSET

The digital servo software detectedan abnormality in the motor currentdetection circuit.

442 AXIS n: CONVERTER DC LINKCHARGING/INVERTER DB

PSM: The reserved charging cir-cuit of the DC link is abnormal.PSMR: The reserved charging cir-cuit of the DC link is abnormal.

443 AXIS n: CONVERTER COOLINGFAN STOPPED.

PSM: The fan for internal stirring isfaulty.PSMR: The fan for internal stirringis faulty.

444 AXIS n: INVERTER INSIDECOOLING FAN STOPPED.

SVM: The fan for internal stirring isfaulty.

445 AXIS n: SOFTWARE DISCON-NECTION ALARM

The digital servo software detecteda pulse coder disconnection.

416

446 AXIS n: HARDWARE DISCON-NECTION ALARM

The hardware detected a built–inpulse coder disconnection.

8.28SERVO ALARMS


370

NOTEThe column of * indicates the alarm numbers described inthe manual mentioned above.

If the CNC hardware is considered to be faulty as a result of theinvestigation, replace the axis control card.If these alarms are issued on the sub–CPU board, replace the axis controlcard on the sub–CPU board.

CPU card


Axis control card

Main CPU board

CPU card

DRAM module

Sub–CPU board

Axis control card



371

For the SPC alarms (serial pulse coder alarms) listed below, refer to”FANUC Servo Motor α series Maintenance Manual (B–65165E)”.

AlarmNo. Message Description *

380 AXIS n: PULSE CODER CHECK-SUM ERROR (BUILT–IN)

The built–in pulse coder issued achecksum alarm.

350

361 AXIS n: PULSE CODER PHASEERROR (BUILT–IN)

The built–in pulse coder issued analarm indicating a phase data error.

362 AXIS n: PULSE CODER REV-OLUTION ERROR (BUILT–IN)

The built–in pulse coder issued analarm indicating a revolution counterror.

363 AXIS n: CLOCK ERROR (BUILT–IN)

The built–in pulse coder issued aclock alarm.

364 AXIS n: SOFT PHASE ALARM(BUILT–IN)

The digital servo software detectedan error in the built–in pulse coderdata.

365 AXIS n: LED ERROR (BUILT–IN) The LED of the built–in pulse coderis abnormal.

366 AXIS n: PULSE CODER ERROR(BUILT–IN)

The LED of the built–in pulse coderis abnormal.

367 AXIS n: COUNT ERROR (BUILT–IN)

A count error occurred in the built–in pulse coder.

368 AXIS n: SERIAL DATA ERROR(BUILT–IN)

Communication data cannot be re-ceived from the built–in pulse cod-er.

351

369 AXIS n: DATA TRANSFER ER-ROR (BUILT–IN)

A CRC error or stop bit error oc-curred in the communication datareceived from the built–in pulsecoder.


For details on the spindle alarms, refer to ”FANUC Servo Motor α seriesMaintenance Manual (B–65165E)”.

Alarm No Description *

7101–7199 First spindle alarm (AL–01 through 99) 751

7201-7299 Second spindle alarm (AL–01 through 99) 761


8.29SPC ALARMS

8.30SPINDLE ALARMS

APPENDIX

APPENDIXB–63395EN/01 A. ALARM LIST

375

A ALARM LIST

A.1 LIST OF ALARMCODES 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2 ALARMS (PMC) 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3 SPINDLE ALARMS 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIXA. ALARM LIST B–63395EN/01

376

(1) Program errors /Alarms on program and operation (P/S alarm)

Number Message Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER Turn off the power. A parameter which requires the power offwas input, turn off power.

001 TH PARITY ALARM Modify the program or tape. TH alarm (A character with incorrect paritywas input).

002 TV PARITY ALARM Modify the program or tape. TV alarm (The number of characters in ablock is odd). This alarm will be generatedonly when the TV check is effective.

003 TOO MANY DIGITS Modify the program. Data exceeding the maximum allowablenumber of digits was input.

004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND Modify the program. A numeral or the sign “ – ” was input withoutan address at the beginning of a block.

005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS Modify the program. The address was not followed by the ap-propriate data but was followed by anotheraddress or EOB code.

006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVESIGN

Modify the program. Sign “ – ” input error (Sign “ – ” was input afteran address with which it cannot be used. Ortwo or more “ – ” signs were input.)

007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMALPOINT

Modify the program. Decimal point “ . ” input error (A decimal point(.) was not input for an address that requiresone; a decimal point was input for an addressfor which a decimal point is not allowed; ortwo decimal points were input.)

009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT Modify the program. Unusable character was input in significantarea.

010 IMPROPER G–CODE Modify the program. An unusable G code or G code correspond-ing to the function not provided is specified.

011 NO FEEDRATE COMMAN-DED

Modify the program. Feedrate was not commanded to a cuttingfeed or the feedrate was inadequate.

014 ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND Check the parameter settings. In variable lead threading, the lead incremen-tal and decremental outputted by address Kexceed the maximum command value or acommand such that the lead becomes a neg-ative value is given.

015 TOO MANY AXES COMMAN-DED

Modify the program. An attempt has been made to move the toolalong more than the maximum number of si-multaneously controlled axes.

020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS

Modify the program. In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), differ-ence of the distance between the start pointand the center of an arc and that between theend point and the center of the arc exceededthe value specified in parameter No. 3410.

021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS COMMANDED

Modify the program. An axis not included in the selected plane (byusing G17, G18, G19) was commanded incircular interpolation.

022 NO CIRCLE RADIUS Modify the program. The command for circular interpolation lacksarc radius R or coordinate I, J, or K of the dis-tance between the start point to the center ofthe arc.

A.1LIST OF ALARMCODES


377

Number ContentsFaulty location/corrective action

Message

025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 ING02/G03

This alarm is not generated. F0 (fast feed) was instructed by F1 –digit col-umn feed in circular interpolation.

027 NO AXES COMMANDED ING43/G44

Modify the program. No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocksfor the tool length offset type C.Offset is not canceled but another axis is off-set for the tool length offset type C.

028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT Modify the program. In the plane selection command, two or moreaxes in the same direction are commanded.

029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE Modify the program. The offset values specified by H code is toolarge.

030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER Modify the program. The offset number specified by D/H code fortool length offset or cutter compensation istoo large.

031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND ING10

Modify the program. In setting an offset amount by G10, the offsetnumber following address P was excessiveor it was not specified.

032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE ING10

Modify the program. In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writ-ing an offset amount by system variables, theoffset amount was excessive.

033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC Modify the program. A point of intersection cannot be determined forcutter compensation.

034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN ST–UP /EXT BLK

Modify the program. The start up or cancel was going to be per-formed in the G02 or G03 mode in cutter com-pensation C.

035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G39 This alarm is not generated. G39 is commanded in cutter compensation Bcancel mode or on the plane other than offsetplane.

036 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Modify the program. Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cuttercompensation mode.

037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANEIN CRC

Modify the program. G40 is commanded on the plane other thanoffset plane in cutter compensation B. Theplane selected by using G17, G18 or G19 ischanged in cutter compensation C mode.

038 INTERFERENCE IN CIRCU-LAR BLOCK

Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in cutter compensationC because the arc start point or end pointcoincides with the arc center.

041 INTERFERENCE IN CRC Modify the program. Overcutting will occur in cutter compensationC. Two or more blocks are consecutivelyspecified in which functions such as the auxil-iary function and dwell functions are per-formed without movement in the cutter com-pensation mode.

042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED INCRC

Modify the program. Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded incutter compensation.

044 G27–G30 NOT ALLOWED INFIXED CYC

This alarm is not generated. One of G27 to G30 is commanded in cannedcycle mode.

046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN COMMAND

Modify the program. Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commandedfor 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position returncommand.


378


Message

047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT This alarm is not generated. Two or more parallel axes (in parallel with abasic axis) have been specified upon start–up of three–dimensional tool compensationor three–dimensional coordinate conversion.

048 BASIC 3 AXIS NOT FOUND This alarm is not generated. Start–up of three–dimensional tool com-pensation or three–dimensional coordinateconversion has been attempted, but thethree basic axes used when Xp, Yp, or Zp isomitted are not set in parameter No. 1022.

050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED INTHRD BLK

This alarm is not generated. Optional chamfering or corner R is comman-ded in the thread cutting block.

051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR

This alarm is not generated. Improper movement or the move distancewas specified in the block next to the optionalchamfering or corner R block.

052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTERCHF/CNR

This alarm is not generated. The block next to the chamfering or corner Rblock is not G01,G02 or G03.

053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COM-MANDS

This alarm is not generated. For systems without the arbitary angle cham-fering or corner R cutting, a comma was spe-cified. For systems with this feature, a com-ma was followed by something other than Ror C Correct the program.

055 MISSING MOVE VALUE INCHF/CNR

This alarm is not generated. In the arbitrary angle chamfering or corner Rblock, the move distance is less than chamferor corner R amount.

058 END POINT NOT FOUND This alarm is not generated. In a arbitrary angle chamfering or corner Rcutting block, a specified axis is not in the se-lected plane.

059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOTFOUND

This alarm is not generated. In an external program number search, aspecified program number was not found.Otherwise, a program specified for searchingis being edited in background processing.

060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOTFOUND

Check the sequence number. Commanded sequence number was notfound in the sequence number search.

070 NO PROGRAM SPACE INMEMORY

1) Operate memory reduction.

2) Delete any unnecessary pro-grams and then execute reg-istration.

The memory area is insufficient.

071 DATA NOT FOUND Check the data to search for. The address to be searched was not found.Or the program with specified program num-ber was not found in program numbersearch.

072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS Delete any unnecessary pro-grams and then execute registra-tion.

The number of programs to be stored ex-ceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option), 200 (option),400 (option) or 1000 (option).

073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE

1) Change the program number.

2) Delete any unnecessary pro-grams and then execute reg-istration.

The commanded program number has al-ready been used.

074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER

Modify the program number. The program number is other than 1 to 9999.

075 PROTECT Modify the program number. An attempt was made to register a programwhose number was protected.


379


Message

076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Modify the program. Address P (program number) was not com-manded in the block which includes an M98,G65, or G66 command.

077 SUB PROGRAM NESTINGERROR

Modify the program. The subprogram was called in five folds.

078 NUMBER NOT FOUND 1) Modify the program.

2) Stop the background editingoperation.

A program number or a sequence numberwhich was specified by address P in the blockwhich includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66was not found. The sequence number speci-fied by a GOTO statement was not found.Otherwise, a called program is being editedin background processing.

079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR Check the contents of thememory and the contents of theprogram to be read from theexternal I/O device.

In memory or program collation,a program inmemory does not agree with that read froman external I/O device.

080 G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ASSERTED

This alarm is not generated. In the automatic tool length measurementfunction (G37), the measurement positionreach signal (XAE, YAE, or ZAE) is not turnedon within an area specified in parameter6254 (value ε).

081 OFFSET NUMBER NOTFOUND IN G37

This alarm is not generated. Tool length automatic measurement (G37)was specified without a H code. (Automatictool length measurement function).

082 H–CODE NOT ALLOWED ING37

This alarm is not generated. H code and automatic tool compensation(G37) were specified in the same block. (Au-tomatic tool length measurement function).

083 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND ING37

This alarm is not generated. In automatic tool length measurement, an in-valid axis was specified or the command is in-cremental.

085 COMMUNICATION ERROR 1) Check the RS–232C channelnumber.

2) Set the correct baud rate(number of bits per second)for RS–232C data.

When entering data in the memory by usingReader / Puncher interface, an overrun, par-ity or framing error was generated.

086 DR SIGNAL OFF 1) Check that the I/O device ison.

2) Check that the cable to the I/Odevice is connected.

3) Replace the I/O device.

4) Replace the master printedcircuit board.

When entering data in the memory by usingReader / Puncher interface, the ready signal(DR) of reader / puncher was turned off.

087 BUFFER OVERFLOW 1) Replace the I/O device.


When entering data in the memory by usingReader / Puncher interface, though the readterminate command is specified, input is notinterrupted after 10 characters read.

088 LAN FILE TRANS ERROR(CHANNEL–1)

This alarm is not generated. File data transfer via OSI–ETHERNET hasbeen stopped due to a transfer error.

089 LAN FILE TRANS ERROR(CHANNEL–2)

This alarm is not generated. File data transfer via OSI–ETHERNET hasbeen stopped due to a transfer error.


380


Message

090 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE

This alarm is not generated. The reference position return cannot be per-formed normally because the reference posi-tion return start point is too close to the refer-ence position or the speed is too slow.

091 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE

Operational error. Manual reference position return cannot beperformed when automatic operation ishalted.

092 AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE POINT

1) Check the contents of theprogram.

2) Replace the pulse coder forthat axis.

3) For the first to sixth axes,replace the master printed cir-cuit board.

4) For the loader axis or for theaxis for the second path,replace the sub–CPU printedcircuit board.

The commanded axis by G27 (Referenceposition return check) did not return to the ref-erence position.

094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD CHG)

This alarm is not generated. P type cannot be specified when the programis restarted. (After the automatic operationwas interrupted, the coordinate system set-ting operation was performed.)

095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (EXT OFS CHG)

This alarm is not generated. P type cannot be specified when the programis restarted. (After the automatic operationwas interrupted, the external workpiece off-set amount changed.)

096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (WRK OFS CHG)

This alarm is not generated. P type cannot be specified when the programis restarted. (After the automatic operationwas interrupted, the workpiece offset amountchanged.)

097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (AUTO EXEC)

This alarm is not generated. P type cannot be directed when the programis restarted. (After power ON, after emergen-cy stop or P / S 94 to 97 reset, no automaticoperation is performed.)

098 G28 FOUND IN SEQUENCE RETURN

This alarm is not generated. A command of the program restart was speci-fied without the reference position return op-eration after power ON or emergency stop,and G28 was found during search.

099 MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWED AFT. SEARCH

This alarm is not generated. After completion of search in program restart,a move command is given with MDI. Moveaxis before a move command or don’t inter-rupt MDI operation.

100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE

After the completion of therelated operation, set PWE to 0(parameter writing enabled), thenreset the system.

On the PARAMETER(SETTING) screen,PWE(parameter writing enabled) is set to 1.

101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY Press the ”PROG” and ”RESET”key combination to delete onlythe program being edited. (Thiscancels the alarm.)Register that program again.

The power turned off while rewriting thememory by program edit operation.

109 P/S ALARM Modify the program. A value other than 0 or 1 was specified afterP in the G08 code, or no value was specified.


381


Message

110 DATA OVERFLOW Modify the program. The absolute value of fixed decimal point dis-play data exceeds the allowable range.

111 CALCULATED DATA OVER-FLOW

Modify the program. The result of calculation turns out to be inval-id, an alarm No.111 is issued.–1047 to –10–29, 0, 10–29 to 1047

112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Modify the program. Division by zero was specified. (including tan90°)

113 IMPROPER COMMAND Modify the program. A function which cannot be used in custommacro is commanded.

114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO Modify the program. There is an error in other formats than <For-mula>.

115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER

Modify the program. A value not defined as a variable number isdesignated in the custom macro or in high–speed cycle machining.The header contents are improper. Thisalarm is given in the following cases:

High speed cycle machining

1. The header corresponding to the speci-fied machining cycle number called is notfound.

2. The cycle connection data value is out ofthe allowable range (0 – 999).

3. The number of data in the header is out ofthe allowable range (0 – 32767).

4. The start data variable number of execut-able format data is out of the allowablerange (#20000 – #85535).

5. The last storing data variable number ofexecutable format data is out of the allow-able range (#85535).

6. The storing start data variable number ofexecutable format data is overlappedwith the variable number used in theheader.

116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE

Modify the program. The left side of substitution statement is avariable whose substitution is inhibited.

118 PARENTHESIS NESTINGERROR

Modify the program. The nesting of bracket exceeds the upperlimit (quintuple).

119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT Modify the program. The SQRT argument is negative. Or BCD ar-gument is negative, and other values than 0to 9 are present on each line of BIN argu-ment.

122 FOUR FOLD MACRO MODAL–CALL

Modify the program. The macro modal call is specified four fold.

123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND IN DNC

This alarm is not generated. Macro control command is used during DNCoperation.

124 MISSING END STATEMENT Modify the program. DO – END does not correspond to 1 : 1.

125 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO Modify the program. <Formula> format is erroneous.

126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER Modify the program. In DOn, 1 n 3 is not established.


382


Message

127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT INSAME BLOCK

Modify the program. NC and custom macro commands coexist.

128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE NUMBER

Modify the program. The sequence number specified in thebranch command was not 0 to 9999. Or, itcannot be searched.

129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS

Modify the program. An address which is not allowed in <Argu-ment Designation > is used.

130 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION Modify the program. An axis control command was given by PMCto an axis controlled by CNC. Or an axis con-trol command was given by CNC to an axiscontrolled by PMC.

131 TOO MANY EXTERNALALARM MESSAGES

This alarm is not generated. Five or more alarms have generated in exter-nal alarm message.Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find thecause.

132 ALARM NUMBER NOTFOUND

This alarm is not generated. No alarm No. concerned exists in externalalarm message clear.Check the PMC ladder diagram.

133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT.ALARM MSG

This alarm is not generated. Small section data is erroneous in externalalarm message or external operator mes-sage.

135 ILLEGAL ANGLE COMMAND This alarm is not generated. The index table indexing positioning anglewas instructed in other than an integral multi-ple of the value of the minimum angle.

136 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND This alarm is not generated. In index table indexing.Another control axiswas instructed together with the B axis.

138 SUPERIMPOSED DATAOVERFLOW

This alarm is not generated. The total distribution amount of the CNC andPMC is too large during superimposed con-trol of the extended functions for PMC axiscontrol.

139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMCCONTROL AXIS

This alarm is not generated. An axis is selected in commanding by PMCaxis control.

140 BP/S ALARM Operational error. An attempt was made to select or delete, inthe background, the program that is alreadyin the foreground.Perform a correct background editingoperation.

141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 INCRC

This alarm is not generated. G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the tooloffset mode.

142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE This alarm is not generated. Scaling magnification is commanded in otherthan 1 – 999999.Correct the scaling magnification setting(G51 Pp or parameter 5411 or 5421).

143 SCALED MOTION DATAOVERFLOW

This alarm is not generated. The scaling results, move distance, coordi-nate value and circular radius exceed themaximum command value.

144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED This alarm is not generated. The coordinate rotation plane and arc or cut-ter compensation C plane must be the same.


383


Message

145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS INPOLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION

This alarm is not generated. The conditions are incorrect when the polarcoordinate interpolation starts or it is can-celed.

1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1was specified.

2) An error is found in the plane selection.Parameters No. 5460 and No. 5461 areincorrectly specified.

146 IMPROPER G CODE This alarm is not generated. G codes which cannot be specified in the po-lar coordinate interpolation mode was speci-fied.

148 ILLEGAL SETTING DATA Modify parameters Nos. 1710 to1714.

Automatic corner override deceleration rateis out of the settable range of judgementangle. Modify the parameters (No.1710 toNo.1714)

149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 This alarm is not generated. A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was speci-fied as the life count type in the extended toollife management.

150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUPNUMBER

This alarm is not generated. Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allow-able value.

151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOTFOUND

This alarm is not generated. The tool group commanded in the machiningprogram is not set.

152 NO SPACE FOR TOOLENTRY

This alarm is not generated. The number of tools within one group ex-ceeds the maximum value registerable.

153 T–CODE NOT FOUND This alarm is not generated. In tool life data registration, a T code was notspecified where one should be.

154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFEGROUP

This alarm is not generated. When the group is not commanded, H99 orD99 was commanded.

155 ILLEGAL T–CODE IN M06 This alarm is not generated. In the machining program, M06 and T code inthe same block do not correspond to thegroup in use.

156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND This alarm is not generated. P and L commands are missing at the headof program in which the tool group is set.

157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS This alarm is not generated. The number of tool groups to be set exceedsthe maximum allowable value. (See parame-ter No. 6800 bit 0 and 1)

158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA This alarm is not generated. The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modifythe setting value.

159 TOOL DATA SETTING INCOMPLETE

This alarm is not generated. During executing a life data setting program,power was turned off. Set again.

160 G72.1 NESTING ERROR This alarm is not generated. A subprogram which performs rotationalcopy with G72.1 contains another G72.1command.

161 G72.1 NESTING ERROR This alarm is not generated. A subprogram which performs parallel copywith G72.2 contains another G72.2 com-mand.


384


Message

175 ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND This alarm is not generated. Conditions when performing circular inter-polation start or cancel not correct. Tochange the mode to the cylindrical interpola-tion mode, specify the command in a formatof “G07.1 rotation–axis name radius of cylin-der.”

176 IMPROPER G–CODE ING107

This alarm is not generated. Any of the following G codes which cannot bespecified in the cylindrical interpolation modewas specified.1) G codes for positioning: G28,, G73, G74,G76, G81 – G89,

including the codes specifying the rapidtraverse cycle2) G codes for setting a coordinate system:G52,G92, 3) G code for selecting coordinate system:G53 G54–G59

177 CHECK SUM ERROR(G05 MODE)

Modify the program. Check sum errorModify the program.

178 G05 COMMANDED ING41/G42 MODE

Modify the program. G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 mode.

179 PARAM. (NO. 7510) SETTINGERROR

Change the setting of parameterNo. 7510.

The number of controlled axes set by the pa-rameter 7510 exceeds the maximum num-ber.

180 COMMUNICATION ERROR (REMOTE BUF)

This alarm is not generated. Remote buffer connection alarm has gener-ated. Confirm the number of cables, parame-ters and I/O device.

181 FORMAT ERROR IN G81BLOCK

This alarm is not generated. G81 block format error (hobbing machine)

1) T (number of teeth) has not beeninstructed.

2) Data outside the command range wasinstructed by either T, L, Q or P.

182 G81 NOT COMMANDED This alarm is not generated. G83 (C axis servo lag quantity offset) wasinstructed though synchronization by G81has not been instructed. Correct the pro-gram. (hobbing machine)

183 DUPLICATE G83 (COMMANDS)

This alarm is not generated. G83 was instructed before canceled by G82after compensating for the C axis servo lagquantity by G83. (hobbing machine)

184 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G81 This alarm is not generated. A command not to be instructed during syn-chronization by G81 was instructed. (hob-bing machine)

1) A C axis command by G00, G27, G28,G29, G30, etc. was instructed.

2) Inch/Metric switching by G20, G21 wasinstructed.

185 RETURN TO REFERENCEPOINT

This alarm is not generated. G81 was instructed without performing refer-ence position return after power on or emer-gency stop. (hobbing machine)


385


Message

186 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR

This alarm is not generated. Parameter error regarding G81 (hobbingmachine)

1) The C axis has not been set to be a rotaryaxis.

2) A hob axis and position coder gear ratiosetting error

190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT Modify the program. In the constant surface speed control, theaxis specification is wrong. (See parameterNo. 3770.) The specified axis command (P)contains an illegal value.Correct the program.

194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN SYNCHRO–MODE

Modify the program. A contour control mode, spindle positioning(Cs–axis control) mode, or rigid tappingmode was specified during the serial spindlesynchronous control mode. Correct the pro-gram so that the serial spindle synchronouscontrol mode is released in advance.

197 C–AXIS COMMANDED INSPINDLE MODE

Check the PMC Ladder program. The program specified a movement alongthe Cs–axis when the signalCON(DGN=G027#7) was off. Correct theprogram, or consult the PMC ladder diagramto find the reason the signal is not turned on.

199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Modify the program. Undefined macro word was used.

200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND

Modify the program. In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the rangeor is not specified.

201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND INRIGID TAP

Modify the program. In the rigid tap, no F value is specified.

202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW Modify the program. In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value istoo large. (System error)

203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGIDTAPPING

This alarm is not generated. In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M code(M29) or an S command is incorrect. Modifythe program.

204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION This alarm is not generated. In the rigid tap, an axis movement is specifiedbetween the rigid M code (M29) block andG84 or G74 for M series (G84 or G88 for T se-ries) block. Modify the program.

205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF This alarm is not generated. Rigid mode DI signal is not ON when G84 orG74 is executed though the rigid M code(M29) is specified.Consult the PMC ladderdiagram to find the reason the DI signal(DGNG061.1) is not turned on.

206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE (RIGID TAP)

Modify the program. Plane changeover was instructed in the rigidmode.


386


Message

210 CAN NOT COMAND M198/M199

This alarm is not generated. M98 and M99 are executed in the scheduleoperation. M198 is executed in the DNC op-eration. Modify the program.

1) The execution of an M198 or M99 com-mand was attempted during scheduledoperation. Alternatively, the execution ofan M198 command was attempted dur-ing DNC operation. Correct the program.

2) The execution of an M99 command wasattempted by an interrupt macro duringpocket machining in a multiple repetitivecanned cycle.

211 G31 (HIGH) NOT ALLOWEDIN G99

Modify the program. G31 is commanded in the per revolutioncommand when the high–speed skip optionis provided.

212 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT This alarm is not generated. The arbitrary angle chamfering or a corner Ris commanded or the plane including an addi-tional axis.

213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHRO–MODE

Modify the program. Movement is commanded for the axis to besynchronously controlled.Any of the following alarms occurred in theoperation with the simple synchronizationcontrol.

1) The program issued the move commandto the slave axis.

2) The program issued the manual continu-ous feed/manual handle feed/incremen-tal feed command to the slave axis.

3) The program issued the automatic refer-ence position return command withoutspecifying the manual reference positionreturn after the power was turned on.

4) The difference between the position erroramount of the master and slave axes ex-ceeded the value specified in parameterNO.8313.

214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHRO–MODE

Modify the program. Coordinate system is set or tool compensa-tion of the shift type is executed in the syn-chronous control.

222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN BG.–EDIT

This alarm is not generated. Input and output are executed at a time in thebackground edition.

224 RETURN TO REFERENCEPOINT

Perform reference positionreturn.

Reference position return has not been per-formed before the automatic operation starts.Perform reference position return only whenbit 0 of parameter 1005 is 0.

230 R CODE NOT FOUND Modify the program. The infeed quantity R has not been instructedfor the G161 block. Or the R command valueis negative. Correct the program.


387


Message

231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 ORL50

Modify the program. Any of the following errors occurred in thespecified format at the programmable–pa-rameter input.

1 Address N or R was not entered.

2 A number not specified for a parameterwas entered.

3 The axis number was too large.

4 An axis number was not specified in theaxis–type parameter.

5 An axis number was specified in the pa-rameter which is not an axis type. Correctthe program.

6 An attempt was made to reset bit 4 of pa-rameter 3202 (NE9) or change parameter3210 (PSSWD) when they are protectedby a password.

232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS COMMANDS

Modify the program. Three or more axes (in the normal directioncontrol mode two or more axes) were speci-fied as helical axes in the helical interpolationmode.

233 DEVICE BUSY Operational error. When an attempt was made to use a unitsuch as that connected via the RS–232–C in-terface, other users were using it.

239 BP/S ALARM This alarm is not generated. While punching was being performed withthe function for controlling external I/O units,background editing was performed.

240 BP/S ALARM Operational error. Background editing was performed duringMDI operation.

241 ILLEGAL FORMAT ING02.2/G03.2

This alarm is not generated. The end point, I, J, K, or R is missing from acommand for involute interpolation.

242 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02.2/G03.2

This alarm is not generated. An invalid value has been specified for invo-lute interpolation.

The start or end point is within the basiccircle.

I, J, K, or R is set to 0.

The number of rotations between the startof the involute curve and the start or endpoint exceeds 100.

243 OVER TOLERANCE OF ENDPOINT

This alarm is not generated. The end point is not on the involute curvewhich includes the start point and thus fallsoutside the range specified with parameterNo. 5610.

253 G05 IS NOT AVAILABLE Modify the program. Alarm detailsBinary input operation using high–speed re-mote buffer (G05) or high–speed cycle ma-chining (G05) has been specified in advancecontrol mode (G08P1). Execute G08P0; tocancel advance control mode, beforeexecuting these G05 commands.

5000 ILLEGAL COMMAND CODE This alarm is not generated. The specified code was incorrect in the high–precision contour control (HPCC) mode.


388


Message

5003 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (HPCC)

This alarm is not generated. There is an invalid parameter.

5004 HPCC NOT READY This alarm is not generated. High–precision contour control is not ready.

5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONEBLOCK

This alarm is not generated. The number of words specified in a block ex-ceeded 26 in the HPCC mode.

5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE This alarm is not generated. In the HPCC mode, the machine moved be-yond the limit.

5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRYRUN)

This alarm is not generated. The maximum feedrate (parameter No.1422) or the feedrate in dry run (parameterNo. 1410) is 0 in the HPCC model.

5010 END OF RECORD Modify the program. The end of record (%) was specified. I/O is incorrect. modify the program.

5011 PARAMETER ZERO(CUT MAX)

This alarm is not generated. The maximum cutting feedrate (parameterNo. 1422)is 0 in the HPCC mode.

5012 G05 P10000 ILLEGAL STARTUP (HPCC)

This alarm is not generated. G05 P10000 has been specified in a modefrom which the system cannot enter HPCCmode.

5013 HPCC: CRC OFS REMAIN ATCANCEL

This alarm is not generated. G05P0 has been specified in G41/G42 modeor with offset remaining.

5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND This alarm is not generated. Transfer cannot be performed because notrace data exists.

5015 This alarm is not generated. The specified rotation axis does not exist fortool axis direction handle feed.

5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OFM CODE

This alarm is not generated. M codes which belonged to the same groupwere specified in a block. Alternatively,an Mcode which must be specified without other Mcodes in the block was specified in a blockwith other M codes.

5020 PARAMETER OF RESTARTERROR

This alarm is not generated. An erroneous parameter was specified for re-starting a program.A parameter for program restart is invalid.

5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING This alarm is not generated. Three–dimensional coordinate conversionG68 has been specified three or more times.

5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR This alarm is not generated. A G68 command block contains a format er-ror. This alarm is issued in the followingcases:

1. I, J, or K is missing from a G68 commandblock (missing coordinate rotation op-tion).

2. I, J, and K are 0 in a G68 command block.

3. R is missing from a G68 command block.


389


Message

5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (ST.COMP)

This alarm is not generated. The parameter settings for straightness com-pensation contain an error. Possible causesare as follows:

1. A parameter for a movement axis or com-pensation axis contains an axis numberwhich is not used.

2. More than 128 pitch error compensationpoints exist between the negative andpositive end points.

3. Compensation point numbers forstraightness compensation are not as-signed in the correct order.

4. No straightness compensation point existsbetween the pitch error compensationpoints at the negative and positive ends.

5. The compensation value for each com-pensation point is too large or too small.

5050 ILL–COMMAND IN CHOPPINGMODE

This alarm is not generated. In the chopping function, a move commandwas generated for the chopping axis inchopping mode (reciprocation between theupper and lower dead points).

5051 M–NET CODE ERROR 1) Check the M–NET–relatedparameters on the NNC(parameters Nos. 161 to

Abnormal character received (other thancode used for transmission)

5052 M–NET ETX ERROR(parameters Nos. 161 to178).

2) Check the state and commu-nication settings on the PLC.

Abnormal ETX code The CNC cannot recognize the ETX (end–of–text) code.

5053 M–NET CONNECT ERROR 1) Check the M–NET–relatedparameters on the NC(parameters Nos. 161 to178).

2) Check the communicationcable between the NC andthe PLC. Check the effects ofnoise and other factors.


Connection time monitoring error (parameterNo. 175)

5054 M–NET RECEIVE ERROR 1) Check that the M–NET com-munication settings are cor-rect on the NC (parameterNo. 176).



Polling time monitoring error (parameter No.176)


390


Message

5055 M–NET PRT/FRT ERROR 1) Check the M–NET–relatedparameters on the NC(parameters Nos. 161 to178).



Vertical parity or framing error

5056 M–NET OVERRUN ERROR 1) Check that the M–NET com-munication settings are cor-rect (parameter No. 161).



An overrun error was detected.

5057 M–NET BOARD SYSTEMDOWN

1) Check the settings for trans-mission time monitoring(parameter No. 177).

2) Check the state of theM–NET board on the CNC.

Transmission timeout error (parameter No.177)ROM parity errorM–NET system error interrupt other than theabove

5063 IS NOT PRESET AFTER REF. This alarm is not generated. The position counter was not preset beforethe start of workpiece thickness measure-ment. This alarm is issued in the followingcases:

(1) An attempt has been made to start mea-surement without first establishing the ori-gin.

(2) An attempt has been made to start mea-surement without first presetting the posi-tion counter after manual return to the ori-gin.

5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT (IS–B, IS–C)

Modify the program. Circular interpolation has been specified ona plane consisting of axes having different in-crement systems.

5065 DIFFERENT AXIS UNIT (PMC AXIS)

Check parameter No. 8010. Axes having different increment systemshave been specified in the same DI/DOgroup for PMC axis control. Modify the set-ting of parameter No. 8010.

5066 RESTART ILLEGAL SEQUENCE NUMBER

This alarm is not generated. Sequence number 7xxx has been read dur-ing search for the next sequence number atprogram restart for the return/restart function.

5068 G31 P90 FORMAT ERROR This alarm is not generated. No movement axis or more than one move-ment axis has been specified.

5073 NO DECIMAL POINT This alarm is not generated.(P/S007 is generated.)

No decimal point has been specified for anaddress requiring a decimal point.

5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATIONERROR

Modify the program. The same address has been specified two ormore times in a single block. Alternatively,two or more G codes in the same group havebeen specified in a single block.


391


Message

5082 DATA SERVER ERROR This alarm is not generated. This alarm is detailed on the data server mes-sage screen.

5110 IMPROPER G–CODE (G05.1 G1 MODE)

This alarm is not generated. An illegal G code was specified in simplehigh–precision contour control mode.A command was specified for the index tableindexing axis in simple high–precision con-tour control mode.

5115 SPL : ERROR This alarm is not generated. There is an error in the specification of therank.

No knot is specified.

The knot specification has an error.

The number of axes exceeds the limits.

Other program errors

5116 SPL : ERROR This alarm is not generated. There is a program error in a block underlook–ahead control.

Monotone increasing of knots is not ob-served.

In NURBS interpolation mode, a mode thatcannot be used together is specified.

5117 SPL : ERROR This alarm is not generated. The first control point of NURBS is incorrect.

5118 SPL : ERROR This alarm is not generated. After manual intervention with manual abso-lute mode set to on, NURBS interpolationwas restarted.

5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SPIRAL

This alarm is not generated. A spiral interpolation or conical interpolationcommand has an error. Specifically, this erroris caused by one of the following:

1) L = 0 is specified.2) Q = 0 is specified.3) R/, R/, C is specified.4) Zero is specified as height increment.5) Three or more axes are specified as the

height axes.6) A height increment is specified when

there are two height axes.7) Conical interpolation is specified when

the helical interpolation function is notselected.

8) Q < 0 is specified when radius difference> 0.

9) Q > 0 is specified when radius difference< 0.

10) A height increment is specified when noheight axis is specified.

5123 OVER TOLERANCE OF ENDPOINT

This alarm is not generated. The difference between a specified end pointand the calculated end point exceeds the al-lowable range (parameter 3471).


392


Message

5124 CAN NOT COMMAND SPIRAL

This alarm is not generated. A spiral interpolation or conical interpolationwas specified in any of the following modes:

1) Scaling2) Programmable mirror image3) Polar coordinate interpolation

In cutter compensation C mode, the centeris set as the start point or end point.

5134 FSSB : OPEN READY TIMEOUT

Check the FSSB cable and thestate of the amplifier.

Initialization did not place FSSB in the openready state.

5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE Check the FSSB cable and thestate of the amplifier.

FSSB has entered error mode.

5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS ISSMALL


In comparison with the number of controlledaxes, the number of amplifiers recognized byFSSB is not enough.

5137 FSSB : CONFIGURATION ER-ROR

1) Check the FSSB cable andthe state of the amplifier.

2) Check the FSSB–relatedparameters.

FSSB detected a configuration error.

5138 FSSB : AXIS SETTING NOTCOMPLETE


In automatic setting mode, axis setting hasnot been made yet.Perform axis setting on the FSSB settingscreen.

5156 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION (SHPCC)

This alarm is not generated. In simple high–precision contour controlmode, the controlled axis selection signal(PMC axis control) changes.In simple high–precision contour controlmode, the simple synchronous axis selectionsignal changes.

5197 FSSB : OPEN TIME OUT Check the FSSB cable and thestate of the amplifier.

The CNC permitted FSSB to open, but FSSBwas not opened.

5198 FSSB : ID DATA NOT READ Check the FSSB cable and thestate of the amplifier.

Temporary assignment failed, so amplifierinitial ID information could not be read.

5222 SRAM CORRECTABLE ERROR

Replace the master printed cir-cuit board (SRAM module).

A correctable error cannot be removed fromthe SRAM.

6000 G24, G48 IN MEMORY OVER Modify the program. The number of points recorded with G24 andG48 has already reached the maximum val-ue (10 points). No further points can be re-corded.

6001 I1, I2 NOT FOUND Modify the program. G26, M31, or M34 is encountered, but thereis no flag point to which a return is made.

6002 G45, G46 CAN NOT CALCLA-TION

Modify the program. When G45 or G46 is specified, the previousamount of travel was 0, so no move com-mand can be generated.

6003 NOT G92 IN G53 MODE Modify the program. When a G92 command is executed in G53mode, the workpiece coordinate systemdoes not match the machine coordinate sys-tem.

6004 COMMAND MORE THANTWO AXIS

Modify the program. When external positioning (G34) is per-formed, more than one axis is specified at thesame time.


393


Message

6005 FIRST BLOCK NOT BACKTAP

Modify the program. When a return is performed during tapping,the first block does not specify a tapping re-turn command.

6006 COMMAND OF AXIS NOTRIGHT

Modify the program. The spindle rotation command is not speci-fied correctly in a tapping cycle (G74/G84,G76/G86).

6007 WRONG OF G52 Modify the program. G52 is specified in cutter compensationmode. Alternatively, more than one axis isspecified, or no axis is specified in the G52block.

6008 TOO MANY DIGITS OF G34 FCOMMAND

Modify the program. In external positioning (G34), a feedrate ex-ceeding F655.35 is specified.

6009 ABS. AXIS ADDR. IS ILLEGAL Check parameter No. 17100. An invalid address is set in a parameter.

6010 INC. AXIS ADDR. IS ILLEGAL Check parameter No. 17101. An invalid address is set in a parameter. Al-ternatively, the set address name is the sameas an ABS axis name.

6011 2ND AUX. ADDR. IS ILLEGAL Check parameter No. 17102. An invalid address is set in a parameter. Al-ternatively, the set address name is the sameas an ABS/INC axis name.

6012 3RD AUX. ADDR. IS ILLEGAL Check parameter No. 17103. An invalid address is set in a parameter. Al-ternatively, the set address name is the sameas an ABS/INC axis name. Or, the set ad-dress name is the same as a second auxiliaryfunction name.

6013 4TH AUX. ADDR. IS ILLEGAL Check parameter No. 17104. An invalid address is set in a parameter. Al-ternatively, the set address name is the sameas an ABS/INC axis name. Or, the set ad-dress name is the same as a second/thirdauxiliary function name.

6014 CAN NOT COMMANDED [RESTRANT]

Operational error. Block restart cannot be specified in cuttercompensation or tool offset mode.

(2) Pulse coder alarm


Contents

300 nth–axis origin return Execute reference positionreturn for the nth–axis.

Manual reference position return is requiredfor the nth–axis (n=1 – 8).

301 APC alarm: nth–axis commu-nication

1) Replace the nth–axis pulsecoder.

2) Replace the nth–axis servoamplifier (SMV).

3) Replace the nth–axis returncable.

Alternatively,

1) Replace the nth–axis sepa-rate detector.

2) Replace the nth–axis sep-arate detector I/F unit.


nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC communication error.Failure in data transmission


394


Message

302 APC alarm: nth–axis overtime


2) Replace the nth–axis sepa-rate detector I/F unit.


nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC overtime error.Failure in data transmission.

303 APC alarm: nth–axis framing 1) Replace the nth–axis sepa-rate detector.



nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC framing error. Failurein data transmission.

304 APC alarm: nth–axis parity 1) Replace the nth–axis sepa-rate detector.



nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC parity error.Failure in data transmission.

305 APC alarm: nth–axis pulse er-ror




nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC pulse error alarm. APC alarm.

306 APC alarm: nth–axis battery voltage 0

1 Replace the nth–axis APCbattery.

2) Replace the cable of theabove battery.


4) Replace the detector.

nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC battery voltage hasdecreased to a low level so that the data can-not be held. APC alarm.

307 APC alarm: nth–axis batterylow 1





nth–axis (n=1 – 8) axis APC battery voltagereaches a level where the battery must be re-newed.APC alarm.

308 APC alarm: nth–axis batterylow 2





nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC battery voltage hasreached a level where the battery must be re-newed (including when power is OFF).APC alarm .


395


Message

309 APC ALARM: n AXIS ZRN IMPOSSIBL

Rotate the nth–axis motor oneor more times. Then, turn off the power and return to theorigin.Alternatively,Rotate the nth–axis motor to letthe one–rotation signal of the separate detector to passthrough. Then, turn off the power and return to the origin.

Return to the origin has been attempted with-out first rotating the motor one or more times.

360 n AXIS : ABNORMALCHECKSUM (INT)

1) Apply appropriate counter-measures against noise,because the nth–axis returnsignal is affected by noise.


A checksum error occurred in the built–inpulse coder.

361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASEDATA (INT)

1) Apply appropriate counter-measures against noise, because the nth–axis returnsignal is affected by noise.


A phase data error occurred in the built–inpulse coder.

362 n AXIS : ABNORMALREV.DATA (INT)



A rotation speed count error occurred in thebuilt–in pulse coder.

363 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CLOCK(INT)

Replace the nth–axis pulsecoder.

A clock error occurred in the built–in pulsecoder.

364 n AXIS : SOFT PHASEALARM (INT)



The digital servo software detected invaliddata in the built–in pulse coder.

365 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (INT) Replace the nth–axis pulsecoder.

An LED error occurred in the built–in pulsecoder.

366 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (INT) 1) Apply appropriate counter-measures against noise, because the nth–axis returnsignal is affected by noise.


A pulse error occurred in the built–in pulsecoder.

367 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (INT) 1) Apply appropriate counter-measures against noise, because the nth–axis returnsignal is affected by noise.


A count error occurred in the built–in pulsecoder.


396


Message

368 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR (INT)




4) Replace the nth–axis servoamplifier (SMV).

Communication data from the built–in pulsecoder cannot be received.

369 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ERROR (INT)



A CRC or stop bit error occurred in thecommunication data being received fromthe built–in pulse coder.

380 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (EXT) 1) Replace the nth–axis sepa-rate detector.

The separate detector is erroneous.

381 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE(EXT LIN)



A phase data error occurred in the separatelinear scale.

382 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (EXT) 1) Apply appropriate counter-measures against noise,because the nth–axis returnsignal is affected by noise.


A pulse error occurred in the separate de-tector.

383 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (EXT) 1) Apply appropriate counter-measures against noise,because the nth–axis returnsignal is affected by noise.


A count error occurred in the separate de-tector.

384 n AXIS : SOFT PHASEALARM (EXT)



The digital servo software detected invaliddata in the separate detector.


397


Message

385 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ER-ROR (EXT)





Communication data from the separate de-tector cannot be received.

386 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ER-ROR (EXT)



A CRC or stop bit error occurred in thecommunication data being received fromthe separate detector.

(3) Servo alarms


Contents

401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY OFF

1) Replace the cable of the n–thaxis servo amplifier.

2) Replace the n–th axis servoamplifier (SVM).

The n–th axis (axis 1–8) servo amplifierREADY signal (DRDY) went off.Refer to procedure of trouble shooting.

404 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY ON

1) Replace the cable of the n–thaxis servo amplifier.


Even though the n–th axis (axis 1–8) READYsignal (MCON) went off, the servo amplifierREADY signal (DRDY) is still on. Or, whenthe power was turned on, DRDY went oneven though MCON was off.

405 SERVO ALARM: (ZERO POINT RETURNFAULT)

1) Execute manual referenceposition return.

2) Replace the n–th axis detec-tor.

Position control system fault. Due to an NCor servo system fault in the reference positionreturn, there is the possibility that referenceposition return could not be executed correct-ly.

407 SERVO ALARM: EXCESSERROR

1) Replace the n–th axis powerline.


3) Check the load of the n–thaxis machine.

4) Replace the separate detec-tor.

During simple synchronous control, either ofthe following errors occurred:

1) The difference in synchronous axis posi-tion deviation exceeded the value set forparameter No. 8314.

2) The maximum allowable compensationduring synchronization exceeded the val-ue set for parameter No. 8325.

409 SERVO ALARM: n AXISTORQUE ALM

1) Check that the n–th axismotor brake is released.

2) Replace the n–th axis motor.

3) Check the n–th axis machineload.

Abnormal servo motor load has been de-tected. Alternatively, abnormal spindle motorload has been detected in Cs mode.


398


Message

410 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EXCESS ER-ROR





The following error occurred:On the n–th axis, the position deviation valueduring a stop exceeded the value set for pa-rameter No. 1829.

411 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EXCESS ER-ROR





The position deviation value when the n–thaxis (axis 1–8) moves is larger than the setvalue.

413 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – LSI OVERFLOW

1) Replace the servo softwarewith the latest edition.

The contents of the error register for the n–thaxis (axis 1–8) exceeded 231 power.

415 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – EXCESS SHIFT

1) Check the parameters andthe program.

A speed higher than 511875 units/s was at-tempted to be set in the n–th axis (axis 1–8).This error occurs as the result of improperlyset CMR.


399


Message

417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – PARAMETER INCORRECT

Check the parameters shownon the left.

There is a problem with the settings of theparameters related to the digital servo.

This alarm occurs when the n–th axis (axis1–8) is in one of the conditions listed below.(Digital servo system alarm)

(A) If it is judged that a parameter in invalidon the NC.

1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020(motor form) is out of the specified limit.

2) A proper value (111 or –111) is not set inparameter No.2022 (motor revolutiondirection).

3) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was setin parameter No. 2023 (number of speedfeedback pulses per motor revolution).

4) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was setin parameter No. 2024 (number of posi-tion feedback pulses per motor revolu-tion).

5) Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 (flex-ible field gear rate) have not been set.

6) A value outside the limit of 1 to the num-ber of control axes or a non–continuousvalue (Parameter 1023 (servo axis num-ber) contains a value out of the rangefrom 1 to the number of axes.

7) In torque control in PMC axis control, theparameter settings contains an error.(The torque constant parameter is 0.)

(B) If it is judged that a parameter is invalidon the servo.

Check No. 352 for the n–th axis on thediagnosis screen. The cause code is dis-played.

420 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS SYNC TORQUE

1) Check the setting of the n–thaxis parameter No. 2031.


During simple synchronous control, the dif-ference between the torque commands forthe master and slave axes exceeded the val-ue set in parameter No. 2031. This alarm canoccur only on the master axis.

421 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS EXCESS ER (D)

1) Check the settings of the dualposition conversion factors(parameters Nos. 2078 and2079).


The difference between the errors in thesemi–closed loop and closed loop has be-come excessive during dual position feed-back.

422 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS In torque control of PMC axis control, aspecified allowable speed has been ex-ceeded.

423 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS In torque control of PMC axis control, theparameter–set allowable cumulative traveldistance has been exceeded.


400


Message

430 n AXIS : SV. MOTOR OVER-HEAT

1) Reduce the acceleration/de-celeration frequency of theprogram.


3) Replace the n–th axis detec-tor.



A servo motor overheat occurred.

431 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD 1) Check the acceleration/de-celeration frequency of then–th axis program.

2) Replace the n–th axis PSM.

1) PSM: Overheat occurred.

2) β series SVU: Overheat occurred.

432 n AXIS : CNV. LOWVOLTCON./POWFAULT

1) Check the input power of thePSM.


1) PSM: Phase missing occurred in the in-put voltage.

2) PSMR: The control power supply voltagehas dropped.

3) α series SVU: The control power supplyvoltage has dropped.

433 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT DCLINK



1) PSM: The DC link voltage has dropped.

2) PSMR: The DC link voltage has dropped.

3) α series SVU: The DC link voltage hasdropped.

4) β series SVU: The DC link voltage hasdropped.

434 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLTCONTROL



SVM: The control power supply voltagehas dropped.

435 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT DCLINK



SVM: The DC link voltage has dropped.

436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL(OVC)

1) Check the acceleration/de-celeration frequency of then–th axis program.



4) Replace the n–th axis powercable.



The digital servo software detected the softthermal state (OVC).

437 n AXIS : CNV. OVERCUR-RENT POWER

1) Replace the n–th axis PSM. PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the input cir-cuit.


401


Message

438 n AXIS : INV. ABNORMALCURRENT

1) Check the n–th axis accelera-tion/deceleration timeconstant.

2) Replace the n–th axis powercable.



1) SVM: The motor current is too high.

2) α series SVU: The motor current is toohigh.

3) β series SVU: The motor current is toohigh.

439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLTPOWER



3) Check whether the n–th axisregenerative resistor isrequired.


1) PSM: The DC link voltage is too high.

2) PSMR: The DC link voltage is too high.

3) α series SVU: The C link voltage is toohigh.

4) β series SVU: The link voltage is too high.

440 n AXIS : CNV. EX DECEL-ERATION POW.



3) Check whether the n–th axisregenerative resistor isrequired.


1) PSMR: The regenerative dischargeamount is too large.

2) α series SVU: The regenerative dis-charge amount is too large. Alternatively,the regenerative discharge circuit is ab-normal.

441 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CUR-RENT OFFSET


The digital servo software detected an ab-normality in the motor current detection cir-cuit.

442 n AXIS : CNV. CHARGEFAULT/INV. DB

1) Replace the n–th axis PSM. 1) PSM: The spare discharge circuit of theDC link is abnormal.

2) PSMR: The spare discharge circuit of theDC link is abnormal.

3) α series SVU: The dynamic brake circuitis abnormal.

443 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING FANFAILURE

1) Replace the n–th axis PSMfan.


1) PSM: The internal stirring fan failed.

2) PSMR: The internal stirring fan failed.

3) β series SVU: The internal stirring fanfailed.

444 n AXIS : INV. COOLING FANFAILURE

1) Replace the n–th axis servoamplifier (SVM) fan.


SVM: The internal stirring fan failed.

445 n AXIS : SOFT DISCON-NECT ALARM

1) Replace the n–th axis returncable.

2) Replace the n–th axis sepa-rate detector.

The digital servo software detected a bro-ken wire in the pulse coder.

446 n AXIS : HARD DISCON-NECT ALARM

This alarm is not generated. A broken wire in the built–in pulse coderwas detected by hardware.


402


Message

447 n AXIS : HARD DISCON-NECT (EXT)

1) Replace the n–th axis returncable.


A broken wire in the separate detector wasdetected by hardware.

448 n AXIS : UNMATCHEDFEEDBACK ALARM

1) Check the setting of B0 ofn–th axis parameter No.2018.


The sign of feedback data from the built–inpulse coder differs from that of feedbackdata from the separate detector.

449 n AXIS : INV. IPM ALARM 1) Replace the n–th axis powercable.



1) SVM: IPM (intelligent power module) de-tected an alarm.

2) α series SVU: IPM (intelligent powermodule) detected an alarm.

460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCON-NECT

1) Replace the n–th axis opticcable.


3) Replace the CNC masterprinted circuit board (axiscard).


FSSB communication was disconnectedsuddenly.

461 n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP IN-TERFACE

1) Check the setting of B0 ofparameter No. 1905.

The axes of the 2–axis amplifier were as-signed to the fast type interface.

462 n AXIS : SEND CNC DATAFAILED

1) Replace the n–th axis opticalcable.


Because of an FSSB communication error,a slave could not receive correct data.

463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE DATAFAILED



Because of an FSSB communication error,the servo system could not receive correctdata.

464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATAFAILED



An attempt was made to write maintenanceinformation on the amplifier maintenancescreen, but it failed.

465 n AXIS : READ ID DATAFAILED



At power–up, amplifier initial ID informationcould not be read.


403


Message

466 n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP COM-BINATION

1) Check the motor and ampli-fier combination.

2) Replace the n–th axis opticcable.


The maximum current rating for the amplifi-er does not match that for the motor.

467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTINGOF AXIS

1) Check the settings of theparameters shown on theright.

The servo function for the following has notbeen enabled when an axis occupying asingle DSP (corresponding to two ordinaryaxes) is specified on the axis settingscreen.

1. Learning control (bit 5 of parameter No.2008 = 1)

2. High–speed current loop (bit 0 of param-eter No. 2004 = 1)

3. High–speed interface axis (bit 4 of pa-rameter No. 2005 = 1)

(4) Over travel alarms


Contents

500 OVER TRAVEL : +n 1) Operational error.

2) Modify the program.

Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored strokelimit I.(Parameter No.1320 or 1326 NOTE)

501 OVER TRAVEL : –n 1) Operational error.

2) Modify the program.

Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored strokelimit I.(Parameter No.1321 or 1327 NOTE)

502 OVER TRAVEL : +n This alarm is not generated. Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored strokelimit II.(Parameter No.1322 )

503 OVER TRAVEL : –n This alarm is not generated. Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored strokelimit II.(Parameter No.1323)

504 OVER TRAVEL : +n This alarm is not generated. Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored strokelimit III.(Parameter No.1324 )

505 OVER TRAVEL : –n This alarm is not generated. Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored strokelimit III.(Parameter No.1325 )

506 OVER TRAVEL : +n This alarm is not generated. Exceeded the n–th axis + side hardware OT.

507 OVER TRAVEL : –n This alarm is not generated. Exceeded the n–th axis – side hardware OT.

508 INTERFERENCE : +n This alarm is not generated. During movement in the + direction along then–th axis, interference with the other tool postoccurred.

509 INTERFERENCE : –n This alarm is not generated. During movement in the – direction along then–th axis, interference with the other tool postoccurred.


404


Message

510 OVER TRAVEL: +n This alarm is not generated. Alarm for stroke check prior to movement.The end point specified in a block falls withinthe forbidden area defined with the strokelimit in the positive direction along the N axis.Correct the program.

511 OVER TRAVEL: –n This alarm is not generated. Alarm for stroke check prior to movement.The end point specified in a block falls withinthe forbidden area defined with the strokelimit in the negative direction along the N axis.Correct the program.

NOTEParameters 1326 and 1327 are effective when SLTS (stroke limit switch signal) is on.

(5) Overheat alarms


Contents

700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT 1) Check the rotation of thepower magnetics cabinet fan.

2) Clean the air filter of thepower magnetics cabinet.

3) Check the rotation of the con-trol unit fan.


Control unit overheatCheck that the fan motor operates normally,and clean the air filter.

701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR 1) Check the rotation of the con-trol unit fan.

2) Replace the control unit rack.


The fan motor on the top of the cabinet for thecontorl unit is overheated. Check the opera-tion of the fan motor and replace the motor ifnecessary.

704 OVERHEAT: SPINDLE 1) During heavy cutting, easethe cutting conditions.

2) Check that the cutting toolhas not become dull.

3) Replace the spindle amplifier.

4) Replace the spindle motor.

Spindle overheat in the spindle fluctuationdetection


405

(6) Rigid tapping alarms


Contents

740 RIGID TAP ALARM: EX-CESS ERROR

1) Check the parameters.

2) Check the spindle load.


The positional deviation of the stoppedspindle has exceeded the set value duringrigid tapping.

741 RIGID TAP ALARM: EX-CESS ERROR




The positional deviation of the movingspindle has exceeded the set value duringrigid tapping.

742 RIGID TAP ALARM: LSIOVERFLOW




An LSI overflow has occurred for the spindleduring rigid tapping.

(7) Serial spindle alarms


Contents

749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR 1) Replace the spindle amplifier.


3) Replace the cable connect-ing the CNC to the spindleamplifier.

It is serial communication error while systemis executing after power supply on.

If this alarm occurs when CNC power sup-ply is turned on or when this alarm can notbe cleared even if CNC is reset, turn off thepower supply also turn off the power supplyin spindle side.

750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINKSTART FAULT

1) Check that the spindle ampli-fier is on.

2) Check the alarm indication ofthe spindle amplifier.(This alarm is generatedwhen the power is turnedOFF while the serial spindle isoperating. In this case, turnthe spindle amplifier OFF,and then restart it.)

3) Replace the cable for con-necting to the spindle.

4) Repeat 1) to 3) above for thesecond spindle (when SP2,bit 4 of parameter No. 3701, is1).

This alarm is generated when the spindlecontrol unit is not ready for starting correctlywhen the power is turned on in the systemwith the serial spindle.

See diagnostic display No. 409 for details.

752 FIRST SPINDLE MODECHANGE FAULT

Check the PMC Ladder pro-gram.

This alarm is generated if the system doesnot properly terminate a mode change. Themodes include the Cs contouring, spindlepositioning, rigid tapping, and spindle controlmodes. The alarm is activated if the spindlecontrol unit does not respond correctly to themode change command issued by the NC.

754 SPINDLE–1 ABNORMALTORQUE ALM


2) Check the abnormal loaddetection parameter.

Abnormal first spindle motor load has beendetected.

762 SPINDLE–2 ABNORMALCHANGE FAULT

Refer to alarm No. 752. Same as alarm No. 752 (for the secondspindle)


Refer to alarm No. 754. Same as alarm No. 754 (for the secondspindle)


406


Message

772 SPINDLE–3 MODE CHANGEEROR

This alarm is not generated. Same as alarm No. 752 (for the third spindle)


This alarm is not generated. Same as alarm No. 754 (for the third spindle)

(8) Machine abnormalities


Contents

801 MCN ALARM: EXTERNALPOS.

1) Check the program.

2) Check signal G34F (externalpositioning completion).

When external positioning (G34) isperformed, the external positioning signal isalready on, or the signal is not turned onuntil the end. (External positioning error)

802 MCN ALARM: AXIS CLAMP 1) Check the machine.

2) Check parameter No. 17013.

When an axis is clamped with the servoturned off, the machine position exceedsthe allowable value. (Axis clamp error)

803 MCN ALARM: PROTECTIVECIRCUIT ERROR

1) Check the machine.

2) Check signals X22/X38/X79.

A DO protective circuit alarm is generated.Check signals X22/X38/X79.

810 MCN ALARM: X AXIS CHECK MT POS.



When the power is turned on, the machineposition on the first axis is beyond theallowable value, in comparison with themachine position immediately beforepower–on.

820 MCN ALARM: Y AXIS CHECK MT POS.



When the power is turned on, the machineposition on the second axis is beyond theallowable value, in comparison with themachine position immediately beforepower–on.

830 MCN ALARM: Z AXIS CHECK MT POS.



When the power is turned on, the machineposition on the third axis is beyond theallowable value, in comparison with themachine position immediately beforepower–on.

840 MCN ALARM: * AXIS CHECK MT POS.



When the power is turned on, the machineposition on the fourth axis is beyond theallowable value, in comparison with themachine position immediately beforepower–on.


407

(9) System alarms


Description

900 ROM PARITY Replace the master printedcircuit board (FROM module).

A parity error occurred in the CNC, macro, orservo ROM.

912 DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) Replace the master printedcircuit board (DRAM module).

A RAM parity error occurred in the DRAMmodule.








920 SERVO ALARM (1–4 AXIS) Replace the master printedcircuit board (axis card).

Servo alarm (first to fourth axis). A watchdogalarm condition occurred, or a RAM parity er-ror occurred in the axis control card.

921 SERVO ALARM (5–8 AXIS) Replace the master printedcircuit board (axis card).

Servo alarm (fifth to eighth axis). A watchdogalarm condition occurred, or a RAM parity er-ror occurred in the axis control card.

926 FSSB ALARM 1) Check that the servo ampli-fier is on.

2) Replace the cable (opticalcable) for connecting the servo amplifier.

3) Replace the master printedcircuit board (axis card).

4) Replace the servo ampli-fier.

FSSB alarm.

930 CPU INTERRUPT Replace the master printedcircuit board (CPU card).

CPU error (abnormal interrupt).

935 SRAM ECC ERROR Replace the master printedcircuit board (SRAM module).Clear the memory, and thenset all data including parame-ters again.

A ECC error occurred in the tape memoryRAM.

950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM 1) Replace the I/O Link cable.

2) Check the power supply ofthe unit connected to theI/O Link.


4) Replace the unit connectedto the I/O Link.

An error occurred in the PMC.

951 PMC WATCH DOG ALARM Replace the master printedcircuit board.

An error occurred in the PMC.(Watchdog alarm)


408

Number DescriptionFaulty location/corrective action

Message

972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHERMODULE

1) Replace the sub–CPUprinted circuit board.

2) Replace the built–in PLCprinted circuit board.

3) Replace the HSSB I/Fprinted circuit board.

4) Replace other optionprinted circuit boards.


An NMI occurred on a board other than themotherboard.

973 NON MASK INTERRUPT Replace the master printedcircuit board.

An NMI occurred as a result of an unknowncause.

974 F–BUS ERROR 1) Replace the sub–CPUprinted circuit board.

2) Replace the built–in PLCprinted circuit board.

3) Replace the HSSB I/Fprinted circuit board.

4) Replace other optionprinted circuit boards.


A bus error occurred on the FANUC bus.

975 BUS ERROR Replace the master printedcircuit board.

A bus error occurred on the motherboard.

976 L–BUS ERROR Replace the master printedcircuit board.

A bus error occurred on the local bus.

Alarms (serial spindle)

Num-ber Message

SPM in-dication

*1

Faulty location/correctiveaction Contents

A0A

1) Replace the ROM on theSPM control printed circuitboard.

2) Replace the SPM controlprinted circuit board.

The program does not start normally.The ROM on the SPM control PCB is of thewrong series, or a hardware error occurred.

A1 Replace the SPM controlprinted circuit board.

An error was detected in the CPU peripheralcircuit of the SPM control circuit.

7n01 SPINDLE_n:MOTOR OVERHEAT

01 1) Check the ambient tempera-ture and the load status.

2) If the cooling fan hasstopped, replace it.

The interior of the motor exceeds the specifiedtemperature.The use of the motor exceeds the continuousrating or an error related to cooling occurred.

7n02 SPINDLE_n:EX DEVIATIONSPEED

02 Reduce the load by checkingthe cutting conditions.

The motor speed cannot follow the specifiedspeed.The motor load torque is too large.

7n03 SPINDLE_n:DC–LINK FUSE ISBROKEN

03 1) Replace the SPM unit.

2) Check the insulation state ofthe motor.

The fuse in the DC link inside the SPM is bro-ken. (The power element is damaged or themotor is grounded.)


409


Num-ber

ContentsFaulty location/correctiveaction

SPM in-dication

*1Message

7n04 SPINDLE_n:INPUT FUSE ISBROKEN/POWERSUPPLY ERROR

04 Check the state of the inputpower to the PSM.

The PSM detected a power supply error.(PSM alarm indication: 5)

7n07 SPINDLE_n:OVERSPEED

07 Check that the sequence isfree from errors (such as an at-tempt to specify spindle syn-chronization when the spindlecannot rotate).

The motor speed exceeded 115% of the ratedspeed.In position control mode, the spindle axis wasin a state in which total positional deviationwas excessive (for example, SFR or SRV wasturned off in the PMC).

7n09 SPINDLE_n:MAIN CIRCUITOVERLOAD

09 1) Improve the cooling status ofthe heat sink.

2) If the heat sink cooling fanhas stopped, replace theSPM unit.

The temperature of the radiator for power tran-sistor cooling rose exceedingly.

7n11 SPINDLE_n:OVERVOLT POWERCIRCUIT

11 Check the input power voltage,as well as the power fluctua-tions during motor deceleration.If 253 VAC is exceeded, modifythe power supply.

An overvoltage of the DC link was detected inthe PSM. (PSM alarm indication: 7)The wrong PSM was selected. (The maxi-mum output specifications of the PSM are ex-ceeded.)

7n12 SPINDLE_n:OVERCURRENTPOWER CIRCUIT

12 1) Check the insulation state ofthe motor.

2) Check the spindle parame-ters.

3) Replace the SPM unit.

The current of the motor output is too large.

7n15 SPINDLE_n:SPINDLE SWITCH-ING FAULT

15 1) Replace the switching MC.

2) Check the Ladder sequenceand modify it if required.

The switching sequence used during spindleswitching/output switching contains an error.The contact state confirmation signal of theswitching MC does not match the command.

7n16 SPINDLE_n:RAM ERROR

16 Replace the SPM controlprinted circuit board.

An error was detected in an SPM control cir-cuit part. (Error in the RAM for external data)

7n18 SPINDLE_n:SUMCHECK ERRORPROGRAM ROM


An error was detected in an SPM control cir-cuit part. (Error in the program ROM data)

7n19 SPINDLE_n:EXCESS OFFSETCURRENT U

19 Replace the SPM unit. An error was detected in an SPM part. (Theinitial value of the phase U current detectioncircuit is abnormal.)

7n20 SPINDLE_n:EXCESS OFFSETCURRENT V

20 Replace the SPM unit. An error was detected in an SPM part. (Theinitial value of the phase V current detectioncircuit is abnormal.)

7n24 SPINDLE_n:SERIAL TRANSFERERROR

24 1) Keep the CNC inter–spindlecable away from the powerline.

2) Replace the cable.

The off state of the CNC power supply wasdetected. (Normal operation)An error was detected in the communicationdata provided to the CNC.

7n26 SPINDLE_n:DISCONNECT CsVELOCITY DETEC-TOR

26 1) Replace the cable.

2) Readjust the preamplifier.

The signal amplitude of the motor–side detec-tion signal for Cs contour control (connectorJY2) is abnormal.(For example, the cable is not connected orthe adjustment is not correct.)


410


Num-ber


SPM in-dication

*1Message

7n27 SPINDLE_n:DISCONNECT POSI-TION CODER


2) Readjust the signal involvedin the BZ sensor.

1) The signal of the spindle position coder (con-nector JY4) is abnormal.

2) The signal amplitude of the MZ or BZ sensor(connector JY2) is abnormal.(For example, the cable is not connected ora parameter is not set correctly.)

7n28 SPINDLE_n:DISCONNECT CsPOSITION DETEC-TOR


2) Readjust the preamplifier.

The position detection signal for Cs contourcontrol (connector JY5) is abnormal.(For example, the cable is not connected orthe adjustment is not correct.)

7n29 SPINDLE_n:OVERLOAD

29 Check the load state andmodify it if required.

An excessive load was applied continuouslyfor a given time.(For example, the motor shaft was constrainedduring positioning.)

7n30 SPINDLE_n:OVERCURRENT IN-PUT CIRCUIT

30 Check the load state andmodify it if required.

An overcurrent was detected in the PSM maincircuit input (PSM alarm indication: 1)Power imbalance.The wrong PSM was selected. (The maxi-mum output specifications of the PSM are ex-ceeded.)

7n31 SPINDLE_n:MOTOR LOCK ORDISCONNECT DE-TECTOR

31 1) Check the load state andmodify it if required.

2) Replace the motor sensorcable (JY2 or JY5).

The motor cannot rotate at the specifiedspeed.(Very low speed, motor constraint alarm, orstop)The speed detection signal is abnormal.

7n32 SPINDLE_n:SERIAL LSI RAMFAULT


An error was detected in an SPM control cir-cuit part. (Error in the LSI for serial transfer)

7n33 SPINDLE_n:SHORTAGE POWERCHARGE

33 1) Check the power voltageand modify it if required.

2) Replace the PSM unit.

When the magnetic contactor inside the ampli-fier was ON, the DC power in the power circuitwas insufficient. (For example, power error ordefective charging resistor)

7n34 SPINDLE_n:PARAMETER OUTOF RANGE

34 See the manual for details onhow to modify the parametervalue.If the number is unknown, con-nect the spindle check boardand check the displayed pa-rameter.

Parameter data exceeding the permissible val-ue was set.

7n35 SPINDLE_n:TOO LARGE GEARRATIO DATA

35 See the parameter manual fordetails on how to modify theparameter value to the correctvalue.

Gear ratio data exceeding the permissible val-ue was set.

7n36 SPINDLE_n:OVERFLOW ERRORCOUNTER

36 Check that the position gainvalue is not exceedingly largeand modify it if required.

The error counter overflowed.

7n37 SPINDLE_n:VELOCITY DETEC-TOR PARAMEERERROR

37 See the parameter manual fordetails on how to modify theparameter value to the correctvalue.

The setting of the number–of–pulses parame-ter of the velocity detector is invalid.


411


Num-ber


SPM in-dication

*1Message

7n39 SPINDLE_n:ILLEGAL 1REVSIGN OF CS DE-TECTOR

39 1) Adjust the one–rotation sig-nal in the preamplifier.

2) Check the shielding state ofthe cable.


During Cs contour control, it was detected thatthe relationship between the one–rotation sig-nal and the number of phase AB pulses wasnot correct.

7n40 SPINDLE_n:NO 1REV SIGN OFCS DETECTOR

40 1) Adjust the one–rotation sig-nal in the preamplifier.

2) Check the shielding state ofthe cable.


No one–rotation signal is generated during CScontour control.

7n41 SPINDLE_n:ILLEGAL 1REVSIGN OF POSITIONCODER

41 1) Check the parameter andmodify it if required.


3) Readjust the BZ sensor timesignal.

1) The one–rotation signal of the spindle posi-tion coder (connector JY4) is abnormal.

2) The one–rotation signal of the MZ or BZ sen-sor (connector JY2) is abnormal.

3) The parameter was not set correctly.

7n42 SPINDLE_n:NO 1REV SIGN OFPOSITION CODER



1) The one–rotation signal of the spindle posi-tion coder (connector JY4) is disconnected.

2) The one–ration signal of the MZ or BZ sen-sor (connector JY2) is disconnected.

7n43 SPINDLE_n:DISCONNECT POSI-TION CODER DEF.SPEED

43 Replace the cable. In the SPM of Type3, the differential speedposition coder signal (connector JY8) is abnor-mal.

7n44 SPINDLE_n:ILLEGAL A/D CON-VERT


An error was detected in an SPM control cir-cuit part. (Error in the A/D converter)

7n46 SPINDLE_n:ILLEGAL 1REVSIGN OF SCREWCUT

46 1) Check the parameter andmodify it if required.



An error corresponding to alarm 41 was de-tected during threading.

7n47 SPINDLE_n: ILLE-GAL SIGNAL OFPOSITION CODER



3) Improve the arrangement ofthe cable. (Keep it awayfrom the power line.)

1) The phase A/B signal of the spindle positioncoder (connector JY4) is abnormal.

2) The phase A/B signal of the MZ or BZ sensor(connector JY2) is abnormal.The relationship between the phase A/B andthe one–rotation signal is not correct. (Thepulse intervals do not match.)

7n49 SPINDLE_n:DEF. SPEED ISOVER VALUE

49 Check that the calculated valueof the differential speed doesnot exceed the maximumspeed of the motor.

In differential speed mode, the value resultingfrom converting the speed of the remote ma-chine into that of the local machine exceedsthe maximum permissible value. (The differ-ential speed is calculated by multiplying thespeed of the remote machine by the gear ra-tio.)

7n50 SPINDLE_n:SYNCRONOUS VAL-UE IS OVER SPEED

50 Check that the calculated valuedoes not exceed the maximumspeed of the motor.

During spindle synchronization, the calculatedvalue of the velocity command exceeded themaximum permissible value. (The motorspeed is calculated by multiplying the spindlerotation command by the gear ratio.)


412


Num-ber


SPM in-dication

*1Message

7n51 SPINDLE_n:LOW VOLT POWERCIRCUIT

51 1) Check the power voltageand modify it if required.

2) Replace the MC.

A reduction in the input voltage was detected.(PSM alarm indication: 4)(Instantaneous power failure, poor MC con-tact)

7n52 SPINDLE_n:ITP FAULT 1

52 1) Replace the SPM controlprinted circuit board.

2) Replace the spindle inter-face printed circuit board onthe CNC.

An error was detected in the inter–NC inter-face. (Stoppage of the ITP signal)

7n53 SPINDLE_n:ITP FAULT 2

53 1) Replace the SPM controlprinted circuit board.

2) Replace the spindle inter-face printed circuit board onthe CNC.

An error was detected in the inter–NC inter-face. (Stoppage of the ITP signal)

7n56 SPINDLE_n:UNIT INTERNALCOOLING FAN FAIL-URE

56 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the SPM control circuit isstopped.

7n57 SPINDLE_n:EX DECELERATIONPOW.

57 1) Reduce the acceleration/de-celeration duty.

2) Check the cooling conditions(ambient temperature).

3) If the cooling fan is stopped,replace the resistor.

4) If the resistance is abnormal,replace the resistor.

A regenerative resistor overload was detected.(PSMR alarm indication: 8)A thermostat or short–time overload was de-tected.The regenerative resistor is disconnected orthe resistance is abnormal.

7n58 SPINDLE_n:PSM OVERLOAD

58 1) Check the cooling status ofthe PSM.

2) Replace the PSM unit

The temperature of the PSM radiator rose ex-cessively. (PSM alarm indication: 3)

7n59 SPINDLE_n:PSM COOLING FANFAILURE

59 Replace the PSM unit. The internal cooling fan of the PSM isstopped. (PSM alarm indication: 2)

*1 The SPM indicates an alarm with the red LED and a 2–digit number.Note that if the yellow LED is lit, the number indicates an error number,not an alarm number.


413

Alarm messages (PMC)

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR 1) Re–input the sequence program.

2) Replace the master printed circuitboard.

The sequence program is invalid.

ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER 1) Re–input the sequence program.


The sequence program is too large.The sequence program is invalid.

ER03 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR(OPTION)

1) Reduce the sequence program.

2) Contact FANUC to have a largernumber–of–Ladder–steps optionspecified.

The sequence program exceeds the sizespecified by the number–of–Ladder–stepsoption.

ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH Using an offline programmer,change the sequence program tothat for the correct PMC type.

The setting of the type in the sequence pro-gram differs from the actual type.

ER06 PMC CONTROL SOFT-WARE TYPE UNMATCH

Contact FANUC to specify PMC–SB6.

The combination of CNC system configura-tion and PMC type is invalid.

1) PMC–SB5 is used for a 3–path CNC sys-tem.

2) PMC–SB5 is used for the Series 18i–LNA.

ER07 NO OPTION(LADDERSTEP)

1) Restore the backed up parameterdata.

2) Check the data sheet and re–in-put the parameters.

3) Contact FANUC to specify a num-ber–of–Ladder–steps option ofthe necessary size.

No number–of–Ladder–steps option isfound.

ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH 1) For the Series 18i–LNA, convertthe sequence program to thatwithout a step sequence function.

2) Contact FANUC.

An unsupported function is used in the se-quence program.(Example: A sequence program with a stepsequence function is used in the Series18i–LNA.)

ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK ER-ROR

PLEASE TURN ON POWERAGAIN WITH PUSH ’O’&’Z’.(CLEAR PMC SRAM)

1) Press and hold down the ’O’ and’Z’ key combination, and turn theCNC back on.

2) Replace the backup battery.


With a change in the PMC type, for exam-ple, the retention–type memory of the PMCmust be initialized.

ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING406A

Reconfigure the PMC managementsoftware.Contact FANUC.

The PMC management software is notloaded correctly.

ER11 OPTION AREA NOTH-ING406C

Reconfigure the PMC C board man-agement software.Contact FANUC.

The PMC C board management software isnot loaded correctly.

ER12 OPTION AREA ER-ROR406A


The PMC management software is invalid.(The series of BASIC and OPTION do notmatch.)

A.2ALARMS (PMC)


414


Alarm number ContentsFaulty location/corrective action

ER13 OPTION AREA ER-ROR406C


The PMC C board management software isinvalid.(The series of BASIC and OPTION do notmatch.)

ER14 OPTION AREA VERSIIONERROR 406A


The PMC management software is invalid.(The editions of BASIC and OPTION do notmatch.)

ER15 OPTION AREA VERSIIONERROR 406C


The PMC C board management software isinvalid.(The editions of BASIC and OPTION do notmatch.)

ER16 RAM CHECK ERROR (PRO-GRAM RAM)

Replace the master printed circuitboard.

The initialization of the memory used tostore the sequence program failed.

ER17 PROGRAM PARITY 1) Re–input the sequence program.


The parity of the sequence program is inval-id.

ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERRORBY I/O

Re–input the sequence program. While the sequence program was beingread, an interrupt command was generated.

ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Display the Ladder edit screen againand exit from editing by using the[<<] key.

During Ladder editing, the system was forci-bly switched to the CNC screen with a func-tion key.

ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATAERROR

Display the symbol/comment editscreen again and exit from editingby using the [<<] key.

During symbol/comment editing, the systemwas forcibly switched to the CNC screenwith a function key.

ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR Display the message data editscreen again and exit from editingby using the [<<] key.

During message data editing, the systemwas forcibly switched to the CNC screenwith a function key.

ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING 1) Re–input the sequence program.


The sequence program is empty.

ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POW-ER

Turn the CNC off and then back on. With a change in the PMC type, for exam-ple, the power must be turned off and thenback on.

ER25 SOFTWARE VERSION ER-ROR (PMCAOPT)


The PMC management software is invalid.(The edition of PMCAOPT does not match.)

ER26 PMC CONTROL MODULEERROR(PMCAOPT)


The initialization of the PMC managementsoftware failed.

ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM ISOUT OF RANGE

Modify the sequence program.Change the parameter number ofthe function instruction to a valuewithin the valid range.

An out–of–range parameter number is spe-cified with function instruction TMR, TMRB,CTR, DIFU, or DIFD.

ER32 NO I/O DEVICE 1) Check that the I/O device is on.

2) Check that the I/O device wasturned on before the CNC wasturned on.

3) Check the connection of thecable.

An I/O device such as the I/O Link, connec-tion unit, and Power Mate is not connected.

ER33 SLC ERROR Replace the master printed circuitboard.

The LSI of the I/O Link is defective.


415



ER34 SLC ERROR (xx) 1) Check the connection of the cableleading to a device in group xx.

2) Check that the I/O device wasturned on before the CNC.

3) Replace that device in group xx inwhich the PMC control module isinstalled.

In a slave in group xx, an error occurred incommunication with an I/O device.

ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT DATAIN GROUP (xx)

Reduce the amount of output data ingroup xx.

The amount of output data in I/O Link groupxx exceeds the limit (33 bytes). The excessdata is nullified.

ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA INGROUP (xx)

Reduce the amount of input data ingroup xx.

The amount of input data in I/O Link groupxx exceeds the limit (33 bytes). The excessdata is nullified.

ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUTDATA OVER (xx)

Modify the total amount of outputdata in each group to 128 bytes orless.

The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient.(The allocation of any group after group xxon the output side is nullified.)

ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT DATAOVER (xx)

Modify the total amount of input datain each group to 128 bytes or less.

The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient.(The allocation of any group after group xxon the input side is nullified.)

ER40 I/O LINK–II SETTING ER-ROR (CHx)

Reconfigure the I/O Link–II. The I/O Link–II setting is invalid.(CH1: Primary board, CH2: Secondaryboard)

ER41 I/O LINK–II MODE ER-ROR(CHx)

Reconfigure the I/O Link–II. The I/O Link–II mode setting is invalid.(CH1: Primary board, CH2: Secondaryboard)

ER42 I/O LINK–II STATIONNO.ERROR (CHx)

Reconfigure the I/O Link–II. The I/O Link–II station number setting is in-valid.(CH1: Primary board, CH2: Secondaryboard)

ER98 ILLEGAL LASER CONNEC-TION

Modify the allocation of the I/O mod-ule.

When an I/O device for a laser is used, theallocation of the I/O module does not matchthe actual I/O device configuration.

ER99 X,Y96–127 ARE ALLO-CATED

Modify the allocation of the I/O mod-ule.

When an I/O device for a laser is used,another I/O device is allocated toX96–127/Y96–127.X96–127/Y96–127 are used for I/O devicesfor a laser, and cannot be used for other de-vices.

WN02 OPERATE ADDRESS ER-ROR

Modify the setting of the PMC sys-tem parameter, address of the oper-ator’s panel for Series 0.

The setting of the PMC system parameter,address of the operator’s panel for Series 0,is invalid.

WN03 ABORT NC–WINDOW/EXIN 1) Check that the Ladder program isfree from problems and then re-start the Ladder program (bypressing the RUN key).

2) Turn the CNC off and then backon.

The Ladder program was stopped duringcommunication between the CNC and PMC.Function instructions such as WINDR,WINDW, EXIN, and DISPB may not beexecuted normally.

WN05 PMC TYPE NO CONVER-SION

Using an offline programmer,change the sequence program tothat for the correct PMC type.

The setting of the type in the sequence pro-gram differs from the actual type.(Example: For the PMC–SB5, the Ladderprogram of the PMC–SA3/SA5 was trans-ferred.)


416



WN06 TASK STOPPED BY DE-BUG FUNC

To restart a user task that has beenstopped, stop the sequence pro-gram and then reexecute it.

When a PMC C board is used, a user taskhas been stopped due to a break by a de-bug function.

WN07 LADDER SP ERROR(STACK)

Modify the sequence program sothat the subprogram nesting level iseight or less.

For a subprogram call with the functioninstruction CALL or CALLU, the nesting lev-el is too deep (exceeds 8).

WN17 NO OPTION(LANGUAGE) 1) Restore the backed up parameterdata.

2) Check the data sheet and re–in-put the parameters.

3) Contact FANUC to specify a PMCC program option of the neces-sary size.

When a PMC C board is used, no PMC Cprogram option is found.

WN18 ORIGIN ADDRESS ERROR 1) On the PMC system parameterscreen, press [ORIGIN].

2) Set the PMC system parameter,LANGUGE ORIGIN, to the ad-dress indicated by theRC_CTLB_INIT in the map file.

When a PMC C board is used, the PMCsystem parameter, LANGUAGE ORIGIN, isinvalid.

WN19 GDT ERROR(BASE,LIMIT) Modify the setting in the user–de-fined GDT in the link control state-ment or build file.

When a PMC C board is used, the BASELI-MIT or ENTRY in the user–defined GDT isinvalid.

WN20 COMMON MEM. COUNTOVER

Change the number of shared me-mories to eight or less.Modify the link control statement,build file, or other source files forshared memories.

When a PMC C board is used, the numberof shared memories exceeds eight.

WN21 COMMON MEM. ENTRYERROR

Modify the ENTRY in the sharedmemory GDT in the link controlstatement.

When a PMC C board is used, the ENTRYin the shared memory GDT is out of range.

WN22 LADDER 3 PRIORITY ER-ROR

Change the value of the TASK LEVEL(LADDER LEVEL 3) in the link controlstatement to 0, 10 to 99, or –1.

When a PMC C board is used, the priority ofLADDER LEVEL 3 is out of range.

WN23 TASK COUNT OVER Change the TASK COUNT in thelink control statement to 16 or less.(To change the task count, modifythe link control statement, build file,and the configuration of the files tobe linked.)

When a PMC C board is used, the numberof user tasks exceeds 16.

WN24 TASK ENTRY ADDR ER-ROR

Change the GDT table in the buildfile to 32 (20H) to 95 (5FH).

When a PMC C board is used, the user taskentry address selector is out of range.

WN25 DATA SEG ENTRY ERROR Change the DATA SEGMENT GDTENTRY value in the link controlstatement and the GDT table in thebuild file to 32 (20H) to 95 (5FH).

When a PMC C board is used, the data seg-ment entry address is out of range.

WN26 USER TASK PRIORITY ER-ROR

Change the TASK LEVEL of eachtask in the link control statement to avalue from 10 to 99 or –1. (Note that–1 can be specified for the TASKLEVEL of only one task, includingthe third Ladder level).

When a PMC C board is used, the priority ofthe user task is out of range.


417



WN27 CODE SEG TYPE ERROR Change the value of the code seg-ment according to the segment set-ting in the link control statement andbuild file.

When a PMC C board is used, the codesegment type is invalid. The setting of theRENA–MESEG code segment in the bindcontrol file is wrong.

WN28 DATA SEG TYPE ERROR Change the value of the data seg-ment according to the segment set-ting in the link control statement andbuild file.

When a PMC C board is used, the data seg-ment type is invalid. The setting of theRENA–MESEG data segment in the bindcontrol file is wrong.

WN29 COMMON MEM SEG TYPEERROR

Change the value according to thesegment setting in the link controlstatement and build file.

When a PMC C board is used, the sharedmemory segment type is invalid. The set-ting of the RENAMESEG segment in theshared memory bind control file is wrong.

WN30 IMPOSSIBLE ALLOCATEMEM.

1) Check that the USER GDT AD-DRESS in the link control state-ment and the start address of thecode segment in the build file arecorrect.

2) Change the PMC system parame-ter, MAX LADDER AREA SIZE, toa minimum.

3) Change the stack size in the linkcontrol state to a minimum.

When a PMC C board is used, the memoryarea for data, stacks, and others cannot bereserved.

WN31 IMPOSSIBLE EXECUTE LI-BRARY

1) Check the types supported by thelibrary.

2) Reconfigure the PMC manage-ment software and contact FA-NUC.

When a PMC C board is used, library func-tions cannot be executed.

WN32 LNK CONTROL DATA ER-ROR

1) Check that the address ofRC_CTLNB_INIT is set for thePMC system parameter, LAN-GUAGE ORIGIN.

2) Create the link control statementagain.

When a PMC C board is used, link controlstatement (program control) data is invalid.

WN33 LNK CONTROL VER.ER-ROR

Modify the link control statement inthe PMC C program.

When a PMC C board is used, a link controlstatement data edition error has occurred.

WN34 LOAD MODULE COUNTOVER

Change the number of independentload modules to eight or less.

When a PMC C board is used, the numberof independent load modules exceeds eight.

WN35 CODE AREA OUT OFRANGE

Check the link map and allocatesegments within the range of RAM.

When a PMC C board is used, the codesegment area is out of the range of theRAM.

WN36 LANGUAGE SIZE ER-ROR(OPTION)

1) Reduce the PMC C program.

2) Contact FANUC to specify a PMCC program option of a larger size.

When a PMC C board is used, the PMC Cprogram exceeds the size specified for thePMC C program option.

WN37 PROGRAM DATA ER-ROR(LANG.)

Initialize the PMC C programmemory.

The PMC C program memory must be ini-tialized.

WN38 RAM CHECK ER-ROR(LANG.)


The initialization of the PMC C programmemory failed.

WN39 PROGRAM PARITY(LANG.) 1) Re–input the PMC C program.


The parity of the PMC C program parity isinvalid.

WN40 PROGRAM DATA ERRORBY I/O(LANG.)

Re–input the language program. While the PMC C program was being read,an interrupt command was generated.


418



WN41 LANGUAGE TYPE UN-MATCH

1) Re–input the PMC C program.


When a PMC C board is used, an unusableC program is input.

WN42 UNDEFINE LANGUAGEORIGIN ADDRESS

1) On the PMC system parameterscreen, click [ORIGIN].

2) Set the PMC system parameter,LANGUGE ORIGIN, to the ad-dress indicated by theRC_CTLB_INIT in the map file.

When a PMC C board is used, the PMC pa-rameter, LANGUAGE ORIGIN, is not set.

WN48 UNAVAIL LANGUAGE BYCNC UNMATCH

Remove the PMC C board. A PMC C board is installed in a CNC inwhich a PMC C board cannot be used.

PMC system alarm messages


PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyyPC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyyPC009 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyyPC010 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy

PC012 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy


2) If the error recurs even after the re-placement, contact FANUC to re-port the status (displayed mes-sage, system configuration, op-eration, when the error occurs, oc-currence frequency, etc.).

A CPU error occurred in the PMC.xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyyy are internal errorcodes.

PC030 RAM PARITY aa:bb 1) Replace the master printed circuitboard.

2) If the error recurs even after the re-placement, contact FANUC to re-port the status (displayed mes-sage, system configuration, op-eration, when the error occurs, oc-currence frequency, etc.) and theabove internal error codes.

A RAM parity error occurred in the PMC.aa and bb are internal error codes.

PC050 NMI SLC aa:bb 1) Check that the I/O allocation datamatches the actual I/O deviceconnection.

2) Check that the cable is connectedproperly.

3) Check the cable specifications.

4) Replace the I/O device interfacemodule, cable, master printed cir-cuit board, etc.

A communication error occurred in the I/OLINK.aa and bb are internal error codes.If this alarm is generated, probable causesinclude the following:

1) When an I/O Unit–MODEL A is used, thebase is not connected even though baseexpansion allocation has been per-formed.

2) The cable is not connected properly.

3) The cable is defective.

4) An I/O device (such as the I/O Unit andPower Mate) is defective.

5) The master printed circuit board is defec-tive.


419



PC060 FBUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyyPC061 FL–R xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy



A bus error occurred in the PMC.

PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK) Check the correspondence betweenthe CALL/CALLU and SPE instruc-tions.

A stack error occurred in Ladder functioninstruction CALL/CALLU.

PC090 NMI(___) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy 1) Replace the master printed circuitboard.


An NMI with an unknown cause occurred inthe PMC management software.

PC092 USER TRAPaa:xxxxxxxx



The TRAP instruction, which is not used inthe PMC management software, wasexecuted.

PC093 INT(SYS) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyy-yy

PC094 INT(TRAP) xxxxxxxx:yyyyy-yyy

PC095 INT(EX) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyy-yy

PC096 INT(IN) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy



An interrupt with an unknown cause oc-curred in the PMC management software.

PC087 PARITY ERR (LADDER–2)

PC097 PARITY ERR (LADDER)

PC098 PARITY ERR (DRAM)



An error occurred in a RAM check.


420



PC501 NC/PMC INTERFACE ERRPATH_



The reading/writing of signals between theCNC and the PMC failed.

PC502 ILLEGAL FUNCTION (SUBxx)

Modify the sequence program sothat instruction function xx is notused.

Unsupported function instruction xx is used.

Messages that may be displayed during PMC program editing


ADDRESS BIT NOTHING Set the relay or coil address. The relay or coil address is not set.

FUNCTION NOT FOUND Check the function instruction num-ber.

There is no function instruction with the in-put number.

COM FUNCTION MISSING Check the locations where functioninstructions COM/COME are used.

Function instruction COM is not used cor-rectly.

1) The correspondence between COM andCOME is not correct.

2) The number–of–coils specification ofCOIL cannot be used in this PMC.

EDIT BUFFER OVER Reduce the net being edited. The editing buffer does not have sufficientfree space.

END FUNCTION MISSING Modify the sequence program. 1) The function instruction END1, END2,END3, or END cannot be found.

2) The net of function instruction END1,END2, END3, or END is not correct.

3) The order of the function instructionsEND1, END2, END3, and END is not cor-rect.

ERROR NET FOUND Modify the error net. An error net is found.

ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO. Check the function instruction num-ber.

An attempt was made to search for an illegalfunction instruction number.

FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL Check the connection of the functioninstruction.

The connection of the function instruction isnot correct.

HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL Connect the horizontal line of thenet.

The horizontal line of the net is not con-nected.

ILLEGAL OPERATION Check the operation and then re–in-put it.

The operation is not correct.

1) Only the INPUT key is pressed.

2) The address data input is not correct.

3) Function instructions cannot be createdbecause the net intervals are too small.

SYMBOL UNDEFINED Check the symbol. The specified symbol is not defined.


421

Messages that may be displayed during PMC program editing


INPUT INVALID Check the input data. The input data is not correct.

1) Data other than numeric values is inputwith COPY, INSLIN,C–UP, or C–DOWN.

2) A write–disabled address is specified for acoil.

3) An invalid character is specified for a datatable.

NET TOO LARGE Reduce the net being edited. The net being edited is too large.

JUMP FUNCTION MISSING Check the locations where functioninstructions JMP/JMPE are used.

Function instruction JMP is not used correct-ly.

1) The correspondence between JMP andJMPE is not correct.

2) The number–of–coils specification of JMPcannot be used in this PMC.

LADDER BROKEN Modify the error net. The Ladder program is damaged.

LADDER ILLEGAL Modify the error net. The Ladder program is not correct.

OBJECT BUFFER OVER Reduce the size of the Ladder pro-gram.

The sequence program is too large.

PARAMETER NOTHING Input the parameters for the functioninstruction.

The parameters for the function instructionare not set.

PLEASE COMPLETE NET Modify the error net. An error net is found.

PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO. 1) Input the function instruction num-ber.

2) If not inputting a function instruc-tion, click the soft key FUNC onceagain.

The function instruction number is not speci-fied.

RELAY COIL FORBIT Delete the unnecessary relay or coil. There is an unnecessary relay or coil.

RELAY OR COIL NOTHING Input a relay or coil. A relay or coil is missing.

PLEASE CLEAR ALL 1) Re–input the sequence program.


The sequence program is invalid.

SYMBOL DATA DUPLICATE Change the symbol to another. The specified symbol has already been de-fined for another address.

COMMENT DATA OVERFLOW Reduce the number of comments. The comment data is too large.

SYMBOL DATA OVERFLOW Reduce the number of symbols. The symbol data is too large.

VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL Connect the vertical line of the net. The vertical line of the net is not connected.

MESSAGE DATA OVERFLOW Reduce the number of messages. The message data is too large.

1ST LEVEL EXECUTE TIMEOVER

Reduce the first level of the Ladderprogram.

The first level of the Ladder program is toolarge.

PARA NO. RANGE ERR Modify the parameter number sothat it falls within the range.

The parameter number of the functioninstruction is out of range.

PARA NO. DUPLICATE Change the parameters so that theyhave different parameter numbers,unless it can be assured in the cir-cuit that instructions with the samenumber will never be executed atthe same time.

The same function instruction parameternumber is used in more than one location.


422

Messages that may be displayed during PMC program transfer


I/O OPEN ERROR nn

I/O READ ERROR nn

I/O WRITE ERROR nn

Terminate the other function thatuses RS–232C, then retry.

In input/output using RS–232C, RS–232Ccannot be used because RS–232C is usedby another function.

I/O WRITE ERROR nn

I/O COMPARE ERRORnn

I/O LIST ERROR nn

I/O DELETE ERROR nn

I/O FORMAT ERROR nn

1) Check the connected RS–232Cchannel.

2) Check the communication pa-rameters (such as BAUD RATE).

3) Check the connection of theRS–232C cable.

4) Check the connection of thereader/punch interface cable.

In input/output using RS–232C, correct datacannot be read/written.

1) Check the communication pa-rameters (such as BAUD RATE).



In input/output using RS–232C, correct datacannot be read/written.

1) Check that the memory card isinserted securely.

2) Check that the memory card isinserted into the correct slot.

In memory card input/output, a memory cardis not inserted.

Turn off the write protection of thememory card.

In memory card input/output, writing to thememory card failed.

Mount a new battery on the memorycard.

In memory card input/output, the battery ofthe memory card is dead.

1) Insert a new memory card.

2) Delete any unnecessary files toincrease the amount of freespace.

In memory card input/output, the free spaceof the memory card is insufficient.

1) Format the memory card.

2) Insert a formatted memory card.

In memory card input/output, an unformattedmemory card is inserted.

Check the list of files on the memorycard, using [LIST].

In memory card input/output, a file with thespecified number or name cannot be foundon the memory card.

Remove the ”read only” attributefrom the file.

In memory card input/output, the specifiedfile cannot be overwritten/deleted.

ADDRESS OUT OF RANGE(xxxxxx)

1) Check that no other data hasbeen transferred.

2) For a PMC C program, check thespecification of the address inthe link control statement or buildfile.

During the reading of a sequence programor PMC C program, an attempt was made totransfer an invalid address.


423



DATA ERROR 1) Check the communication pa-rameters (such as BAUD RATE).



In addition, for the reading of a PMCC program, clear the memory withthe following procedure:

[EDIT][CLEAR][CLRLNG][EXEC]

During the reading of a sequence programor PMC C program, invalid data was trans-ferred.

PROGRAM DATA ERROR Release the PMC alarm. The data to be written contains an error.

COMPARE ERR xxxxxx=aa:bbCONT? (Y/N)

To continue comparison, press ’Y’.To stop, press ’N’.

A mismatch was detected during compari-son.

(xxxxxx: Mismatch address, aa: PMC data,bb: Data to compare the data with)

CREATE ERROR Specify the file name in MS–DOSformat.

In memory card input/output, the specifica-tion of the file name is invalid.

NO MORE SPACE

WRITE ERROR

1) Insert a new memory card.

2) Delete any unnecessary files toincrease the amount of freespace.

In memory card input/output, the amount offree space on the memory card is insuffi-cient.

NOT READY 1) Check that the memory card isinserted securely.

2) Check that the memory card isinserted into the correct slot.

In memory card input/output, a memory cardis not inserted.

MOUNT ERROR 1) Format the memory card.

2) Insert the formatted memorycard.

In memory card input/output, the memorycard is not formatted.

WRITE ERROR Turn off the write protection of thememory card.

In memory card input/output, writing to thememory card failed.

BATTERY ALARM Mount a new battery on the memorycard.

In memory card input/output, the battery ofthe memory card is dead.

FILE NOT FOUND Check the list of files on the memorycard, using [LIST].

In memory card input/output, a file with thespecified number or name cannot be foundon the memory card.

DELETE ERROR Remove the ”read only” attributefrom the file.

In memory card input/output, the specifiedfile cannot be overwritten/deleted.

PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS Specify another file name. In memory card input/output, the specifiedfile name already exists on the memorycard.

PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS(EXEC ?)

To save the program by overwriting,select [EXEC].

Upon writing a sequence program to F–ROM, a sequence program was found to bealready in F–ROM.


424



ERASE ERROR

WRITE ERROR

READ ERROR

The F–ROM must be replaced.Contact FANUC.

Upon writing a sequence program to F–ROM, an error was detected in F–ROM.

ANOTHER USED Terminate the other function thatuses F–ROM, and then retry.

In the writing of a sequence program to F–ROM, writing fails because F–ROM is beingused by another function.

MUST BE IN EMG STOP

NOT EMG STOP

Place the CNC in the emergencystop state, and then retry.

In the writing of a sequence program to F–ROM, the CNC is not placed in the emer-gency stop state.


425

Error codes (serial spindle)

Displaynumber

Faulty location/corrective action Contents

01 Check the sequences of *ESP andMRDY. (For MRDY, pay attention to bit0 of parameter No. 4001, which speci-fies whether to use the MRDY signal.)

SFR (forward rotation signal)/SRV (reverse rotation signal)/ORCM(orientation command) is input even though *ESP (Emergency stop sig-nal. There are two types, the PMC signal and PSM contact signal.) andMRDY (machine ready signal) are not input.

02 Check the spindle motor velocity de-tector parameter (bits 2, 1, and 0 of pa-rameter No. 4011).

For a spindle motor with a high–resolution magnetic pulse coder (Cssensor) (bits 6 and 5 of parameter No. 4001 = 0 and 1), the setting forthe velocity detector must be 128 λ/rev (bits 2, 1, and 0 of parameter No.4011 = 0, 0, and 1), but the setting is not 128 λ/rev. In this case, the motoris not excited.

03 Check the parameters for the detectorfor Cs contour control (bit 5 of parame-ter No. 4001 and bit 4 of parameter No.4018).

A Cs control command is input although bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 isset to 0 to indicate that a high–resolution magnetic pulse coder is notprovided or that bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 is set to 0 to indicate thata Cs contour control function with an α sensor is not provided. In thiscase, the motor is not excited.

04 Check the position coder signal pa-rameter (bit 2 of parameter No. 4001).

A servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning) or spindle synchro-nous control command is input although bit 2 of parameter No. 4001 isset to 0 to indicate that the position coder signal is not being used. In thiscase, the motor is not excited.

05 Check the orientation software option. An orientation command (ORCM) is input although the orientation op-tion is not set.

06 Check the spindle output switchingsoftware option and the power linestate signal (RCH).

Low–speed winding is selected although the output switching option isnot set. (RCH = 1)

07 Check the sequence. SFR/SRV is not input although Cs contour control mode is specified.

08 Check the sequence. SFR/SRV is not input although servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle posi-tioning) is specified.

09 Check the sequence. SFR/SRV is not input although spindle synchronous control mode isspecified.

10 Do not specify another operationmode during the execution of a C axiscontrol command. Before changing toanother mode, release the Cs contourcontrol command.

Another operation mode (servo mode, spindle synchronous control, ororientation) is specified although the system is in Cs contour controlmode.

11 Do not specify another operationmode during the execution of a servomode command. Before changing toanother mode, release servo mode.

Another operation mode (Cs contour control, spindle synchronous con-trol, or orientation) is specified although the system is in servo mode (rig-id tapping, spindle positioning).

12 Do not specify another operationmode during the execution of a spindlesynchronous control command. Be-fore changing to another mode, re-lease the spindle synchronous controlcommand.

Another operation mode (Cs contour control, servo mode, or orientation)is specified although the system is executing spindle synchronous con-trol.

13 Do not specify another operationmode during the execution of anorientation command. Before chang-ing to another mode, release theorientation command.

Another operation mode (Cs contour control, servo mode, or synchro-nous control) is specified although the system is executing an orienta-tion command.

14 Input either SFR or SRV signal. Both SFR and SRV signals are input at the same time.

A.3SPINDLE ALARMS


426

Error codes (serial spindle)

Displaynumber

ContentsFaulty location/corrective action

15 Check the setting of bit 5 of parameterNo. 4000 and the PMC signal (CON).

Cs axis control is specified although bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 is setto 1 to indicate that a differential speed mode function is provided.

16 Check the setting of bit 5 of parameterNo. 4000 and the PMC signal(DEFMD).

A differential speed mode command (DEFMD) is input although bit 5 ofparameter No. 4000 is set to 0 to indicate that a differential speed modefunction is not provided.

17 Check the settings of bits 2, 1, and 0 ofparameter No. 4011.

The settings for the velocity detector (bits 2, 1, and 0 of parameter No.4011) are not appropriate. (The corresponding velocity detector cannotbe found.)

18 Check the setting of bit 2 of parameterNo. 4001 and the PMC signal (ORCM).

A position coder type orientation command (ORCMA) is input althoughbit 2 of parameter No. 4001 is set to 0 to indicate that the position codersignal is not used.

19 Do not specify another operationmode during the execution of anorientation command. Before chang-ing to another mode, release theorientation command.

Another operation mode is specified although the system is executingmagnetic sensor type orientation.

20 Check the settings of bits 5 of parame-ter No. 4001, bit 5 of No. 4014, and bit4 of No. 4018.

Bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 is set to 1 to indicate that a high–resolutionmagnetic pulse coder is used or bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 is set to 1to indicate that a Cs contour control function with an α sensor is pro-vided, although bit 5 of parameter No. 4014 is set to 1 to indicate that asub–operation mode function is provided. Both bit 5 of parameter No.4001 or bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 and bit 5 of parameter 4014 cannotbe set to 1 at the same time.

21 Input a sub–operation mode com-mand (SLV) in normal operation mode.

A sub–operation mode command (SLV) is input although the system isexecuting position control (servo mode, orientation, etc.).

22 Input a position control command innormal operation mode.

A position control command (servo mode, orientation, etc.) is input al-though the system is in sub–operation mode (SLVS = 1).

23 Check the setting of bit 5 of parameterNo. 4014 and the PMC signal (SLV).

A sub–operation mode command (SLV) is input although bit 5 of param-eter No. 4014 is set to 0 to indicate that a sub–operation mode functionis not provided.

24 Check the PMC signal (INCMD).Execute absolute position commandorientation first.

Orientation was performed with incremental operation (INCMD = 1) first,then an absolute position command (INCMD = 0) was input.

25 Check the spindle amplifier specifica-tions and the setting of bit 4 of parame-ter No. 4018.

Bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 is set to 1 to indicate that a Cs contour controlfunction with an α sensor is provided although the spindle amplifier is notan SMP of Type 4.

APPENDIXB–63395EN/01 B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS

427

B LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS

Product name Ordering information Remarks

Fuse Main CPU board A02B–0265–K100

LCD unit A02B–0265–K101

I/O module for operator’s panel A03B–0815–K001

I/O module for connector panel A03B–0815–K002

Battery For control unit memory backup A02B–0200–K102

Fan For 1–slot case A02B–0265–C101

For 2–slot case A02B–0260–C021

Backlight For 10.4” LCD A02B–0236–K116

Touch panel protective sheet A02B–0236–K110

Touch panel pen A02B–0236–K111

APPENDIXC. BOOT SYSTEM B–63395EN/01

428

C BOOT SYSTEM

C.1 OVERVIEW 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING

PROCEDURE 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED

ACTIONS 447. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIXB–63395EN/01 C. BOOT SYSTEM

429

The boot system load the CNC system software (flash RAM→DRAM),then starts it so that software can be executed.The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for theCNC:

(1)Registering a file in flash ROM

⋅ Reads a file from a memory card, in MS–DOS format conformingto JEIDA V4.1, into flash ROM.

(2)Checking a file (series and edition) in flash ROM

(3)Deleting a file from flash ROM

(4)Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programsbacked up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a memory card

(5)Saving a file in flash ROM to a memory card

(6)Formatting of a memory card

(7)Deleting a file from a memory card

This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as thescreen displays and operation for the functions listed above.

CAUTIONA kind of memory card1 We recommend to use SRAM type memory card. When you

use flash type memory card, it is impossible to use functions(4) to (7).

2 For the 60M1/05 and later versions of BOOT SYSTEMsoftware, data can be saved to a flash memory cardrecommended by FANUC. Note, however, that the actuallyavailable memory is equal to the capacity of the flashmemory card, minus 128 KB. The types of memory cardswhich can be used are detailed in the ordering list.Refer to the Order List for details of the usable memory cardtypes.

CAUTIONThese functions cannot be used with displays without MDIkeys.For such displays, use either a detachable LCD or basicoperation package (MS–DOS/RS–232C).

C.1OVERVIEW


430

In ordinary system activation, the boot system automatically transfersfiles from flash ROM to DRAM in the background.The user is not aware of this operation. However, the boot system mustbe operated manually, from menu screen, when maintenance is to becarried out or when the flash ROM does not contain a required file.

1 In system maintenance, for example, to replace a file in ROMOperation : Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two softkeys at the right end.

Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.

2 When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start theCNC

Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system startstransferring files from flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason, afile required to start the CNC (NC basic) is not in flash ROM or hasbeen destroyed, the boot system is automatically started.

The boot system organizes files in flash ROM into two main groups :system files and user files. These two file types have the followingcharacteristics :

CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC

PMC sequence program (ladder), P–CODE macro program, and otheruser–created files

C.1.1Starting the BootSystem

C.1.2System Files and UserFiles

System files

User files


431

When OPT2 board or LCB (loader control board) is mounted on the CNC,we have to access to flash ROM or SRAM that mounted on additionalboard. So, the boot system displays BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATIONscreen that to select a access board.

BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION 60M1–02

NO. BOARD F–ROM SRAM0. MAIN 4MB 1.0MB1. OPT2 6MB 1.0MB2. OPT3 128KB3. LCB 512KB

*** MESSAGE ***SELECT SLOT AND HIT SELECT KEY.[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) : Screen title.

(2) : Flash memory size and SRAM size of each board.

(3) : Message

Press the [ UP ] or [DOWN] soft key to move the cursor, and select boardto press the [SELECT] soft key.

Memory card slotThe memory card slot on the loader control board (LCB) is provided specifically for the ladderedit card for the loader. When a memory card is to be used in the boot system, insert the cardinto the slot provided on the main board.

C.1.3Boot SlotConfiguration Screen


432

When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen isdisplayed. This screen is described below :

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1-01

1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE5. SRAM DATA BACKUP6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT

10.END

*** MESSAGE ***SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1)

(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

(9)

(10)

(1) : Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system appear atthe right end.

(2) : Function for writing data to flash ROM.

(3) : Function for checing the edition of a file in ROM.

(4) : Function for deleting a file from flash ROM.

(5) : Function for making a backup copy of the data stored on the memorycard.

(6) : Function for making a backup copy of the data in SRAM.

(7) : Function for deleting a file from a memory card.

(8) : Function for formatting a memory card.

(9) : Function for terminating the boot system and starting the CNC.

(10) : Condensed guidance or error message

Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. Afterpositioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] softkey. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmationfrom the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.

Position the cursor.

[UP][DOWN]

→

Select a function[SELECT] →

Check the selection

[YES][NO]

→Executethefunction

→ Select END

→ Return to original state

C.2SCREENCONFIGURATIONAND OPERATINGPROCEDURE

Operating procedure

Basic operation


433

This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card intoflash ROM.

SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1

FILE DIRECTORYB1A1E10. ROMB1A1E11. ROMEND

*** MESSAGE ***SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1) : Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m)are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end.

(2) : Files on the memory card

(3) : Option for returning to previous menu Message

(4) : Message

1 Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card andwritten to flash ROM. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key.

A single page can list up to eight file names. If the memory cardcontains nine or more files, the remaining files are displayed onanother page.

To display the next page, press the soft key.

To display the previous page, press the soft key. The END optionis displayed on the last page.

The END option is displayed on the last page.

2 After a file has been slected, the system asks whether that file is to beloaded.

*** MESSAGE ***LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

C.2.1System Data LoadingScreen

Description

Screen configuration

Operating procedure


434

3 To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO]key.

*** MESSAGE ***LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.

4 When loading terminates normally, the system displays the followingmessage. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs, see D.3

*** MESSAGE ***LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

1 Counter display while a file is being loaded

While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently beingaccessed is displayed.

*** MESSAGE ***LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.ADDRESS 001: The counter appears under the

message fild.(1)

(1) : Number of 128–KB management unit in flash ROM

2 File name in flash ROM

The boot system identifies a file in flash ROM by the first fourcharacters of the ID in the header. If flash ROM has a file of the sametype as a file to be read from the memory card, the file in flash ROMis deleted before the file on the memory card is read. The followingtable lists the IDs in the header and the contents. Note that these IDsare subject to change without prior notice.

File name Contents File type

NC BASICDG SERVOGRAPHICNC OPTNPMC****PCD ****CEX ****PMC - ****PMC@****

BasicServoGraphicOptionalPMC control software, etc.P–CODE macro file/ OMMC–language executorLadder softwareLadder software for the loader

System fileSystem fileSystem fileSystem fileSystem fileUser fileUser fileUser fileUser file

: A numeric character, * : An alphabetic character

Others


435

This screen is used to list files in flash ROM, together with thecorresponding numbers of 128–KB management units in each file and theseries and edition of the software.

SYSTEM DATA CHECK 1/1[BOARD:MAIN]FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)1 NC BASIC ( 8)2 DG SERVO ( 1)3 PMC0BSC ( 2)4 PMC–RB ( 1)5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)END


(1)(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1) : Screen title

(2) : Names of accessing board

(3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management unitsconstituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the filename.

(4) : Returning to the previous menu

(5) : Message

C.2.2System Data CheckScreen

Description



436

1 Select the file whose details are required. For example, select “1 NCBASIC (8).”

2 The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed,together with the series and edition of the software in eachmanagement unit. After checking the listed data, select the[SELECT] soft key to return to the file selection screen.

ROM FILE CHECKNC BASIC

0 B1B1 801B 0001 B1B1 802B 0012 B1B1 841B 0023 B1B1 842B 0034 B1B1 881B 0045 B1B1 882B 0056 B1B1 8C1B 0067 B1B1 8C2B 007

*** MESSAGE ***HIT SELECT KEY.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Internal management–unitnumberROM number and editionSeries

0 B1B1 801B 000

Parity information for the system file and user file The NC BASIC, DG SERVO, and other system files in flash ROMcontain parity information in each management unit. If the file name fieldor parity field on the check screen contains a non–ASC II character or an“@” , the flash ROM may have been destroyed or a damaged file mayhave been read. Re–read the data from the memory card.The PMC–RB, PCD 0.5M, and other user files do not contain parityinformation in each management unit. A non–ASCII character or an “@”may appear in the series/edition information. In this case, it does notindicate that the file has been damaged.

Operating procedure

Others


437

This screen is used to delete a user file from flash ROM.

SYSTEM DATA CHECK 1/1[BOARD:MAIN]FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)1 NC BASIC ( 8)2 DG SERVO ( 1)3 PMC0BSC ( 2)4 PMC–RB ( 1)5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)END


(1)(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1) : Screen title(2) : Names of accessing board(3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units

constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the filename.

(4) : Returning to the previous menu(5) : Message

1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the[SELECT] soft key.

2 The system displays the following confirmation message :

*** MESSAGE ***DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 To start the deletion, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].

*** MESSAGE ***DELETING ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.

4 When deletion terminates normally, the system displays the followingmessage. Press the [SELECT] key.

*** MESSAGE ***DELETING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

C.2.3System Data DeleteScreen

Description


Operating procedure


438

1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen The system files are protected from accidental deletion. User files,however, are not protected. Protected system files can beoverwritten from the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.

This screen is used to write a user file in flash ROM to a memory card.Only user files can be saved from flash ROM to a memory card. Systemfiles cannot be saved.

SYSTEM DATA SAVE[BOARD:MAIN]FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)1 NC BASIC ( 8)2 DG SERVO ( 1)3 PMC0BSC ( 2)4 PMC–RB ( 1)5 PCD 0.5M ( 4)END


(1)(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1) : Screen title


(3) : Names of files in flash memory The number of management unitsconstituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the filename.


(5) : Message

Others

C.2.4SYSTEM DATA SAVEScreen

Description



439

1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the[SELECT] soft key.

2 The system displays the following confirmation message :

*** MESSAGE ***SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].

*** MESSAGE ***WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD.SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000

4 When saving terminates normally, the system displays thefollowing message. Press the [SELECT] key. The names of fileswritten to the memory card are listed. Check the file names by, forexample, making a note of the list.

*** MESSAGE ***FILE SAVE COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000

1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen

The SYSTEM DATA SAVE function provides a safeguard against freecopying of the system files.

User files, however, are not protected.

2 Names of saved files

Files saved from flash ROM to a memory card have the followingnames :

Flash ROM File name inMemory card

PMC–RBPMC 0.5MPMC 1.0MPMC 1.5MCEX1.0MCEX 2.0M

PMC_RB. XXXPCD_0.5M.XXXPCD_10M.XXXPCD_15M.XXXCEX_10M.XXXCEX_20M.XXX

XXX corresponds to the file extension of MS–DOS format files. Anumber from 000 to 031 is specified for XXX. For example, if thePMC–RB file in flash ROM is saved to a memory card that does not yetcontain a file whose name begins with “PMC–RB”, the saved file isnamed PMC–RB.000. If, however, that file is saved to a memory card thatalready contains a file named PMC–RB.000, the saved file is namedPMC–RB.001. As files are added, the extension is incremented up to amaximum of PMC–RB.031. Any no–longer used numbers in thesequence of the extension numbers are used in as cending order. If twoor more files having identical names but different extension numbers arenormally saved to the memory card, check the file names displayedsubsequently.

Operating procedure

Others


440

This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, programs,and other data, retained after the CNC power in SRAM is turned off, toand from a memory card.

Select “4 SRAM DATA BACKUP” on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAINMENU screen. The following screen is displayed.

SRAM DATA BACKUP[BOARD:MAIN]1. SRAM BACKUP (CNC MEMORY CARD)2. RESTORE SRAM (MEMORY CARD CNC)END

SRAM SIZE : 0.5MB (BASIC)FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A. FDB


(1)(2)(3)

(4)

(5)(6)

(7)

(1) : Screen title


(3) : Menu


(5) : Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC

(6) : File name

(7) : Message

C.2.5SRAM DATA BACKUPScreen

Description



441

1 Select “1. SRAM BACKUP.” The following confirmation message isdisplayed. The backup file name may be displayed according to theSRAM capacity.

2 Press [YES] to start backup.

*** MESSAGE ***BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 If a backup file is already on the memory card, you will be promptedto confirm whether to permit overwriting.

4 The name of the file being written to the memory card is displayed inthe FILE NAME: field.

SRAM SIZE : 0.5MB (BASIC)FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A.FDB MEMORY CARD

*** MESSAGE ***SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.

Name of the file beingsaved

5 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the followingmessage. Press the [SELECT] soft key.

*** MESSAGE ***SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

1 Select “2. RESTORE SRAM.” The system displays the followingmessage. Press the [YES] key.

*** MESSAGE ***RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

2 The system displays the following message during restoration.

*** MESSAGE ***RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.

3 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the followingmessage. Press the [SELECT] soft key.

*** MESSAGE ***RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Operating procedure

[Backing up data]

[Restoring the data]

Number of files

SRAM size


442

1 Name of backup file

The name of the backup file written to the memory card by the SRAMbackup function depends on the size of the SRAM installed in theCNC.

When the size of SRAM is 1MB or larger, backup files are created inunits of 512 KB.

1 2 3 4 5

256KB SRAM256A.FDB

1.5MB SRAM0_5A.FDB

1.0MB SRAM1_0A.FDB SRAM1_0B.FDB

1.5MB SRAM1_5A.FDB SRAM1_5B.FDB SRAM1_5C.FDB

2.5MB SRAM2_5A.FDB SRAM2_5B.FDB SRAM2_5C.FDB SRAM2_5D.FDB SRAM2_5E.FDB

2 When the OPT2, OPT3, or LCB board is mounted in addition to themain board

The backup file for SRAM on the OPT2, OPT3, or LCB board willhave the following extension:

Board MAIN OPT2 OPT3 LCB

Extension FDB OP2 OP3 LCB

CAUTIONIf data such as parameters was restored from a memorycard to SRAM in a system using an absolute pulse coder,set bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 to 0, and set thereference point again.

Others


443

This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.

SRAM DATA LOADING 1/1FILE DIRECTORYB1A1EO2B.ROMB1A1E02O.ROMEND


(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1) : Screen title. Tlhe current page number (n) and the total numberof pages (m) are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end.

(2) : Files on the memory card

(3) : Option for returning to the previous menu

(4) : Message

1 Press the [SELECT] key to select the name of the file to be deletedfrom the memory card.

2 The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the[YES] key.

*** MESSAGE ***DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 When a file has been deleted normally, display the following message.Press the [SELECT] key.

*** MESSAGE ***DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

C.2.6MEMORY CARD FILEDELETE Screen

Description


Operating procedure


444

This function is used to format a memory card. Memory cards must beformatted before they can be used for the first time or before they can bere–used after their data has been destroyed or lost because of, for example,battery failure.

1 From the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select “7.

MEMORY CARD FORMAT.”

2 The system displays the following confirmation message.Press the [YES] key.

*** MESSAGE ***MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 The system displays the following message during formatting :

*** MESSAGE ***FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.

4 When a card has been formatted normally, the system display the

⋅ following message.

⋅ Press the [SELECT] key.

*** MESSAGE ***FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

C.2.7MEMORY CARDFORMAT Function

Description

Operating procedure


445

The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.

From the MAIN MENU screen, select “9. END.” The system displaysthe “ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO” message. To terminate theboot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. Press the[NO] soft key, and you will be brought back to the main menu.

*** MESSAGE ***ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

1 After pressing the [YES] soft key

The system checks the NC BASIC system file in the flash ROM. Thesystem displays the following message :

*** MESSAGE ***CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM.


When the NC BASIC system file is found to be normal, the systemsends the system file to DRAM and starts the NC basic system. Duringloading, the system blinks the following message.

*** MESSAGE ***LOADING BASIC TO DRAM


If the contents of the NC BASIC SYSTEM file are found to have beendamaged or destroyed, the system returns to the processing selectionstate, in exactly the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed.

C.2.8LOAD BASIC SYSTEMFunction

Description

Operating procedure


446

2 If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processingselection state as shown below :

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1-01

1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE5. SRAM DATA BACKUP6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT

10.END



447

The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabeticalorder.

Message Description and required action

D DELETE ERROR.HIT SELECT KEY.

An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful. Retry thedeletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may havebeen damaged or destroyed. Replace the flash ROM module.

DEVICE ERROR (CNC x) An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful. Retry thewrite operation. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM mayhave been damaged or destroyed. Repalce the flash ROM module.

D–RAM OR S–RAM PARITY Invalid data has been found in the RAM area. If the RAM was notcleared after being installed, subsequently attempting backup maystop the BOOT SYSTEM and cause this message to be output.

F FILE SAVE ERROR.HIT SELECT KEY.

An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful. Checkthat the memory card is not damaged.

Note) Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that itscircuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely insertedinto its slot.

FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file. Deleteany unnecessary files from flash ROM.

FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST.HIT SELECT.

The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system. Put theflash ROM module on the board.

I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE The selected file cannot be read into flash memory. The selected fileor the header information for flash ROM may have been damaged ordestroyed.

L LOADING ERROR.HIT SELECT KEY.

An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.Do not touch the memory card while loading data.

C.3ERROR MESSAGESAND REQUIREDACTIONS


448

Description and required actionMessage

M MAX EXTENSION OVER.HIT SELECT KEY.

The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031. Delete anyunnecessary backup files from the memory card.

MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM.HIT SELECT.

The memory card’s battery is exhausted. Replace the battery.

MEMORY CARD FULL.HIT SELECT KEY.

The memory card is full. Delete any unnecessary files from thememory card. Alternatively, replace the memory card with anothercard having sufficient free space.

MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR.HIT SELECT KEY

The memory card could not be accessed. Check that the memory cardis normal.

MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST.HIT SELECT KEY.

The memory card is not inserted into its slot. Check that the memorycard is pushed fully home.

MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HITSELECT KEY.

Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write inhibitswitch is set. Disable the write inhibit switch.


MEMORY CARD TYPE IS NOTAVAILABLE.

Write has been attempted to an incompatible flash memory card. Useonly the flash ROM cards recommended by FANUC. Recommendedflash ROM cards are listed in the ordering list.

MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR.HIT SELECT KEY.

Access to the memory card has failed. Check whether the memorycard is defective.


P PLEASE FORMAT FLASH TYPECARD.HIT SEL.

It is not possible to delete only specific files from a flash ROM card, dueto the characteristics of the memory used. To delete a file it is neces-sary to delete all files on the card, by using the FORMAT function.

R ROM PARITY ERROR:NC BASIC. HIT SELECT.

The NC BASIC is parity error. Check whether NC BASIC is in flashROM, using SYSTEM DATA CHECK.

S SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR.HIT SELECT KEY.

An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed. Check that the memory card is normal.


APPENDIXB–63395EN/01D. INDICATIONS OF THE MAIN UNIT LED AND MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS

449

DINDICATIONS OF THE MAIN UNIT LED AND MAINTENANCEOPERATIONS

D.1 OVERVIEW 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.2 LOCATIONS OF THE 7–SEGMENT LED

AND SWITCHES 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.3 OPERATING PROCEDURES 451. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIXD. INDICATIONS OF THE MAIN UNIT LED AND MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS B–63395EN/01

450

The FANUC Series 18i–LNA (subsequently referred to as the 18i–LNAin this manual) is provided with a 7–segment LED, a rotary switch, anda push switch. For configurations without a CRT/MDI, or if theCRT/MDI cannot be used because of a fault, battery backed–up data canbe saved and restored by operating the rotary switch and the push switch.If the CRT/MDI can be used, use the maintenance operations of the BOOTfunction.

The locations of the 7–segment LED, rotary switch, and push switch areas shown in the figure below.

Push switch

(PSW)

Rotary switch

(MTSW)

7–segment LED(STATUS)

FUSE

STATUS

MTSW

DISPLAY

COP20A

CA

54A

(SV

CH

EC

K)

PS

W

D.1OVERVIEW

D.2LOCATIONS OF THE7–SEGMENT LEDAND SWITCHES


451

Before power–on, select a specific function number by using the rotaryswitch. Selecting a number with the rotary switch and then turning on thepower causes the LED to flash with the number corresponding to theselected function number at intervals of about one second.

The function numbers that can be selected with the rotary switch are asfollows. Do not select the reserved function numbers. If a reservedfunction number is set, it is assumed to be function number 0.

Functionnumber Description Remarks

Normal state. Select this setting after the end of mainte-nance.

Edition 10

Reserved

Sets the device number for the display link function. Edition 11

Reserved

Switch for maintenance Edition 11

Clears all memory. Edition 11

Reserved

Reserved

Batch–saves battery backed–up memory board data to amemory card.

Edition 10

Reserved

Batch–restores battery backed–up main board data from thememory card.

Edition 10

Batch–restores battery backed–up main board data, as wellas Ladder programs, operator’s panel software, and macroprograms stored in the CNC.

Edition 13

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

NOTEFor old software editions, some of the functions may not beavailable. See the series and edition corresponding to 0.

D.3OPERATINGPROCEDURES

D.3.1Operation to beperformed beforepower–on

D.3.2Selectable functionnumbers


452

Number indicated onthe LED

Whetherflashing

Description

Not flashing Automatic operation pause, stop,or reset state

Rotation of the character)( Not flashing Automatic operation start signal

if STL (bit 5 of F000) is 1

Number ( )to Flashing System alarm state

Number ( )to Not flashing State change during power on

LED indication Description

Automatic operation start signal

if STL (bit 5 of F000) is 1

LED indication Whetherflashing

Description

Not flashing Indicates that the push switch hasbeen pressed normally.

NOTEFor old software editions, the above indication may notappear.

D.3.3Indications of the7–segment LED

D.3.3.1NC state indications

D.3.3.2LED indications duringan automatic operationstart

D.3.3.3LED indication thatappears when the pushswitch is pressed


453

When a system alarm is generated, the 7–segment LED flashes with thecorresponding number.

Number indicated on theLED (flashing)

System alarmnumber System alarm type

900 to 909

910 to 919 ,

920 to 929

930 to 939 ! ,

950 to 959

970 to 979 !!" ! ,

Other numbers Other system alarms

D.3.3.4LED indications thatappear when systemalarms are generated


454

Number indicated on the LED Description

The power is not turned on.

The power is turned on, but the CPU has notstarted.

The loading of the NC system of the BOOTsystem has started.

The NC system has started and the RAM hasbeen initialized.

The system is waiting for the ID of each boardto be set.

The ID of each board has been set and theCRT has been initialized.

The FANUC BUS has been initialized.

Loading from the F–ROM has been completed,the PMC has been initialized, and the seriesand edition screen is displayed.

The hardware configuration information foreach module has been set.

The PMC Ladder has been initialized.

The system is waiting for the digital servo andthe spindle to be initialized.

The digital servo and the spindle have beeninitialized.

Initialization has been completed and the system is in the normal operation state.

D.3.3.57–segment LEDindications that appearduring power on


455

This function sets the device number for the display link function.

(1)Check that the LED flashes ”2”, then press the push switch.

(2)”2” is indicated on the LED. Press the push switch.

(3)The 16 numbers from ”0” to ”F” are indicated on the LED at intervalsof about one second. While the desired device number is indicated onthe LED, press the push button.

(4)The LED flashes the selected device number. Press the push switch.

(5)The device number used for the display link function is indicated onthe LED.

This function indicates the device number for the display link function.

(1)Check that the LED flashes ”4”, then press the push switch.



(4)”0” and ”2” are indicated on the LED alternately at intervals of aboutone second. While ”2” is indicated, press the push button.

(5)The device number used for the display link function is indicated onthe LED.

This function clears all battery backed–up SRAM data. It also clears thedevice number for the display link function. When cleared, the devicenumber is assumed to be ”0”.

(1)Check that the LED flashes ”5”, and then press the push switch.


(3)The LED changes from ”–” to ”F”, ”9”, ”8”, ”7”, ”6”, ”5”, ”4”, ”3”,”2”, ”3”, ”1”, and then ”0”.

(4)When the clearing of all data terminates normally, the indication on theLED stops with ”0”.

(5)Turn off the power. Return the rotary switch to 0 (normal state) andstart the system again.

D.3.4Procedures foroperating theindividual functions

D.3.4.1Function number 2




456

This function batch–saves battery backed–up main board data to amemory card. The data saved using this function can be restored as abatch by operating function number A or by using the BOOT function,”SRAMDATABACKUP” function.

(1) Insert a formatted memory card with at least 512 KB of free space intothe main unit memory card slot (MEMORY CARD CNM1B).

(2)Check that the LED flashes ”8”, and then press the push switch.

(3)While data is being saved to the memory card, the indication on theLED rotates clockwise.

(4) If the data cannot be stored to a single memory card, the LED flashes”3”. Replace the current memory card with another, then press thepush switch.

(5) If the protect switch on the memory card is not canceled or if thememory card battery is failing, the LED flashes ”2”. Replace thecurrent memory card with another, and then press the push switch.

(6)Upon the normal termination of data saving, ”0” is indicated on theLED. If the data is not saved normally, ”1” is indicated on the LED.

(7) If an SRAMPARITY error occurs during data saving, the LED flashes”1”. If this occurs, the data cannot be batch–saved. Back up theindividual blocks of data separately, and then perform an all clearoperation.

This function batch–restores battery backed–up main board data from thememory card to which the data has been saved.

(1) Insert the memory card into the main unit memory card slot(MEMORY CARD CNM1B).

(2)Check that the LED flashes ”A”, and then press the push switch.

(3)While the data is being restored from the memory card, the indicationon the LED rotates counterclockwise.

(4) If the data cannot be restored from a single card, the LED flashes ”3”.Replace the current memory card with the next one, and then press thepush switch.

(5) If the memory card cannot be recognized correctly, the LED flashes”2”. Check the memory card, and then press the push switch.

(6)Upon the normal termination of data restoration, ”0” is indicated onthe LED. If the data is not restored normally, ”1” is indicated on theLED.


D.3.4.5Function number A


457

This function batch–restores battery backed–up data, as well as Ladderprograms, operator’s panel software, and macro programs stored in theCNC.

(1) Insert the memory card into the main unit memory card slot(MEMORY CARD CNM1B).

(2)Check that the LED flashes ”b”, and then press the push switch.

(3)The LED stops flashing ”b”. Press the push button again.

(4)While the data is being restored from the memory card, the indicationon the LED rotates counterclockwise.

(5) If the data cannot be restored from a single memory card, the LEDflashes ”3”. Replace the current memory card with the next one, andthen press the push switch.

(6) If the memory card cannot be recognized correctly, the LED flashes”2”. Check the memory card, and then press the push switch.

(7)Upon the normal termination of data restoration, ”0” is indicated onthe LED. If the data is not restored normally, ”1” is indicated on theLED.

D.3.4.6Function number B

IndexB–63395EN/01

i–1

[Numbers]7–Segment LED Indications that Appear During Pow-

er On, 454

[A]Absolute Coordinates (Slide Coordinates, Machine

Coordinates, or Remaining Amount of Movement),91

AC Spindle (Serial Interface), 304

Action Against Noise, 196

Alarm 401 (VRDY Off), 328

Alarm 404 (VRDY On), 330

Alarm 462 (Invalid CNC Data Transfer) Alarm 463(Invalid Slave Data Transfer), 332

Alarm 5134 (FSSB: Open Ready is not Set) Alarm5135 (FSSB: Error State Occurred) Alarm 5137(FSSB: Configuration Error) Alarm 5197 (FSSB:Open State is not Set) Alarm 5198 (FSSB: ID In-formation cannot be Read), 338

Alarm 5136 (FSSB: Insufficient Number of Amplifi-ers), 341

Alarm 700 (Overheat: Control Unit), 333

Alarm 701 (Overheat: Fan Motor), 334

Alarm 749 (Serial Spindle Communication Error), 335

Alarm 750 (Spindle Serial Link Activation Failure),336

Alarm 900 (ROM Parity), 342

Alarm 926 (FSSB Alarm), 348

Alarm 930 (CPU Interrupt), 352

Alarm 935 (SRAM ECC Error), 354

Alarm 950 (PMC System ALarm), 356

Alarm 951 (PMC Watchdog Alarm), 359

Alarm 972 (NMI Alarm On an Option Board), 360

Alarm 973 (NMI Alarm for Unknown Cause), 362

Alarm 974 (F–BUS Error), 363

Alarm 975 (Bus Error), 365

Alarm 976 (Local Bus Error), 367

Alarm Display, 26

Alarm History, 131

Alarm History Screen, 26

Alarm List, 375

Alarms (PMC), 413

Alarms 912 Through 919 (DRAM Parity), 344

Alarms 920 and 921 (Servo Alarm), 346

Applicable models, p–2

Automatic Setting of Standard Parameter, 315

[B]Basic Operating Package Viewing and Operating, 77

Basic Operation Package, 298

Basic Units, 170

Batch Data Saving/Loading with a Memory Card, 215

Boot Slot Configuration Screen, 431

Boot System, 428

Built–in PLC, 224

Built–in PMC, 223

Built–in PMC and Built–in PLC, 223

[C]Cable Clamp and Shield Processing, 201

Clearing Alarm History, 26

CNC Diagnosis, 133

CNC Setting, 117

Command Line, 148

Common Operations, 79

Compensation Procedure, 76

Conditions Requiring Compensation, 75

Configuration Display of Software, 22

Configuration of BOP, 78

Configuration of PCBs, 23

Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output,207

Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit,199

Connectors and Configurations of Printed CircuitBoards, 157

Contents Displayed, 44

Control Unit Printed Circuit Boards, 170

Corrective Action for Failures, 318

Correspondence Between Operation Mode and Param-eters on Spindle Tuning Screen, 312

[D]Data Input/Output, 112

Demounting a Card PCB, 178

Demounting a DIMM Module, 181

Demounting a Mini–slot Option Board, 174

Demounting the Back Panel, 182

Demounting the DeviceNet Board, 175

Index B–63395EN/01

i–2

Demounting the Main CPU Board or an OptionBoard, 172

Description of this manual, p–1

Details of the PMC Parameters for M–NET InterfaceControl, 259

DeviceNet Board, 167

Dialog Box and Input/Output, 82

Dialog Box Layout, 82

Digital Servo, 281

Directory, 103

Display and operation of CRT/MDI, 1

Display Method, 23, 41, 67, 271, 307

Displaying Diagnostic Page, 44

Displaying Servo Tuning Screen, 293

Displaying the Memory Card Save/Load Screen andSave/Load Operation, 215

[E]Editing, 92

Environmental Requirements Outside the Cabinet,194

Error Messages and Required Actions, 447

[F]FL–net Board, 169

Function keys and soft keys, 4

Function Number 2, 455




Function Number A, 456

Function Number B, 457

[G]Gear Change Method, 306

Graphic of Wave Diagnosis Data, 57

Ground, 198

[H]Hardware, 152

Hardware Configuration, 153

Heat Output of EAch Unit, 195

Help Function, 41

HSSB Interface Board, 166

[I]Indications of the 7–Segment LED, 452

Indications of the Main UNIT LED and MaintenanceOperations, 449

Initial Setting Servo Parameters, 282

Input and Output of Data, 204

Input Signal or Output Signal to be Recorded in theOperation History, 31

Input/Output to and from I/O devices is Disabled orcannot be Performed Normally, 323

Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data,36

Inputting CNC Parameters, 211

Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 213

Inputting Part Programs, 214

Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount, 213

Inputting PMC Parameters, 212

Inputting Tool Compensation Amount, 213

Inputting/Outputting Data, 207

Interface Maps for Lathe, 242

Interface Maps for Special Machine, 225

Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Oc-curred, 318

IPL Screen, 150

IPL Screen Menu/Item, 151

[K]Keep Relay Setting, 259

[L]LCD Unit Display Blinks, 322

LED Indication that Appears when the Push Switch isPressed, 452

LED Indications During an Automatic OperationStart, 452

LED Indications that Appear when System Alarms areGenerated, 453

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 190

List of Alarm Codes, 376

List of Maintenance Parts, 427

B–63395EN/01 Index

i–3

List of Operations, 69

Load Basic System Function, 445

Locations of the 7–Segment LED and Switches, 450

[M]Machine Interface I/O Types, 221

Macro Variable, 127

Main CPU Board, 157

Manual Handle Operation is Impossible, 325

MDI Program, 109

Memory Card File Delete Screen, 443

Memory Card Format Function, 444

Memory Card Screen, 145

Memory Display (M.SRCH), 278

Menu Configuration, 79

Menus and Screen Selection, 79

Message Screens, 131

Messages, 219

Miscellaneous, 148

Module Configuration Screen, 25

Mounting a Card PCB, 179

Mounting a DIMM module, 181

Mounting a Mini–slot Option Board, 174

Mounting and Demounting Card Pcbs, 177

Mounting and Demounting Dimm Modules, 180

Mounting and Demounting Mini–slot Option Boards(Other than the DeviceNet Board), 174

Mounting and Demounting Option Boards, 172

Mounting and Demounting the Back Panel, 182

Mounting and Demounting the DeviceNet Board, 175

Mounting and Demounting the Main CPU Board andOption Boards, 172

Mounting the Back Panel, 182

Mounting the DeviceNet Board, 175

Mounting the Main CPU Board or an Option Board,173

[N]NC State Display, 52

NC State Indications, 452

Noise Suppressor, 200

Notes, 220

[O]Operating Monitor, 67

Operating Procedures, 451

Operation, 80, 83, 87, 89, 93, 104, 110, 111, 113, 119,122, 125, 128, 132, 134, 136, 140, 143, 146

Operation History, 27

Operation History Signal Setting, 135

Operation to be Performed before Power–On, 451

Outputting CNC Parameters, 208

Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 210

Outputting Part Program, 210

Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount, 209

Outputting PMC Parameters, 209

Outputting Tool Compensation Amount, 210

Overall Connection Diagram, 155

Overall Position Information, 88

Overall Position Information and Monitoring, 90

Overview of Hardware, 154

Overview of Spindle Control (Serial Interface), 305

[P]Parameter Setting, 27, 75, 293

PLC Interface Board, 165

PMC, 148

PMC Screen, 269

PMCDGN Screen, 274

PMCLAD Screen, 272

PMCPRM Screen, 279

Position Display Screens, 88

Power–On Related Processing Performed On the IPLScreen, 149

Procedures for Operating the Individual Functions,455

Program Check, 111

Program Screens, 92

Purpose, 78, 79, 82, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 103, 109, 111,112, 117, 121, 124, 127, 131, 133, 135, 139, 145

[R]Related manual, p–2

Replacing the Control Unit Battery, 184

Replacing the Fans in the Control Unit, 186

Replacing the Fuse in Each I/O Module, 192

Index B–63395EN/01

i–4

Replacing the Fuse in the Control Unit, 183

Replacing the Fuse in the LCD Unit, 187

Replacing the LCD Backlight, 188

[S]Screen Configuration, 92, 103, 109, 112, 117, 121,

124, 127, 131, 135, 139, 142, 145

Screen configuration, 111

Screen Configuration and Operating Procedure, 432

Screen Display, 26, 28

Screen Displayed Immediately After Power Is TurnedOn, 21

Screen Layout, 86, 88, 90, 91

Screen Structure, 133

Selectable Function Numbers, 451

Separating Signal Lines, 196

Servo Alarm Type Waveform Diagnostic Data, 61

Servo Alarms, 369

Servo Tuning Screen, 293

Setting Module Screen, 22

Setting Parameters, 53

Setting Parameters for Input/Output, 205

Setting Screens, 112

Setting the input signal or output signal to be recordedin the operation history, 32

Slot Status Display, 21

Soft keys, 4

Software Configuration Screen, 25

SPC Alarms, 371

Spindle Alarms, 371, 425

Spindle Monitor Screen, 310

Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen, 307

Spindle Setting Screen, 307

Spindle Tuning Screen, 308

SRAM Data Backup screen, 440

Starting the Boot System, 430

Status Display, 86

Sub–CPU Board, 162

System Configuration Screen, 23

System Data Check Screen, 435

System Data Delete Screen, 437

System Data Loading Screen, 433

System Data Save Screen, 438

System Files and User Files, 430

System Screens, 133

[T]Timers, 265

Tool Offset, 121

Touch Panel Adjustment Screen, 75

Touch Panel LCD, 296

Troubleshooting, 316

[U]Units, 171

Units and Printed Circuit Boards, 170

[V]Virtual Keyboard, 2

[W]Warning Screen Displayed when an Option is

Changed, 74

Wave form Diagnostic Function, 53

Waveform Diagnosis Screen, 139

Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen, 54

When no Data is Displayed on the LCD Unit at Pow-er–Up, 320

Workpiece Origin Offset, 124

[Z]Zero Point Setting, 296

Rev

isio

n R

eco

rd

FAN

UCS

erie

s18

–

LN

A M

AIN

TE

NA

NC

E M

AN

UA

L (

B–6

3395

EN

)

01M

ar.,

2000

Edi

tion

Dat

eC

onte

nts

Edi

tion

Dat

eC

onte

nts

• No part of this manual may bereproduced in any form.

• All specifications and designsare subject to change withoutnotice.

Date post:	09-Mar-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	31 times
Download:	4 times

GE Fanuc Automation - JAMETjamet.com/Fanuc_Web_Manuals/Lasers/63395EN.pdf · GE Fanuc Automation...

Documents